Alteon OS 22.0.

2

Command Reference

part number: 315393-J, January 2005

4655 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 Phone 1-800-4Nortel http://www.nortelnetworks.com

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Copyright 2005 Nortel Networks, Inc., 4655 Great America Parkway, Santa Clara, California 95054, USA. All rights reserved. Part Number: 315393-J. This document is protected by copyright and distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying, distribution, and decompilation. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Nortel Networks, Inc. Documentation is provided “as is” without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including any kind of implied or express warranty of noninfringement or the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. U.S. Government End Users: This document is provided with a “commercial item” as defined by FAR 2.101 (Oct 1995) and contains “commercial technical data” and “commercial software documentation” as those terms are used in FAR 12.211-12.212 (Oct 1995). Government End Users are authorized to use this documentation only in accordance with those rights and restrictions set forth herein, consistent with FAR 12.211- 12.212 (Oct 1995), DFARS 227.7202 (JUN 1995) and DFARS 252.227-7015 (Nov 1995). Nortel Networks, Inc. reserves the right to change any products described herein at any time, and without notice. Nortel Networks, Inc. assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the use of products described herein, except as expressly agreed to in writing by Nortel Networks, Inc. The use and purchase of this product does not convey a license under any patent rights, trademark rights, or any other intellectual property rights of Nortel Networks, Inc.

Alteon OS, Alteon 2424, Alteon 2424-SSL, Alteon 2224, 2216, 2208, 3408, Alteon 180, Alteon 180e,
Alteon 184, Alteon AD3, Alteon AD4, and ACEswitch are trademarks of Nortel Networks, Inc. in the United States and certain other countries. Cisco® and EtherChannel® are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. in the United States and certain other countries. Check Point® and FireWall-1® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Check Point Software Technologies Ltd. Any other trademarks appearing in this manual are owned by their respective companies. Originated in the U.S.A.

2

315393-J, January 2005

Contents
Preface 15 Who Should Use This Book 15 How This Book Is Organized 15 Related Documentation 16 Typographic Conventions 17 How to Get Help 18 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 19 Connecting to the Switch 20 Establishing a Console Connection 20 Requirements 20 Procedure 20 Establishing a Telnet Connection 21 Using a BOOTP Server 21 Running Telnet 21 Establishing an SSH Connection 22 Running SSH 22 Accessing the Switch 23 CLI Versus Setup 25 Command Line History and Editing 25 Idle Timeout 25 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 27 Using the Setup Utility 27 Information Needed For Setup 27 Starting Setup When You Log In 28 Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually 29 Stopping Setup 29 Restarting Setup 29 Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration 29
3

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Setup Part 2: Port Configuration 31 Setup Part 3: VLANs 34 Setup Part 4: IP Configuration 35 IP Interfaces 35 Default Gateways 36 IP Routing 37 Setup Part 5: Final Steps 38 Optional Setup for SNMP Support 39 Optional Setup for Telnet Support 39 Setting Passwords 40 Changing the Default Administrator Password 40 Changing the Default User Password 42 Changing the Default Layer 4 Administrator Password 44 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 47 The Main Menu 47 Menu Summary 48 Global Commands 49 Command Line History and Editing 51 Command Line Interface Shortcuts 52 Command Stacking 52 Command Abbreviation 52 Tab Completion 52 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 53 Information Menu 53 System Information Menu 55 SNMPv3 System Information Menu 57 SNMPv3 USM User Table Information 58 SNMPv3 View Table Information 59 SNMPv3 Access Table Information 60 SNMPv3 Group Table Information 61 SNMPv3 Community Table Information 61 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information 62 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information 63 SNMPv3 Notify Table Information 64 SNMPv3 Dump Information 65 General System Information 66

4

Contents

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Show Last 30 Syslog Messages 67 Saved Syslog Messages 68 Management Port Information 69 SONMP Information 70 System Capacity Information 71 System Information Dump 74 Layer 2 Information Menu 77 Layer 2 FDB Information 78 Show All FDB Information 79 Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database 80 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu 80 LACP Aggregator Information 81 LACP Port Information 82 LACP Dump Information 84 Layer 2 Spanning Tree Group Information 85 Trunk Group Information 87 VLAN Information 88 Layer2 Dump Information 89 Layer3 Information Menu 90 IP Routing Information 91 Show All IP Route Information 92 Type Parameters 92 Tag Parameters 93 ARP Information Menu 93 Show ARP Entries on Referenced SP 95 Show All ARP Entry Information 95 ARP Address List Information 96 BGP Information Menu 96 BGP Peer information 97 BGP Summary information 97 Dump BGP Information 98 OSPF Information Menu 98 OSPF General Information 100 OSPF Interface Information 100 OSPF Database Information 101 OSPF Information Route Codes 102 OSPF Dump Information 103 IP Information 104

315393-J, January 2005

Contents

5

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

VRRP Information 105 Layer3 Dump Information 107 Layer 4 Information Menu 110 Session Table Information 112 Samples of Session Dumps for Different Applications 113 Session dump information in Alteon OS 115 Global SLB Information Menu 117 Show All Layer 4 Information 118 Link Status Information 119 Port Information 120 Bandwidth Management Information 121 BWM IP User Information Menu 122 BWM Contract Information 124 Security Information 126 Software Enabled Keys 127 Information Dump 127 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 129 Statistics Menu 129 Port Statistics Menu 131 Bridging Statistics 132 Ethernet Statistics 133 Interface Statistics 136 Interface Protocol Statistics 138 Link Statistics 139 RMON Statistics 140 Port Dump Statistics 143 Layer 2 Statistics Menu 144 FDB Statistics 145 LACP Statistics 146 Spanning Tree Group Statistics 147 Layer 3 Statistics Menu 148 OSPF Statistics Menu 150 OSPF Global Statistics 151 IP Statistics 155 Route Statistics 157 ARP statistics 159 VRRP Statistics 159

6

Contents

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

DNS Statistics 160 ICMP Statistics 161 Interface Statistics 163 TCP Statistics 165 UDP Statistics 167 Server Load Balancing Statistics Menu 167 Server Load Balancing SP statistics Menu 170 SP Real Server Statistics 170 SP Filter Statistics 171 SP Maintenance Statistics 172 Global SLB Statistics Menu 174 Real Server Global SLB Statistics 175 Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics 175 Global SLB Site Statistics 176 Global SLB Maintenance Statistics 177 Real Server SLB Statistics 179 Per Service Octet Counters 179 Real Server Group Statistics 180 Virtual Server SLB Statistics 181 Filter SLB Statistics 181 SLB Layer7 Statistics Menu 182 Layer7 Redirection Statistics 182 Layer 7 SLB String Statistics 183 Layer 7 SLB Maintenance Statistics 184 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics 186 File Transfer Protocol SLB and Filter Statistics Menu 187 Active FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics 188 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics 188 FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics 189 FTP SLB Statistics Dump 189 RTSP SLB Statistics 190 DNS SLB Statistics 191 WAP SLB Statistics 192 SLB Maintenance Statistics 194 SIP SLB Statistics 196 Clearing the SLB Statistics 196 BWM Statistics Menu 198 BWM Switch Processor Statistics 199

315393-J, January 2005

Contents

7

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

BWM Switch Processor Contract Statistics Menu 199 BWM Switch Processor Rate Contract Statistics 199 BWM Contract Statistics 200 BWM Contract Rate Statistics 201 BWM History Statistics 203 BWM Maintenance Statistics 204 BWM IP Users Statistics 204 Management Processor Statistics 205 MP Packet Statistics 206 TCP Statistics 208 UCB Statistics 208 MP-Specific SFD Statistics 209 CPU Statistics 209 SP Specific Statistics 210 SP-Specific Maintenance Statistics 211 CPU Statistics 211 Security Statistics 212 DOS Attack Statistics Menu 213 Types of DOS Attacks 214 IP Access Control List Statistics 214 UDP Blast Statistics 215 UDP Blast Dump Statistics 215 UDP Pattern Match Statistics 216 Rate Limiting Statistics 216 Dump Statistics for Security 217 SNMP Statistics 218 NTP Statistics 222 Port Mirroring Statistics Menu 224 Management Port Statistics 224 Dump Statistics 225 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 227 Configuration Menu 227 Viewing, Applying, and Saving Changes 228 Viewing Pending Changes 229 Applying Pending Changes 229 Saving the Configuration 229 System Configuration 231

8

Contents

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

System Host Log Configuration 233 Seven Levels of Severity 234 Management Port Configuration Menu 234 Management Port Link Menu 237 SSH Server Configuration Menu 237 RADIUS Server Configuration 239 TACACS+ Server Configuration Menu 240 NTP Server Configuration 242 SynOptics Network Management Protocol Configuration 243 System SNMP Configuration 244 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu 247 User Security Model Configuration Menu 249 SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu 250 View-based Access Control Model Configuration Menu 251 SNMPv3 Group Configuration Menu 253 SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu 254 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration Menu 255 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu 256 SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration Menu 257 System Health Check Configuration Menu 258 System Access Control Configuration 259 Management Networks Menu 260 User Access Control Menu 261 HTTPS Access Configuration Menu 263 System User ID Configuration Menu 264 Port Configuration 265 Alteon OS 2000 Series 265 Fast Ethernet Ports 265 SFP GBIC Ports 265 Port Link Configuration 267 Alteon OS 3000 Series 269 Port Configuration on Alteon OS 3408 269 Single-Mode ports 270 Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu 271 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Link Configuration Menu 273 Dual-Mode Ports 274 Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration 276 Dual-Mode SFP Gigabit Link Configuration Menu 277

315393-J, January 2005

Contents

9

2 Command Reference Temporarily Disabling a Port 277 Port Mirroring Menu 278 Port-Mirroring Menu 278 Bandwidth Management Configuration 279 Bandwidth Management Contract Configuration 281 BWM Contract Time Policy Configuration Menu 283 Bandwidth Management Policy Configuration 284 Bandwidth Management Group Configuration Menu 285 Bandwidth Management Current Configuration 286 Layer 2 Configuration Menu 287 Spanning Tree Group Configuration 288 Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration 290 Spanning Tree Port Configuration 291 Trunk Configuration 292 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu 294 LACP Port Configuration Menu 296 VLAN Configuration 297 Layer 3 Configuration Menu 299 IP Interface Configuration 301 Default IP Gateway Configuration 302 Default Gateway Metrics 303 IP Static Route Configuration 304 ARP Configuration Menu 304 ARP Static Configuration Menu 305 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu 306 Local Network Route Caching Definition 306 Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache 307 Network Filter Configuration 308 Route Map Configuration Menu 309 IP Access List Configuration Menu 311 Autonomous System Filter Path 312 Routing Information Protocol Configuration 313 Open Shortest Path First Configuration 315 Area Index Configuration Menu 317 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu 318 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu 319 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu 321 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu 322 10 Contents 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .0.

323 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu 324 Border Gateway Protocol Configuration 324 BGP Peer Configuration Menu 326 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu 328 BGP Aggregate Routing Configuration Menu 329 IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu 330 Domain Name System Configuration Menu 331 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu 332 VRRP Configuration Menu 333 Virtual Router Configuration Menu 334 Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration 336 Virtual Router Group Menu 338 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu 340 Virtual Router Group Configuration 341 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration 343 VRRP Interface Configuration 345 VRRP Tracking Configuration 346 Default Gateway Metrics 347 Security Configuration Menu 348 IP Address Access Control List Configuration Menu 349 Pattern Matching Menu 350 Port Security Configuration Menu 351 UDP Blast Protection Configuration Menu 352 Setup 353 Dump 353 Saving the Active Switch Configuration 354 Restoring the Active Switch Configuration 354 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 355 SLB Configuration 356 Filtering and Layer 4 (Server Load Balancing) 358 Real Server SLB Configuration 358 Real Server Layer 7 Configuration 362 Real server IDS Configuration Menu 363 Real Server Group SLB Configuration 364 SLB Health Check Types 367 Server Load Balancing Metrics 370 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu. January 2005 Contents 11 .0.

0.2 Command Reference Virtual Server SLB Configuration 372 Virtual Server Service Configuration 375 Virtual Server RTSP Configuration 380 Cookie-Based Persistence 381 SLB Filter Configuration 383 Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters 387 Advanced Filter Configuration 388 802.1p Advanced Menu 391 Advanced Filter TCP Configuration 392 IP Advanced Menu 393 ICMP Message Types 394 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Configuration Menu 395 SLB Filter Advanced Security Menu 397 Advanced Security Rate Limiting Configuration Menu 398 Port SLB Configuration 399 Global SLB Configuration 401 GSLB Remote Site Configuration 403 GSLB Network Preference Configuration Menu 405 GSLB Rule Configuration Menu 406 Global SLB Rule Metric Menu 408 Layer 7 SLB Resource Definition Menu 408 Web Cache Redirection Configuration 409 Server Load Balance Resource Configuration Menu 411 WAP Configuration 412 Synchronize Peer Switch Configuration 413 Peer Switch Configuration 414 Advanced Layer 4 Configuration 415 SYN Attack Detection Configuration Menu 418 Advanced SMT Real Server Port Configuration Menu 418 Inbound Link Load Balancing configuration Menu 419 Inbound Link Load Balancing Domain Record Menu 420 Inbound Link Load Balancing Mapping Menu 421 Advanced Health Check Configuration Menu 421 Scriptable Health Checks Configuration 423 SNMP Health Check Configuration 425 WAP Health Check Configuration 426 WSP Content Health Check 428 WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu 429 12 Contents 315393-J. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.

2 Command Reference Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu 430 SLB Peer Proxy IP Address Menu 431 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 433 Operations Menu 433 Operations-Level Port Options 435 Operations-Level SLB Options 436 Real Server Group Operations 437 Global SLB Operations Menu 438 Operations-Level VRRP Options. 439 Operations-Level Bandwidth Management Options 439 Operations-Level IP Options 440 Operations-Level BGP Options 440 Activating Optional Software 441 Removing Optional Software 442 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 443 Boot Menu 443 Scheduled Reboot of the Switch 444 Scheduled Reboot Menu 444 Updating the Switch Software Image 444 Downloading New Software to Your Switch 444 Selecting a Software Image to Run 446 Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch 446 Selecting a Configuration Block 447 Resetting the Switch 448 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 449 Maintenance Menu 449 System Maintenance Options 451 Forwarding Database Options 451 ARP Cache Options 452 ARP Entries on a Single Port 453 IP Route Manipulation 454 Debugging Options 455 Uuencode Flash Dump 456 TFTP System Dump Put 456 Clearing Dump Information 457 Panic Command 457 315393-J.0. January 2005 Contents 13 .Alteon OS 22.

2 Command Reference Unscheduled System Dumps 458 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 459 LOG_WARNING 459 LOG_ALERT 460 LOG_CRIT 461 LOG_ERR 461 LOG_NOTICE 467 LOG_INFO 469 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 471 Appendix C: Performing a Serial Download 475 Glossary 477 Index 481 14 Contents 315393-J.0.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .

Port Mirroring.” shows how to view switch performance statistics. “The Information Menu.0. “The Statistics Menu. the IEEE 802.2 Command Reference describes how to configure and use the Alteon OS software with your Alteon OS. VLANs. The administrator should be familiar with Ethernet concepts.” shows how to configure switch system parameters. IP Routing. “Menu Basics.” provides an overview of the menu system. “The Configuration Menu. Spanning Tree Protocol. SNMP. see the Hardware Installation Guide for your particular switch model. and more. 315393-J. “First-Time Configuration. IP addressing. For documentation on installing the switches physically. and menu shortcuts.” describes how to connect to the switch and access the information and configuration menus.Preface The Alteon OS 22. global commands. How This Book Is Organized “The Command Line Interface. January 2005 15 . and SNMP configuration parameters.1d Spanning Tree Protocol.” describes how to use the Setup utility for initial switch configuration and how to change the system passwords. Port Trunking. ports. including a menu map.” shows how to view switch configuration parameters. Who Should Use This Book This Command Reference is intended for network installers and system administrators engaged in configuring and maintaining a network.

0.2 Release Notes (315397-H). in the software. “The Maintenance Menu. “The Operations Menu. Appendix A. Filtering. and how to clear part or all of the forwarding database. Related Documentation Alteon OS 22. The menu describes how to activate or deactivate optional software features.” lists the Management Interface Bases (MIBs) sup- ported in the switch software.” describes the use of the primary and alternate switch images.” shows how to configure Server Load Balancing. Alteon Application Switch Hardware Installation Guide (315396-E) Provides a description of the Alteon Application Switch hardware. “Alteon OS SNMP Agent. “Alteon OS Syslog Messages. if any. “Glossary” defines the terminology used throughout the book.” shows how to directly load a binary software image into the switch for upgrade or maintenance. and more.Alteon OS 22. 16 Preface 315393-J. but do not alter permanent switch configurations (such as temporarily disabling ports). 315394-H) Provides application explanations and configuration examples for the Switch. and how to troubleshoot it. how to clear it.0.” shows how to use commands which affect switch performance immediately. “Performing a Serial Download.” shows how to generate and access a dump of critical switch state information. Global Server Load Balancing. “The Boot Options Menu.” shows a listing of syslog messages.2 Command Reference “The SLB Configuration Menu. “Index” includes pointers to the description of the key words used throughout the book. January 2005 . Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface (BBI) Quick Guide (315395-C) Provides a description of the Switch BBI and how to configure and access it on the Switch. how to load a new software image. Appendix B. This document provides a description of new features and caveats and limitations. Alteon OS 22.0. how to install it. Appendix C. the physical features.2 Application Guide (Part No. and how to reset the software to factory defaults.

Read your User’s Guide thoroughly. files. This also shows book titles. Replace host# telnet <IP address> the indicated text with the appropriate real name or value when using the command. enter: examples as a parameter placeholder.2 Command Reference Typographic Conventions The following table describes the typographic styles used in this book. host# ls [-a] 315393-J. Example View the readme.txt file. or words to be emphasized. Table 1 Typographic Conventions Typeface or Symbol AaBbCc123 Meaning This type is used for names of commands. [ ] Command items shown inside brackets are optional and can be used or excluded as the situation demands. and directories used within the text. It also depicts on-screen computer output and Main# prompts. Do not type the brackets. AaBbCc123 This bold type appears in command examples. It shows text that must be typed in exactly as shown. Do not type the brackets. Main# sys <AaBbCc123> This italicized type appears in command To establish a Telnet session. special terms. January 2005 Preface 17 .0.Alteon OS 22.

Alteon OS 22. When you use an ERC. To locate an ERC for your product or service. refer to the following URL: http://www.nortelnetworks. your call is routed to a technical support person who specializes in supporting that product or service.nortelnetworks. contact one of the following Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Centers: Technical Solutions Center Europe.html 18 Preface 315393-J. If you purchased a Nortel Networks service program. Middle East.2 Command Reference How to Get Help If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel Networks product from a distributor or authorized reseller.com/help/contact/erc/index. contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance.com/help/contact/global An Express Routing Code (ERC) is available for many Nortel Networks products and services. January 2005 .0. and Africa Telephone 00800 8008 9009 or +44 (0) 870 907 9009 (800) 4NORTEL or (800) 466-7835 (61) (2) 8870-8800 (800) 810-5000 North America Asia Pacific China Additional information about the Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Centers is available at the following URL: http://www.

Using a basic terminal. however. Some of the more advanced features. The extensive Alteon OS switching software included in your switch provides a variety of options for accessing and configuring the switch: A built-in.CHAPTER 1 The Command Line Interface Your Alteon Application Switch is ready to perform basic switching functions right out of the box. This chapter explains how to access the Command Line Interface (CLI) to the switch. require some administrative configuration before they can be used effectively. and to perform any necessary configuration. you are presented with a hierarchy of menus that enable you to view information and statistics about the switch. January 2005 19 . 315393-J. text-based command line interface and menu system for access via local terminal or remote Telnet session A GUI-based Element Management System (EMS) for interactive network access SNMP support for access through network management software such as HP OpenView Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface (BBI) The command line interface is the most direct method for collecting switch information and performing switch configuration.

3.0. you will need the following: An ASCII terminal or a computer running terminal emulation software set to the parameters shown in the table below: Table 1-1 Console Configuration Parameters Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Value 9600 8 None 1 None A standard serial cable with a male DB9 connector (see your switch hardware installation guide for specifics). To establish the connection. (For more information. press <Enter> a few times on your terminal. Connect the terminal to the Console port using the serial cable.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Connecting to the Switch You can access the command line interface in any one of the following ways: Using a console connection via the console port Using a Telnet connection over the network Using an SSH connection to securely log into another computer over a network Establishing a Console Connection Requirements To establish a console connection with the switch. You will next be required to enter a password for access to the switch. 20 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 315393-J. Power on the terminal. see “Setting Passwords” on page 40). 2. Procedure 1. January 2005 .

To configure the switch for Telnet access. when you configure the switch IP address (see “Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration” on page 29). The switch can get its IP address in one of two ways: Dynamically. from a BOOTP server on your network Manually. followed by the switch IP address: telnet <IP address> You will then be prompted to enter a password as explained on page 22. The MAC address can be found on a small white label on the back panel of the switch. NOTE – You need to enable Telnet and SSH. The switch must have an IP address. January 2005 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 21 . the Alteon OS software is set up to request its IP address from a BOOTP server. 315393-J. If you have a BOOTP server on your network. To establish a Telnet connection with the switch.0. you can access the CLI using a Telnet connection.2 Command Reference Establishing a Telnet Connection A Telnet connection offers the convenience of accessing the switch from any workstation connected to the network. you need to have a device with Telnet software located on the same network as the switch. The MAC address can also be found in the System Information menu (see “System Information” on page 55). NOTE – If connecting to the management port. The port must be manually configured with the proper IP address. Telnet access provides the same options for user access and administrator access as those available through the console port. before you can use these methods of accessing the switch.Alteon OS 22. Running Telnet Once the IP parameters on the Alteon Application Switch are configured. run the Telnet program on your workstation and issue the Telnet command. BOOTP is not supported. add the MAC address of the switch to the BOOTP configuration file located on the BOOTP server. using serial connection. Using a BOOTP Server By default. Refer to “Establishing a Telnet Connection” on page 21.

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Establishing an SSH Connection
Although a remote network administrator can manage the configuration of an Alteon Application Switch via Telnet, this method does not provide a secure connection. The SSH (Secure Shell) protocol enables you to securely log into another computer over a network to execute commands remotely. As a secure alternative to using Telnet to manage switch configuration, SSH ensures that all data sent over the network is encrypted and secure. The switch can do only one session of key/cipher generation at a time. Thus, a SSH/SCP client will not be able to login if the switch is doing key generation at that time or if another client has just logged in before this client. Similarly, the system will fail to do the key generation if a SSH/SCP client is logging in at that time. The supported SSH encryption and authentication methods are listed below. Server Host Authentication: Client RSA-authenticates the switch in the beginning of every connection. Key Exchange: RSA Encryption: 3DES-CBC, DES User Authentication: Local password authentication, Radius The following SSH clients have been tested: SSH 1.2.23 and SSH 1.2.27 for Linux (freeware) SecureCRT 3.0.2 and SecureCRT 3.0.3 (Van Dyke Technologies, Inc.) F-Secure SSH 1.1 for Windows (Data Fellows) NOTE – The Alteon OS implementation of SSH is based on SSH version 1.5 and supports SSH-1.5-1.X.XX. SSH clients of other versions (especially Version 2) will not be supported.

Running SSH
Once the IP parameters are configured and the SSH service is turned on the Alteon Application Switch, you can access the command line interface using an SSH connection. To establish an SSH connection with the switch, run the SSH program on your workstation by issuing the SSH command, followed by the switch IP address:
>> # ssh <switch IP address>

22

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

or, if SecurID authentication is required, use the following command:
>> # ssh -1 ace <switch IP address>

You will then be prompted to enter your user name and password.

Accessing the Switch
To enable better switch management and user accountability, seven levels or classes of user access have been implemented on the Alteon Application Switch. Levels of access to CLI, Web management functions, and screens increase as needed to perform various switch management tasks. Conceptually, access classes are defined as follows: User interaction with the switch is completely passive—nothing can be changed on the Alteon Application Switch. Users may display information that has no security or privacy implications, such as switch statistics and current operational state information. Operators can only effect temporary changes on the Alteon Application Switch. These changes will be lost when the switch is rebooted/reset. Operators have access to the switch management features used for daily switch operations. Because any changes an operator makes are undone by a reset of the switch, operators cannot severely impact switch operation. Administrators are the only ones that may make permanent changes to the switch configuration—changes that are persistent across a reboot/reset of the switch. Administrators can access switch functions to configure and troubleshoot problems on the Alteon Application Switch. Because administrators can also make temporary (operator-level) changes as well, they must be aware of the interactions between temporary and permanent changes. Access to switch functions is controlled through the use of unique surnames and passwords. Once you are connected to the switch via local console, Telnet, or SSH, you are prompted to enter a password. The default user names/password for each access level are listed in the following table. NOTE – It is recommended that you change default switch passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies. For more information, see “Setting Passwords” on page 40.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface

23

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Table 1-2 User Access Levels
User Account User Description and Tasks Performed The User has no direct responsibility for switch management. He or she can view all switch status information and statistics, but cannot make any configuration changes to the switch. Password user

SLB Operator

The SLB Operator manages Web servers and other Internet ser- slboper vices and their loads. In addition to being able to view all switch information and statistics, the SLB Operator can enable/disable servers using the Server Load Balancing operation menu. The Layer 4 Operator manages traffic on the lines leading to the l4oper shared Internet services. This user currently has the same access level as the SLB operator. and the access level is reserved for future use, to provide access to operational commands for operators managing traffic on the line leading to the shared Internet services. The Operator manages all functions of the switch. In addition to oper SLB Operator functions, the Operator can reset ports or the entire switch. The SLB Administrator configures and manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. In addition to SLB Operator functions, the SLB Administrator can configure parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus, with the exception of not being able to configure filters or bandwidth management. The Layer 4 Administrator configures and manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services. In addition to SLB Administrator functions, the Layer 4 Administrator can configure all parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus, including filters and bandwidth management. The superuser Administrator has complete access to all menus, information, and configuration commands on the Alteon Application Switch, including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. slbadmin

Layer 4 Operator

Operator

SLB Administrator

Layer 4 Administrator

l4admin

Administrator

admin

NOTE – With the exception of the “admin” user, access to each user level can be disabled by setting the password to an empty value. All user levels below “admin” will by default be initially disabled (empty password) until they are enabled by the “admin” user. This prevents inadvertently leaving the switch open to unauthorized users.

24

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

CLI Versus Setup
Once the administrator password is verified, you are given complete access to the switch. If the switch is still set to its factory default configuration, the system will ask whether you wish to run Setup (see Chapter 2, “First-Time Configuration”), a utility designed to help you through the first-time configuration process. If the switch has already been configured, the Main Menu of the CLI is displayed instead. The following table shows the Main Menu with administrator privileges.
[Main Menu] info stats cfg oper boot maint diff apply save revert exit

-

Information Menu Statistics Menu Configuration Menu Operations Command Menu Boot Options Menu Maintenance Menu Show pending config changes [global command] Apply pending config changes [global command] Save updated config to FLASH [global command] Revert pending or applied changes [global command] Exit [global command, always available]

NOTE – If you are accessing a user account or Layer 4 administrator account, some menu options will not be available.

Command Line History and Editing
For a description of global commands, shortcuts, and command line editing functions, see “Menu Basics” on page 47.”

Idle Timeout
By default, the switch will disconnect your console or Telnet session after five minutes of inactivity. This function is controlled by the idle timeout parameter, which can be set from 1 to 10080 minutes. For information on changing this parameter, see “System Configuration” on page 231.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface

25

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

26

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface

315393-J, January 2005

CHAPTER 2

First-Time Configuration
To help with the initial process of configuring your switch, the Alteon OS software includes a Setup utility. The Setup utility prompts you step-by-step to enter all the necessary information for basic configuration of the switch. This chapter describes how to use the Setup utility and how to change system passwords. NOTE – If you are configuring a 2000-SSL Series Switch, you can use the Switch Setup Utility in the Alteon OS 2000-SSL Series Quick Setup Guide (part number 215102-A) instead for setting up the Switch and the SSL Processor. Then return to this guide for configuration and management information on your Switch.

Using the Setup Utility
Whenever you log in as the system administrator under the factory default configuration, you are asked whether you wish to run the Setup utility. Setup can also be activated manually from the command line interface any time after login.

Information Needed For Setup
Setup requests the following information: Basic system information Date & time Whether to use BOOTP or not Whether to use Spanning Tree Protocol or not Management port configuration Optional configuration for each port Speed, duplex, flow control, and negotiation mode (as appropriate) Whether to use VLAN tagging or not (as appropriate)
27

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Optional configuration for each VLAN Name of VLAN Which ports are included in the VLAN Optional configuration of IP parameters IP address, subnet mask, and broadcast address, and VLAN for each IP interface IP addresses for up to four default gateways Destination, subnet mask, and gateway IP address for each IP static route Whether IP forwarding is enabled or not Whether the RIP supply is enabled or not

Starting Setup When You Log In
The Setup prompt appears automatically whenever you login as the system administrator under the factory default settings. 1. Connect to the switch console. After connecting, the login prompt will appear as shown below.
Enter Password:

2.

Enter admin as the default administrator password. If the factory default configuration is detected, the system prompts:
Connected to Alteon Application Switch 2424 18:44:05 Mon April 12, 2004 The switch is booted with factory default configuration. To ease the configuration of the switch, a "Set Up" facility which will prompt you with those configuration items that are essential to the operation of the switch is provided. Would you like to run "Set Up" to configure the switch? [y/n]:

NOTE – If the default admin login is unsuccessful, or if the administrator Main Menu appears instead, the system configuration has probably been changed from the factory default settings. If you are certain that you need to return the switch to its factory default settings, see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 447. 3.
28

Enter y to begin the initial configuration of the switch, or n to bypass the Setup facility.

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually
Stopping Setup
To abort the Setup utility, press <Ctrl-C> during any Setup question. When you abort Setup, the system will prompt:
Would you like to run from top again? [y/n]

Enter n to abort Setup, or y to restart the Setup program at the beginning.

Restarting Setup
You can restart the Setup utility manually at any time by entering the following command at the administrator prompt:
# /cfg/setup

Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration
When Setup is started, the system prompts:
"Set Up" will walk you through the configuration of System Date and Time, BOOTP, Spanning Tree, Management port, Port Speed/Mode, VLANs, and IP interfaces. [type Ctrl-C to abort "Set Up"] -----------------------------------------------------------Will you be configuring VLANs? [y/n]

1.

Enter y if you will be configuring VLANs. Otherwise enter n. If you decide not to configure VLANs during this session, you can configure them later using the configuration menus, or by restarting the Setup facility. For more information on configuring VLANs, see the Alteon OS 22.0.2 Application Guide. Next, the Setup utility prompts you to input basic system information.

2.

Enter the year of the current date at the prompt:
System Date: Enter year [2004]:

Enter the last two digits of the year as a number from 00 to 99. “00” is considered 2000. To keep the current year, press <Enter>.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration

29

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

3.

Enter the month of the current system date at the prompt:
System Date: Enter month [4]:

Enter the month as a number from 1 to 12. To keep the current month, press <Enter>. 4. Enter the day of the current date at the prompt:
Enter day [12]:

Enter the date as a number from 1 to 31. To keep the current day, press <Enter>. 5. Enter the hour of the current system time at the prompt:
System Time: Enter hour in 24-hour format [18]:

Enter the hour as a number from 00 to 23. To keep the current hour, press <Enter>. 6. Enter the minute of the current time at the prompt:
Enter minutes [55]:

Enter the minute as a number from 00 to 59. To keep the current minute, press <Enter>. 7. Enter the seconds of the current time at the prompt:
Enter seconds [37]:

Enter the seconds as a number from 00 to 59. To keep the current second, press <Enter>. The system displays the date and time settings:
System clock set to 18:55:36 Mon April 12, 2004.

8.

Enable or disable the use of BOOTP at the prompt:
BootP Option: Current BOOTP usage: Enter new BOOTP usage [d/e]:

disabled

30

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration

315393-J, January 2005

before the system will prompt for IP parameters. 315393-J. press <Enter> without specifying any port and go to “Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 34. a BOOTP server can supply the switch with IP parameters so that you do not have to enter them manually. Turn Spanning Tree Protocol on or off at the prompt: Spanning Tree: Current Spanning Tree setting: ON Turn Spanning Tree OFF? [y/n] Enter y to turn off Spanning Tree. 2. To keep the current setting.Alteon OS 22. Setup Part 2: Port Configuration NOTE – The port configuration options shown in these steps are for the Alteon OS 2424. or enter e to enable the use of BOOTP.0. default gateway. 1. some of the prompts and options may be different. broadcast address. 9.2 Command Reference If available on your network. To skip port configuration. BOOTP must be disabled however. or skip port configuration at the prompt: Port Config: Enter port number: (1-28) If you wish to change settings for individual ports. or enter n to leave Spanning Tree on. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 31 . When configuring port options for other switches. press <Enter>. set up the management port: Management Port Config: Configure management port? [y/n] y If you answer y to configure the management port. enter the number of the port you wish to configure. subnet mask. you will be prompted for IP address. If desired. and other management port options. Enter d to disable the use of BOOTP. Select the port to configure.

If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port speed. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. the system prompts: Port Auto Negotiation: Current Port 1 autonegotiation: Enter new value ["on"/"off"]: on Enter on to enable autonegotiation. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port flow control. To keep the current setting. If appropriate. half for half-duplex. or any to have the switch auto-negotiate. January 2005 . the system prompts: Port Mode: Current port 1 mode setting: any Enter new speed ["full"/"half"/"any"] Enter full for full-duplex. press <Enter>. both to enable both. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector.2 Command Reference 3. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port autonegotiation mode. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port duplex mode.Alteon OS 22. 5. the system prompts: Fast Link Configuration: Port Speed: Current Port 1 speed setting: 10/100 Enter new speed ["10"/"100"/"any"]: Enter the port speed from the options available. off to disable it. 4. press <Enter>. If appropriate. press <Enter>. To keep the current setting. tx for transmit flow control.0. or press <Enter> to keep the current setting. To keep the current setting. 6. the system prompts: Port Flow Control: Current Port 1 flow control setting: both Enter new value ["rx"/"tx"/"both"/"none"]: Enter rx to enable receive flow control. or enter any to have the switch auto-sense the port speed. If appropriate. or none to turn flow control off for the port. 32 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. If appropriate.

9. To keep the current setting.2 Command Reference 7. enable or disable VLAN tagging for the port. To keep the current setting. Otherwise.Alteon OS 22. If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector. 8. press <Enter>. the system prompts: Port VLAN tagging config (tagged port can be a member of multiple VLANs) Current TAG flag: disabled Enter new TAG status [d/e]: Enter d to disable VLAN tagging for the port or enter e to enable VLAN tagging for the port. tx for transmit flow control. If you have selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1. If appropriate. If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector. 10. configure Gigabit Ethernet port autonegotiation mode. the system prompts: Gig Link Configuration: Port Flow Control: Current Port 1 flow control setting: both Enter new value ["rx"/"tx"/"both"/"none"]: Enter rx to enable receive flow control. off to disable it. If configuring VLANs. or press <Enter> to keep the current setting. repeat the steps in this section. both to enable both. The system prompts you to configure the next port: Enter port number: When you are through configuring ports. 315393-J. press <Enter>. or none to turn flow control off for the port. If appropriate. the system prompts: Port Auto Negotiation: Current Port 1 autonegotiation: Enter new value ["on"/"off"]: on Enter on to enable port autonegotiation. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 33 .0. press <Enter> without specifying any port. configure Gigabit Ethernet port flow parameters.

3. When you are finished adding ports to this VLAN. January 2005 . The system prompts you to define the first port in the VLAN: Define ports in VLAN: Current VLAN 2: empty Enter port numbers one per line. enter the number of the VLAN you wish to configure. To use the pending new VLAN name. NULL at end: 34 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. press <Enter> without specifying any port. Pending new VLAN name: "VLAN 2" Enter new VLAN name. To skip VLAN configuration. press <Enter> without typing a VLAN number and go to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 35. skip to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 35.2 Command Reference Setup Part 3: VLANs If you chose to skip VLANs configuration back in Part 1. type the port number and press <Enter> to move to the next line. NULL at end: Type the first port number to add to the current VLAN and press <Enter>. The right angle prompt appears: > For each additional port in the VLAN.0. 1. 4. Enter the new VLAN name at the prompt: VLAN is newly created. Enter the VLAN port numbers. NULL at end: If you wish to change settings for individual VLANs. 2. Repeat this until all ports for the VLAN being configured are entered. or skip VLAN configuration at the prompt: VLAN Config: Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4090. Select the VLAN to configure.Alteon OS 22. without quotes: Entering a new VLAN name is optional. press <Enter>. The system prompts you to configure the next VLAN: VLAN Config: Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4090.

If you wish to configure individual IP interfaces.0. if you disabled BOOTP.Alteon OS 22. the system prompts for IP parameters. enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation: Current IP address: Enter new IP address: 0. Up to 256 IP interfaces can be configured on the Alteon Application Switch. press <Enter>. skip to Setup Part 5: Final Steps. press <Enter> without typing an interface number and go to “Default Gateways” on page 36. When all VLANs have been configured.0. enter the number of the IP interface you wish to configure.0. enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation: Current subnet mask: Enter new subnet mask: 0. The interfaces can be used for connecting to the switch for remote configuration. 2. and for routing between subnets and VLANs (if used). No two IP interfaces can be on the same IP subnet. The IP address assigned to each IP interface provides the switch with an IP presence on your network. or skip interface configuration at the prompt: IP Config: IP interfaces: Enter interface number: (1-256) NOTE – The total number of interfaces on an Alteon Application Switch 2424-SSL is 1-255. Otherwise. press <Enter> without specifying any VLAN. At the prompt. Select the IP interface to configure.0. IP Interfaces IP interfaces are used for defining subnets to which the switch belongs.2 Command Reference Repeat the steps in this section until all VLANs have been configured.0 To keep the current setting.0. To skip IP interface configuration. 1. Setup Part 4: IP Configuration If BOOTP was enabled back in Part 1. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 35 . For the specified IP interface. 3.0 315393-J.

When all interfaces have been configured.0. Default Gateways 1. This prompt appears if you selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1: Current VLAN: Enter new VLAN: 1 Enter the number for the VLAN to which the interface belongs. press <Enter>.0 To keep the current setting. January 2005 . 4. select a default gateway for configuration. At the prompt.Alteon OS 22. or skip default gateway configuration: IP default gateways: Enter default gateway number: (1-259) Enter the number for the default gateway to be configured. At the prompt. press <Enter> without specifying any interface number. To skip default gateway configuration. or press <Enter> without specifying a VLAN number to accept the current setting.0. At the prompt. enter the broadcast IP address in dotted decimal notation: Current broadcast address: Enter new broadcast address: 0.0. specify a VLAN for the interface. 6. 5. enter y to enable the IP interface. press <Enter>.2 Command Reference To keep the current setting. or n to leave it disabled: Enable IP interface? [y/n] 7. The system prompts you to configure another interface: Enter interface number: (1-256) Repeat the steps in this section until all IP interfaces have been configured. press <Enter> without typing a gateway number and go to “IP Routing” on page 37. 36 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. If configuring VLANs.

Alteon OS 22. To disable IP forwarding. enter the IP address for the selected default gateway: Current IP address: Enter new IP address: 0. 2. At the prompt.0. At the prompt. This part of the Setup program prompts you to configure the various routing parameters. press <Enter>. IP routing between them can be performed entirely within the switch. This eliminates the need to bounce inter-subnet communication off an external router device.0. When all default gateways have been configured. or press <Enter> without specifying an address to accept the current setting. enter y to enable the default gateway. where subnets may not have a direct presence on the Alteon Application Switch. IP Routing When IP interfaces are configured for the various subnets attached to your switch. The system prompts you to configure another default gateway: Enter default gateway number: (1-259) Repeat the steps in this section until all default gateways have been configured. can be accomplished through configuring static routes or by letting the switch learn routes dynamically.0. press <Enter> without specifying any number. enter n and proceed to Step 2. 3. 1. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 37 . or n to leave it disabled: Enable default gateway? [y/n] 4. enable or disable the RIP supply: Enable RIP supply? [y/n] 315393-J. At the prompt.2 Command Reference 2.To keep the current setting. Routing on more complex networks. enable or disable forwarding for IP Routing: Enable IP forwarding? [y/n] Enter y to enable IP forwarding.0 Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation. At the prompt.

2 Command Reference Setup Part 5: Final Steps 1. If you do not apply or save the changes.0. January 2005 . Enter n to continue without reviewing the changes. Enter n to return to the Apply the changes? prompt. Next. Enter n to continue without saving the changes. it is recommended that you change the default passwords as shown in “Setting Passwords” on page 40. 3. We recommend that you review the changes. or n to continue without applying. the system prompts whether to abort them: Abort all changes? [y/n] Enter y to discard the changes. or n to continue. NOTE – After initial configuration is complete. When prompted. 4. 5. 38 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. decide whether you wish to review the configuration changes: Review the changes made? [y/n] Enter y to review the changes made during this session of the Setup utility. Changes are normally saved at this point. decide whether to apply the changes at the prompt: Apply the changes? [y/n] Enter y to apply the changes.Alteon OS 22. At the prompt. 2. decide whether to make the changes permanent: Save changes to flash? [y/n] Enter y to save the changes to flash. Changes are normally applied. decide whether to restart Setup or continue: Would you like to run from top again? [y/n] Enter y to restart the Setup utility from the beginning. When prompted.

January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 39 . By default. NOTE – If you need to configure SNMPv3. 1. refer to “SNMPv3 Configuration Menu” on page 247 of this manual. >> System# apply >> System# save 315393-J.2 Command Reference Optional Setup for SNMP Support NOTE – This step is optional. >> System# apply >> System# save Optional Setup for Telnet Support NOTE – This step is optional. such as Alteon EMS. >> # /cfg/sys/access/tnet ena 2. >> # /cfg/sys/ssnmp/rcomm|wcomm 3. >> # /cfg/sys/access/snmp (disabled/read-only/read-write) [d/r/w]: 2. Otherwise apply and save after “Optional Setup for Telnet Support” on page 39. Enable SNMP and select one of the options. Apply and save configuration if you are not configuring the switch with Telnet support. they are public and private respectively.0.Alteon OS 22. Perform this procedure only if you are planning on connecting to the switch through any telnet application. 1. Apply and save SNMP and /or telnet configuration(s). Set SNMP read or write community string. Perform this procedure only if you are planning on using SNMPbased tools. Enable telnet.

January 2005 . To change both the user password and the administrator password. When RIP is enabled. enter n to disable it.2 Command Reference If your network uses Routing Interface Protocol (RIP). Otherwise. Changing the Default Administrator Password The administrator has complete access to all menus. The default password for the administrator account is admin. and configuration commands. RIP listen is set by default. To change the default password. follow this procedure: 1. you must login using the administrator password. Setting Passwords It is recommended that you change the user and administrator passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies. NOTE – If you forget your administrator password. including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. information. From the Main Menu. 2.Alteon OS 22. enter y to enable the RIP supply. Passwords cannot be modified from the user command mode.0. use the following command to access the Configuration Menu: Main# /cfg 40 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode.

[Configuration Menu] sys .Layer 3 Menu slb . From the Configuration Menu.Server Load Balancing (Layer 4-7) Menu security .Port Mirroring Menu bwm .System-wide Parameter Menu port .Port Menu pmirr . January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 41 .Restore current configuration from tftp server 3.Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg .Alteon OS 22.Backup current configuration to tftp server gtcfg .0. [System Menu] syslog mmgmt sshd radius tacacs ntp sonmp ssnmp health access date time idle notice bannr smtp hprompt bootp cur - Syslog Menu Management Port Menu SSH Server Menu RADIUS Authentication Menu TACACS+ Authentication Menu NTP Server Menu SONMP Menu System SNMP Menu System Health Check Menu System Access Menu Set system date Set system time Set timeout for idle CLI sessions Set login notice Set login banner Set SMTP host Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt Enable/disable use of BOOTP Display current system-wide parameters 315393-J. use the following command to select the System Menu: >> Configuration# sys The System Menu is displayed.Layer 2 Menu l3 .Bandwidth Management Menu l2 .Security Menu setup .Step by step configuration set up dump .2 Command Reference The Configuration Menu is displayed.

Apply and save your change by entering the following commands: System# apply System# save Changing the Default User Password The user login has limited control of the switch. use the following path to select the User menu: System# access/user 5. 42 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. 7. validation required. System# user/admpw 6. Through a user account. you can view switch information and statistics. but you can’t make configuration changes. Enter the new administrator password.0.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 . Enter current administrator password: NOTE – If you forget your administrator password. Enter the current administrator password at the prompt: Changing ADMINISTRATOR password.. as shown in the following procedure. again. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode.2 Command Reference 4. Select the administrator password. The default password for the user account is user. From the System menu.. at the prompt: Re-enter new administrator password: 9. Enter the new administrator password at the prompt: Enter new administrator password: 8. This password cannot be changed from the user account. Only the administrator has the ability to change passwords.

Changing USER password. Enter the new user password at the prompt: Enter new user password: 7. From the Main Menu. System# access/user/usrpw 5. again.2 Command Reference 1. at the prompt: Re-enter new user password: 8. Enter the new user password. validation required. Apply and save your changes: System# apply System# save 315393-J.0. Entering the administrator password confirms your authority. 2. Only the administrator can change the user password.. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 43 .. Enter the current administrator password at the prompt.Alteon OS 22. use the following command to access the Configuration Menu: Main# cfg 3. Select the user password. From the Configuration Menu. Enter current administrator password: 6. use the following command to select the System Menu: >> Configuration# sys 4. Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password.

Through a Layer 4 administrator account.0. The default password for the Layer 4 administrator account is l4admin. follow this procedure: 1. Select the Layer 4 administrator password: System# l4apw 4. 2. 5.2 Command Reference Changing the Default Layer 4 Administrator Password The Layer 4 administrator has limited control of the switch. Enter the current administrator password (not the Layer 4 administrator password) at the prompt: Changing L4 ADMINISTRATOR password. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode.Alteon OS 22. To change any switch password. Enter the new Layer 4 administrator password at the prompt: Enter new L4 administrator password: 6... at the prompt: Re-enter new L4 administrator password: 44 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. To change the default password. Passwords cannot be modified from the Layer 4 administrator account or the user account. January 2005 . Enter current administrator password: NOTE – If you forget your administrator password. use the following path to access the user command: Main# /cfg/sys/access/user 3. but can configure changes only on the Server Load Balancing menus. Enter the new administrator password. you can view all switch information and statistics. Connect to the switch and log in using the administrator account. again. validation required. From the Main Menu. you must login using the administrator password.

0. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 45 .2 Command Reference 7. Apply and save your change by entering the following commands: System# apply System# save 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.

Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .2 Command Reference 46 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J.0.

along with a summary of what each command will do. This chapter describes the Main Menu commands. To make the CLI easy to use. Each menu displays a list of commands and/or sub-menus that are available. Some features are not available under the user login. the various commands have been logically grouped into a series of menus and sub-menus. always available] 315393-J.CHAPTER 3 Menu Basics The Alteon Application Switch’s Command Line Interface (CLI) is used for viewing switch information and statistics. The Main Menu The Main Menu appears after a successful connection and login. The following table shows the Main Menu for the administrator login. NOTE – The ssl option is only visible on the Alteon OS 2000-SSL Series. January 2005 47 . and provides a list of commands and shortcuts that are commonly available from all the menus within the CLI. [Main Menu] info stats cfg oper boot maint diff apply save revert exit - Information Menu Statistics Menu Configuration Menu Operations Command Menu Boot Options Menu Maintenance Menu Show pending config changes [global command] Apply pending config changes [global command] Save updated config to FLASH [global command] Revert pending or applied changes [global command] Exit [global command. Below each menu is a prompt where you can enter any command appropriate to the current menu. the administrator can use the CLI for performing all levels of switch configuration. In addition.

Operations Command Menu Operations-level commands are used for making immediate and temporary changes to switch configuration.2 Command Reference Menu Summary Information Menu Provides sub-menus for displaying information about the current status of the switch: from basic system settings to VLANs. Configuration Menu This menu is available only from an administrator login. UDP. Maintenance Menu This menu is used for debugging purposes. VRRP. and enabling or disabling Server Load Balancing functions. and Layer 4 statistics. It is also used for activating or deactivating optional software packages. performing port mirroring. and to clear entries in the forwarding database and the ARP and routing tables. ARP. ICMP. Boot Options Menu This menu is used for upgrading switch software. Statistics Menu Provides sub-menus for displaying switch performance statistics. 48 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 315393-J. It includes sub-menus for configuring every aspect of the switch. Changes to configuration are not active until explicitly applied. January 2005 . Changes can be saved to non-volatile memory.Alteon OS 22. routing. Layer 4 settings. enabling you to generate a dump of the critical state information in the switch. TCP. and for resetting the switch when necessary. SNMP. Included are port. DNS. selecting configuration blocks. This menu is used for bringing ports temporarily in and out of service. IP.0. and more. IF.

Display the current menu. Apply pending configuration changes. navigating through menus. Move up one menu level / Top menu if first. a summary of the global commands is displayed. this is used to separate multiple commands placed on the same line. or command separator ! Execute command from history pwd quit revert history Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands Command ? command or help . and for applying and saving configuration changes. type help. If placed at the beginning of a command.. Use this command to restore configuration parameters set since last “apply” command. When used without the command parameter. For help on a specific command. Set the number of lines (n) that display on the screen at one time. Print current menu . Remove pending configuration changes between “apply” commands. The default is 24 lines. or up / Action Provides more information about a specific command on the current menu. Exit from the command line interface and log out.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Global Commands Some basic commands are recognized throughout the menu hierarchy. Show any pending configuration changes. Write configuration changes to non-volatile flash memory. go to the Main Menu. January 2005 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 49 . Go up one level in the menu structure. When used without a value.0.. These commands are useful for obtaining online help. lines diff apply save revert exit or quit 315393-J. Otherwise. the current setting is displayed. or print . You will see the following screen: Global Commands: [can be issued from any menu] help up print lines verbose exit diff apply save ping traceroute telnet pushd popd who The following are used to navigate the menu structure: .

By default. By default. If the management port is used. The format is as follows: <hostname>|<IP address> [port] [-m|-mgmt|-d|-data]. Display the command path used to reach the current menu. The format is as follows: traceroute <host name>| <IP address> [<max-hops (1-32)> [msec delay]] [-m|-mgmt|-d|-data] Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the target station. the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. and delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds for wait for the response. specify the -m or -mgmt option. The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames (see “Domain Name System Configuration Menu” on page 331). By default. specify the -m or -mgmt option. maxhops (optional) is the maximum distance to trace (1-16 devices). This command is used to telnet out of the switch. the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. The format is as follows: ping <host name>|<IP address> [tries <(1-32)> [msec delay]] [-m| -mgmt|-d|-data] Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device. specify the -m or -mgmt option. Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device. This command stores the current location of the menu tree. the current setting is displayed. This command brings up the history of the last 10 commands. the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. If the management port is used. January 2005 . Use this command to identify the route used for station-to-station connectivity across the network. msec delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds between attempts. 2 =Verbose: Everything is shown. As with ping. the DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. Sets the level of information displayed on the screen: 0 =Quiet: Nothing appears except errors—not even prompts. This command takes the user one level back to the menu location stored by the last pushd command.Alteon OS 22. When used without a value. 1 =Normal: Prompts and requested output are shown. but no menus. traceroute pwd verbose n telnet history pushd popd who 50 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 315393-J. If the management port is used.0. This command displays the currently logged user’s session information.2 Command Reference Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands Command ping Action Use this command to verify station-to-station connectivity across the network. tries (optional) is the number of attempts (1-32).

) Move the cursor back one position to the left. <Ctrl-n> <Ctrl-a> <Ctrl-e> <Ctrl-b> <Ctrl-f> <Backspace> <Ctrl-d> <Ctrl-k> <Ctrl-l> <Ctrl-u> Other keys 315393-J. Insert new characters at the cursor position.) Recall the previous command from the history list. This can be used multiple times to work forward through the last 10 commands. Repeat the last entered command. you can retrieve and modify previously entered commands with just a few keystrokes. (Also the right arrow key. or edited using the options below. Kill (erase) all characters from the cursor position to the end of the command line. Redraw the screen.) Move the cursor forward one position to the right. (Also the up arrow key.2 Command Reference Command Line History and Editing Using the command line interface. Move cursor to the end of the command line.Alteon OS 22. Clear the entire line. The following options are available globally at the command line: Table 3-2 Command Line History and Editing Options Option history !! !n <Ctrl-p> Description Display a numbered list of the last 10 previously entered commands. The recalled command can be entered as is. Move the cursor to the beginning of command line. Delete one character at the cursor position. or edited using the options below.) Erase one character to the left of the cursor position. January 2005 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 51 . This can be used multiple times to work backward through the last 10 commands. Repeat the nth command shown on the history list. The recalled command can be entered as is. (Also the left arrow key.0. (Also the down arrow key.) Recall the next command from the history list. (Also the Delete key.

Entering additional letters will further refine the list of commands or options displayed. the keyboard shortcut to access the Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu from the Main# prompt is as follows: Main# cfg/l2/stg/port Command Abbreviation Most commands can be abbreviated by entering the first characters which distinguish the command from the others in the same menu or sub-menu. 52 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 315393-J. the CLI will display all commands or options in that menu that begin with that letter. January 2005 . waiting to be entered. For example.Alteon OS 22. the command shown above could also be entered as follows: Main# c/l2/st/p Tab Completion By entering the first letter of a command at any menu prompt and hitting <Tab>. the currently active menu will be displayed. You can connect as many commands as required to access the menu option that you want.2 Command Reference Command Line Interface Shortcuts Command Stacking As a shortcut. For example. If only one command fits the input text when <Tab> is pressed. you can type multiple commands on a single line.0. If the <Tab> key is pressed without any input on the command line. separated by forward slashes (/). that command will be supplied on the command line.

with pointers to where detailed information can be found. This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch infor- mation.Show port information bwm . l3 Displays the Layer 3 information menu. l2 Displays the Layer 2 Information Menu.CHAPTER 4 The Information Menu You can view configuration information for the switch in both the user and administrator command modes.Layer 3 Information Menu slb .Layer 2 Information Menu l3 .Show link status port . see page 90. To view menu options.System Information Menu l2 .Layer 4-7 Information Menu link . For details.Dump all information The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 4-1 on page 53. January 2005 53 . see page 77. Table 4-1 Information Menu Options (/info) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays system menu information.Show enabled software features dump . /info Information Menu [Information Menu] sys .Bandwidth Management Information Menu security .Show Security status swkey . see page 55. For details. 315393-J.

or 1000) Duplex mode (half.Alteon OS 22.0. link Displays configuration information about each port. To view a sample. or auto) Link status (up or down) For details. full. or auto) Flow control for transmit and receive (no. including: Port number Whether the port uses VLAN Tagging or not Port VLAN ID (PVID) Port name VLAN membership For details. dump Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more. For details. 54 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. including: Port number Port speed (10. see page 120. To view menu options. For details. see page 119. see page 127. see page 126. 10/100. January 2005 . see page 121. If you want to capture dump data to a file. see page 110. security Displays current UDP blast settings and the security status of the port. 100. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. swkey Displays a list of all the optional software packages which have been activated or installed on your switch. For details see page 127. port Displays port status information. bwm Displays Bandwidth Management information. depending on your configuration). yes.2 Command Reference Table 4-1 Information Menu Options (/info) Command Syntax and Usage slb Displays the Layer 4 Information Menu.

See page 68 for a sample output. and date. To view the menu options. day. Management Processor Board Hardware. mgmt Displays Management port information. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 55 .2 Command Reference /info/sys System Information Menu [System Menu] snmpv3 general log savedlog mgmt sonmp capacity fan temp dump SNMPv3 Information Menu Show general system information Show last 30 syslog messages Display syslog messages saved in flash Show Management Port information Show SONMP topology table information Show switch capacity information Show switch fan status Show switch temperature sensor status Dump all system information Table 4-2 Information System Menu Options (/info/sys) Command Syntax and Usage snmpv3 Displays SNMPv3 Information Menu. and Fast Ethernet Board Hardware Software image file and version number Configuration name Log-in banner. See page 69 for detailed information. see page 57. savedlog Displays syslog messages that are saved in flash. if one is configured See page 66 for a sample output. log Displays last 30 syslog messages.Alteon OS 22. See page 67 for a sample output and detailed information. general Displays general system information including: System information like time.0. Switch model name and number How long the switch has been up Time of last boot MAC address of the switch management processor Internal SSL Processor MAC Address if the switch is 2424-SSL IP address of IP interface #1 Hardware order number and part numbers of the Mainboard Hardware. 315393-J.

See page 74 for a sample output. This output displays the maximum switch capacity for the various applications and services that the switch supports. 56 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. and SNMPv3. Layer 3. Layer 4-7. VRRP. Route Maps. The output contains capacity information about Layer 2. GSLB. dump Displays all system information. Filters. Bandwidth Management.Alteon OS 22. Network Filters. January 2005 . fan Displays the fan status of the switch.0. RIP. Health Checks. BGP. OSPF. capacity gen|bwm|l2|l3|slb|port Displays the switch capacity information. temp Displays the temperature status of the switch sensors. See page 70 for detailed information. General switch information.2 Command Reference Table 4-2 Information System Menu Options (/info/sys) Command Syntax and Usage sonmp Displays SONMP topology table information. which includes Server Load Balancing. See page 71 for a sample output.

Show vacmViewTreeFamily table information access . January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 57 . To view a sample.Show usmUser table information view . [SNMPv3 Information Menu] usm . To view a sample. To view a sample. To view the table. see page 59.2 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3 SNMPv3 System Information Menu SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2 Framework by supporting the following: a new SNMP message format security for messages access control remote configuration of SNMP parameters For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276.0. To view a sample.Show vacmSecurityToGroup table information comm . sub tress. and group name. see page 58.Show all SNMPv3 information Table 4-3 SNMPv3 information Menu Options (/info/sys/snmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage usm Displays User Security Model (USM) table information. see page 61. user name. 315393-J. mask and type of view.Alteon OS 22. see page 60. access Displays View-based Access Control information. see page 61.Show targetParams table information notify .Show community table information taddr . taddr Displays the Target Address table information. To view a sample.Show vacmAccess table information group . see page 62. the security model.Show notify table information dump . view Displays information about view. group Displays information about the group that includes.Show targetAddr table information tparam . comm Displays information about the community table information.

see page 63. To view a sample. see page 64.0. /info/sys/snmpv3/usm SNMPv3 USM User Table Information The User-based Security Model (USM) in SNMPv3 provides security services such as authentication and privacy of messages. NO PRIVACY 58 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. DES PRIVACY NO AUTH. This security model makes use of a defined set of user identities displayed in the USM user table. DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA. To view a sample. notify Displays the Notify table information.2 Command Reference Table 4-3 SNMPv3 information Menu Options (/info/sys/snmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage tparam Displays the Target parameters table information. To view a sample. which is an indication that the messages sent on behalf of the user can be authenticated the privacy protocol. NO PRIVACY HMAC_MD5. dump Displays all the SNMPv3 information. usmUser Table: User Name -------------------------------admin adminmd5 adminsha v1v2only Protocol -------------------------------NO AUTH. January 2005 . see page 65. The USM user table contains information like: the user name a security name in the form of a string whose format is independent of the Security Model an authentication protocol.

Displays the bit mask.3.3.1.3 1. Displays whether a family of view subtrees is included or excluded from the MIB view.3 1.3.1.6.6. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 59 .0.16 1. Alteon OS 22. A view subtree is the set of all MIB object instances which have a common Object Identifier prefix to their names.3.6. Displays the MIB subtree as an OID string. This indicates whether messages sent on behalf of this user are protected from disclosure using a privacy protocol.Alteon OS 22.2 supports DES algorithm for privacy. The software also supports two authentication algorithms: MD5 and HMAC-SHA.15 1.2 Command Reference Table 4-4 USM User Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/usm) Field User Name Protocol Description This is a string that represents the name of the user that you can use to access the switch.3.0.6.6.18 Mask -------------Type -------included included excluded excluded excluded Table 4-5 SNMPv3 View Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/view) Field View Name Subtree Description Displays the name of the view. Mask Type 315393-J. /info/sys/snmpv3/view SNMPv3 View Table Information The user can control and restrict the access allowed to a group to only a subset of the management information in the management domain that the group can access within each context by specifying the group’s rights in terms of a particular MIB view for security reasons.1.3. View Name ----------------org v1v2only v1v2only v1v2only v1v2only Subtree -----------------1.6.

Displays the security model used. Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the read access. for example. Displays the Notify view to which this entry authorizes the notify access. For example. The options are: exact and prefix. a context. Group Name Prefix Model Level Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV ---------. Displays the minimum level of security required to gain rights of access. a write-view and a notify-view. Displays the match for the contextName. The View-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of a group. The vacmAccessTable maps a group name. noAuthNoPriv. security information. The read-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group while reading the objects. or authPriv. Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the write access. This group's access rights are determined by a read-view. The notify-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group when sending a notification.0. and a message type.-----.2 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/access SNMPv3 Access Table Information The access control sub system provides authorization services. The write-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group when writing objects.---------admin usm noAuthNoPriv exact org org org v1v2grp snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv exact org org v1v2only admingrp usm authPriv exact org org org Table 4-6 SNMPv3 Access Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/access) Field Group Name Prefix Model Description Displays the name of group. SNMPv1.------. or SNMPv2 or USM. Displays the prefix that is configured to match the values. which could be the read or write type of operation or notification into a MIB view. Level Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV 60 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. authNoPriv.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .----------.-----.

and SNMPv3. SNMPv2.---------.-------------------. Sec Model ---------snmpv1 usm usm usm User Name ------------------------------v1v2only admin adminmd5 adminsha Group Name -------------------v1v2grp admin admingrp admingrp Table 4-7 SNMPv3 Group Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/group) Field Sec Model User Name Group Name Description Displays the security model used. which is any one of: USM.2 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/group SNMPv3 Group Table Information A group is a combination of security model and security name that defines the access rights assigned to all the security names belonging to that group. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 61 .Alteon OS 22.---------trap1 public v1v2only v1v2trap 315393-J. Displays the access name of the group. SNMPv1. The group is identified by a group name.0. Index Name User Name Tag ---------. Displays the name for the group. /info/sys/snmpv3/comm SNMPv3 Community Table Information This command displays the community table information stored in the SNMP engine.

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-8 SNMPv3 Community Table Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/comm)
Field Index Name User Name Tag Description Displays the unique index value of a row in this table Displays the community string, which represents the configuration. Displays the User Security Model (USM) user name. Displays the community tag. This tag specifies a set of transport endpoints from which a command responder application accepts management requests and to which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap.

/info/sys/snmpv3/taddr
SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information
This command displays the SNMPv3 target address table information, which is stored in the SNMP engine.
Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params ---------- --------------- ---- ---------- --------------trap1 47.81.25.66 162 v1v2trap v1v2param

Table 4-9 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/ snmpv3/taddr)
Field Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params Description Displays the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargetAddrEntry. Displays the transport addresses. Displays the SNMP UDP port number. This column contains a list of tag values which are used to select target addresses for a particular SNMP message. The value of this object identifies an entry in the snmpTargetParamsTable. The identified entry contains SNMP parameters to be used when generating messages to be sent to this transport address.

62

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/snmpv3/tparam
SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information
Name MP Model --------------- -------v1v2param snmpv2c User Name -------------v1v2only Sec Model --------snmpv1 Sec Level --------noAuthNoPriv

Table 4-10 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/ tparam)
Field Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Description Displays the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargeParamsEntry. Displays the Message Processing Model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry. Displays the securityName, which identifies the entry on whose behalf SNMP messages will be generated using this entry. Displays the security model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry. The system may choose to return an inconsistentValue error if an attempt is made to set this variable to a value for a security model which the system does not support. Displays the level of security used when generating SNMP messages using this entry.

Sec Level

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

63

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/snmpv3/notify
SNMPv3 Notify Table Information
Name Tag -------------------- -------------------v1v2trap v1v2trap

Table 4-11 SNMPv3 Notify Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/notify)
Field Name Tag Description The locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this snmpNotifyEntry. This represents a single tag value which is used to select entries in the snmpTargetAddrTable. Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable that contains a tag value equal to the value of this entry, is selected. If this entry contains a value of zero length, no entries are selected.

64

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/snmpv3/dump
SNMPv3 Dump Information
usmUser Table: User Name -------------------------------admin adminmd5 adminsha v1v2only Protocol -------------------------------NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY HMAC_MD5, DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA, DES PRIVACY NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY

vacmAccess Table: Group Name Prefix Model Level Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV ---------- ------ ------- ---------- ------ ------- -------- -----admin usm noAuthNoPriv exact org org org v1v2grp snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv exact org org v1v2only admingrp usm authPriv exact org org org vacmViewTreeFamily Table: View Name Subtree -------------------- --------------org 1.3 v1v2only 1.3 v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.15 v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.16 v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.18

Mask ------------

Type -------------included included excluded excluded excluded

vacmSecurityToGroup Table: Sec Model User Name ---------- ------------------------------snmpv1 v1v2only usm admin usm adminsha

Group Name ----------------------v1v2grp admin admingrp

snmpCommunity Table: Index Name User Name Tag ---------- ---------- -------------------- ---------snmpNotify Table: Name Tag -------------------- -------------------snmpTargetAddr Table: Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params ---------- --------------- ---- ---------- --------------snmpTargetParams Table: Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Sec Level -------------------- -------- ------------------ --------- -------

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

65

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/general
General System Information
On an Alteon Application Switch 2424:
Enter password: System Information at

9:06:50 Tue Oct 26, 2004

Alteon Application Switch 2424 Switch is up 1 day, 19 hours, 52 minutes and 55 seconds. Last boot: 13:13:52 Fri Oct 22, 2004 (power cycle) MAC Address: 00:0e:40:2f:5b:00 IP Hardware Order No: EB1412003 Mainboard Hardware: Management Processor Board Hardware: Fast Ethernet Board Hardware: (If 1) Address: 47.80.23.249 Part No: P314090-A Part No: P314080-A Part No: P314091-A Rev: 03 Rev: 02 Rev: 03

Software Version 22.0.2.0 (FLASH image2), active configuration.

On an Alteon Application Switch 2424-SSL:
Enter password: System Information at 19:03:14 Tue Oct 26, 2004 Alteon Application Switch 2424-SSL Switch is up 2 days, 19 hours, 6 minutes and 33 seconds. Last boot: 23:56:35 Mon Oct 25, 2004 (unknown reason or power cycle) Last apply: 14:43:37 Fri Oct 22, 2004 Last save: 14:45:44 Fri Oct 22, 2004 MAC Address: 00:0c:f8:90:ee:00 IP (If 20) Address: 21.10.0.1 Internal SSL Processor MAC Address: 00:0c:f8:90:ee:1f Hardware Order No: EB1412006 Mainboard Hardware: Part No: P315720-A Rev: 03 Management Processor Board Hardware: Part No: P314080-A Rev: 02 Fast Ethernet Board Hardware: Part No: P314091-A Rev: 03 Software Version 22.0.2 (FLASH image1), active configuration.

66

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

NOTE – The display of temperature will come up only if the temperature of any of the sensors exceeds 60oC. There will be a warning from the software if any of the sensors exceeds this temperature threshold. The switch will shut down if the power supply overheats and the temperature gets to 100oC. Information about fan failures will also be displayed if one or more fans are not functioning.

/info/sys/log
Show Last 30 Syslog Messages
Date Time Criticality level Message Nov 19 12:16:51 ALERT stp: STG 1, new root bridge Nov 19 13:52:03 ALERT ip: cannot contact default gateway 47.80.22.1 Nov 19 13:52:23 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.22.1 operational Nov 19 13:52:23 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.22.1 enabled Nov 19 14:21:27 ALERT ip: cannot contact default gateway 47.80.22.1 Nov 19 14:21:47 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.22.1 operational Nov 19 14:21:47 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.22.1 enabled Nov 19 14:38:55 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.27.4 Nov 19 14:44:02 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 16:15:06 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:15:20 INFO mgmt: new configuration saved Nov 19 16:18:44 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:19:37 ERROR mgmt: Error: Apply not done Nov 19 16:19:57 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:34:35 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.27.4 Nov 19 16:39:43 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 16:39:59 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.27.4 Nov 19 16:54:13 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 17:20:37 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.27.4 Nov 19 17:26:21 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.25.49 Nov 19 17:31:53 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH

Each syslog message has a criticality level associated with it, included in text form as a prefix to the log message. One of eight different prefixes is used, depending on the condition that the administrator is being notified of, as shown below. EMERG: indicates the system is unusable ALERT: Indicates action should be taken immediately CRIT: Indicates critical conditions ERR: indicates error conditions or error operations
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 67

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

WARNING: indicates warning conditions NOTICE: indicates a normal but significant condition INFO: indicates an information message DEBUG: indicates a debut-level message

/info/sys/savedlog
Saved Syslog Messages
Aug 20 13:54:21 NOTICE 47.80.22.1 operational Aug 20 13:57:53 ALERT gateway 47.80.22.1 Aug 20 13:57:57 NOTICE 47.80.22.1 operational Aug 20 13:58:23 ALERT gateway 47.80.22.1 Aug 20 13:58:33 NOTICE 47.80.22.1 operational Aug 24 14:43:43 NOTICE Aug 24 14:49:50 NOTICE Aug 24 14:51:38 NOTICE Aug 24 14:57:30 NOTICE Aug 24 15:05:54 NOTICE Aug 24 15:11:40 NOTICE Aug 24 16:00:40 NOTICE Aug 24 16:00:52 NOTICE ip: management port default gateway ip: cannot contact management port default ip: management port default gateway ip: cannot contact management port default ip: management port default gateway mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.25.12 admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 47.81.25.12 admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 47.81.25.12 admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 47.81.25.12 switch reset from CLI

68

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/mgmt
Management Port Information
Speed ----100 Duplex -----full Link ---up

MAC address: 00:01:81:2e:a4:8d Interface information: 47.80.23.251 255.255.254.0 Gateway information: 47.80.22.1

47.80.23.255

Use this command to display Management port information on an Alteon Application Switch including: Port speed (10/100) Duplex mode (half, full, any, or auto) Link (Up or down) MAC Address of the system IP address of the Interface IP address of the gateway.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

69

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/sonmp
SONMP Information
This command displays the SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) topology table. SONMP protocol is enabled on Alteon Application Switches using the /cfg/sys/ sonmp on command, and is necessary so that an Alteon switch can be discovered by the Nortel Networks Optivity Switch Manager.When SONMP is enabled, devices on the network exchange multicast packets namely: flatnet hellos and segment hellos. The IP address of the device is written into the hello packets. As the network devices exchange information, a topology table is built like the one shown below.
Slot Port ----0 /0 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 Seg Id --------------- --47.80.23.247 0 47.80.22.1 770 47.80.23.25 259 47.80.23.25 260 47.80.23.241 257 50.10.10.1 263 IP address MAC address ----------------00:01:81:2e:a3:60 00:e0:16:7c:28:24 00:60:cf:81:54:28 00:60:cf:81:54:38 00:60:cf:43:a2:10 00:60:cf:46:d5:60 Local State Seg ------------------ ----- ----Alteon2224 true topChanged Passport1200 true heartbeat Passport8610 true heartbeat Passport8610 true heartbeat AlteonAD4 true topChanged Alteon184 true topChanged Chassis Type

Table 4-12 SONMP Information Parameters Description
Parameter Slot Port Description Specifies the slot and port on which the topology message was received. This is the IP address of the sender of the topology message. The “segment identifier” of the segment from which the remote agent send the topology message. Different devices may use different methods for representing the segment identifier. The MAC address of the sender of the topology message. The chassis type of the device that sent the topology message. Indicates if the sender of the topology message is on the same Ethernet segment (i.e. not across a bridge) as the reporting agent. The current state of the sender of the topology message. the values are: topChanged—topology information has recently changed heartbeat—topology information unchanged. new—sending agent is in new state.

IP Address Seg ID

Mac Address Chassis Type Local Seg

State

70

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

.2 Command Reference /info/sys/capacity System Capacity Information The following sample output from an Alteon OS 2424 displays the maximum and currently enabled switch capacity for various services and applications from Layer 2-7. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 71 .0.. Maximum LAYER 2 FDB FDB per SP VLANs Static Trunk Groups LACP Trunk Groups Trunks per Trunk Group Spanning Tree Groups Monitor Ports LAYER 3 IP Interfaces IP Gateways IP Routes Static Routes ARP Entries Static ARP Entries Local Nets DNS Servers BOOTP Servers RIP Interfaces OSPF OSPF OSPF OSPF OSPF LSDB Interfaces Areas Summary Ranges Virtual Links Hosts Limit 16384 8192 255 12 28 8 16 1 Current(Enabled) 54 1(1) 0(0) 16(1) 256 4+255 4096 128 8192 128 5 2 2 256 256 3 16 3 128 12288 1(1) 1+0(1+0) 7 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) Continued.Alteon OS 22. 315393-J.

.0.PORTS Port # Client Server Filter RTS Continued.2 Command Reference BGP Peers BGP Route Aggregators Route Maps Network Filters AS Filters VRRP Routers VRRP Router Groups VRRP Interfaces SLB (LAYER 4-7) Real Servers Server Groups Virtual Servers Virtual Services Real Services Global Global Global Global Global Global Global Global Global Global SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB Domains Services Local Servers Remote Servers Remote Sites Failovers per Remote Site Networks Geographical Regions Rules Metrics Per Rule 16 16 32 256 8 1024 16 256 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0 1024 1024 1024 1024 8192 1024 8192 1024 1024 64 2 128 7 128 8 2048 32 32 5 1024 2097104 16 64 8 0(0) 0 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 2(2) 0(0) 7(7) 0(1) 8(8) 0(0) 0 0 0 1 0 0(0) Filters PIPs Scriptable Health Checks SNMP Health Checks Rules for URL Parsing SLB Sessions Number of Rports to Vport Domain Records Mapping Per Domain Record LAYER 4 . 72 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 ..

Alteon OS 22.0. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 73 .2 Command Reference BWM Policies Contracts Groups Contracts per Group Time Policies per Contract GENERAL Syslog hosts RADIUS servers NTP servers SMTP hosts Mnet/Mmask End Users Panic Dumps MP memory SP memory SNMPv3 SNMPv3 SNMPv3 SNMPv3 SNMPv3 Users Views Access Groups Target Address Entries Target Params Entries 512 256 32 8 2 0 1(1) 0 2 2 1 1 5 10 2 128M 128M 16 128 32 16 16 0 0 0 1 0 3 5 2 0 0 315393-J.

2 Command Reference /info/sys/dump System Information Dump System Information at 10:23:41 Tue Jul Alteon Application Switch 2424 Switch is up 13 days.8.1 enabled Jun 22 15:17:05 ALERT stp: STG 1.Alteon OS 22. active configuration.249 Part No: P314090-A Part No: P314080-A Part No: P314091-A Rev: 03 Rev: 02 Rev: 03 6.23.22.80. 2004 Software Version 22.80.81. topology change detected Jun 22 15:28:55 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47. 7 minutes and 58 seconds.25.80.12 Jun 22 15:32:57 ERROR cli: No apply needed Jun 22 15:35:33 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Jun 22 15:40:37 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Jun 23 12:13:04 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.0 (FLASH image1).0.27.12 Jul 6 9:47:06 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Jul 6 10:22:32 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.0.27. 19 hours.1 operational Jun 22 15:16:32 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.22.81.6 Jun 30 12:37:26 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Jul 2 9:51:57 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47. Last boot: 15:15:56 Tue Jun 22.81. January 2005 .6 Continued 74 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.25.81. Jun 23 12:18:36 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Jun 30 12:32:11 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.25. Last 30 syslog message information: Jun 22 15:16:00 NOTICE system: link up on port 9 Jun 22 15:16:30 NOTICE system: rebooted (power cycle) Jun 22 15:16:32 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47. 2008 (power cycle) MAC Address: 00:0e:40:2f:5b:00 IP Hardware Order No: EB1412003 Mainboard Hardware: Management Processor Board Hardware: Fast Ethernet Board Hardware: (If 1) Address: 47.0.81.12 Jun 23 12:13:39 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Jun 23 12:13:53 NOTICE mgmt: Failed login attempt via BBI.81.99 Jul 2 9:56:11 NOTICE mgmt: admin logout from Telnet/SSH Jul 6 9:41:55 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.

--------noAuthNoPriv exact iso iso iso noAuthNoPriv exact iso iso noAuthNoPriv authPriv noAuthNoPriv noAuthNoPriv exact exact exact exact iso iso iso iso iso iso iso iso iso iso iso iso vacmViewTreeFamily Table: View Name Subtree -------------------. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 75 .6.1.0.1.Alteon OS 22.6. DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA.-----.3. NO PRIVACY HMAC_MD5.16 Continued 315393-J.-------.3.15 1.6.3.2 Command Reference Management port information: Speed ----10/100 Duplex -----any Link ---disabled Interface information: Gateway information: Engine ID = 80:00:07:50:03:00:0E:40:2F:5B:00 usmUser Table: User Name -------------------------------test wyin adminmd5 adminsha v1v2only vacmAccess Table: Group Name Prefix Model ---------.6.------testgrp usm v1v2grp snmpv1 v1v2only wyingrp usm admingrp usm test1grp usm test2grp usm Protocol -------------------------------NO AUTH.-----.------------------------iso 1 included v1v2only included v1v2only excluded v1v2only excluded 1 Mask ------------ Type ---- 1. NO PRIVACY NO AUTH. DES PRIVACY NO AUTH.3. NO PRIVACY Level Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV -----------.

------------------------------.------------Local Seg ----State ----- 76 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.6.6.0.--------.18 vacmSecurityToGroup Table: Sec Model User Name Group Name ---------.2 Command Reference v1v2only excluded 1.---------.1.--------------.-------.3.---.Alteon OS 22.--------------snmpTargetParams Table: Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Sec Level -------------------.---------.-------------------.--------------.3.------Slot IP address Seg MAC address Chassis Type Port Id ----.---------------. January 2005 .-----------------------snmpv1 v1v2only v1v2grp usm test testgrp usm wyin wyingrp usm test1 test1grp usm adminmd5 admingrp usm adminsha admingrp snmpCommunity Table: Index Name User Name Tag ---------.-------------------snmpTargetAddr Table: Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params ---------.------------.---.---------snmpNotify Table: Name Tag -------------------.

stg <STG index to display or carriage return for all STGs> In addition to seeing if Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled or disabled. For details. lacp Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu. For details. 315393-J. you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. trunk When trunk groups are configured.Alteon OS 22. see page 80. you can view the following STP bridge information: Priority Hello interval Maximum age value Forwarding delay Aging time You can also see the following port-specific STP information: Port number and priority Cost State For details. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 77 .0.2 Command Reference /info/l2 Layer 2 Information Menu [Layer 2 Menu] fdb lacp stg trunk vlan dump Forwarding Database Information Menu Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Show STG information Show Trunk Group information Show VLAN information Dump all layer 2 information Table 4-13 Layer 2 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Information Menu. For details. see page 87. see page 78. see page 83.

For example. The FDB also shows which other ports have seen frames destined for a particular MAC address. Each SP supports up to 8K entries. You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device. xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. January 2005 . /info/l2/fdb Layer 2 FDB Information The forwarding database (FDB) contains information that maps the media access control (MAC) address of each known device to the switch port where the device address was learned. Enter the MAC address using the format.Alteon OS 22. including: VLAN Number VLAN Name Status Port membership of the VLAN For details. 08:00:20:12:34:56. You can also enter the MAC address using the format.Show FDB entries on a single VLAN refpt .Show a single FDB entry by MAC address port . xxxxxxxxxxxx.2 Command Reference Table 4-13 Layer 2 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage vlan <VLAN number to display or carriage return to display all VLANs> Displays VLAN configuration information. [Forwarding Database Menu] find .0.Show FDB entries on a single trunk vlan . For example.Show all FDB entries NOTE – The master forwarding database supports up to 16K MAC address entries on the MP per switch.Show FDB entries referenced by a single SP dump . see page 88. dump Displays all Layer 2 information. Table 4-14 Layer 2 FDB Information Menu Options (/info/l2/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage find <MAC address> [<VLAN>] Displays a single database entry by its MAC address. 78 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. 080020123456.Show FDB entries on a single port trunk .

refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays the FDB entries referenced by a single port. although ports which reference the address as a destination will be listed under “Reference ports. When in the trunking (TRK) state. trunk <trunk group number> Displays all FDB entries on a single trunk. 0 for "unknown"> Displays all FDB entries for a particular port. no outbound port is indicated. For more information. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN. When an address is in the unknown state.-------------.” 315393-J.---. dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database.0.----.2 Command Reference Table 4-14 Layer 2 FDB Information Menu Options (/info/l2/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number. If the state for the port is listed as unknown (UNK). the port field represents the trunk group number. but has only been seen as a destination address. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 79 . /info/l2/fdb/dump Show All FDB Information MAC address VLAN Port State Referenced SPs Referenced ports ----------------.------------00:02:01:00:00:00 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:01 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:02 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:03 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:04 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:05 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:06 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:07 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:08 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:09 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0a 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0b 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0c 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 An address that is in the forwarding (FWD) state.Alteon OS 22.---. see page 79. means that it has been learned by the switch. the MAC address has not yet been learned by the switch.

refer to “Forwarding Database Options” on page 451. see dump Displays LACP information of all the ports. January 2005 . Use this command to verify the state of ports in an LACP trunk group. To view a sample output.0.Show all LACP ports information Table 4-15 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu Options (/info/ lacp) Command Syntax and Usage aggr <aggregator index 1 to max num ports> Displays information an LACP aggregator.Show LACP aggregator information for the port . /info/l2/lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu The following menu options display the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) information on the Alteon OS. the MAC address is for a virtual server router—a virtual router with the same IP address as a virtual server.Show LACP port information . [LACP Menu] aggr port dump . see port <port index 1 to max num ports> Displays information of an LACP port. see page 83. Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database To delete a MAC address from the forwarding database (FDB) or to clear the entire FDB. the MAC address is for a standard VRRP virtual router. If the state is listed as a virtual server (VIP). To view a sample output. 80 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. To view a sample output.2 Command Reference If the state for the port is listed as an interface (IF).

FALSE Actor Admin Key .32768 Partner System ID .10 index 0 port 1 index 1 port 2 index 2 port 3 index 3 port 4 index 4 port 5 index 5 port 6 index 6 port 7 index 7 port 8 index 8 port 9 index 9 port 10 315393-J.00:0d:29:e3:4a:00 Partner Oper Key .00:01:81:2e:a1:b0 Individual .00:01:81:2e:a1:d1 Actor System Priority .0.TRUE Number of Ports in aggr .2 Command Reference /info/lacp/aggr LACP Aggregator Information Aggregator Id 1 ---------------------------------------------MAC address .32768 Actor System ID . January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 81 .Alteon OS 22.300 Actor Oper Key .300 Partner System Priority .1 ready .

TRUE lacp_admin_enabled .0.2 Command Reference /info/lacp/port LACP Port Information port 1 ---------------------------------------------lacp_enabled .0x0 Partner Oper Port state Activity: Active Timeout: Long FALSE FALSE Aggregation: Distributing: TRUE FALSE Long Aggregation: TRUE Distributing: FALSE TRUE TRUE Long Aggregation: TRUE Continued 82 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.TRUE Actor Actor Actor Actor Actor Actor System ID System Priority Admin Key Oper Key Port Number Port Priority Admin System Priority Oper System Priority Admin System ID Oper System ID Admin Key Oper Key Admin Port Number Admin Port Priority Oper Port Number Oper Port Priority 00:01:81:2e:a1:b0 32768 300 300 1 32768 0 32768 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:0d:29:e3:4a:00 0 1 0 0 4 32768 Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Actor Admin Port state Activity: Active Timeout: Synchronization:FALSE Collecting: Defaulted: FALSE Expired: Actor Oper Port state Activity: Active Timeout: Synchronization:TRUE Collecting: Defaulted: FALSE Expired: Partner Admin Port state .

January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 83 .LACP_MUX_COL_DIS_STATE .FALSE .FALSE .Selected .FALSE .2 Command Reference Synchronization: TRUE Defaulted: FALSE Collecting: Expired: TRUE Distributing: FALSE TRUE Rx machine state Mux machine state Periodic machine state Individual Selected Aggregator ID Attached Aggregator ID ready_n ntt selected port_moved Collision and Detection state .1 .Alteon OS 22.FALSE turned ON! 315393-J.1 .LACP_RX_CURRENT_STATE .LACP_PERIODIC_SLOW_STATE .0.

2 Command Reference /info/lacp/dump LACP Dump Information port attached trunk aggr ------------------------------------------------------------------1 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 2 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 3 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 4 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 5 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 6 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 7 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 8 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 9 active 300 300 n 32768 --10 active 300 300 n 32768 --11 active 300 300 n 32768 --12 active 300 300 n 32768 --13 active 300 300 n 32768 --14 off 14 14 n 32768 --15 off 15 15 n 32768 --16 off 16 16 n 32768 --17 off 17 17 n 32768 --18 off 18 18 n 32768 --19 off 19 19 n 32768 --20 off 20 20 n 32768 --21 off 21 21 n 32768 --22 off 22 22 n 32768 --23 off 23 23 n 32768 --24 off 24 24 n 32768 --25 off 25 25 n 32768 --26 off 26 26 n 32768 --27 off 27 27 n 32768 --28 off 28 28 n 32768 --lacp adminkey operkey selected prio 84 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.0.

1d Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). Spanning Tree Group 1: On Current Root: 8000 00:01:81:2e:a1:80 Parameters: Priority 32768 Cost ---0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 Path-Cost 0 Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging 0 2 20 15 300 FwdDel 15 Aging 300 Hello 2 MaxAge 20 Port ----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Priority -------128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 State ---------DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED FORWARDING DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED Designated Bridge Des Port ---------------------.------- 8000-00:01:81:2e:a1:80 32773 The switch software uses the IEEE 802. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path. you can view the following STP bridge information: Priority Hello interval Maximum age value Forwarding delay Aging time 315393-J.2 supports up to 16 multiple Spanning Tress or Spanning Tree Groups. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 85 . In addition to seeing if STP is enabled or disabled.Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference /info/l2/stg Layer 2 Spanning Tree Group Information When multiple paths exist on a network.0. NOTE – Alteon OS 22.

The state field shows the current state of the port.0. how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. LISTENING. the lower the path cost. A setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link speed has been auto negotiated.2 Command Reference You can also see the following port-specific STP information: Port number and priority Cost State Designated Bridge Designated Port The following table describes the STP parameters. in seconds. The hello time parameter specifies.Alteon OS 22. or DISABLED. Generally speaking. LEARNING. in seconds. the faster the port. The aging time parameter specifies. The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding state. January 2005 . The state field can be either BLOCKING. MaxAge FwdDel Aging priority (port) Cost State 86 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. in seconds. The maximum age parameter specifies. the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the Forwarding Database. in seconds. The forward delay parameter specifies. Table 4-16 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions Parameter Priority (bridge) Hello Description The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the STP root bridge. FORWARDING. the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigure the STP network. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment. Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value.

Designated port /info/l2/trunk Trunk Group Information Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth. A trunk group is a group of ports that act together. multi-link connections between Alteon Application Switches or other trunk-capable devices.0. combining their bandwidth to create a single.2 Command Reference Table 4-16 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions (Continued) Parameter Designated Bridge Description The designated bridge resides closest to the root bridge and is responsible for forwarding packets from LAN towards the root bridge. you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. This bridge is displayed as character string starting with the bridge priority (1-65535) followed by a hyphen and six byte MAC address of that switch. a physical port number four with bridge priority 32768 will be displayed as 32678+4=32772. The designated port identifies a physical port. larger virtual link. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 87 . For example.Alteon OS 22. When trunk groups are configured. This is a number that is the numerical sum of bridge priority and the actual physical port number. port state: 1: STG 1 forwarding 2: STG 1 forwarding NOTE – If Spanning Tree Protocol on any port in the trunk group is set to forwarding. bw contract 256. the remaining ports in the trunk group will also be set to forwarding. 315393-J. Trunk group 1.

Alteon OS 22.----.----Default VLAN ena n 256 ena 1-28 This information display includes all configured VLANs and all member ports that have an active link state. Port membership is represented in slot/port format. VLAN information includes: VLAN Number VLAN Name Status Jumbo Frames Bandwidth Contract if BWM is enabled Source MAC Address Learning Port membership of the VLAN 88 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .----.2 Command Reference /info/l2/vlan VLAN Information VLAN ---1 Name Status Jumbo BWC Learn Ports -------------------------------.-----.0.---.

January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 89 .0.Alteon OS 22.------ 8000-00:01:81:2e:a1:80 32773 315393-J.2 Command Reference /info/l2/dump Layer2 Dump Information Spanning Tree Group 1: On Current Root: 8000 00:01:81:2e:a1:80 Parameters: Priority 32768 Cost ---0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Path-Cost 0 Hello 2 Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging 0 2 20 15 300 FwdDel 15 Aging 300 MaxAge 20 Port -----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Priority -------128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 State ---------DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED FORWARDING DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED Designated Bridge Des Port ---------------------.

or 16 for infinite hops) The IP interface that the route uses For details. subnet mask. includes: IP interface information: Interface number. VLAN number. IP address.Alteon OS 22. see page 91. gateway number. IP address. Default gateway information: Metric for selecting which configured gateway to use. and operational status. bgp Displays BGP Information Menu. broadcast address. arp Displays the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Information Menu.0. January 2005 . lnet and lmask Port status 90 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. For details.2 Command Reference /info/l3 Layer3 Information Menu [Layer 3 Menu] route arp bgp ospf ip vrrp dump IP Routing Information Menu ARP Information Menu BGP Information Menu OSPF Routing Information Menu Show IP information Show Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol information Dump all layer 3 information Table 4-17 Layer 3 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage route Displays the IP Routing Menu. For details. For details. and gateway address Type of route Tag indicating origin of route Metric for RIP tagged routes. see page 93. see page 104. see page 96. and health status IP forwarding information: Enable status. specifying the number of hops to the destination (1-15 hops. subnet mask. the system displays the following for each configured or learned route: Route destination IP address. ospf Displays OSPF routing information menu. ip Displays IP Information. IP information. Using the options of this menu. see page 98. To view menu options.

17.Show type . NOTE – The total number of interfaces on an Alteon Application Switch 2424-SSL is 1-255. see Table 4-20 on page 93. /info/l3/route IP Routing Information [IP Routing Menu] find .17. see Table 4-19 on page 92. 192.4.0. For a description of IP routing types.44)> Displays routes to a single gateway. dump Displays all Layer 3 information.Show dump . 315393-J.Show tag .Show gw . January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 91 . For details. see page 105.101)> Displays a single route by destination IP address. 192. gw <default gateway address (such as. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays routes on a single interface.Show a single route by destination IP address routes to a single gateway routes of a single type routes of a single tag routes on a single interface all routes Using the commands listed below. type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast Displays routes of a single type. Table 4-18 Route Information Menu Options (/info/route) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as.Show if . you can display all or a portion of the IP routes currently held in the switch.2 Command Reference Table 4-17 Layer 3 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage vrrp Displays the VRRP Information Menu.4. For a description of IP routing types. tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|bgp|broadcast|martian|vip Displays routes of a single tag.Alteon OS 22.

0.0.0 224.255.80.0.255 255.Alteon OS 22.0.255.255. January 2005 . direct local broadcast martian multicast 92 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.255.0.0 255.0 martian martian * 224.0.255 0.255.255.255.0.22.23.0.------------.255 broadcast broadcast Type Parameters The following table describes the Type parameters.255.80.0. Indicates a route to one of the switch’s IP interfaces.0 0.6 255.255 255.0 0.0.best Destination Mask Gateway Type Tag Metr If --------------.255.0.-* 0.0 multicast addr * 224.0.255 broadcast broadcast 1 * 127.22.0.--------. Packets will be delivered to a destination host or subnet attached to the switch.--------------.255.0.0 multicast addr * 255.255 255.80.255.5 255.23.0.1 indirect static 1 * 47.0 255.23.0.255.249 direct fixed 1 * 47.0 47. /info/l3/route/dump Show All IP Route Information Status code: * .255.0.255.0.23. Packets to this destination are discarded.23.80.0.0.80.80.255.255 0.249 local addr 1 * 47. For more information.254. Table 4-19 IP Routing Type Parameters (/info/l3/route/dump/type) Parameter indirect Description The next hop to the host or subnet destination will be forwarded through a router at the Gateway address.2 Command Reference Table 4-18 Route Information Menu Options (/info/route) Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all routes configured in the switch.80.255 47.0.249 255. The destination belongs to a host or subnet which is filtered out.0. Indicates a broadcast route.0 martian martian * 224. see page 92.0 0.0.255 47.----.0 47.0. Indicates a multicast route.0.

The address was learned via Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) Indicates a broadcast address. The address was learned by the Routing Information Protocol (RIP).Show ARP entries referenced by a single SP dump . Then the corresponding physical address is used to send a packet.Show ARP entries on a single VLAN refpt . ARP queries machines on the local network for their physical addresses. VIP routes are needed to advertise virtual server IP addresses via BGP.Show ARP entries on a single port vlan . ARP also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its cache memory. [Address Resolution Protocol Menu] find .2 Command Reference Tag Parameters The following table describes the Tag parameters.Alteon OS 22. addr rip ospf bgp broadcast martian vip /info/l3/Arp ARP Information Menu Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the TCP/IP protocol that resides within the Internet layer. The address belongs to a filtered group. In any IP communication. the ARP cache is consulted to see if the IP address of the router is present in the ARP cache. The address is a static route which has been configured on the Alteon Application Switch.Show all ARP entries help . The address belongs to one of the switch’s IP interfaces. ARP resolves a physical address from an IP address.0. Indicates a route destination that is a virtual server IP address. Table 4-20 IP Routing Tag Parameters (info/l3/route/tag) Parameter fixed static Description The address belongs to a host or subnet attached to the switch.Show ARP address list 315393-J.Show a single ARP entry by IP address port .Show help on the fields of ARP entries addr . The address was learned by Open Shortest Path First (OSPF). January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 93 .

refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays the ARP entries referenced by a single SP.Permanent ARP entry (not obtained via ARP request). and VLAN flags. R . For details.4.2 Command Reference The ARP information includes IP address and MAC address of each entry. 94 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. IP interface.ARP entry belongs to a Jumbo capable VLAN P .17. see page 95.Layer 4 IP address (VIP) u . vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays the ARP entries on a single VLAN. Table 4-21 ARP Information Menu Options (/info/l3/arp) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as. VLAN and port for the address.101> Displays a single ARP entry by IP address. address status flags (see Table 4-22 on page 95). 192. and port referencing information. etc. dump Displays all ARP entries.Alteon OS 22. help Displays help on the ARP field entries.Unresolved ARP entry. MAC address. VIP. port <port number> Displays the ARP entries on a single port.g. The MAC address has not been learned. e. see page 95.Indirect ARP (cache) entry for IP address reachable via indirect routes (static/dynamic) 4 .0. MAC address: VLAN: Port: Referenced SPs: MAC address of ARP entry VLAN of this ARP entry Physical port where this IP address owner is connected SPs on which this ARP entry is present addr Displays the ARP address list: IP address. For example: IP address: Flags: IP address of ARP entry J . January 2005 . IP mask. including: IP address and MAC address of each entry Address status flag (see below) The VLAN and port to which the address belongs The ports which have referenced the address (empty if no port has routed traffic to the IP address shown) For more information.

----00:0e:40:2f:5b:00 1 Referenced SPs -----------1-4 /info/l3/arp/dump Show All ARP Entry Information IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port --------------.---.31.31.81 P 00:09:97:16:5f:00 1 172.23.Alteon OS 22.22.---.---1.80.1 P 4 00:09:97:16:5f:01 10.23. this traffic needs to be forwarded to the egress port (port 6 in the above example).10 00:b0:d0:98:d8:1b 1 3 172.1. NOTE – If you have VMA turned on.----------------. The MAC address has not been learned.1 00:e0:16:7c:28:86 1 23 47.10. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 95 . The Flag field is interpreted as follows: Table 4-22 ARP Dump Flag Parameters Flag P P 4 Description Permanent entry created for switch IP interface.31.80.11 00:b0:d0:98:d8:1b 1 3 Referenced SPs ------------1-4 1-4 empty 1-4 1-4 empty empty Referenced ports are the ports that request the ARP entry.0.11.10.3. the designated port will be the normal ingress port.249 P MAC address VLAN Port ----------------.3.80. Indirect route entry.2 Command Reference /info/l3/arp/refpt Show ARP Entries on Referenced SP IP address Flags ------------.1 P 00:09:97:16:5f:00 1 172.----47. So the traffic coming into the referenced ports has the destination IP address. ARP entry belongs to a Jumbo capable VLAN R U J 315393-J. Permanent entry created for Layer 4 proxy IP address or virtual server IP address.10 P 4 00:09:97:16:5f:01 47. If you have VMA turned off. the referenced port will be the designated port. From the ARP entry (the referenced ports).----. Unresolved ARP entry.3.

0.255. January 2005 .255.255 255.10 1.11.4. See page 97 for a sample output.Show BGP routing table Table 4-23 BGP Peer Information Menu Options (/info/l3/bgp) Command Syntax and Usage peer Displays BGP peer information.255.255 MAC address ----------------00:09:97:16:5f:01 00:09:97:16:5f:01 00:09:97:16:5f:0e 00:09:97:16:5f:00 00:09:97:16:5f:00 00:09:97:16:5f:00 VLAN ---Flags ----- D 1 1 1 /info/l3/bgp BGP Information Menu Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a network to share routing information with each other and advertise information about the segments of the IP address space they can access within their network with routers on external networks. summary Displays peer summary information such as AS. [BGP Menu] peer .23.255.1 172.1. state.255.Alteon OS 22.1 172. See page 97 for a sample output. up/down.255 255.31.255. message received.Show all BGP peers summary . For more information.255.31. See page 98 for a sample output.255 255.200 172. refer to BGP section in chapter: “The Configuration Menu” on page 227 and the Application Guide.255.255.31. message sent.1 47.10.255. 96 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.81 IP mask --------------255.255. dump Displays the BGP routing table.255 255.2 Command Reference /info/l3/arp/addr ARP Address List Information IP address --------------10.3.255 255.10.255.Show all BGP peers in summary dump .80.4.

-------.4 .0. Link type: IBGP Remote router ID: 0. TTL 1 Remote AS: 0.142 4 142 113 121 00:00:28 established 2: 205.0.2 Command Reference /info/l3/bgp/peer BGP Peer information Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/peer provides.---------1: 205.-------.1 . BGP Peer Summary Information: Peer V AS MsgRcvd MsgSent Up/Down State --------------. Local AS: 0.0. TTL 1 Remote AS: 0.1.201. version 0. LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0) Established state transitions: 0 /info/l3/bgp/summary BGP Summary information Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/summary provides. Local router ID: 1. Old status: idle Total received packets: 0. LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0) Established state transitions: 0 4: 2. Old status: idle Total received packets: 0. BGP Peer Information: 3: 2.. Sent updates: 0 Keepalive: 0. Total sent packets: 0 Received updates: 0.178.Alteon OS 22. Local AS: 0. version 0.15. Sent updates: 0 Keepalive: 0.0.148 0 148 0 0 never connect 315393-J. Local router ID: 1.23. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 97 .5 BGP status: idle.1.-------.1. Holdtime: 0. MinAdvTime: 60 LastErrorCode: unknown(0).-------. Link type: IBGP Remote router ID: 0.1.1.0.178. Holdtime: 0.5 BGP status: idle.0. MinAdvTime: 60 LastErrorCode: unknown(0).1. Total sent packets: 0 Received updates: 0.201.0.

15.Show area(s) information if . e .Show OSPF routes dump .147 1 128 *> 205.incomplete Network Next Hop Metr LcPrf Wght --------------.Show NSSA summary address list routes .Show neighbor(s) information dbase . ? . OSPF is designed for routing traffic within a single IP domain called an Autonomous System (AS).0 0. refer to the OSPF section in chapter “The Configuration Menu” on page 227 and your Alteon OS Application Guide.17.0. one area must be designated as area 0.21.internal Origin codes: i . The AS can be divided into smaller logical units known as areas.EGP.178. known as the backbone. Areas inject summary routing information into the backbone.21.0 * 205.178.Show interface(s) information virtual .2 Command Reference /info/l3/bgp/dump Dump BGP Information Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/dump provides. which then distributes it to other areas as needed. [OSPF Information Menu] general .0 205.0 205.Show general information aindex .0.Show details of virtual links nbr .178.---.21. The backbone acts as the central OSPF area. > best.Show summary address list nsumadd .IGP. All other areas in the AS must be connected to the backbone. In any AS with multiple areas.0.--------------.Database Menu sumaddr .147 1 256 *>i205.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 . The Alteon OS implementation conforms to the OSPF version 2 specifications detailed in Internet RFC 1583.----*> 10.Show OSPF information 98 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.178.0.0. >> BGP# dump Status codes: * valid. For more information on how to configure OSPF on the switch. i .----.21.0 205.0.147 1 256 Path -------------147 148 i 0 i 147 i 147 i 147 {35} ? /info/l3/ospf OSPF Information Menu Alteon OS supports the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol.147 1 128 13.178.0.178.

If no router ID is supplied. See page 100 for a sample output. aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays area information for a particular area index. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 99 . it displays information for all the interfaces.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 4-24 OSPF Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage general Displays general OSPF information.D)> Displays the status of a neighbor with a particular router ID. dbase Displays OSPF database menu. See page 102 for a sample output. To view menu options.C. see page 101. If no parameter is supplied. it displays area information for all the areas. nsumadd <area index (0-2)> Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to NSSA areas. dump Display all the OSPF information. 315393-J. virtual Displays information about all the configured virtual links. if <interface number [1-256]> Displays interface information for a particular interface. If no parameter is supplied. routes Displays OSPF routing table. sumaddr <area index (0-2)> Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to non-NSSA areas.0. See for a sample output. nbr <nbr router-id (A. it displays the information about all the current neighbors.B. See page 100 for a sample output.

Authentication type none 100 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. Hello 10. Retransmit 5.10. State DR.12. Area 0. 2 are =FULL state Number of areas is 2.10.1. Admin Status UP Router ID 10. Ip Address 10.10.1.1 Backup Designated Router (ID) 10.12.Alteon OS 22.247 Started at 95 and the process uptime is 352315 Area Border Router: yes. of which 3-transit 0-nssa Area Id : 0.0.10.0. Poll interval 0.10.1. AS Boundary Router: no LS types supported are 6 External LSA count 0 External LSA checksum sum 0x0 Number of interfaces in this router is 2 Number of virtual links in this router is 1 16 new lsa received and 34 lsa originated from this router Total number of entries in the LSDB 10 Database checksum sum 0x0 Total neighbors are 1. 2 are >=EXCH state.0.10.12.2 Command Reference /info/l3/ospf/general OSPF General Information OSPF Version 2 Router ID: 47.0.1. Ip Address 10.0.10.23.10. Dead 40. of which 2 are >=INIT state. Transit delay 1 Neighbor count is 1 If Events 4.14. January 2005 . Wait 1663.0 Authentication : none Import ASExtern : yes Number of times SPF ran : 8 Area Border Router count : 2 AS Boundary Router count : 0 LSA count : 5 LSA Checksum sum : 0x2237B Summary : noSummary /info/l3/ospf/if OSPF Interface Information Ip Address 10.2 Timer intervals.80. Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10.1.

Network-Summary LS Database info all .LS Database summary ext .Router LS Database info self .NSSA External LS Database info rtr . 315393-J.Self Originated LS Database info summ . d) asbrsum with no parameters displays all the ASBR summary LSAs. Displays all the Link State Advertisements (LSAs) in the LS database that have the advertising router with the specified router ID. c) the total number of LSAs for each LSA type for all areas combined. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 101 .D)> Takes advertising router as a parameter. The usage of this command is as follows: a) asbrsum adv-rtr 20.ASBR Summary LS Database info dbsumm .1. asbrsum <adv-rtr (A. c) asbrsum self displays the self advertised ASBR summary LSAs. b) the total number of LSAs for each area.1.B.1.1. No parameters are required.1.B.1.1.0.B. d) the total number of LSAs for all LSA types for all areas combined.2 Command Reference /info/l3/ospf/dbase OSPF Database Information [OSPF Database Menu] advrtr .B. b) asbrsum link_state_id 10.C. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.1.1.1.Alteon OS 22.1.External LS Database info nw . dbsumm Displays the following information about the LS database in a table format: a) the number of LSAs of each type in each area.1.C.C.1 displays ASBR summary LSAs having the link state ID 10.1. ext <adv-rtr (A.D)>|<self> Displays the AS-external (type 5) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.1 displays ASBR summary LSAs having the advertising router 20. for example: 20.All Table 4-25 OSPF Database Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf/dbase) Command Syntax and Usage advrtr <router-id (A.D)>|<self> Displays ASBR summary LSAs.Network LS Database info nssa .C.LS Database info for an Advertising Router asbrsum .B.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.D)>|<link_state_id (A.

0/16 via 200.7/32 via 30.1.1.OSPF external type 2 IA 10.8/32 via 30.3/32 via 30.2 E2 172.D)>|<self> Displays the NSSA (type 7) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.C.18.0/24 via 200.C.C.0. N1 .10.1.1.2 E2 172.6/32 via 30.0/28 via 200. E2 .2 E2 172.B.D)>|<link_state_id (A.C.1. No parameters are required.2 IA 140.1.1.1.2 E2 172.1. January 2005 .D)>|<self> Displays the router (type 1) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.1.B.1. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.B.18. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum. /info/l3/ospf/routes OSPF Information Route Codes Codes: IA .1.2 IA 150.0.1.2 E2 172.0/24 via 20.4/32 via 30.1.1.1.18.1.1.2 E2 172.2 102 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.18.1.1.1.1.B.2/32 via 30.18.1.1.1.1.1. rtr <adv-rtr (A.Alteon OS 22.D)>|<self> Displays the network summary (type 3) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.18.2 E2 172.B.2 Command Reference Table 4-25 OSPF Database Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf/dbase) Command Syntax and Usage nw <adv-rtr (A. N2 . self Displays all the self-advertised LSAs.18.D)>|<link_state_id (A.2 E2 172. summ <adv-rtr (A.1.1/32 via 30.1. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.B.1.1. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.OSPF external type 1.2 IA 100.1.5/32 via 30.1.2 IA 40.18.0/28 via 20.1. all Displays all the LSAs.C.1.D)>|<link_state_id (A.1.0/27 via 20. nssa <adv-rtr (A.1.B.D)>|<link_state_id (A.C.C.1.B.1.1.OSPF NSSA external type 2 E1 .OSPF NSSA external type 1.OSPF inter area.2 IA 80.1.network LS database.1.1.D)>|<self> Displays the network (type 2) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSA.C.1.1.1.

of which 0-transit 0-nssa OSPF Neighbors: Intf NeighborID ---. 0 are =FULL state Number of areas is 0.1) No areas enabled. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 103 . of which 0 are >=INIT state.0.1.2 Command Reference /info/ospf/dump OSPF Dump Information OSPF Version 2 Router ID: 1. AS Boundary Router: no External LSA count 0 Number of interfaces in this router is 0 Number of virtual links in this router is 0 0 new lsa received and 0 lsa originated from this router Total number of entries in the LSDB 0 Total neighbors are 0.1.Alteon OS 22.---------- Prio ---- State ----- Address ------- OSPF LS Database: OSPF LSDB breakdown for router with ID (1. 315393-J. 0 are >=EXCH state.1 Started at 42 and the process uptime is 1197051 Area Border Router: no.1.1.

0 2: 172.1.31. up Current IP forwarding settings: ON.1 255.0 47.255.22.3.80.4.255.1. up vlan 1.3.255.1 lsdb limit 0 104 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.255.1 255.254.4.31. January 2005 .1. up Default gateway information: metric strict 2: 47.0. 172.80.31. 172.81 255. vlan any.31.Alteon OS 22.255.255. vlan 1.2 Command Reference /info/l3/ip IP Information Interface information: 1: 47.23.80.255.23.0 3: 172. up vlan 1.255. dirbr disabled Current local networks: Current IP port settings: All other ports have forwarding ON Current network filter settings: none Current route map settings: Current OSPF settings: ON Default route none Router ID: 1.

Alteon OS 22. server 172: vrid 172.18. A virtual router is the owner when the IP address of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same. VRRP information: 10: vrid 10. 11.2.1. 27: vrid 27. if 172.8. 172.200. 12: vrid 12.100. 14. renter.200. 254: vrid 254. backup. prio 102.178.2. prio 100. 27. 100: vrid 100. prio 118. master 12. prio 110. master if 27. If the master fails.2. 205. 27. if 28. 205. prio 100.178.2. renter. prio 110. backup 20. renter.202. prio 110. renter.0. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 105 . master.204. if 3: vrid 3.200. master. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. prio 102. Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for more information on VRRP. prio 102. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. renter.1. 28. 13.200.8.18.2.1. prio 118. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address.2. server 1. backup 1.21.1.1. based on a number of priority criteria. renter. renter.200. master 14.200. 13: vrid 13. master. VRRP information includes: Virtual router number Virtual router ID and IP address Interface number Ownership status owner identifies the preferred master virtual router. renter. prio 118. 20: vrid 20.18. 28. prio 102. renter. renter.1. renter. 315393-J. if if if if if if if if if if 10. renter identifies virtual routers which are not owned by this device.1.200.21. if 2: vrid 1.2. backup 172. server VRRP information: 1: vrid 2. backup 13. 14: vrid 14.1. master 11. master 27. prio 118. renter. 12.2. prio 100.100. 20. 205. 10. master 28. renter.2 Command Reference /info/l3/vrrp VRRP Information Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on Alteon Application Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. prio 110.100. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master. 1. proxy When virtual routers are configured.1.2. master. 172.1.200. renter.200.210.178. server 255: vrid 255. 28: vrid 28. you can view the status of each virtual router using this command. renter.2. 11: vrid 11.

Activity status master identifies the elected master virtual router.0. During the election process. January 2005 . Proxy status. The use of virtual proxy routers enables redundant switches to share the same IP address. minimizing the number of unique IP addresses that must be configured. These are known as virtual server routers: any virtual router whose IP address is the same as any configured virtual server IP address. The proxy state identifies virtual proxy routers. backup identifies that the virtual router is in backup mode.Alteon OS 22. where the virtual router shares the same IP address as a proxy IP address. the virtual router with the highest priority becomes master. Server status. The server state identifies virtual routers that support Layer 4 services.2 Command Reference Priority value. 106 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.

January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 107 .2 Command Reference /info/l3/dump Layer3 Dump Information This command dumps all the information about Layer 3 parameters.0. up vlan 1.254 255. adv 60 retry 120.1.1.1. enabled metric none.255.1.255 . ttl 1.0 45.0.1.0.255. dirbr disabled Current local networks: Current IP port settings: All other ports have forwarding ON Current network filter settings: none Current route map settings: Current BGP settings: ON. This dump is a collection of all the individual commands described in the sections above.21.1.1. IP information: IP information: Router ID: 45.1.201. vip disabled in-rmap: empty out-rmap: empty Current BGP aggr settings: Continued 315393-J.0 4: 172. orig 15.1.255. 205.1. static disabled.255 .1. up Default gateway information: metric strict Current IP forwarding settings: ON. hold 180. 172.1. vlan 1. ospf disabled fixed disabled. alive 60. default none. AS number 100 Current BGP peer settings: 1: 45.255.255. rip disabled. up vlan 1.203.255. ras 300.21.201 255.0 3: 205. pref 100.201 255.Alteon OS 22.255 . AS number 100 Interface information: 2: 45.

1.201 P 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 1-4 ARP address information: IP address IP mask --------------.0.1.254 P 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 1-4 205.255.5 00:09:6b:00:74:97 1 24 empty 205.255.1.2 00:09:6b:b5:08:48 1 24 empty 205.1.201 255.0.0.------------.0.0.1.255broadcast broadcast 2 * 127.Alteon OS 22.21.1.1.1.255.254 255.1.1.--------------205.255.1 00:09:6b:b5:0b:d6 1 24 empty 205.1.1.21.254 255.255 172.21.255.255.1.255.1.0 martian martian * 172.1.---.255 45.255.1.0 255.1.---------------45.21.201 local addr 2 * 45.255 MAC address VLAN Flags ----------------.21. January 2005 .1.1. ARP cache information: IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port Referenced SPs --------------.----00:01:81:2e:a2:2e D 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 Route table information: Status code: * .1.254 direct fixed 4 * 172.best Destination Mask Gateway Type Tag Metr If --------------.1.-----------.255.0.6 00:09:6b:00:71:bb 1 24 empty 205.100 P 4 00:01:81:2e:a2:2e 1-4 205.255 45.255 172.255 172.255 255.201 direct fixed 2 * 45.255.255.255.255.----------------.255 255.1.0.1.1.255 205.255 45.0 255.21.1.201 255.1.255.255 broadcast broadcast 4 Continued 108 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.255.255.255.0 172.0 255.1.----.1.---.3 00:09:6b:00:6f:b7 1 24 empty 205.75 00:0f:06:ec:8a:00 1 24 empty 45.255.4 00:09:6b:00:76:1b 1 24 empty 205.202 00:09:97:5e:69:00 1 24 empty 172.201 P 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 1-4 45.1.-* 45.1.0 45.255.1.1.100 255.----.1.2 Command Reference Virtual Router Redundancy is globally turned OFF.255.1.------------.1.0.1.0.21.1.254 local addr 4 * 172.1.1.255.0 0.201 255.0.1.255.21.0.1.1.

201 255.255.255 205.0.0.----.21.Alteon OS 22.1.255.1.1.0.255 255.0.1.255.0.0 0. ? .--------------*> 45. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 109 .255.0.----.0 224.201 local addr 3 * 205.255.255.0.255.100 direct vip * 205.0.1.1.255.201 direct fixed 3 * 205. Status codes: * valid.1.0.255 205.0.255.255 255.incomplete Network Next Hop Metr LcPrf Wght Path --------------.0 0.0 205.255.255.0 martian martian * 255.2 Command Reference * 205.1.0.1.0 0.1.1.255.255 broadcast broadcast 3 * 224.1.1.255 255. e .0.--------------.1. i .0 0 ? *> 205.0.255.255 broadcast broadcast OSPF is disabled.0 0 ? 315393-J.255.100 255.0.0.255 205.1.0 255.----. > best.1.IGP.1.internal Origin codes: i .0 0 ? *> 172.0 0.1.1.EGP.

Show real server information virt .Show port information idshash . or minmisses metric cookie . based on a variety of load-balancing algorithms. RIP and Rport synatk . With this software feature. the switch is aware of the services provided by each server and can direct user session traffic to an appropriate server. To view menu options.Decode the HEX value to get VIP.Show IDS server selected by hash or minmisses metric bind . To view menu options.Session Table Information Menu gslb .Show all layer 4 information Table 4-26 Layer 4 Information Menu Options (/info/slb) Command Syntax and Usage sess Displays the Session Table Information Menu. MAC address. layer where health check is performed. VLAN.Show filter information port . January 2005 .0. phash. see page 117.Show virtual server information filt . 110 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. Placing this kind of strain on a server can decrease the performance of the entire network as user requests are rejected by the server and then resubmitted by the user stations.: [Server Load Balancing Information Menu] sess .Global SLB Information Menu real . and health check result.Show SYN attack detection information dump . real IP address. see page 112. real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays Real server number. If one of these servers provides access to applications or data that is in high demand.2 Command Reference /info/slb Layer 4 Information Menu Server Load Balancing (SLB) allows you to configure the Alteon Application Switch to balance user session traffic among a pool of available servers that provide shared services.Show real server selected by hash. it can become overutilized. In an average network that employs multiple servers without server load balancing. Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for detailed information on this feature. physical switch port. each server usually specializes in providing one or two unique services.Alteon OS 22. gslb Displays the Global SLB Information Menu.

Alteon OS 22. or minmisses metric. and real server port. server port mapping. real server port. proxy IP address. 315393-J. real server group. synatk Displays SYN attack detection information. virtual MAC address Virtual Port State: Virtual service or port. group backup server. cookie <16 or 20 bytes cookie value in HEX as 0xXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX> Decodes the hexadecimal value to get the virtual server IP address. URL for health checks. For details. the number of new half open sessions is examined within a set period of time. and status. backup server. see page 118. for example. real server IP address. bind <IP address> <mask> <group number> Displays the real server selected by hash. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 111 . dump Displays all Layer 4 information for the switch. real server group. filter status. To identify whether or not the server is under SYN attack. group backup server. every two seconds. IP address. health check layer. This feature requires dbind to be enabled. phash. port <port number> Displays the physical port number.0. destination port. idshash <IP address 1> <IP address 2> Displays the Intrusion Detection System server selected by hash or minmisses metric. a list of applied filters. filt <filter ID (1-2048)>|list|allow|deny|redir|nat Displays the filter number. and client and/or server Layer 4 activity.2 Command Reference Table 4-26 Layer 4 Information Menu Options (/info/slb) Command Syntax and Usage virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays Virtual Server State: Virtual server number. and real server group. IP address.

Show all session entries on sp dump . pport <proxy port> Displays all session entries with proxy port.Show all session entries with ingress port real .Session entry description Table 4-27 Session Information Menu Options (/info/slb/sess) Command Syntax and Usage cip <IP address> Displays all session entries with client’s source IP address. January 2005 .Show all session entries with proxy port filter .Show all session entries help . cport <real port> Displays all session entries with source (client) port. See “Session dump information in Alteon OS” on page 115 for a description of these options.Show all session entries with destination IP address dport .Alteon OS 22.Show all session entries with source port dip .2 Command Reference /info/slb/sess Session Table Information [Session Table Information Menu] cip . dport <Destination real port> Displays all session entries with destination port.0. pip <Proxy IP address> Displays all session entries with proxy IP address. flag <E|L|N|P|S|Rt|Ru|Ri|Vi|Vr|Vs|Vm|U|W> Displays all session entries with matching flag.Show all session entries with real IP address sp . filter <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays all session entries with matching filter.Show all session entries with proxy IP address pport .Show all session entries with matching filter flag . dip <Destination IP address> Displays all session entries with the destination IP address. 112 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.Show all session entries with destination port pip .Show all session entries with source IP address cport .Show all session entries with matching flag port .

39.1 21220 -> 47.16: 172.01: 172. are described in “Session dump information in Alteon OS” on page 115.19 6970.21.2.168. 172.144.21. 1 to 13 associated with a session as identified in the above example.1 4586.2 Command Reference Table 4-27 Session Information Menu Options (/info/slb/sess) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays all session entries on the ingress port.2.1.8.21.13 rtsp age 10 EU 3.1.81.21.3.01: 172.51 http -> 192.1 http -> 47.01: 172.79 urlwcr age 6 f:123 E RTSP L4-L7 RTSP 3.13 21220 age 10 P The first session is RTSP TCP control connection. real <IP address> Displays all session entries with real server IP address.19 4586.1 rtsp -> 47.2.01: 172.3.1.1 http -> 47.81.1 http -> 1.2.21.81.19 1040. 39.1.12.Alteon OS 22. 3. 2.21.21.2.12.1.12.2. January 2005 . dump Displays all session entries.2 3567 3. Information similar to the following may appear in a session entry dump: 3.1 http age 6 f:10 EUSPT c (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7a) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) Note: The fields.0.24.144.200 44687. sp <port number (1-4)> Displays all session entries on switch processor.2.12.144.19 6970.81. 39.2.12.2. 01: 1. the destination port shows “rtsp” and server port shows “0” L7 WCR RTSP Chapter 4: The Information Menu 113 315393-J. 39.19 1040.13 0 age 10 P During client-server port negotiation.01: 172.8.1 rtsp -> 47.24.81. Samples of Session Dumps for Different Applications L4 HTTP 3. The second session is RTSP UDP data connection.79 http age 4 L4-L7 WCR HTTP 2.2.2.11 wcr age 4 f:12 E 3.2. 39. help Displays the description of the session entry.

2. real server IP and server port are not shown for persistent session.01: 172. 205.200 ftp ->172.81.00: 237.31. 10.81.123 160.13 urlwcr age 10 f:100 EU 3. 172.31.21.16 2559.3.26 http NAT age 2 f:24 E Persistent session 3.31.4. 114 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.215 80.1.31.21.26 1706.31.19 4586. 172.09: 172.21.1.144.215 4102. 172.00: 172.0.4.3.20 ftp age 10 EU 1.20.215 4098.2.8.178.1 rtsp -> 47.200 ftp-data ->172.19 6970. 39.31.168.Alteon OS 22.162.3.0.31.4. January 2005 .12.31.84 http -> 192.200 0 172.144.52.10.05: 172.12.4.4.2.1 21220 -> 47.2.0.4.31.07: 10.13 21220 age 10 P Filtering LinkLB 2.2 Command Reference 3.10 linklb age 8 f:10 E FTP 1.30 age 4 EPS C:3 The destination port.20 ftp-data age 10 E NAT 2.4.01: 172.11 age 8 EP c:1 1.14.09: 172. 39.

01: 1.2. “DENY” or “NAT” instead.1 6970.2. No address is shown if the filter action is Allow.1 1040. 2.3.2 Command Reference Session dump information in Alteon OS Field (1) SP number Description This field indicates the Switch Processor number that created the session. Deny or NAT.1 http age 10 3. For example: 3.2.1 21220 age 10 P For filtering.1.168. It will show “ALLOW”.01: 1. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 115 . This field identifies the source port from the client’s TCP/UDP packet.01: 1. this field also shows the real server IP address. this field contains the IP address of the real server that the switch selects to forward client packet to. 2. This field contains the source IP address from the client’s IP packet. No address is shown if the filter action is Allow.1. DENY or NAT instead.2.2. 2. For load balancing.1.1.10 linklb age 8 f:10 E (8) Real Server IP Address 315393-J. Deny or NAT. If the switch does not find a live server.4. If the switch does not find live server. 2. It will show ALLOW.1 http age 10 f:11 2.1.1 http -> 3.3.3.1.2. This field shows the physical port through which the client traffic enters the switch. this field contains the same information as the destination IP address mentioned in field (5). for load balancing. (2) Ingress port (3) Source IP address (4) Source port (5) Destination IP address (6) Destination port (7a) Proxy IP address (7) Proxy Port This field identifies the TCP/UDP source port substituted by the switch. For example: 3.1 rtsp -> 2.1 http -> 3. This field identifies the destination port from client’s TCP/UDP packet.3.2. This field also shows the real server IP address for filtering.07: 1.0.1 1040.2.1. This field contains the Proxy IP address substituted by the switch.1 http-> 192. This field identifies the destination IP address from the client’s TCP/UDP packet.1. This field contains the real server IP address of the corresponding server that the switch selects to forward the client packet to. this field is the same as destination IP address (as in row 5).1 1706.Alteon OS 22.2.2.

“Vm”: Indicates the session is a SIP MESSAGE session. “Ru”: Indicates UDP rate limiting for every client entry. This indicates that slowage is used. For RTSP UDP session.The session is aged out in 10 minutes. idslb. It is for internal use only. The user can configure slowage by using the command: /cfg/slb/adv/slowage. if: age 10 . 116 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. “E”: Indicates the session is established and will be aged out if no traffic is received within session timeout value.Alteon OS 22. “N”: Indicates no NAT. or Cookie Pbind. This field is the filtering application port for filtering. “L”: Indicates the session is a link load balance session. “Rt”: Indicates the session is TCP rate limiting for every client entry. “Ri”: Indicates the session is ICMP rate limiting per-client entry. “U”: Indicates the session is Layer 7 delayed binding and the switch is trying to open TCP connection to the real server. linkslb or nonat. which means the session only translates the destination MAC when forwarding client traffic to the real server. “W”: Indicates the session only translates the destination MAC when forwarding Layer 7 WCR traffic to the real server. If no packet is received within the value specified. January 2005 . (7) and (8) cannot have persistent session. Fields (6). (11) Filter number (12) Flag This field indicates the session created by filtering code as a result of the IP header keys matching the filtering criteria. This field can be urlwcr. the session is freed. “Vi”: Indicates the session is a SIP INVITE session. (13) Persistent session user count This counter indicates the number of client sessions created to associate with this persistent session. “P”: Indicates the session is a persistent session and is not to be aged out. For example.2 Command Reference Field (9) Server port Description This field is the same as the destination port (field 6) for load balancing except for the RTSP UDP session. age < 160 .The session is aged out in 160 minutes. this server port is obtained from the client-server negotiation.0. (10) Age This is the session timeout value. wcr. “Vs”: Indicates the session is a SIP SUBSCRIBE session. “Vr”: Indicates the session is a SIP REGISTER session. “S”: Indicates the session is a persistent session and the application is SSL session ID.

and the group of real servers associated with the local and remote virtual servers.Alteon OS 22. geo Displays the Global SLB geographical preference information.Show Global SLB rule . January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 117 . The menu for this feature displays the following information: [Global SLB Information Menu] virt .2 Command Reference /info/slb/gslb Global SLB Information Menu An Alteon OS running Global SLB selects the most appropriate site to direct the client traffic for a given domain during the initial client connection.Show Global SLB site . 315393-J.Show Global SLB dump . the number of the local and remote virtual servers. site Displays the Global SLB remote site information.Show all Global virtual server information remote site information rule information geographical preference information SLB information Table 4-28 Global SLB Information Menu Options (/info/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays the Global SLB virtual server information such as the domain name of the virtual server.Show Global SLB geo . dump Displays all Global SLB information.0. the number of virtual services on those virtual servers.

200.20.2. vlan 1. up 2: 210. filters: 80 idslb filt enabled.102. 00:01:02:c1:4b:48. 00:60:cf:47:5c:1e virtual ports: http: rport http. filters: 200 idslb filt enabled. filters: 200 filt disabled.0. 00:01:02:70:4d:4a. port 1. health 3. dbind HTTP Application: urlslb real servers: 26: 20.102. radius snoop disabled real servers: 1: 210. 2 ms. 2 ms.1. up Port 1: 2: 3: 4: state: filt disabled.Alteon OS 22. up exclusionary string matching: disabled 1: any 2: urlone 27: 20. health 3.20. up Virtual server state: 1: 20.20.2 Command Reference /info/slb/dump Show All Layer 4 Information Real 1: 2: 26: 27: server state: 210. vlan any 200: group 1.20. up 20. 1 ms.20. backup none.20. health 3. vlan 1. backup none proxy enabled.1.20. port 6. up exclusionary string matching: disabled 3: urltwo 4: urlthree Redirect filter state: Action redir dport http. backup none. vlan 1. vlan 1. filters: 50 200 118 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. group 88. backup none. health 3.2. 00:03:47:07:a4:9e.1. up 210. 00:01:02:71:9c:a6. port 7.20. backup none.200.101. 3 ms. health 3.2.200.1. up 20.1.1.2.20.101. backup none. rport 3128. January 2005 .20. port 8.

or auto) Link status (up or down) 315393-J.2 Command Reference /info/link Link Status Information Port ----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Speed ----10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 1000 1000 1000 1000 Duplex -------any any any any any any any any half any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any full full full full Flow Ctrl --TX-----RX-yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Link -----down down down down down down down down up down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down Use this command to display link status information about each port on an Alteon Application Switch slot. 10/100. any. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 119 . or auto) Flow control for transmit and receive (no. or 1000) Duplex mode (half. full.0. including: Port number Port speed (10. yes.Alteon OS 22. 100.

January 2005 .2 Command Reference /info/port Port Information Port ----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Tag --n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n RMON ---e d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d PVID ---1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BWC ----256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 NAME -------------VLAN(s) --------------------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Port information includes: Port number Whether the port uses VLAN tagging or not (y or n) Whether Remote Monitor is enabled or disabled Port VLAN ID (PVID) Port name VLAN membership Whether RMON is enabled or disabled on the port 120 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.0.Alteon OS 22.

January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 121 . You can see the following information on your switch when you execute this command: [Bandwidth Management Information Menu] ipuser . It allows companies to guarantee that critical business traffic. 315393-J.0. receive higher priority versus non-criticaltraffic. See page 122 for sample output. BWM policies can be configured to set lower and upper bounds on the bandwidth allocation. cont Displays the BWM contract information configured on this switch.2 Command Reference /info/bwm Bandwidth Management Information Bandwidth Management (BWM) enables Web site managers to allocate a portion of the available bandwidth for specific users or applications. such as e-commerce transactions.Show Bandwidth Management Contract information Table 4-29 Bandwidth Management Information Command Syntax and Usage ipuser Displays the IP user entries with their IP addresses.Alteon OS 22. Traffic classification can be based on user or application information.BWM IP User Entries Information Menu cont .

2 Command Reference /info/bwm/ipuser BWM IP User Information Menu [BWM IP User Entries Information Menu] ip . 1-256> Displays the IP user entries for a specific BWM contract.Show all IP user entries for a contract sp .Show all IP user entries Table 4-30 BWM IP User Information Menu (/info/bwm/ipuser) Command Syntax and Usage ip <IP address> Displays the IP user entries for a specific IP address. but only for the specified sp number.Alteon OS 22. dump Displays all the IP user entries.Show all IP user entries on sp dump . The same fields as described in cont above are displayed. January 2005 . cont <BW Contract number. 122 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. sp <SP number (1-4)> Displays the IP user entries on the Switch Processor.Show all IP user entries with IP address cont .0.

-------.106 16 199940 0 97 97 2 10 11.108 16 199940 0 97 97 2 10 11.1.0.1.---------------.----2 11 11.1. Octets: the number of octets processed on this ipuser entry Discards: the number of octets discarded on this ipuser entry Allowed Rate: the rate of traffic allowed for this IP address Offered Rate: the rate including the discards for this IP address 315393-J.105 16 198402 0 96 96 2 10 11.1. IP address: the IP address of the ipuser entry.0. Contract Rate: the BWM contract number of the ipuser entry.1.--.101 16 201478 0 98 98 2 10 11.1. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 123 .1.0.1.0.0.103 16 196864 0 96 96 2 10 11.109 16 203016 0 99 99 SP Rate: the switch processor number (1-4) of the ipuser entry.1.Alteon OS 22.1.2 Command Reference The format of the output of the above commands: SP Contract IP Address Age Octets Discards Allowed Offered Rate Rate -.0.---------.100 86 1076600 0 97 97 2 10 11. Age: the age of the entry in seconds.0.1.---------.0.104 16 204554 0 99 99 2 10 11.107 16 199940 0 97 97 2 10 11.0.0.102 16 198402 0 96 96 2 10 11.100 86 21500000 301001440 1953 29297 2 10 11.0.0.

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/bwm/cont
BWM Contract Information
Current Bandwidth Management setting: ON Policy Enforcement:enabled BWM history will be mailed in a minute to 'abcd' at host '100.81.138.26' BWM IP user table entries 64k

Contract Policy Per User Traffic Num Name Prec Hard Soft Resv Limit Key State Shaping 1 123456789012345 2 1 50M 1M 500K E D 2 vlan 4 1 60M 2M 500K E D 3 filter 7 20 2M 1M 500K E D 4 5 1 2M 1M 500K D D 5 512 1 2M 1M 500K E D 10 10 1 1M 0K 0K 500K sip E D 11 11 1 100M 80M 500K 2M sip E D 12 12 1 2M 1M 500K E D 13 13 1 3M 1M 500K E D 14 14 1 4M 400K 100K E D 15 15 1 2M 1M 500K E D

This command displays information about any configured contracts and the BWM policies applied to the contracts. Table 4-31 BWM Contract Information
Field Contract Policy Description

Displays the BWM contract number. Displays specific information about a policy applied to a contract. Includes the following:
The policy number applied to the contract Prec: the precedence applied to the policy Hard: the hard limit applied to the policy Soft: the soft limit applied to the policy Resv: the reserve limit applied to the policy

124

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-31 BWM Contract Information
Field Per User Description These two columns display information for an ipuser limit, if applied to the contract. Includes the following: Limit: the user rate limit applied to the ipuser. Key: If an ipuser rate limit is enforced, this field displays whether the user limit is enforced on a source IP address (sip) or a destination IP address (dip). Displays whether the BWM contract is enabled (E) or disabled (D).

State Traffic Shaping

Displays whether Traffic Shaping is enabled (E) or disabled (D) for this contract.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

125

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/security Security Information
This command displays information about the current security settings that includes: rate threshold for security logging
whether the out-of-order IP fragment packets have the option of allow or deny on the filters

the current IP addresses in the Access Control List (ACL) the current UDP blast protection settings the current port security settings
Current security settings: seclog 128 fragment allow pdepth none Current IP address ACL settings: Number Address Mask -------- ---------------- ---------------Current UDP blast protection settings: UDP Port ----------1-5000 Packet Rate (per second) -----------------------20

Port security state:

126

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/swkey Software Enabled Keys
For optional Layer 4 switching software, the information would be displayed as follows:
Enabled Software features: Layer 4: GSLB Bandwidth Management Security Pack Enabled Software features: Layer 4: GSLB Inbound Linklb Intelligent Traffic Management

Software key information includes a list of all the optional software packages which have been activated or installed on your switch. For information on ordering optional software license keys, see “How to Get Help” on page 18.

/info/dump Information Dump
Use the dump command to dump all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more, depending on your configuration). This data is useful for tuning and debugging switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

127

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

128

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

CHAPTER 5

The Statistics Menu
You can view switch performance statistics in both the user and administrator command modes. This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch statistics.

/stats Statistics Menu
[Statistics Menu] port - Port Stats Menu l2 - Layer 2 Stats Menu l3 - Layer 3 Stats Menu slb - Server Load Balancing (L4-7) Stats Menu bwm - Bandwidth Management Stats Menu mp - MP-specific Stats Menu sp - SP-specific Stats Menu security - Security Stats Menu snmp - Show SNMP stats ntp - Show NTP stats pm - Port Mirroring Stats Menu mgmt - Management Port Stats dump - Dump all stats

315393-J, January 2005

129

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-1 Statistics Menu Options (/stats)
Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the Port Statistics Menu for the specified port. Use this command to display traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis. Traffic statistics are included in SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects. To view menu options, see page 131. l2 Displays Layer 2 Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 144. l3 Displays Layer3 Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 148. slb Displays the Server Load Balancing (SLB) Menu. To view menu options, see page 167. bwm Displays the Bandwidth Management Menu. To view menu options, see page 198. mp Displays the Management Processor Statistics Menu. Use this command to view information on how switch management processes and resources are currently being allocated. To view menu options, see page 205. sp <SP number (1-4)> Displays Switch Processor-Specific Menu. To view menu options, see page 210. security Displays Security Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 212. snmp Displays SNMP Statistics. See page 218 for a sample output and description of SNMP statistics. ntp <clear> Displays Network Time Protocol (NTP) Statistics. See page 222 for a sample output and a description of NTP Statistics. You can execute the clear command option to delete all statistics. pm Displays Port Mirroring Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 224. mgmt Displays interface statistics for the Management Port. See page 224 for sample output. dump Dumps all switch statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. For details, see page 225.

130

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/port <port number> Port Statistics Menu
This menu displays traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis. Traffic statistics include SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects.
[Port Statistics Menu] brg - Show bridging ("dot1") stats ether - Show Ethernet ("dot3") stats if - Show interface ("if") stats ip - Show Internet Protocol ("IP") stats link - Show link stats rmon - Show RMON stats dump - Dump port stats clear - Clear all port stats

Table 5-2 Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/port)
Command Syntax and Usage brg Displays bridging (“dot1”) statistics for the port. See page 132 for a sample output and the description of statistics. ether Displays Ethernet (“dot1”) statistics for the port. See page 133 for a sample output and the description of statistics. if Displays interface statistics for the port. See page 136 for a sample output and the description of statistics. ip Displays IP statistics for the port. See page 138 for a sample output and the description of statistics. link Displays link statistics for the port. See page 139 for a sample output and the description of statistics. rmon Displays Remote Monitor (RMON) statistics for the port. See page 140 for a sample output and the description of statistics. dump Displays all the port statistics.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu

131

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-2 Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/port) (Continued)
Command Syntax and Usage clear This command clears all the statistics on this port.

/stats/port <port number>/brg
Bridging Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the bridging statistics of the selected port.
Bridging statistics for port 1: dot1PortInFrames: dot1PortOutFrames: dot1PortInDiscards: dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards: dot1BasePortDelayExceededDiscards: dot1BasePortMtuExceededDiscards: dot1StpPortForwardTransitions:

63242584 63277826 0 0 NA NA 0

Table 5-3 Bridging Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/brg)
Statistics dot1PortInFrames Description The number of frames that have been received by this port from its segment. A frame received on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function, including bridge management frames. The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its segment. Note that a frame transmitted on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function, including bridge management frames. Count of valid frames received which were discarded (that is, filtered) by the Forwarding Process. The total number of Forwarding Database entries, which have been or would have been learnt, but have been discarded due to a lack of space to store them in the Forwarding Database. If this counter is increasing, it indicates that the Forwarding Database is regularly becoming full (a condition which has unpleasant performance effects on the subnetwork). If this counter has a significant value but is not presently increasing, it indicates that the problem has been occurring but is not persistent.

dot1PortOutFrames

dot1PortInDiscards

dot1TpLearnedEntry Discards

132

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu

315393-J, January 2005

315393-J. It is incremented by both transparent and source route bridges.Alteon OS 22.3 Layer Management. counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 133 . The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the alignmentError status is returned by the MAC service to the Logical Link Control (LLC) (or other MAC user).2 Command Reference Table 5-3 Bridging Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/brg) Statistics dot1BasePortDelay ExceededDiscards Description The number of frames discarded by this port due to excessive transit delay through the bridge. It is incremented by both transparent and source route bridges.0. dot1BasePortMtu ExceededDiscards dot1StpPortForward Transitions /stats/port <port number>/ether Ethernet Statistics This menu option enables you to display the ethernet statistics of the selected port Ethernet statistics for port 1: dot3StatsAlignmentErrors: dot3StatsFCSErrors: dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames: dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames: dot3StatsSQETestErrors: dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions: dot3StatsLateCollisions: dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions: dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors: dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors: dot3StatsFrameTooLongs: dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors: dot3CollFrequencies [1-15]: 0 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 NA Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsAlignment Errors Description A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check. according to the conventions of IEEE 802. Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are. The number of frames discarded by this port due to an excessive size. The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state.

ifOutMulticastPkts. ifOutMulticastPkts. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision. The SQE TEST ERROR is set in accordance with the rules for the verification of the SQE detection mechanism in the PLS Carrier Sense Function as described in IEEE Std. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode.0. A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts.802. dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames dot3StatsSQETestErrors 134 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsFCSErrors Description A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check. This count does not include frames received with frametoo-long or frame-too-short errors. A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision.4.2. Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are. or ifOutBroadcastPkts. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameCheckError status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). section 7. January 2005 . and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrame object. according to the conventions of IEEE 802. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. Note: Coding errors detected by the physical layer for speeds above 10 Mb/s will cause the frame to fail FCS check. A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the PLS sub layer for a particular interface. A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts.31998 Edition. counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC.Alteon OS 22. or ifOutBroadcastPkts. and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames object.3 Layer Management.6.

A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions. The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame on a particular interface. dot3StatsLateCollisions dot3StatsExcessive Collisions dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors 315393-J.0. even if the carrier sense condition fluctuates during a transmission attempt. The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation-specific. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented at most once per transmission attempt. or the dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors object. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 135 . Five hundred and twelve bit-times corresponds to 51. In particular. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsLateCollisions object. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode.2 Command Reference Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions Description A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium is busy. The count represented by an instance of this object does not include frames involved in collisions. A (late) collision included in a count represented by an instance of this object is also considered as a (generic) collision for purposes of other collision-related statistics.Alteon OS 22.2 microseconds on a 10 Mbit/s system. A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer transmit error. an instance of this object may represent a count of transmission errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted. the dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions object. The number of times that a collision is detected on a particular interface later than one slotTime into the transmission of a packet.

In particular. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode.3 Layer Management. A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer receive error. No other instance of dot3CollFrequencies would be incremented in this example.0. according to the conventions of IEEE 802. counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC. For example. a frame which is transmitted after experiencing exactly 4 collisions would be indicated by incrementing only dot3CollFrequencies [4]. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsFrameTooLongs object. dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors dot3CollFrequencies /stats/port <port number>/if Interface Statistics This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port. A count of individual MAC frames for which the transmission (successful or otherwise) on a particular interface occurs after the frame has experienced exactly the number of collisions specified by the index. the dot3StatsAlignmentErrors object. an instance of this object may represent a count of received errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameTooLong status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). January 2005 . Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are.Alteon OS 22. or the dot3StatsFCSErrors object.2 Command Reference Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsFrameTooLongs Description A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size. The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation-specific. Interface statistics for port 1: ifHCIn Counters Octets: 51697080313 UcastPkts: 65356399 BroadcastPkts: 0 MulticastPkts: 0 Discards: 0 Errors: 0 ifHCOut Counters 51721056808 65385714 6516 0 0 0 136 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.

One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. For a MAC layer protocol. including the MAC header and FCS. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 137 . which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sublayer. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. this includes both Group and Functional addresses.0. and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer. For a MAC layer protocol. and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors and dot3StatsSymbolErrors. This does include the number of octets in valid MAC Control frames received on this interface. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.layer. including those that were discarded or not sent.Alteon OS 22. which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. including those that were discarded or not sent. dot3StatsFrameTooLongs. The sum for this interface of dot3statsAlignmentErrors. which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer. The number of packets delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub) layer. including the MAC header and FCS. The number of packets. The number of octets transmitted in valid MAC frames on this interface. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sub. including those that were discarded or not sent. dot3StatsFCSErrors. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sub. and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sublayer.layer. ifHCInUcastPkts ifHCInBroadcastPkts ifHCInMulticastPkts ifHCInDiscards ifHCInErrors ifHCOutOctets ifHCOutUcastPkts ifHCOutBroadcastPkts ifHCOutMulticastPkts ifHCOutDiscards 315393-J. The number of packets.2 Command Reference Table 5-5 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if) Statistics ifHCInOctets Description The number of octets in valid MAC frames received on the interface. The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. this includes both Group and Functional addresses. This does not include the number of octets in valid MAC Control frames transmitted on this interface.

/stats/port <port number>/ip Interface Protocol Statistics This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port. The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.Alteon OS 22. The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not their final IP destination. ipInAddrErrors ipForwDatagrams ipInUnknownProtos 138 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors and dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors. This count includes invalid addresses (for example. The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch).0. 0.2 Command Reference Table 5-5 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if) Statistics ifHCOutErrors Description The sum for this interface of: dot3statsSQETestErrors. this counter will include only those packets which were Source-Routed via this entity (the switch).0. In entities which do not act as IP Gateways. and the Source.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example.0.Route option processing was successful. For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams. IP statistics for port 1: ipInReceives: ipInAddrErrors: ipInUnknownProtos: ipInDelivers: ipTtlExceeds: ipLANDattacks: 0 0 0 0 0 0 ipForwDatagrams: ipInDiscards: 0 0 Table 5-6 Interface Protocol Statistics (/stats/port/ip) Statistics ipInReceives Description The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces. Class E). this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address. as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. including those received in error. January 2005 . dot3StatsLateCollisions. dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions.

for lack of buffer space). The number of IP datagram for which an ICMP TTL exceeded message was sent. but which were discarded (for example. 315393-J. Link statistics for port 1: linkStateChange: 4 Table 5-7 Link Statistics (/stats/port/link) Statistics linkStateChange Description The total number of link state changes.Alteon OS 22. The number of packets that have the same source and destination IP address.2 Command Reference Table 5-6 Interface Protocol Statistics (/stats/port/ip) Statistics ipInDiscards Description The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing.0. The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP userprotocols (including ICMP). Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 139 . ipInDelivers ipTtlExceeds ipLANDattacks /stats/port <port number>/link Link Statistics This menu enables you to display the link statistics of the selected port.

RMON statistics for port 1: etherStatsDropEvents: etherStatsOctets: etherStatsPkts: etherStatsBroadcastPkts: etherStatsMulticastPkts: etherStatsCRCAlignErrors: etherStatsUndersizePkts: etherStatsOversizePkts: etherStatsFragments: etherStatsJabbers: etherStatsCollisions: etherStatsPkts64Octets: etherStatsPkts65to127Octets: etherStatsPkts128to255Octets: etherStatsPkts256to511Octets: etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets: etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets: 0 129677 1485 734 712 0 0 0 0 0 0 954 578 35 26 16 8 Table 5-8 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics etherStatsDrop Events Description The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources. it is just the number of times this condition has been detected. the etherStatsPkts and etherStatsOctets objects should be sampled before and after a common interval. January 2005 . 000 The result of this equation is the percent value of utilization.Alteon OS 22. and the number of seconds in the interval is Interval. The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). This object can be used as a reasonable estimate of utilization (which is the percent utilization of the ethernet segment).8 ) Utilization = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Interval × 10. Note that this number is not necessarily the number of packets dropped. respectively.2 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/rmon RMON Statistics This menu option enables you to display the remote monitor statistics of the selected port. etherStatsOctets 140 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.4 ) + ( Octets × 0.0. The differences in the sampled values are Pkts and Octets. These values are used to calculate the utilization as follows: Pkts × ( 9.6 + 6. If greater precision is desired.

Note that this definition of jabber is different than the definition in IEEE802. The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address.3 section 8. inclusive.1. The allowed range to detect jabber is between 20 milliseconds and 150 milliseconds. broadcast packets.5 (10Base-5) and section 10. The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address. but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. etherStatsBroadcastPkts etherStatsMulticastPkts etherStatsCRCAlign Errors etherStatsUndersizePkts etherStatsOversizePkts etherStatsFragments etherStatsJabbers 315393-J.4 (10Base-2). The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).3.Alteon OS 22. (A runt is a packet that is less than 64 bytes. The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits. but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). but including FCS octets). These documents define jabber as the condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms. Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address. but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets.) The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits. Note that this does not include multicast packets.2 Command Reference Table 5-8 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics etherStatsPkts Description The total number of packets (including bad packets. The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits. This is because it counts both runts (which are normal occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits.1.0. and multicast packets) received.2. The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits. but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 141 . and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). Note that it is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to increment.

Thus a probe placed on a repeater port could record more collisions than a probe connected to a station on the same segment would. etherStatsPkts64Octets etherStatsPkts65to127Octets etherStatsPkts128to255Octets etherStatsPkts256to511Octets etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets 142 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).1. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets).2 Command Reference Table 5-8 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics etherStatsCollisions Description The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.2.3 (10Base-2) of IEEE standard 802. A repeater port must detect a collision when two or more stations are transmitting simultaneously.2. The value returned will depend on the location of the RMON probe. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets).Alteon OS 22.0. in the receive mode.3 defines a collision as the simultaneous presence of signals on the DO and RD circuits (transmitting and receiving at the same time).1. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). 14. should report the same number of collisions.3k) plus receiver collisions observed on any coax segments to which the repeater is connected. Section 8. A 10Base-T station can only detect collisions when it is transmitting. Note also that an RMON probe inside a repeater should ideally report collisions between the repeater and one or more other hosts (transmit collisions as defined by IEEE 802. if three or more stations are transmitting simultaneously. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). January 2005 . The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). Probe location plays a much smaller role when considering 10Base-T.1.3.4 (10Base-T) of IEEE standard 802.3 (10Base-5) and section 10.3 states that a station must detect a collision. Thus probes placed on a station and a repeater.

January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 143 .2 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/dump Port Dump Statistics Bridging statistics for port 1: dot1PortInFrames: 1284 dot1PortOutFrames: 142 dot1PortInDiscards: 130 dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards: 0 dot1BasePortDelayExceededDiscards: NA dot1BasePortMtuExceededDiscards: NA dot1StpPortForwardTransitions: 2 -----------------------------------------------------------------Ethernet statistics for port 1: dot3StatsAlignmentErrors: 0 dot3StatsFCSErrors: 0 dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames: 0 dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames: 0 dot3StatsSQETestErrors: NA dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions: 0 dot3StatsLateCollisions: 0 dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions: 0 dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors: NA dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors: 1 dot3StatsFrameTooLongs: 0 dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors: 0 dot3CollFrequencies [1-15]: NA -----------------------------------------------------------------Interface statistics for port 1: ifHCIn Counters ifHCOut Counters Octets: 124166 19560 UcastPkts: 39 27 BroadcastPkts: 631 14 MulticastPkts: 614 101 Discards: 130 0 Errors: 1 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------IP statistics for port 1: ipInReceives: 0 ipInAddrErrors: 0 ipForwDatagrams: 0 ipInUnknownProtos: 0 ipInDiscards: 0 ipInDelivers: 0 ipTtlExceeds: 0 ipLANDattacks: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Link statistics for port 1: linkStateChange: 3 ------------------------------------------------------------------ 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.0.

Show LACP stats stg . see page 145. 144 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference RMON statistics for port 1: etherStatsDropEvents: etherStatsOctets: etherStatsPkts: etherStatsBroadcastPkts: etherStatsMulticastPkts: etherStatsCRCAlignErrors: etherStatsUndersizePkts: etherStatsOversizePkts: etherStatsFragments: etherStatsJabbers: etherStatsCollisions: etherStatsPkts64Octets: etherStatsPkts65to127Octets: etherStatsPkts128to255Octets: etherStatsPkts256to511Octets: etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets: etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets: 0 123840 1406 698 669 0 0 0 0 0 0 906 548 35 25 16 8 /stats/l2 Layer 2 Statistics Menu [Layer 2 Statistics Menu] fdb .0. To view statistics and their description.Show FDB stats lacp .Show STG stats Table 5-9 Layer 2 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l2) Command Syntax and Usage fdb Displays Forwarding Database statistics. see page 147. see page 146. stg Displays Spanning Tree Group statistics. January 2005 . To view statistics and their description. lacp <port number (1 to max num ports)> Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol statistics. To view statistics and their description.Alteon OS 22.

January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 145 . Number of entry lookups in the Forwarding Database. Number of maximum Forwarding Database entries supported by the switch.0. Number of successful searches in the Forwarding Database. Number of entries found or created in the Forwarding Database. finds. Highest number of entries recorded at any given time in the Forwarding Database. including the number of new entries. Current number of entries in the Forwarding Database.2 Command Reference /stats/l2/fdb FDB Statistics FDB statistics: creates: current: lookups: finds: find_or_c's: max: 9611 58 850254 5832 11874 16384 deletes: hiwat: lookup fails: find fails: overflows: 9553 65 151373 0 0 This menu option enables you to display statistics regarding the use of the forwarding database. lookup fails find fails overflows max 315393-J. FDB statistics are described in the following table: Table 5-10 Forwarding Database Statistics (/stats/l2/fdb) Statistic creates current lookups finds find_or_c’s deletes hiwat Description Number of entries created in the Forwarding Database. Number of unsuccessful searches made in the Forwarding Database. Number of search failures in the Forwarding Database. Number of entries deleted from the Forwarding Database. Number of entries overflowing the Forwarding Database. and unsuccessful searches.Alteon OS 22.

The number of unknown version or TLV type that the switch received on this port. Marker Rsp PDUs trans.The number of Marker Responses transmitted out of this port. The number of valid Marker Responses that the switch received on this port.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /stats/l2/lacp LACP Statistics >> Layer 2 Statistics# lacp 1 port 1 Valid LACPDUs received Valid Marker PDUs received Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received Unknown version/TLV type Illegal subtype received LACPDUs transmitted Marker PDUs transmitted Marker Rsp PDUs transmitted - 9394 0 0 0 0 8516 0 0 Table 5-11 LACP Statistics Parameters (/stats?l2/lacp) Field Description Valid LACPDUs received The number of LACPDUs that the switch received on this port. The number of LACPDUs transmitted out of this port. Valid Marker PDUs received Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received Unknown version/TLV type Illegal subtype received LACPDUs transmitted Marker PDUs transmitted The number of valid Marker PDUs that the switch received on this port. January 2005 . The number of Marker PDUs transmitted out of this port. mitted 146 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.0. The number of illegal LACP subtype received on this port.

January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 147 .Alteon OS 22. Displays the number of configuration BPDUs received Displays the number of TCN (Topology Change Notification) messages received. Displays the number of configuration BPDUs transmitted.0.2 Command Reference /stats/l2/stg Spanning Tree Group Statistics Spanning Tree Group 1: Port Rcv Cfg Rcv TCN ----.------------------1 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 5 0 0 6 0 0 7 0 0 8 0 0 9 139046 176 10 0 0 11 0 0 12 0 0 13 0 0 14 0 0 15 0 0 16 0 0 17 0 0 18 0 0 19 0 0 20 0 0 21 0 0 22 0 0 23 0 0 24 0 0 25 0 0 26 0 0 27 0 0 28 0 0 Xmt Cfg ---------0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 27 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xmt TCN ---------0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-12 Spanning Tree Group Statistics Parameters (/stats/l2/stg) Field Port Rcv cfg Rcv TCN Description Displays the port number. Xmt Cfg 315393-J.

Clear IP interface ("if") stats ipclear .Show TCP stats udp . See page 157 for sample output.Show DNS stats icmp .Show IP interface ("if") stats tcp .Show ARP stats vrrp .0. See page 159 for sample output. route Displays route statistics.Show route stats arp .Show IP stats route .2 Command Reference Table 5-12 Spanning Tree Group Statistics Parameters (/stats/l2/stg) Field Xmt TCN Description Displays the number of TCN (Topology Change Notification) messages transmitted /stats/l3 Layer 3 Statistics Menu [Layer 3 Statistics Menu] ospf .Show VRRP stats dns . January 2005 .Alteon OS 22. arp Displays Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) statistics. ip Displays IP statistics.Show ICMP stats if .Dump layer 3 stats Table 5-13 Layer 3 Statistics Menu (/stats/l3) Command Syntax and Usage ospf Displays OSPF statistics Menu.OSPF Statistics Menu ip .Clear IP stats dump . See page 150 for sample output. 148 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.Show UDP stats ifclear . See page 155 for sample output.

tcp Displays TCP statistics. 315393-J. udp Displays UDP statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging Layer 3 switch performance. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays IP interface statistics for the management processors. See page 167 for sample output. Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IP interface statistics. dump Dumps all Layer 3 switch statistics. ipclear Clears IP statistics.Alteon OS 22. icmp Displays ICMP statistics. See page 165 for sample output. Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IP statistics.2 Command Reference Table 5-13 Layer 3 Statistics Menu (/stats/l3) Command Syntax and Usage vrrp When virtual routers are configured. If you want to capture dump data to a file. you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP: Advertisements received (vrrpInAdvers) Advertisements transmitted (vrrpOutAdvers) Advertisements received. See page 160 for sample output.0. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 149 . dns Displays Domain Name Server/System (DNS) statistics. See page 163 for sample output. ifclear Clears IP interface statistics. but ignored (vrrpBadAdvers) See page 159 for sample output. See page 161 for sample output.

if <interface number (1-256)> Displays interface statistics. January 2005 . aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays area index statistics.Show global stats aindex .2 Command Reference /stats/l3/ospf OSPF Statistics Menu [OSPF stats Menu] general . See page 151 for sample output and details.Show interface(s) stats Table 5-14 OSPF Statistics Menu (/stats/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage general Displays global statistics. 150 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.Show area(s) stats if .0.

2 Command Reference /stats/l3/ospf/general OSPF Global Statistics The OSPF General Statistics contain the sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 151 . OSPF stats ---------Rx/Tx Stats: Pkts hello database ls requests ls acks ls updates Nbr change stats: hello start n2way adjoint ok negotiation done exchange done bad requests bad sequence loading done n1way rst_ad down Timers kickoff hello retransmit lsa lock lsa ack dbage summary ase export Rx -------0 23 4 3 7 9 Tx -------0 518 12 1 7 7 Intf change Stats: hello down loop unloop wait timer backup nbr change 2 0 2 2 2 2 0 0 2 0 0 1 4 2 0 0 2 0 5 514 1028 0 0 0 0 0 315393-J.0.Alteon OS 22.

Alteon OS 22. The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Request packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Update packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Update packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. Description Tx Pkts Rx Hello Tx Hello Rx Database Tx Database Rx ls Requests Tx ls Requests Rx ls Acks Tx ls Acks Rx ls Updates Tx ls Updates 152 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The sum total of all OSPF packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.0. The sum total of all Database Description packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Database Description packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. January 2005 . The sum total of all Hello packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Hello packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.2 Command Reference Table 5-15 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) Statistics Rx/Tx Stats: Rx Pkts The sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Request packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.

The sum total number of decisions to be made (again) as to whether an adjacency should be established/maintained with the neighbor across all OSPF areas and interfaces.0. The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is. Any of these conditions indicate that some error has occurred during adjacency establishment for all OSPF areas and interfaces. in the initial state of a neighbor conversation) across all OSPF areas and interfaces. in which this router is not mentioned across all OSPF interfaces and areas. The sum total number of neighbors in this state wherein the Master/slave relationship has been negotiated. The sum total number of link state updates received for all out-of-date portions of the database across all OSPF areas and interfaces. in an adjacency's final state) having transmitted a full sequence of Database Description packets. an indication that Hello packets should now be sent to the neighbor at intervals of HelloInterval seconds) across all OSPF areas and interfaces.Alteon OS 22. across all OSPF areas and interfaces. January 2005 . The sum total number of Hello packets received from neighbors. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 153 Description Start n2way adjoint ok negotiation done exchange done bad requests bad sequence loading done n1way rst_ad down 315393-J. The total number of Neighboring routers down (that is. The sum total number of bidirectional communication establishment between this router and other neighboring routers. The sum total number of Database Description packets which have been received that either: a) Has an unexpected DD sequence number b) Unexpectedly has the init bit set c) Has an options field differing from the last Options field received in a Database Description packet. The sum total number of Link State Requests which have been received for a link state advertisement not contained in the database across all interfaces and OSPF areas. The sum total number of times the Neighbor adjacency has been reset across all OPSF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is. and sequence numbers have been exchanged. across all OSPF areas and interfaces.2 Command Reference Table 5-15 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (Continued) Statistics Nbr Change Stats: hello The sum total of all Hello packets received from neighbors on all OSPF areas and interfaces.

The sum total number of times the Retransmit timer has been fired across all OPSF areas and interfaces. Description unloop wait timer backup nbr change Timers Kickoff: hello The sum total number of times the Hello timer has been fired (which triggers the send of a Hello packet) across all OPSF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of times the Wait Timer has been fired. The total number of times the data base age (Dbage) has been fired. retransmit lsa lock lsa ack dbage summary ase export 154 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The total number of times the Summary timer has been fired.Alteon OS 22. The sum total number of times the LSA Ack timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of changes in the set of bidirectional neighbors associated with any interface across all OSPF areas. The sum total number of interfaces.2 Command Reference Table 5-15 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (Continued) Statistics Intf Change Stats: hello down loop The sum total number of Hello packets sent on all interfaces and areas. The sum total number of times the Link State Advertisement (LSA) lock timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces. indicating the end of the waiting period that is required before electing a (Backup) Designated Router across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The total number of times the Autonomous System Export (ASE) timer has been fired. The sum total of interfaces no longer connected to the attached network across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of interfaces down in all OSPF areas. January 2005 .0. connected to the attached network in all OSPF areas. The sum total number of Backup Designated Routers on the attached network for all OSPF areas and interfaces.

errors discovered in processing their IP options. The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers. This count includes invalid addresses (for example. including bad checksums. other format errors.0.Route option processing was successful. time-to-live exceeded. The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch). The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not their final IP destination. version number mismatch.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/ip IP Statistics IP statistics: ipInReceives: ipInAddrErrors: ipInUnknownProtos: ipInDelivers: ipOutDiscards: ipReasmReqds: ipReasmFails: ipFragFails: ipRoutingDiscards: ipReasmTimeout: 3115873 35447 500504 2334166 4 0 0 0 0 5 ipInHdrErrors: ipForwDatagrams: ipInDiscards: ipOutRequests: ipOutNoRoutes: ipReasmOKs: ipFragOKs: ipFragCreates: ipDefaultTTL: 1 0 0 1010542 4 0 0 0 255 Table 5-16 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip) Statistics ipInReceives Description The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces. and so forth. as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. Class E).0. For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams. 0.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example. which were Source-Routed via this entity (the switch). this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address. and the Source.Alteon OS 22.0. In entities which do not act as IP Gateways. The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. this counter will include only those packets. including those received in error. ipInHdrErrors ipInAddrErrors ipForwDatagrams ipInUnknownProtos 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 155 .

The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination. and so forth). The number of failures detected by the IP re. for lack of buffer space). The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP userprotocols (including ICMP). The number of IP datagrams successfully re. The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user-protocols (including ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. ipInDelivers ipOutRequests ipOutDiscards ipOutNoRoutes ipReasmReqds ipReasmOKs ipReasmFails ipFragOKs ipFragFails ipFragCreates 156 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 5-16 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip) Statistics ipInDiscards Description The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing. which meet this no-route criterion. January 2005 . Note that this counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams. The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination.Alteon OS 22. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams. The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this entity (the switch). for example.0. Note that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down. The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity (the switch) but could not be. The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity (the switch).assembly algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out. because their Don't Fragment flag was set. The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this entity (the switch). Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly. but which were discarded (for example. but which were discarded (for example. for lack of buffer space). Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms (notably the algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received.assembled. errors. Note that this counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion.

ipDefaultTTL ipReasmTimeout /stats/l3/route Route Statistics Route statistics: ipRoutesCur: 3 ipRoutesHighWater: 3 ipRoutesMax: 4096 -----------------------------------------------------------------SP Route statistics: SP ipRoutesCur ipRoutesHighWater ipRoutesMax --.------------------. which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity (the switch).------------. which were chosen to be discarded even though they are valid. The maximum number of seconds.0. whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free-up buffer space for other routing entries. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 157 .------------1 3 3 4096 2 3 3 4096 3 3 3 4096 4 3 3 4096 -----------------------------------------------------------------RIP statistics: ripInPkts: ripDiscardPkts: BGP statistics: bgpInPkts: bgpBadPkts: bgpRoutesAdded: bgpRoutesCur: bgpRoutesIgnored: 0 ripOutPkts: 0 ripRoutesAgedOut: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 bgpOutPkts: bgpSessFailures: bgpRoutesRemoved: bgpRoutesFailed: bgpRoutesFiltered: 0 0 0 0 0 315393-J. The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live (TTL) field of the IP header of datagrams originated at this entity (the switch).Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 5-16 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip) Statistics ipRoutingDiscards Description The number of routing entries.

The total number of current BGP routes.Alteon OS 22. The total number of BGP packets sent.2 Command Reference Table 5-17 Route Statistics (/stats/l3/route) Statistics Route Statistics & SP Route Statistics: ipRoutesCur ipRoutesHighWater ipRoutesMax RIP statistics: ripInPkts ripOutPkts ripDiscardPkts The total number of good RIP advertisement packets received. The total number of routes learned via RIP that has aged out.0. The total number of routes that were added to the routing table. bgpRoutesFiltered 158 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. January 2005 . The total number of RIP advertisement packets sent. The total number of outstanding routes in the route table. The total number of BGP routes that failed to add in the routing table. The highest number of routes ever recorded in the route table. The total number of routes dropped by the filter. The maximum number of supported routes. Description ripRoutesAgedOut BGP statistics: bgpInPkts bgpOutPkts bgpBadPkts bgpSessFailures bgpRoutesAdded bgpRoutesRemoved bgpRoutesCur bgpRoutesFailed bgpRoutesIgnored The total number of BGP packets received. The total number of RIP advertisement packets received that were dropped. The total number of routes ignored because the peer was not connected locally or multihop was not configured. The total number of BGP packets dropped. The total number of failed sessions. The total number of routes that were removed from the routing table.

2 Command Reference /stats/l3/arp ARP statistics This menu option enables you to display Address Resolution Protocol statistics. When virtual routers are configured.--------------. The maximum number of ARP entries that are supported. based on a number of priority criteria. If the master fails. you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP: Advertisements received (vrrpInAdvers) Advertisements transmitted (vrrpOutAdvers) Advertisements received.--------------------. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 159 .--------------1 1 1 8192 2 1 1 8192 3 1 1 8192 4 1 1 8192 Table 5-18 ARP Statistics (/stats/l3/arp) Statistics arpEntriesCur arpEntriesHighWater arpEntriesMax Description The total number of outstanding ARP entries in the ARP table. but ignored (vrrpBadAdvers) 315393-J. The highest number of ARP entries ever recorded in the ARP table. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address.0. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master. /stats/l3/vrrp VRRP Statistics Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on the Alteon Application Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. MP ARP statistics: arpEntriesCur: 2 arpEntriesHighWater: 2 arpEntriesMax: 8192 -----------------------------------------------------------------SP ARP statistics: SP arpEntriesCur arpEntriesHighWater arpEntriesMax --.Alteon OS 22. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address.

DNS statistics: dnsInRequests: dnsBadRequests: 0 0 dnsOutRequests: 0 Table 5-20 DNS Statistics (/stats/l3/dns) Statistics dnsInRequests dnsOutRequests dnsBadRequests Description The total number of DNS request packets that have been received. The total number of DNS response packets that have been transmitted.0. /stats/l3/dns DNS Statistics This menu option enables you to display Domain Name System statistics.2 Command Reference The statistics for the VRRP LAN are displayed: VRRP statistics: vrrpInAdvers: vrrpOutAdvers: vrrpBadVersion: vrrpBadAddress: vrrpBadPassword: 0 0 0 0 0 vrrpBadAdvers: vrrpBadVrid: vrrpBadData: vrrpBadInterval: 0 0 0 0 Table 5-19 VRRP Statistics (/stats/l3/vrrp) Statistics vrrpInAdvers vrrpBadAdvers vrrpOutAdvers vrrpBadVersion vrrpBadVrid vrrpBadAddress vrrpBadData vrrpBadPassword vrrpBadInterval Description The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been received. 160 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The total number of VRRP advertisements received that were dropped. January 2005 . The total number of DNS request packets received that were dropped. The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been sent.Alteon OS 22.

The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/icmp ICMP Statistics ICMP statistics: icmpInMsgs: icmpInDestUnreachs: icmpInParmProbs: icmpInRedirects: icmpInEchoReps: icmpInTimestampReps: icmpInAddrMaskReps: icmpOutErrors: icmpOutTimeExcds: icmpOutSrcQuenchs: icmpOutEchos: icmpOutTimestamps: icmpOutAddrMasks: 245802 41 0 0 244350 0 0 0 0 0 253777 0 0 icmpInErrors: icmpInTimeExcds: icmpInSrcQuenchs: icmpInEchos: icmpInTimestamps: icmpInAddrMasks: icmpOutMsgs: icmpOutDestUnreachs: icmpOutParmProbs: icmpOutRedirects: icmpOutEchoReps: icmpOutTimestampReps: icmpOutAddrMaskReps: 1393 0 0 18 0 0 253810 15 0 0 18 0 0 Table 5-21 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp) Statistics icmpInMsgs Description The total number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received. The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 161 . The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received. The number of ICMP Redirect messages received. The number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums. The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received. The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full. The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received.0. stop sending data) messages received. bad length.Alteon OS 22. The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received. and so forth). The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received. icmpInErrors icmpInDestUnreachs icmpInTimeExcds icmpInParmProbs icmpInSrcQuenchs icmpInRedirects icmpInEchos icmpInEchoReps icmpInTimestamps icmpInTimestampReps icmpInAddrMasks 315393-J. Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors. The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received.

The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent. this object will always be zero. In some implementations there may be no types of errors that contribute to this counter's value. The number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffer. icmpOutErrors icmpOutDestUnreachs icmpOutTimeExcds icmpOutParmProbs icmpOutSrcQuenchs icmpOutRedirects icmpOutEchos icmpOutEchoReps icmpOutTimestamps icmpOutTimestampReps icmpOutAddrMasks icmpOutAddrMaskReps 162 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent. This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram. The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent. since hosts do not send redirects. The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent.2 Command Reference Table 5-21 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp) Statistics icmpInAddrMaskReps icmpOutMsgs Description The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received. The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent. The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full. stop sending data) messages sent. The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent. The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent. Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors. The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent. The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent. January 2005 . The total number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) attempted to send.Alteon OS 22. For a host. The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent.0.

Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 163 . The number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sublayer). For packet-oriented interfaces. For any interface which does not support protocol multiplexing. this counter will always be 0. which were addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces. This object is deprecated in favor of ifInMulticastPkts and ifInBroadcastPkts. the number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.0. The number of packets. the number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sublayer). The number of packets. ifInUcastPkts ifInNUCastPkts ifInDiscards ifInErrors ifInUnknownProtos 315393-J. including framing characters. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces which support protocol multiplexing the number of transmission units received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. For packet-oriented interfaces. the number of inbound transmission units that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/if <interface number> Interface Statistics IP interface 1 statistics: ifInOctets: 48948386 ifInNUCastPkts: 167895 ifInErrors: 0 ifOutOctets: 27100789 ifOutNUcastPkts: 218652 ifOutErrors: 0 ifInUcastPkts: ifInDiscards: ifInUnknownProtos: ifOutUcastPkts: ifOutDiscards: ifStateChanges 220553 0 0 441938 0 1 Table 5-22 Interface Statistics (/stats/if) Statistics ifInOctets Description The total number of octets received on the interface.

For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted.Alteon OS 22. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. January 2005 . which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. including framing characters. The number of outbound packets. including those that were discarded or not sent.0.2 Command Reference Table 5-22 Interface Statistics (/stats/if) Statistics ifOutOctets Description The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. the number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors. and which were addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. This object is deprecated in favor of ifOutMulticastPkts and ifOutBroadcastPkts. For packet-oriented interfaces. the number of outbound transmission units that could not be transmitted because of errors. and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. The number of times an interface has transitioned from either down to up or from up to down. ifOutUcastPkts ifOutNUcastPkts ifOutDiscards ifOutErrors ifStateChanges 164 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. including those that were discarded or not sent.

Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 165 . measured in milliseconds.0. this object should contain the value -1. when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3). The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout. The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-SENT state from the CLOSED state. tcpRtoMin tcpRtoMax tcpMaxConn tcpActiveOpens tcpPassiveOpens 315393-J. measured in milliseconds. The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout. In particular. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. an object of this type has the semantics of the UBOUND quantity described in RFC 793. In entities where the maximum number of connections is dynamic. when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3). The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-RCVD state from the LISTEN state.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/tcp TCP Statistics TCP statistics: tcpRtoAlgorithm: tcpRtoMax: tcpActiveOpens: tcpAttemptFails: tcpInSegs: tcpRetransSegs: tcpCurBuff: tcpCurInConn: tcpCurLstnConn: tcpAllocTCBFails: 4 240000 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 tcpRtoMin: tcpMaxConn: tcpPassiveOpens: tcpEstabResets: tcpOutSegs: tcpInErrs: tcpCurConn: tcpCurOutConn: tcpOutRsts: 0 1600 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 Table 5-23 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp) Statistics tcpRtoAlgorithm Description The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting unacknowledged octets. The limit on the total number of TCP connections the entity (the switch) can support. In particular. an object of this type has the semantics of the LBOUND quantity described in RFC 793. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout.

The total number of switch-originated TCP connection requests. The total number of segments received in error (for example. including those received in error. The total number of segments sent. The total number of remotely-initiated TCP connections. The total number of segments received.2 Command Reference Table 5-23 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp) Statistics tcpAttemptFails Description The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the SYN-SENT state or the SYN-RCVD state. including those on current connections but excluding those containing only retransmitted octets. The total number of TCP ports on which the switch is listening. bad TCP checksums). tcpEstabResets tcpInSegs tcpOutSegs tcpRetransSegs tcpInErrs tcpCurBuff tcpCurConn tcpCurInConn tcpCurOutConn tcpCurLstnConn tcpOutRsts tcpAllocTCBFails 166 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The total number of outstanding TCP sessions that are currently opened. This count includes segments received on currently established connections.Alteon OS 22.that is. The number of TCP segments sent containing the RST flag. plus the number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN state from the SYN-RCVD state. The total number of segments retransmitted . The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSEWAIT state.0. January 2005 . the number of TCP segments transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets. The total number of outstanding memory allocations from heap by TCP protocol stack.

Show FTP SLB parsing and NAT stats rtsp .Show WAP SLB stats maint .Dump all SLB statistics 315393-J.Show maintenance stats sip . The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity (the switch). January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 167 . The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at the destination port.Show real server group stats virt .Show auxiliary session table stats dump .Show SIP SLB stats clear .Show DNS SLB stats wap .Show Layer 7 stats ssl . The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/udp UDP Statistics UDP statistics: udpInDatagrams: udpInErrors: 54 0 udpOutDatagrams: udpNoPorts: 43 1578077 Table 5-24 UDP Statistics (/stats/l3/udp) Statistics udpInDatagrams udpOutDatagrams udpInErrors Description The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to the switch.Global SLB Stats Menu real .Clear non-operational Server Load Balancing stats aux . udpNoPorts /stats/slb Server Load Balancing Statistics Menu [Server Load Balancing Statistics Menu] sp .Show virtual server stats filt .Alteon OS 22.Show RTSP SLB stats dns .Show real server stats group .0.SLB Switch SP Stats Menu gslb .Show filter stats layer7 .Show SSL SLB stats ftp .

ftp Displays FTP SLB parsing and NAT statistics. For per-service octet counters. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the virtual server. To view menu options. See page 181 for sample output. gslb Displays the Global SLB Statistics menu. See page 187 for sample output. 168 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. Real server transmit/receive octets. Real server transmit/receive octets. For more information. See page 186 for sample output. For per-service octet counters. see page 170. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays the following virtual server statistics: Current and total sessions for each real server associated with the virtual server. group <real server group number (1-256)> Displays the following real server group statistics: Current and total sessions for each real server in the real server group. See page 181 for sample output. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. layer7 Displays Layer 7 statistics. see page 174. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the real server group. See page 180 for sample output. ssl Displays SSL server load balancing statistics. real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays the following real server statistics: Number of times the real server has failed its health checks Number of sessions currently open on the real server Total sessions the real server was assigned Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server Real server transmit/receive octets See page 179 for sample output. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. see page 179.0.2 Command Reference Table 5-25 SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb) Command Syntax and Usage sp <SP number (1-4)> Displays the server load balancing statistics menu.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 . rtsp Displays RTSP SLB statistics. filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays the total number of times any filter has been used. See page 182 for sample output. See page 190 for sample output. see page 179.

wap Displays WAP SLB statistics. See page 196 for sample output. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 169 .2 Command Reference Table 5-25 SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb) Command Syntax and Usage dns Displays DNS SLB statistics. See page 191 for sample output. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. All related SNMP counters. maint Displays SLB maintenance statistics. See page 194 for sample output. clear [y|n] Clears all non-operating SLB statistics on the Alteon Application Switch. refer to Table 5-48 on page 196. To save dump data to a file. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. resetting them to zero. aux Displays auxiliary session table statistics. This command does not reset the switch and does not affect the following counters: Counters required for Layer 4 and Layer 7 operation (such as current real server sessions). sip Displays SIP SLB statistics.0. To view the statistics reset by this command. 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. See page 192 for sample output. dump Dumps all switch SLB statistics.

maint Displays the SP maintenance statistics.Show maintenance stats aux . See page 171 for a sample output.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/sp Server Load Balancing SP statistics Menu [Server Load Balancing SP Statistics Menu] real . clear Deletes all the SP statistics. filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays statistics of the filter.Show real server group stats virt .0. January 2005 . group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays real server group statistics of the switch port.Show real server stats group .Show filter stats maint .Show virtual server stats filt . See page 171 for a sample output. aux Displays the statistics of the auxiliary session table.Clear SP stats Table 5-26 SP Statistics Menu options (/stats/slb/sp) Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays real server statistics of the switch port.Show auxiliary session table stats clear . /stats/slb/sp/real <real server number> SP Real Server Statistics Port 1 Real server 1 stats: Current sessions: Total sessions: Octets: 3 3 24 170 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays statistics of the virtual server. See page 170 for a sample output. See page 171 for a sample output. See page 172 for a sample output.

-------.10.Alteon OS 22.10.10.100.-------.--------------.100.--------------.10.-------1 200.-------.100.-------40 137 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/virt <virtual server number> SP Virtual Server Statistics Real server group 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.---------.---------.--------------.---------.-------1 200.0. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 171 .14 20 60 9 2 200.-------200.15 20 77 12 ---.14 20 60 9 2 200.--------------.---------.10.100.100.15 20 77 12 ---.100 40 137 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/filt <filter number> SP Filter Statistics SP 1 Filter 1 stats: Total firings: 2 315393-J.-------.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/group <real group server number> SP Real Group Server Statistics Real server group 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.

Number of sessions removed from the session table because the server assigned to them failed and graceful server failure was not enabled. Indicates that the virtual server IP address and MAC are receiving UDP frames when UDP balancing is not turned on. Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a virtual server which was not configured. Indicates the number of non-IP based frames received by the virtual server.0. Terminated Sessions Allocation Failures UDP Datagrams Non TCP/IP Frames Incorrect VIPs 172 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/maint SP Maintenance Statistics SP 1 SLB Maintenance stats: Maximum sessions: Current sessions: 4 second average: 64 second average: Terminated sessions: Allocation failures: Non TCP/IP frames: UDP datagrams: Incorrect VIPs: Incorrect Vports: No available real server: Filtered (denied) frames: LAND attacks: No TCP control bits: Invalid reset packet drops: Total IP fragment sessions: IP fragment sessions: IP fragment discards: IP fragment table full: 524276 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-27 SP Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/sp/maint) Statistic Maximum sessions Current Sessions Description The maximum number of simultaneous sessions supported. Number of session bindings currently in use (the last 4 and 64 seconds). Indicates instances where the Switch ran out of available sessions for a port.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .

Free service pool entries 315393-J. This indicates the number of frames that were dropped because of one of the following reasons: 1. This indicates the number of times a real server failure has occurred and caused a backup server to be brought online. They matched an active filter with the deny action set. The number of packets that were dropped because the packet had no control bits set in the TCP header.0. This counter increases whenever a packet has the same source and destination IP addresses and ports. IP fragment table full This counter indicates how many times session table is full.Alteon OS 22. 2. This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out of service or at their maxcon limit. When there are no available session entries. Current IP fragment sessions IP fragment discards This represents the current number of fragment sessions. The number of fragmented packets that are discarded due to lack of resources. No Available Real Server Backup Server Activations Overflow Server Activations Filtered (Denied) Frames LAND attacks No TCP Control Bits Invalid reset packet drops Total IP fragment ses.This represents the total number of fragment sessions the switch has sions processed so far. There are no real servers (in the case of redirection filters. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 173 . Normally this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client.) 3. but it may be an indication of a potential security probing application like SATAN.2 Command Reference Table 5-27 SP Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/sp/maint) Statistic Incorrect Vports Description This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured. This indicates the number of times a real server has reached the maxcon limit and caused an overflow server to be brought online.

maint To view an example and description of Global SLB maintenance statistics.Clear all Global SLB stats dump . geo Displays Global SLB statistics for the geographical preference. 1-64> Displays Global SLB statistics for the rule.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/gslb Global SLB Statistics Menu [Global SLB Statistics Menu] real . rule <rule. To view an example and description of what is displayed on-screen.Show Global SLB geographical preference stats maint .Show Global SLB virtual server stats site . clear Deletes all Global SLB statistics. see page 176.0. 1-64> Displays Global SLB statistics for the remote site.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 . see page 175. under which the remote server is configured. 1-64> Displays Global SLB statistics for the network. To view an example.Show Global SLB remote site stats network .Show Global SLB rule stats geo . virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> To view an example and description of what is displayed on-screen. site <remote site.Show Global SLB maintenance stats clear . see page 177. see page 175.Show all Global SLB stats Table 5-28 Global SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Where the real server number represents the real server ID on this switch. network <network.Show Global SLB network preference stats rule . dump Displays all Global SLB statistics. 174 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.Show Global SLB remote real server stats virt .

200.gslb.com Server IP address Site DNS directs HTTP redirects -----.----------.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/gslb/real <real server number> Real Server Global SLB Statistics Real server 1 global stats: DNS directs: HTTP redirects: 3210 12 For any remote real server configured for Global Server Load Balancing.-------------v1 200.0.1 0 0 r2 200.Alteon OS 22. the number represents the real server ID on this switch. The remote site number. under which the remote server is configured.200. IP Address Site DNS directs IP address of the server.---.example. The number of DNS responses that return the IP address of the corresponding server. v# represents a local virtual server number r# represents a remote site.--------------. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 175 .--------------.200. Since each remote sites is configured on its peers as if it were a real server (with certain special properties).200.---. 315393-J.10 5 0 0 -----.-------------Totals 0 0 Table 5-29 Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/virt) Field Server Description Type of server configuration and server ID number. the following statistics can be viewed: Number of DNS responses directed to the remote real server Number of HTTP redirects to the remote real server /stats/slb/gslb/virt <virtual server number> Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics Global SLB virtual server 1 http service stats: Domain: www.----------.

176 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. /stats/slb/gslb/site Global SLB Site Statistics Global SLB remote site 1 stats: Bad remote site packets received: DSSPv1 remote site updates sent: DSSPv1 remote site updates received: DSSPv2 remote site updates sent: DSSPv2 remote site updates received: 386 0 0 768 348 Table 5-30 Global SLB Site Statistics Parameters (/stats/slb/gslb/site) Field Bad remote site packets received DSSPv1 remote site updates sent DSSPv1 remote site updates received DSSPv2 remote site updates sent DSSPv2 remote site updates received Description The number of bad packets received from remote site.2 Command Reference Table 5-29 Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/virt) Field HTTP redirects Description The number of HTTP requests redirected to the corresponding server. The number of remote site updates sent using DSSP version 2. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22. The number of remote site updates received using DSSP version 2. The number of remote site updates sent using DSSP version 1. The number of remote site updates received using DSSP version 1.0.

DSSPv1 remote site updates sent DSSPv1 remote site updates received DSSPv2 remote site updates sent DSSPv2 remote site updates received 315393-J. If bad updates or dropped packets occur. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version one updates/packets sent to the remote sites.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/gslb/maint Global SLB Maintenance Statistics Global SLB maintenance stats: Bad remote site packets received: DSSPv1 remote site updates sent: DSSPv1 remote site updates received: DSSPv2 remote site updates sent: DSSPv2 remote site updates received: DNS queries received: Bad DNS queries received: DNS responses sent: HTTP requests received: Bad HTTP requests received: HTTP responses sent: Hostname domain hits: Network domain hits: Basic domain hits: No server selected for hostname domain: No server selected for network domain: No server selected for basic domain: No matching domain: Last no result domain: Last source IP: 0 0 0 127746 85164 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 177 .Alteon OS 22.0.0 Table 5-31 Global SLB Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/maint) Field Bad remote site packets received Description The number of bad packets received from the remote site. check your syslog for configuration error messages. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version two updates/packets received from the remote sites.0. Bad updates or dropped packets usually indicate that there is a configuration problem at local or remote GSLB switches. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version two updates/packets sent to the remote sites. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version one updates/packets received from the remote sites.

Bad HTTP requests received The number of bad/dropped client HTTP requests.0. HTTP responses sent Hostname domain hits Network domain hits Basic domain hits No server selected for hostname domain No server selected for network domain No server selected for basic domain No matching domain Last no result domain Last source IP 178 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. or the network domain configured. The number of bad DNS queries received. The number of times the DNS queries received matched for the hostname configured. The number of times the DNS queries received matched for the basic domain name configured.2 Command Reference Table 5-31 Global SLB Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/maint) Field DNS queries received Bad DNS queries received DNS responses sent Description The number of DNS queries received. or the network domain configured. The number of times the DNS queries received did not match the host name. The source IP address of the last DNS query or HTTP request received. The number of times no server was selected after matching the basic domain name. domain name. The number of times the DNS queries received matched for the network domain name configured. The number of HTTP responses sent by the switch that includes HTTP redirects. Client HTTP GET request packets that do not contain the entire URL are considered bad and are dropped. HTTP requests received The number of HTTP requests received.Alteon OS 22. The number of times no server was selected after matching the host name domain. The number of times no server was selected after matching the network domain name. The number of DNS responses sent by the switch that includes DNS directs and DNS error responses. The domain in the last DNS query received that did not match the host name. January 2005 . domain name.

you can configure IP address 10. Configure a separate IP address for each service on each server being load balanced. The total number of sessions that have been established to the particular real server.1. These counters are then added to report the total octets for each virtual server. For instance. 315393-J. and 10.1. Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Per Service Octet Counters For each load-balanced real server. the octet counters represent the combined number of transmit and receive bytes (octets).20 for HTTP services.0.21 for FTP services on the same physical server. The octet counters are provided per server–not per service. not per service. The total number of octets sent by the particular real server. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 179 . unless configured as described in “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 179. Table 5-32 Real Server SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/real) Statistics Current sessions Description The total number of outstanding sessions that are established to the particular real server.1. The highest number of sessions ever recorded for the particular real server.1.Alteon OS 22. If you need octet counters on a perservice basis. you can accomplish this through the following configuration: 1.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/real <real server number> Real Server SLB Statistics Real server 1 stats: Current sessions: Total sessions: Highest sessions: Octets 129 65478 4343 523824000 NOTE – Octets are provided per server.

configure a real server with a real IP address for each service above. 4.15 20 77 12 ---. and group each appropriate real server IP address into the group that handles the specific service.14 20 60 9 2 200.Alteon OS 22. On the Alteon Application Switch. 180 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. On the Alteon Application Switch. configure one real server group for each type of service. Configure a virtual server and add the appropriate services to that virtual server.2 Command Reference 2. two real servers would be configured for the physical server (representing each real service). If there were five physical servers providing the two services (HTTP and FTP).---------.10.-------1 200.-------. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the real server group.10.100.-------. see the procedure on “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 179. 10 real servers would have to be configured: five for the HTTP services on each physical server. January 2005 . Real server transmit/receive octets. /stats/slb/group <real server group number> Real Server Group Statistics Real server group 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.--------------. Continuing the example above.--------------. and five for the FTP services on each physical server.100.-------40 137 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 Real server group statistics include the following: Current and total sessions for each real server in the real server group. two groups would be configured: one for handling HTTP and one for handling FTP. Thus. 3. For per-service octet counters. in keeping with our example.0.---------. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server.

-------. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 181 .20 40 309 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 NOTE – The virtual server IP address is shown on the last line. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server.14 20 60 9 2 200.--------------.100. Virtual server statistics include the following: Current and total sessions for each real server associated with the virtual server. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the virtual server.-------. see “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 179.---------. /stats/slb/filt <filter number> Filter SLB Statistics Filter 1 stats: Total firings: 1011 You can obtain the total number of times any filter has been matched. For per-service octet counters.100.-------1 200.10.100. Real server transmit/receive octets.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/virt <virtual server number> Virtual Server SLB Statistics Virtual server 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.15 20 77 12 ---.-------200.Alteon OS 22. below the real server IP addresses. 315393-J.--------------.0.10.10.---------.

Show URL Redirection stats str .The total number of HTTP requests forwarded from straight to the gin server hits origin server. /stats/slb/layer7/redir Layer7 Redirection Statistics Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total URL based web cache redirection stats: cache server hits: origin server hits: straight to origin server hits: none-GETs hits: 'Cookie: ' hits: no-cache hits: RTSP cache server hits: RTSP origin server hits: HTTP redirection hits: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-34 Layer 7 Redirection Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/redir) Statistics Description Total cache server hits The total number of HTTP requests redirected to the cache server.Show Layer 7 Maintenance stats Table 5-33 SLB Layer 7 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/layer7) Command Syntax & Usage redir Displays URL Redirection statistics. str Displays SLB string statistics. Total origin server hits The total number of HTTP requests forwarded to the origin server. January 2005 .Show SLB String stats maint . maint Displays Layer 7 maintenance statistics. See page 184 for a sample output. 182 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. See page 182 for a sample output.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/layer7 SLB Layer7 Statistics Menu [Layer 7 Statistics Menu] redir . See page 183 for a sample output. Total straight to ori.Alteon OS 22.0. Total none-GETs hits The total number of none GET requests forwarded to the origin server.

The total number of RTSP requests forwarded to the origin server.[nopqrstuvwxyz]*.com 4 www. /stats/slb/layer7/str Layer 7 SLB String Statistics SLB String stats: ID SLB String 1 any 2 www. The total number of instances that are load-balanced due to matching of the particular URL ID.com 6 www.org Hits 1527115 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-35 Layer 7 SLB String Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/str) Statistics ID SLB String Hits Description The user-defined strings being used in URL matching.[nopqrstuvwxyz]*. The total number of requests containing no-cache header forwarded to the origin server. The total number of HTTP requests that were redirected by redirection filter. The total number of RTSP requests redirected to the cache server. 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 5-34 Layer 7 Redirection Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/redir) Statistics Total 'Cookie:' hits Total no-cache hits Total RTSP cache server hits Total RTSP origin server hits Total HTTP redirection hits Description The total number of cookie requests forwarded to the origin server.com 5 www.Alteon OS 22.abc.0.junk.org 7 www.com 3 www.[abcdefghijklm]*.[abcdefjhijklm]*. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 183 .

0 Clients reset by switch on server side Connection Splicing to support HTTP/1. The total number of connection swapping between different real servers in supporting multiple HTTP/1. This means that when the switch could not connect to the real sever and the client’s retries exceeded the threshold due to delayed binding.1 client requests. the switch will send a reset frame to the client to terminate the connection.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/layer7/maint Layer 7 SLB Maintenance Statistics Layer 7 maintenance stats: Clients reset by switch on client side: 0 Clients reset by switch on server side: 0 Connection Splicing to support HTTP/1.Alteon OS 22.0.1: 0 Invalid HTTP methods: 0 Aged delayed binding sessions: 0 Half open connections: 0 Switch retries: 0 Random early drops: 0 Requests exceeded 9000 bytes: 0 Invalid 3-way handshakes: 0 Exceeded max frame size: 0 Out of order packet drops: 0 Current SP[1] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP[2] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP[3] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP[4] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP memory units: 5040 Current SEQ buffer entries: 0 Highest: Current Data buffer use: 0 Highest: Current SP buffer entries: 0 Highest: Total Nonzero SEQ Alloc: 0 Total SEQ Buffer Allocs: 0 Total SEQ Frees: Total Data Buffer Allocs: 0 Total Data Frees: Alloc Fails . January 2005 .1 184 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The number of reset frames sent to the server by the switch during server connection termination due to delayed binding.Ubufs: Max sessions per bucket: 0 Max frames per session: Max bytes buffered (sess): 0 1260 1260 1260 1260 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-36 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint) Statistics Clients reset by switch on client side Description The number of reset frames sent to the client by the switch during server connection termination.Seq buffers: 0 Alloc Fails .

Aged delayed binding sessions Half open connections Switch retries Random early drops Requests exceeded 4500 bytes Invalid 3-way handshakes Exceeded max frame size Out of order packet drops: Current SP memory units Current SEQ buffer entries Highest SEQ buffer entries Current Data buffer use Highest Data buffer use Total Nonzero SEQ Alloc Total SEQ Buffer Allocs Total SEQ Frees 315393-J. The total number of aged delayed binding sessions caused by failed connection initialization between the switch and the server. It is incremented when the switch responds to TCP SYN packet and decremented upon receiving TCP SYN ACK packet from the requester. The total number of TCP packets dropped because they were received out of order. The total number of GET requests that exceeded 4500 bytes. The total number of sequence buffer allocated.Alteon OS 22.0. The total number of dropped frames because of invalid 3-way hand shakes.2 Command Reference Table 5-36 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint) Statistics Invalid HTTP methods Description The total number of HTTP requests that contain invalid methods sent by the client. The highest number of sequence buffers ever used.2 The total number of sequence buffer allocations. The number of outstanding sequence buffers used. The total number of switch retries to connect to the real server. The total number of SYN frames dropped when the buffer is low. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 185 . The total number of switch-generated frames that exceeded the maximum allowed frame size. The currently available SP memory units. The highest number of data buffers ever used. The total number of sequence buffer is freed. The number of outstanding data buffers used. The total numbers of outstanding TCP connections that are half opened.

-------. The maximum number of items (sessions) allowed in the session table hash bucket chain.-------Unique SessionIds 0 0 0 SSL connections 0 0 0 Persistent Port Sessions 0 0 0 Table 5-37 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics (/stats/slb/ssl) Statistics SSL SLB maintenance stats SessionId allocation fails Total number of SSL ID reassignments Description Debug stats for SSL SessionId based persistence. The number of times the URL data buffer allocation failed. The number of times sequence buffer allocation failed.Seq buffers Alloc Fails . January 2005 . The number of times allocation of a session table entry failed when attempting to store a SessionId in the table.2 The total of number buffers freed. /stats/slb/ssl SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics SSL SLB maintenance stats: SessionId allocation fails: Total number of SSL ID reassignments: 0 0 Current Total Highest Sessions Sessions Sessions ------------------------.---------. 186 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. Max bytes buffered (sess) The maximum number of bytes to be buffered per session.2 Command Reference Table 5-36 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint) Statistics Total Data Buffer Allocs Total Data Frees Alloc Fails .Alteon OS 22.0.Ubufs Max sessions per bucket Description The total number of buffers allocated to store client request. Max frames per session The maximum number of frames to be buffered per session.

these should all bind to the same server.Show dump . This number shows the number of unique SSL sessions seen on the switch. parsing Shows parsing statistics. See page 189 for sample output. SSL connections Persistent Port Sessions /stats/slb/ftp File Transfer Protocol SLB and Filter Statistics Menu [FTP SLB parsing and active .0. maint Shows maintenance statistics.Show maint . The number of SessionIds maintained to allow for persistence across different client ports.2 Command Reference Table 5-37 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics (/stats/slb/ssl) Statistics Description The table shows the Current Sessions. The number of different TCP connections using SSL service. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 187 . See page 188 for sample output. dump Shows all FTP SLB/NAT statistics. See page 189. the total sessions seen on the switch since last reset and the high water mark of current sessions for the following: Unique SessionIds Many SSL sessions can use the same SessionId.Show parsing .Alteon OS 22. See page 188 for sample output. 315393-J.Dump Filter Statistics Menu] active FTP NAT filter stats FTP SLB parsing server stats FTP maintenance stats all FTP SLB/NAT stats Table 5-38 FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/ftp) Command Syntax and Usage active Shows active FTP SLB parsing and filter statistics.

January 2005 . The number of times the switch receives both active and passive FTP connections.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/ftp/active Active FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics Total Active FTP NAT stats(PORT): Total FTP: Total New Active FTP Index: Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff: 0 0 0 Table 5-39 Active FTP Slb Parsing and Filter statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/active) Statistics Total Active FTP NAT stats (PORT) Total FTP Total New Active FTP Index Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff Description The number of times the switch receives the port command from the client. The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the Switch needs for packet adjustment. /stats/slb/ftp/parsing Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics Total FTP SLB Parsing Stats(PASV): Total FTP: Total New FTP SLB parsing Index: FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff: 0 0 0 Table 5-40 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/parsing) Statistics Total FTP Description The number of times the switch receives both active and passive FTP connections. The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the switch needs FTP SLB parsing. Total New FTP SLB parsing Index FTP SLB parsing ACK/ SEQ diff 188 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The number of times the switch creates a new index due to port command from the client.Alteon OS 22.0. The number of times the switch creates a new index in response to the pasv command from the client.

2 Command Reference /stats/slb/ftp/maint FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics FTP mode switch error: 0 Table 5-41 FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/maint) Statistics FTP mode switch error Description The number of times the switch is not able to switch modes from active to passive and vice versa.0. Total FTP NAT Filtered The total number of FTP NAT filter sessions that occurred. Total new active FTP NAT Index Total new FTP SLB parsing Index FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff FTP SLB parsing ACK/ SEQ diff FTP mode switch error The total number of new data sessions created for FTP NAT filter in active mode. The total number of times the adjustment between ACK and SEQ occurred on the filter.Alteon OS 22. The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the switch needs for FTP SLB parsing. The number of times the switch creates a new index in response to the pasv command from the client. /stats/slb/ftp/dump FTP SLB Statistics Dump Total FTP : Total FTP NAT Filtered: Total new active FTP NAT Index: Total new FTP SLB parsing Index: FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff: FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff: FTP mode switch error: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-42 FTP SLB Statistics Dump (/stats/slb/ftp/dump) Statistics Total FTP Description The total number of FTP sessions that occurred. The number of times the switch could not switch mode from active to passive and vice versa. 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 189 .

Redirect ConnectionDenied BufferAllocs AllocFailures 190 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The total number of buffer allocations used.---------.0.---------.---------. The total number of times the connections got denied due to shortage of resources or the real server being down.---------. The total number of times the buffer allocation failed.---------.---------.---------.Alteon OS 22. The number depends upon the type of media player being used. January 2005 . The total number of UDP connections for data channels.---------1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 -.---------.-------0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-43 RTSP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/rtsp) Statistics ControlConnection UDP Streams Description The total number of TCP connections for RTSP control connection.---------. The total number of times the connection got redirected.---------.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/rtsp RTSP SLB Statistics Control UDP Connection Buffer Alloc SP Connection Streams Redirect Denied Allocs Failures -.

Alteon OS 22. The total number of times the user failed to find a real server which has the same layer 7 strings that match the domain name to be resolved. The total number of DNS queries that contain more than one domain name to be resolved. Total number of domain name parse errors Total number of failed real server name matches Total number of DNS parsing internal errors 315393-J. The total number of out of memory and other unexpected errors the user gets while processing the DNS query. Currently only one domain name resolution per request is supported. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 191 .2 Command Reference /stats/slb/dns DNS SLB Statistics Total Total Total Total Total Total Total number number number number number number number of of of of of of of TCP DNS queries: UDP DNS queries: invalid DNS queries: multiple DNS queries: domain name parse errors: failed real server name matches: DNS parsing internal errors: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-44 DNS SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/dns) Statistics Total number of TCP DNS queries Total number of UDP DNS queries Total number of invalid DNS queries Total number of multiple DNS queries Description The total number of DNS queries that received through TCP connections. The total number of DNS queries that have short or invalid domain names to be resolved. The total number of DNS queries received through UDP requests.0. The total number of malformed DNS queries received.

2 Command Reference /stats/slb/wap WAP SLB Statistics This command displays all the Radius and WAP related counters. Indicates instances where the switch ran out of available bindings for a port. January 2005 . This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured.SP dead: 0 req fails. 192 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a virtual server which was not configured.SP dead: 0 req fails. incorrect VIPs incorrect Vports no available real server requests to wrong SP The number of session add/delete requests sent to the wrong SP.SP dead: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------RADIUS Snooping stats: acct reqs: 0 acct wrap reqs: 0 acct start reqs: 0 acct update reqs: 0 acct stop reqs: 0 acct bad reqs: 0 acct reqs(FIP): 0 acct reqs(no FIP): 0 add session reqs: 0 del session reqs: 0 req fails. Normally this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client.DMA: 0 Table 5-45 WAP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/wap) Statistics Description WAP Maintenance stats: current sessions allocation failures The number of session bindings currently in use. WAP Maintenance stats: current sessions: 0 allocation failures: 0 incorrect VIPs: 0 incorrect Vports: 0 no available real server: 0 requests to wrong SP: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------TPCP External Notification stats: add session reqs: 0 del session reqs: 0 req fails.Alteon OS 22.0. This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out of service or at their maxcon limit.

The number of add-request failures due to dead target SP. RADIUS Snooping stats: acct reqs acct wrap reqs The number of RADIUS Accounting frames received. The number of RADIUS Accounting Stop frames received. The number of WAP session add requests via RADIUS snooping.0. The number of RADIUS Accounting Start frames received. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 193 .2 Command Reference Table 5-45 WAP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/wap) Statistics Description TPCP External Notification stats: add session reqs req fails. acct start reqs acct update reqs acct stop reqs acct bad reqs add session reqs del session reqs req fails. The number of WAP session delete requests via RADIUS snooping. The number of add/delete requests failed due to DMA write failure. The number of bad RADIUS Accounting frames received.SP dead The number of WAP session add requests via TPCP.SP dead req fails. The number of RADIUS Accounting Update frames. The number of add/delete request failures due to dead target SP.DMA 315393-J. The number of wrapped RADIUS Accounting frames received.Alteon OS 22.

Alteon OS 22. Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a virtual server which was not configured. Allocation Failures Indicates instances where the Switch ran out of available sessions for a port. Table 5-46 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/maint) Statistic Maximum sessions Current Sessions Description The maximum number of simultaneous sessions supported.0. Indicates the number of non-IP based frames received by the virtual server. Number of session bindings currently in use (the last 4 and 64 seconds). January 2005 .2 Command Reference /stats/slb/maint SLB Maintenance Statistics SLB Maintenance stats: Maximum sessions: Current sessions: 4 second average: 64 second average: Terminated sessions: Allocation failures: UDP datagrams: Non TCP/IP frames: Incorrect VIPs: Incorrect Vports: No available real server: Backup server activations: Overflow server activations: Filtered (denied) frames: LAND attacks: No TCP control bits: Invalid reset packet drops: Total IP fragment sessions: Current IP fragment sessions IP fragment discards: IP fragment table full: Free Service pool entries: 2097104 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8192 SLB Maintenance statistics are described in the following table. Terminated Sessions Number of sessions removed from the session table because the server assigned to them failed and graceful server failure was not enabled. 194 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. UDP Datagrams Non TCP/IP Frames Incorrect VIPs Indicates that the virtual server IP address and MAC are receiving UDP frames when UDP balancing is not turned on.

The number of fragmented packets that are discarded due to lack of resources. Invalid reset packet drops Total IP fragment sessions Current IP fragment sessions IP fragment discards IP fragment table full Free service pool entries This represents the total number of fragment sessions the switch has processed so far.0. This indicates the number of frames that were dropped because they matched an active filter with the deny action set. This counter indicates how many times session table is full. 315393-J. This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out of service or at their maxcon limit. This indicates the number of times a real server has reached the maxcon limit and caused an overflow server to be brought online.2 Command Reference Table 5-46 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/maint) Statistic Incorrect Vports Description This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured. but it may be an indication of a potential security probing application like SATAN. No Available Real Server Backup Server Activations Overflow Server Activations Filtered (Denied) Frames LAND attacks No TCP Control Bits The number of packets that were dropped because the packet had no control bits set in the TCP header. This represents the current number of fragment sessions. This indicates the number of times a real server failure has occurred and caused a backup server to be brought online.Alteon OS 22. Normally this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client. This counter increases whenever a packet has the same source and destination IP addresses and ports. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 195 .

January 2005 . /stats/slb/clear Clearing the SLB Statistics The following statistics are reset to zero when the clear command is given and confirmed: Table 5-48 SLB Statistics Reset (/stats/slb/clear) Statistics Real server stats: Description Health check failures Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Real server group stats: Virtual server stats 196 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. Total number of SIP Incomplete Messages Total number of packets received which do not have the complete SIP message in a single packet.Alteon OS 22.0. The total number of errors encountered during server processing when parsing an incoming SIP packet.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/sip SIP SLB Statistics SIP Stats: Total number Total number Total number Total number of of of of SIP SIP SIP SIP Client Parse Errors Server Parse Errors Unknown Method packets Incomplete Messages : : : : 0 0 0 0 Table 5-47 SIP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/sip) Statistics Total number of SIP Client Parse Errors Total number of SIP Server Parse Errors Description The total number of errors encountered during client processing when parsing an incoming SIP packet. Total number of SIP Total number of packets received with methods not known to the Unknown Method packets SIP parser on the switch.

Total sessions Real server group: Octets. Total sessions Virtual server: Octets. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 197 . per port Description Total firings Real server stats: Octets. Total sessions Total firings: Octets Per real server: DNS handoffs HTTP redirects Per server group: DNS handoffs HTTP redirects Redir: Total cache server hits Total origin server hits Total none-GETs hits Total 'Cookie: ' hits Total no-cache hits LB: ID SLB String hits Total Sessions Highest Sessions Total FTP Total FTP NAT Filtered Total new active FTP NAT Index Total new FTP SLB parsing Index FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff Health check failures Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Global SLB stats URL SLB and Redirection stats SSL SLB stats FTP SLB parsing and NAT stats Real server stats Real server group stats Virtual server stats 315393-J.0.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 5-48 SLB Statistics Reset (/stats/slb/clear) Statistics Filter stats SLB switch port stats.

rcont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract rate statistics.Show BWM IP user stats for iplimit contracts dump . ipusers Displays Bandwidth Management IP user stats for iplimit contracts. Each IP address is limited to the user limit configured in /cfg/bwm/contract on page 281.2 Command Reference /stats/bwm BWM Statistics Menu [Bandwidth Management Statistics Menu] port . See page 203 for sample output. hist Displays bandwidth management history statistics. dump Displays all bandwidth management statistics. clear Clears all bandwidth management statistics. See page 200 for details. 198 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.Clear BWM statistics Table 5-49 Bandwidth Management Statistics Menu Options (/stats/bwm) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays Switch Port Contract Statistics Menu.Switch Port Contract Stats Menu cont . See page 201 for details.Dump all BWM statistics clear . see page 199. January 2005 .0. To view menu options.BW Contract rate stats hist . See page 204 for sample output. cont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract statistics.BW Contract stats rcont . See page 204 for sample output.BW History stats maint . maint Displays bandwidth management maintenance statistics.Alteon OS 22.Show BWM maint statistics ipusers .

-----1 cont1 40465360 262049256 0 16320 2 cont2 0 0 0 16320 20 cont20 674252832 1798583472 16384 16320 26 cont26 0 0 0 16320 256 Default 772710 0 0 16320 /stats/bwm/port <port number>/rcont BWM Switch Processor Rate Contract Statistics This command repeats its output when the printed lines are less than the configured CLI lines per screen.0.BW Contract stats rcont . January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 199 .BW Contract rate stats Table 5-50 Management Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/bwm/sp) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract statistics. See page 199 for a sample output.------. /stats/bwm/port <port number>/cont BWM Switch Processor Contract Statistics Menu BW Contract statistics Contract Name Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------.---------.Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines ? lines sets lines-per-screen 0-300. For example: >> AAS_2424 . the command will continue to repeat its output until you type a key on the console or telnet session. You can configure the number of CLI lines per screen using the global (hidden) command: lines <number of lines>.Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines Current lines-per-screen: 24 >> AAS_2424 . zero for infinite 315393-J. If the CLI lines are configured at zero per screen.---------.Alteon OS 22.--------------. rcont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract rate statistics.2 Command Reference /stats/bwm/port <port number> BWM Switch Processor Statistics [Bandwidth Management Port Statistics Menu] cont .

The contract name.--------------. January 2005 .---------. Table 5-51 Bandwidth Management Contract Statistics (/stats/bwm/cont) Statistics Contract Name Octets Description The contract number. The number of octets that are being discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limit permits.0. Discards 200 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.-----1 cont1 223868832 568900584 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 224149728 568632456 16384 456960 25 cont25 0 0 0 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 401270 0 0 456960 The following description of statistics applies on a specific switch port for all enabled contracts.---------. The number of octets that are being transmitted through a particular contract since the switch is booted.----1 cont1 0 40465360 262049256 0 16320 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 16320 20 cont20 5230 682947936 1822133376 16384 16320 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 16320 256 Default 0 773974 0 0 16320 1 cont1 0 40465360 262049256 0 16320 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 16320 20 cont20 5238 684289056 1825753104 16384 16320 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 16320 256 Default 0 774114 0 0 16320 /stats/bwm/cont <contract number> BWM Contract Statistics BW Contract statistics Contract Name Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------.2 Command Reference BW Contract statistics Contract Name Rate(Kbps) Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------.------. NOTE – This command displays enabled contracts only.------.---------.--------------.Alteon OS 22.---------.---------.

BufMax /stats/bwm/rcont BWM Contract Rate Statistics Use this command to show the rate statistics of all the enabled contracts.Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines Current lines-per-screen: 24 >> AAS_2424 .Alteon OS 22. zero for infinite 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 201 .0. Maximum buffer space that can be used to store the packets before they can be transmitted. NOTE – This command displays enabled contracts only.Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines ? lines sets lines-per-screen 0-300. The switch starts dropping the packets of a particular contract after the maximum buffer space allocated for that contract is being occupied. If the CLI lines are configured at zero per screen. For example: >> AAS_2424 . You can configure the number of CLI lines per screen using the global (hidden) command: lines <number of lines>. the command will continue to repeat its output until you type a key on the console or telnet session.2 Command Reference Table 5-51 Bandwidth Management Contract Statistics (/stats/bwm/cont) Statistics BufUsed Description The current amount of buffer space used to store the packets that is waiting to be transmitted. This command repeats its output when the printed lines are less than the configured CLI lines per screen.

---------.Alteon OS 22. Maximum buffer space that can be used to store the packets before they can be transmitted.2 Command Reference BW Contract statistics Contract Name Rate(Kbps) Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------. The switch starts dropping the packets of a particular contract after the maximum buffer space allocated for that contract is being occupied.---------.----1 cont1 5222 285408288 735607152 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5238 285720864 735308784 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 4 517182 0 0 456960 1 cont1 5230 286747296 739228896 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5230 287059872 738930528 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 8 519400 0 0 456960 1 cont1 5222 288084192 742853160 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5238 288400992 742550760 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 8 521578 0 0 456960 Table 5-52 Bandwidth Management Contract Rate Statistics (/stats/bwm/rcont) Statistics Contract Name Rate (in Kbps) Description The contract number. Rate at which the packets are going out of the switch on a particular contract. The number of octets that are being discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limits. Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax 202 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.---------.0.------. The current amount of buffer space used to store the packets that is waiting to be transmitted. January 2005 . The contract name.--------------. The number of octets that are being transmitted through a particular contract since the switch is booted.

124 1 filter_number01 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.23.80.23.Alteon OS 22.80.80.124 4 filter_number04 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.23.80.124 6 filter_number06 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.---------47.80.124 256 Default 608 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 Switch IP Cont Name Octets You can dump the stats kept in the SMTP history buffer that get dumped periodically when an E-mail is sent.80.124 9 filter_number09 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.0.---------.23.---------.23. Indicates the time the packets were received or discarded.23. Table 5-53 Bandwidth Management History Statistics (/stats/bwm/hist) Statistics Contract Octets Discards Description The contract number for which history is enabled. The number of octets discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limit permits.80.124 5 filter_number05 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47. TimeStamp 315393-J.124 8 filter_number08 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 203 .2 Command Reference /stats/bwm/hist BWM History Statistics Discards TimeStamp YyyyMmDd:Hr:Mi/TmZone --------------. The sampling is done at one-minute intervals. This command is used to keep long term history only for the contracts that are enabled and have history command turned on.124 3 filter_number03 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.124 10 filter_number10 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.23. Use this command to show the history of all the contracts for which history command is enabled.124 7 filter_number07 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.23.23.---------------.23.80. The number of octets sent out on a particular contract.23.80.80.80.124 2 filter_number02 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.---.

2 Command Reference /stats/bwm/maint BWM Maintenance Statistics BWM Maint statistics -----------------------------------------------------------------Maint Stats for rate limiting contracts Discard pkts 0 Discard octets 0 Out pkts 0 Out octets 0 Transmit failed 0 User Limit entry allocation failures 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Maint Stats for traffic shaping contracts QFull Discard pkts 0 QFull Discard octets 0 Out of buffers pkts 0 Out of buffers pkts 0 Transmit failed 0 TDT set when qfull 0 TDT set between soft and hard 0 TDT set at soft 0 /stats/bwm/ipusers BWM IP Users Statistics This command displays the number of BWM IP user entries for each BWM contract for each SP.---------.---------.---------.Alteon OS 22.---------0 20 0 0 20 204 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.---------10 0 10 0 0 10 11 0 10 0 0 10 ---------.---------.---------.---------.---------. January 2005 . BWM IP users statistics Contract SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 Total -------.0.

2 Command Reference /stats/mp Management Processor Statistics [MP-specific Statistics Menu] pkt . see page 206. To view a sample output and a description of the stats. 315393-J. mem Displays memory statistics. cpu Displays CPU utilization for periods of up to 1. To view a sample output. ucb Displays all UDP control blocks that are in use. sfd Displays all Socket File Descriptors that are in use. see page 209. To view a sample output and a description of the stats. to check for leads and load. 4.Show All UDP control blocks in use sfd .Show Packet and TCP stats tcb . see page 208.Show All Socket FD in use cpu .Show All TCP control blocks in use ucb . and 64 seconds.Show CPU utilization mem . see page 208.0. tcb Displays all TCP control blocks that are in use. see page 209. To view a sample output and a description of the stats. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 205 .Alteon OS 22.Show memory stats Table 5-54 Management Processor Statistics Menu Options (/stats/mp) Command Syntax and Usage pkt Displays packet statistics. To view a sample output.

January 2005 . 206 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. The highest number of packet allocation with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packet allocations with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packet allocations with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packets freed from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packet allocations with size between 1536 bytes to 9K bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. smalls hi-watermark The highest number of packet allocation with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packet allocation failures from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.0. Total number of times the packet buffers are freed (released) to the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Description frees mediums jumbos smalls alloc fails frees mediums hi-watermark jumbos hi-watermark The highest number of packet allocation with size between 1536 bytes to 9K bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.2 Command Reference /stats/mp/pkt MP Packet Statistics Packet counts: allocs: mediums: jumbos: smalls: alloc fails: TCP counts: allocs: current: alloc fails: 89262 0 0 0 0 4866 46 0 frees: mediums hi-watermark: jumbos hi-watermark: smalls hi-watermark: packet discards: frees: current hi-watermark: alloc discards: 89262 4 0 4 0 4827 146 0 Table 5-55 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt) Statistics Packet counts: allocs Total number of packet allocations from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.

2 Command Reference Table 5-55 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt) Statistics packet discards Description The number of packets that are discarded by the MP.Alteon OS 22.0. The packets are discarded because MP memory resources are not available. Total number of TCP packet allocation failures from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. The number of TCP packets that are discarded by the MP. The packets are discarded because buffer resources are not available or the buffer threshold is reached and the low priority packets are discarded. Total number of TCP packet allocations from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of times the TCP packet buffers are freed (released) to MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 207 . current alloc fails frees current hi-watermark alloc discards 315393-J. TCP counts: allocs Total number of TCP packet allocations from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. The highest number of TCP packet allocation from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack.

0.81.0.0/47.16.0.80.59 80 23 listen established Table 5-56 MP Specified TCP Statistics (/stats/mp/tcb) Statistics 117f6d00/117f81a8 0.0/47.6 1331 <=> 47.0.27.81.6 0/1331 0.0.0 0 <=> 0.0.27.Alteon OS 22.0 117f81a8: 47.0.16.0. January 2005 .0.59 80/23 listen/established Description Memory Destination IP address Destination port Source IP Source port State /stats/mp/ucb UCB Statistics All UDP allocated control blocks: 161: listen 1985: listen 3122: listen Table 5-57 UCB Statistics on MP (/stats/mp/ucb) Field 161/1985/3122 Listen Description UDP port number State 208 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.80.2 Command Reference /stats/mp/tcb TCP Statistics All TCP allocated control blocks: 117f6d00: 0.

0.31 81 23 22 443 listen listen listen listen TCP TCP TCP TCP /stats/mp/cpu CPU Statistics This menu option enables you to display the CPU utilization statistics on MP.0 server 2 -1 18 108d5cfc: 0. The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last 64 second interval.31 0 <=> 47.88.Alteon OS 22.0.0 server 3 -1 19 1180a258: 0.0.0.133.0 server 0 <=> 47.88.2 Command Reference /stats/mp/sfd MP-Specific SFD Statistics All Socket FD allocated: 0 -1 16 1180b128: 0. The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last four second interval. cpuUtil4Seconds cpuUtil64Seconds 315393-J.0.0.31 0 <=> 47.133.88.133.133.31 0 <=> 47. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 209 .0.0. CPU utilization: cpuUtil1Second: cpuUtil4Seconds: cpuUtil64Seconds: 100% 100% 100% Table 5-58 CPU Statistics (stats/mp/cpu) Statistics cpuUtil1Second Description The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last one second interval.0.0 server 1 -1 17 108c5bd8: 0.88.

To view a sample output and a description of the stats. see page 211.Show maintenance stats clear .2 Command Reference /stats/sp <SP Number> SP Specific Statistics [SP-specific Statistics Menu] maint . and MP DOS shield statistics. Layer 2 FDB maintenance statistics. Displays what percentage of the CPU has been utilized.Clear maintenance stats cpu . January 2005 .Show CPU utilization Table 5-59 SP Specific Statistics (/stats/sp) Statistics maint Description Displays internal statistics.Alteon OS 22. clear cpu 210 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.0. See page 211 for a sample output. Deletes all the maintenance statistics.

315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 211 .Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /stats/sp <SP number>/maint SP-Specific Maintenance Statistics Maintenance statistics for SP 1: Receive Letter success from MP: 158648 Receive Letter success from SP 2: 0 Receive Letter success from SP 3: 0 Receive Letter success from SP 4: 0 Receive Letter errors from MP: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 2: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 3: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 4: 0 Send Letter success to MP: 125516 Send Letter success to SP 2: 0 Send Letter success to SP 3: 6799 Send Letter success to SP 4: 6791 Send Letter failures to MP: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 2: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 3: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 4: 0 learnErrNoddw: 0 resolveErrNoddw: ageMPNoddw: 0 deleteMiss: pfdbFreeEmpty: 0 arpDiscards: 0 icmpDiscards: tcpDiscards: 0 udpDiscards: 0 0 0 0 /stats/sp/cpu CPU Statistics This menu option enables you to display the CPU utilization statistics on the Switch Processor (SP). CPU utilization for SP 1: cpuUtil1Second: cpuUtil4Seconds: cpuUtil64Seconds: 6% 6% 6% Table 5-60 CPU Statistics (stats/sp/cpu) Statistics cpuUtil1Second Description The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last one second interval.0.

UDP Blast Statistics Menu pgroup . udpblast Displays the UDP Blast statistics menu. ratelim Displays the Rate Limiting statistics menu. To view a sample output and a description of the statistics. pgroup Displays the Pattern Match Group statistics menu. see page 214. 212 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.Dump all security statistics Command Syntax and Usage dos Displays the DOS Attack statistics menu. The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last 64 second interval. cpuUtil64Seconds /stats/security Security Statistics [Security Statistics Menu] dos . see page 216.2 Command Reference Table 5-60 CPU Statistics (stats/sp/cpu) Statistics cpuUtil4Seconds Description The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last four second interval. ipacl Displays the IP Address Access Control List statistics menu.IP Address ACL Statistics Menu udpblast . To view a sample output and a description of the stats. see page 215.Show rate limiting statistics dump . To view a sample output and a description of the stats. To view a sample output and a description of the statistics.Show pattern match group statistics ratelim . see page 216. To view a sample output and a description of the statistics.0. January 2005 .DoS Attack Statistics Menu ipacl . see page 213.

/stats/security/dos DOS Attack Statistics Menu [DoS Attack Statistics Menu] port . 315393-J. for each of the following types of DOS attacks: Smurf. LandAttack. see “Types of DOS Attacks” on page 214. help Displays a description of each type of DOS attack by name and how it works.Alteon OS 22. clear Deletes all DOS attack statistics. Fraggle. ScanSynFin. Nullscan. on the selected port only. Xmascan. Blat For a description of these different types of DOS attacks.Port DoS attack statistics dump .2 Command Reference Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all security statistics.Clear all DoS attack statistics help . dump Displays the number of times the packets were dropped on the switch. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 213 . PortZero.DoS attack statistics description Table 5-61 DOS Attacks Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/dos) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the number of times the packets were dropped for each of the following types of DOS attacks.0.Dump all DoS attack statistics clear .

clear Deletes all the statistics of accumulated blocked packets. Fraggle. Nullscan.2 Command Reference Types of DOS Attacks Alteon OS can protect switch ports against a variety of Denial of Service (DOS) attacks including Port Smurf.x.IP address access control Stats clear . Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for a detailed description of DOS attacks.x. LandAttack: Packets with source IP equal destination IP. Blat: TCP packets with SIP!=DIP and SPORT=DPORT. >> /stats/security/dos help Smurf: The ICMP ping request to a broadcast destination IP(x. Fraggle: The UDP packet to a broadcast destination IP(x.0. Xmascan. LandAttack. 214 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. Enable DOS protection on ports connected to any network that could be the source of an attack. and ScanSynFin. Xmascan: TCP sequence number is zero and the FIN.x. PortZero.Alteon OS 22. You can use the help command to obtain a brief explanation of each type of DOS attack detected by the switch. January 2005 .255). /stats/security/ipacl IP Access Control List Statistics The following IP Access Control List statistics can be viewed with this command: [IP ACL Statistics Menu] dump .x.Clear all access control Stats Table 5-62 IPACL Security Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/ipacl) Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays the accumulated blocked packets for each IP address and mask pair.255). ScanSynFin: SYN and FIN bits are set in the packet. PortZero: TCP/UDP Packets with either source/destination port is zero. URG and PSH bits are set. Nullscan: TCP sequence number is zero and all control bits are zeros.

Displays the current rate of packet to the UDP port. /stats/security/udpblast/dump UDP Blast Dump Statistics UDP blast protection stats: UDP Port Blocked Packets ------------------------Current Packet Rate/Second -------------------------- Table 5-64 UDP Blast Dump Statistics Parameters (/stats/security/udpblast/dump) Field UDP Port Blocked Packets Current Packet Rate/ Second Description UDP ports that experienced UDP blast attacks. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 215 .UDP Blast Stats clear .Alteon OS 22.Clear all UDP Blast Stats Table 5-63 UDP Blast Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/udpblast) Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all the accumulated blocked packets for each port. clear Deletes all the accumulated blocked packets. 315393-J.0. The number of blocked packets. See page 215 for a sample output and a description of the statistics. and the current packet rate per second.2 Command Reference /stats/security/udpblast UDP Blast Statistics [UDP Blast Statistics Menu] dump .

Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .0. 216 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The total number of per-client state entries for TCP/UDP/ICMP rate limiting.2 Command Reference /stats/security/pgroup UDP Pattern Match Statistics Pattern Match Group stats: ID Name 1 Hits 0 This menu displays how many times each configured pattern group has been matched and a subsequent filtering action performed. /stats/security/ratelim Rate Limiting Statistics Rate limiting stats: TCP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: UDP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: ICMP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-65 Rate Limiting Statistics (/stats/security/ratelim) Field Total holds down triggered Current per-client state entries Description The total number of packets dropped after the hold-down period expired. Pattern groups are configured in the “Pattern Matching Menu” on page 350.

2 Command Reference /stats/security/dump Dump Statistics for Security IP ACL stats: Address Blocked Packets ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------UDP blast protection stats: UDP Port Blocked Packets Current Packet Rate/Second ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pattern Match Group stats: ID Name Hits 1 0 100 0 101 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Rate limiting stats: TCP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: UDP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: ICMP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: 0 0 0 0 0 0 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 217 .Alteon OS 22.0.

January 2005 .0.2 Command Reference /stats/snmp SNMP Statistics NOTE – You can reset the SNMP counter to zero by using clear command as follows: >> Statistics# snmp clear SNMP statistics: snmpInPkts: snmpInBadC'tyNames: snmpInASNParseErrs: snmpOutPkts: snmpInTooBigs: snmpInBadValues: snmpInGenErrs: snmpInTotalSetVars: snmpInGetNexts: snmpInGetResponses: snmpOutTooBigs: snmpOutBadValues: snmpOutGenErrs: snmpOutGetNexts: snmpOutGetResponses: snmpSilentDrops: 150097 0 0 150097 0 0 0 2731 131389 0 0 0 1 0 150093 0 snmpInBadVersions: snmpInBadC'tyUses: snmpEnableAuthTraps: snmpInBadTypes: snmpInNoSuchNames: snmpInReadOnlys: snmpInTotalReqVars: snmpInGetRequests: snmpInSetRequests: snmpInTraps: snmpOutNoSuchNames: snmpOutReadOnlys: snmpOutGetRequests: snmpOutSetRequests: snmpOutTraps: snmpProxyDrops: 0 0 0 0 0 0 798464 17593 615 0 1 0 0 0 4 0 SNMPv3 Statistics: snmpUnknownSecurityModels: snmpInvalidMsgs: snmpUnknownPDUHandlers: snmpUnknownContexts: snmpUnavailableContexts: usmStatsUnsupportedSecLevels: usmStatsNotInTimeWindows: usmStatsUnknownUserNames: usmStatsUnknownEngineIDs: usmStatsWrongDigests: usmStatsDecryptionErrors: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 0 0 Table 5-66 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics snmpInPkts Description The total number of Messages delivered to the SNMP entity from the transport service. 218 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.

2 Command Reference Table 5-66 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics snmpInBadVersions Description The total number of SNMP Messages. The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP entity which used an SNMP community name not known to the said entity (the switch). which contains the value `read-Only' in the error-status field. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 219 . from simple types such as integers and bit strings to structured types such as sets and sequences.1 is a flexible notation that allows one to define a variety of data types. and one set of rules for representing such objects as strings of ones and zeros is called the BER (Basic Encoding Rules. defined in X. The total number of valid SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Messages which were passed from the SNMP protocol entity to the transport service. The total number of ASN.1 or BER errors encountered by the SNMP protocol entity when decoding SNMP Messages received. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is noSuchName. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is too big. ASN. which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and were for an unsupported SNMP version. Note: OSI's method of specifying abstract objects is called ASN.0. An object to enable or disable the authentication traps generated by this entity (the switch).1 (Abstract Syntax Notation One.209). defined in X. this object is provided as a means of detecting incorrect implementations of the SNMP. It should be noted that it is a protocol error to generate an SNMP PDU.1 type as a string of eight-bit octets. As such. which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is `read-Only'.208). The total number of SNMP Messages which failed ASN parsing. BER describes how to represent or encode values of each ASN. The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP protocol entity which represented an SNMP operation which was not allowed by the SNMP community named in the Message.Alteon OS 22. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is badValue. snmpInBadC'tyNames snmpInBadC'tyUses snmpInASNParseErrs snmpEnableAuth Traps snmpOutPkts snmpInBadTypes snmpInTooBigs snmpInNoSuchNames snmpInBadValues snmpInReadOnlys 315393-J.

The total number of MIB objects which have been retrieved successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP GetRequest and Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs).2 Command Reference Table 5-66 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics snmpInGenErrs Description The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is badValue. The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs).Alteon OS 22. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is genErr. which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of MIB objects. which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus is noSuchName. The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is genErr. which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is too big. The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. January 2005 .0. Not in use. snmpInTotalReqVars snmpInTotalSetVars snmpInGetRequests snmpInGetNexts snmpInSetRequests snmpInGetResponses snmpInTraps snmpOutTooBigs snmpOutNoSuchNames snmpOutBadValues snmpOutReadOnlys snmpOutGenErrs snmpOutGetRequests 220 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. which have been altered successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP SetRequest Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.

The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs). snmpOutSetRequests snmpOutGet Responses snmpOutTraps snmpSilentDrops snmpProxyDrops SNMPv3 Statistics: snmpUnknownSecurityModels The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they referenced a securityModel that was not known to or supported by the SNMP engine. GetNextRequest-PDUs. SetRequest-PDUs. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because there were invalid or inconsistent components in the SNMP message.Alteon OS 22. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because the context contained in the message was unknown. and InformRequest-PDUs delivered to the SNMPv2 entity which were silently dropped because the size of a reply containing an alternate ResponsePDU with an empty variable bindings field was greater than either a local constraint or the maximum message size associated with the originator of the request. The total number of GetRequest-PDUs. The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of GetRequest-PDUs. GetBulkRequest-PDUs. no SNMP application had registered for the proper combination of the contextEngineID and the pduType. GetNextRequest-PDUs. GetBulkRequest-PDUs. and InformRequest-PDUs delivered to the SNMP entity which were silently dropped because the transmission of the message to a proxy target failed in a manner such that no Response-PDU could be returned.2 Command Reference Table 5-66 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics snmpOutGetNexts Description The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs). snmpInvalidMsgs snmpUnknownPDUHandlers snmpUnknownContexts snmpUnavailableContexts 315393-J. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because the context contained in the message was unavailable. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 221 . The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because the PDU contained in the packet could not be passed to an application responsible for handling the pduType. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). for example.0. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. SetRequest-PDUs.

usmStatsNotInTimeWindows usmStatsUnknownUserNames usmStatsUnknownEngineIDs usmStatsWrong Digests usmStatsDecryption Errors /stats/ntp NTP Statistics Alteon OS uses NTP (Network Timing Protocol) version 3 to synchronize the switch’s internal clock with an atomic time calibrated NTP server. the switch can accurately update its internal clock to be consistent with other devices on the network and generates accurate syslogs. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they appeared outside of the authoritative SNMP engine's window. Last update time: 18:04:16 Tue Jul 13. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22. 2004 Current system time: 18:55:49 Tue Jul 13. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they referenced an snmpEngineID that was not known to the SNMP engine. NTP statistics: Primary Server: Requests Sent: 17 Responses Received: 17 Updates: 1 Secondary Server: Requests Sent: 0 Responses Received: 0 Updates: 0 Last update based on response from primary server. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they didn't contain the expected digest value.2 Command Reference Table 5-66 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics usmStatsUnsupportedSecLevels Description The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they requested a securityLevel that was unknown to the SNMP engine or otherwise unavailable.0. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they could not be decrypted. 2004 222 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. With NTP enabled. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they referenced a user that was not known to the SNMP engine.

0. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 223 . Responses Received: The total number of NTP responses received from the secondary NTP server. Updates: The total number of times the switch updated its time based on the NTP responses received from the secondary NTP server. Secondary Server Requests Sent: The total number of NTP requests the switch sent to the secondary NTP server to synchronize time. 315393-J. The switch system time when the command /stats/ntp was issued. The time stamp showing the time when the switch was last updated. Updates: The total number of times the switch updated its time based on the NTP responses received from the primary NTP server. Responses Received: The total number of NTP responses received from the primary NTP server.2 Command Reference Table 5-67 NTP Statistics Parameters (/stats/ntp) Field Primary Server Description Requests Sent: The total number of NTP requests the switch sent to the primary NTP server to synchronize time. NOTE – You can issue /stats/ntp/clear command to delete all statistics.Alteon OS 22. Last update based on response from primary server Last update time Current system time Last update of time on the switch based on either primary or secondary NTP response received.

CAUTION—Use this command carefully as it will delete all statistics permanently. January 2005 . and the statistics of the traffic on the ingress and egress ports. /stats/mgmt Management Port Statistics Management port interface RX bytes: RX packets: RX errors: RX dropped: RX overruns: RX frame errors: RX multicast: statistics: 0 TX bytes: 0 TX packets: 0 TX errors: 0 TX dropped: 0 TX overruns: 0 TX carrier errors: 0 TX collisions: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-69 Management Port Statistics (/stats/mgmt) Statistics RX bytes Description The total number of incoming bytes successfully transferred by the interface.0. clear Deletes all the port mirroring statistics.Clear all Port Mirroring Stats Table 5-68 Port Mirroring Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays the port number.Port Mirroring Stats clear .2 Command Reference /stats/pm Port Mirroring Statistics Menu [Port Mirroring Statistics Menu] dump . The number of bad packets received. RX packets RX errors 224 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The total number of incoming packets successfully transferred by the interface.Alteon OS 22.

The total number of outgoing packets successfully transferred by the interface. The number of incoming packets dropped due to IP framing errors. Collisions occur when two or more stations are transmitting signals at the same time. The total number of outgoing bytes successfully transferred by the interface. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 225 . The number of multicast packets received. The number of packets dropped because size exceeded that of the transmit queue. The number of received packets that were dropped because their size exceeded that of the receive queue.Alteon OS 22. This data can be used to tune or debug switch performance. RX overruns RX frame errors RX multicast TX bytes TX packets TX errors TX dropped TX overruns TX carrier errors TX collisions /stats/dump Dump Statistics Use the dump command to dump all switch statistics available from the Statistics Menu (40K or more. depending on your configuration).2 Command Reference Table 5-69 Management Port Statistics (/stats/mgmt) Statistics RX dropped Description The number of incoming packets that were dropped due to lack of receive buffers. The number of packets dropped due to lack of transmit buffers.0. 315393-J. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. Not applicable. If you want to capture dump data to a file. The number of collisions due to congestion on the medium. The number of packets dropped due to transmission problems.

2 Command Reference 226 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .0.Alteon OS 22.

Important difference are called out in the text.Backup current configuration to tftp server gtcfg . To make finding information easier. To view menu options.Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg .Layer 2 Menu l3 . January 2005 .Bandwidth Management Menu l2 . although not new. Many of the commands.Security Menu setup . see page 265.Step by step configuration set up dump . the menu options under the Server Load Balancing Menu (/cfg/slb) are in Chapter 7. and saving switch configuration changes. port <port number> Displays the Port Configuration Menu. To view menu options. viewing. 227 315393-J. /cfg Configuration Menu [Configuration Menu] sys .Port Mirroring Menu bwm . see page 231.CHAPTER 6 The Configuration Menu This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for making.Layer 3 Menu slb .Restore current configuration from tftp server Table 6-1 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System-wide parameter Configuration Menu.Server Load Balancing (Layer 4-7) Menu security . display more or different information than in the previous version.Port Menu pmirr .System-wide Parameter Menu port .

2 Command Reference Table 6-1 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg) Command Syntax and Usage pmirr Displays the Mirroring Configuration Menu. see page 287.Alteon OS 22. For details. see page 354. you can do the following: View the pending changes Apply the pending changes Save the changes to flash memory 228 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. security Displays the Security Menu. dump Dumps current configuration to a script file. and Saving Changes As you use the configuration menus to set switch parameters. Also. see page 299. To view menu options. see page 348. To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 354. Applying. bwm Displays the Bandwidth Management Configuration Menu. January 2005 . see page 278. To view menu options.0. To view menu options. For details. l2 Displays Layer 2 Configuration Menu. l3 Displays Layer 3 Configuration Menu. any changes are lost the next time the switch boots unless the changes are explicitly saved. see Chapter 7. see page 279. To view menu options. “The SLB Configuration Menu”. For details. ptcfg <host name or IP address of TFTP server> <filename on host> Backs up current configuration to TFTP server. the changes you make do not take effect immediately. setup Step-by-step configuration set-up of the switch. All changes are considered “pending” until you explicitly apply them. slb Displays the Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu. see page 353. see page 353. For details. While configuration changes are in the pending state. Viewing. gtcfg <host name or IP address of TFTP server> <filename on host> Restores current configuration from TFTP server.

you can enter diff at any prompt in the CLI. Applying Pending Changes To make your configuration changes active.Alteon OS 22. # apply NOTE – The apply command is a global command. To turn STP on or off. NOTE – All configuration changes take effect immediately when applied. NOTE – The diff command is a global command. enter the following command at any CLI prompt: # save 315393-J.2 Command Reference Viewing Pending Changes You can view all pending configuration changes by entering diff at the menu prompt. you must apply them. they will be lost the next time the system is rebooted. except for starting Spanning Tree Protocol. Saving the Configuration In addition to applying the configuration changes. you can enter apply at any prompt in the administrative interface. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 229 . you can save them to flash memory on the Alteon Application Switch. enter apply at any prompt in the CLI. you must apply the changes. Therefore. Therefore.0. save them (see below). To save the new configuration. and then reset the switch (see “Resetting the Switch” on page 448). NOTE – If you do not save the changes. To apply configuration changes.

For instructions on selecting the configuration to run at the next system reset. enter the following instead: # save n You can decide which configuration you want to run the next time you reset the switch.0. 230 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. If you do not want the previous configuration block copied to the backup configuration block.2 Command Reference When you save configuration changes.Alteon OS 22. It is a global command that can be executed from any menu. the changes are saved to the active configuration block. January 2005 . The configuration being replaced by the save is first copied to the backup configuration block. see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 447. Your options include: The active configuration block The backup configuration block Factory default configuration You can view all pending configuration changes that have been applied but not saved to flash memory using the diff flash command.

2 Command Reference /cfg/sys System Configuration [System Menu] syslog mmgmt sshd radius tacacs ntp sonmp ssnmp health access date time idle notice bannr smtp hprompt bootp cur Syslog Menu Management Port Menu SSH Server Menu RADIUS Authentication Menu TACACS+ Authentication Menu NTP Server Menu SONMP Menu System SNMP Menu System Health Check Menu System Access Menu Set system date Set system time Set timeout for idle CLI sessions Set login notice Set login banner Set SMTP host Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt Enable/disable use of BOOTP Display current system-wide parameters This menu provides configuration of switch management parameters such as user and administrator privilege mode passwords. To view menu options. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 231 . To view menu options. sshd Displays the SSH Server Menu. mmgmt Displays Management Port Menu. Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys) Command Syntax and Usage syslog Displays the Syslog Menu. see page 239. To view menu options. see page 237.Alteon OS 22. and management access list. see page 234. Web-based management settings. To view menu options.0. see page 240. To view menu options. 315393-J. radius Displays the RADIUS Authentication Menu. see page 233. tacacs Displays TACACS+ authentication Menu.

Alteon OS 22. hprompt disable|enable Enables or disables displaying of the host name (system administrator’s name) in the Command Line Interface (CLI). To view menu options. see page 244. This command is disabled by default. To view menu options. cur Displays the current system parameters. see page 242. see page 243. health Displays system health check menu. This notice can contain up to 1024 characters and new lines. sonmp Displays the SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) menu. If you enable BOOTP. from 1 to 10080 minutes. The default is 5 minutes.0. the switch will query its BOOTP server for all of the switch IP parameters. To view menu options. see page 258. affects both console and Telnet> Sets the idle timeout for CLI sessions. which is used for sending bandwidth management history information. bootp disable|enable Enables or disables the use of BOOTP. notice <max 1024 char multi-line login notice> <'-' to end> Displays login notice immediately before the “Enter password:” prompt. To view menu options. ssnmp Displays the System SNMP Menu. When a user or administrator logs into the switch. see page 259. date Prompts the user for the system date. the login banner is displayed. 232 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. January 2005 . smtp <SMTP host name or IP address> Sets the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) host. time Configures the system time using a 24-hour clock format. idle <idle timeout in minutes. It is also displayed as part of the output from the /info/sys command. To view menu options.2 Command Reference Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys) Command Syntax and Usage ntp Displays the Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server Menu. maximum 80 characters> Configures a login banner of up to 80 characters. access Displays System Access Menu. bannr <string.

disabling console ensures the switch is not affected by syslog messages.4.223)> Sets the IP address of the second syslog host. filter). 315393-J. facil2 <syslog host local facility (0-7)> This option sets the facility level of the second syslog host displayed. The default is 7.17. When necessary. which means. For a detailed description of the seven levels of severity. The default is 7. 192.4. facil <syslog host local facility (0-7)> This option sets the facility level of the first syslog host displayed. console disable|enable Enables or disables delivering syslog messages to the console.17. or enable/disable syslog on all available features. The default is 0. The default is 0.Alteon OS 22. For a detailed description of the seven levels of severity. log <feature|all> <enable|disable> Displays a list of features for which syslog messages can be generated. see page 234. cur Displays the current syslog settings. which means log all the seven severity levels. host2 <new syslog host IP address (such as. sever <syslog host local severity (0–7)> This option sets the severity level of the first syslog host displayed.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/syslog System Host Log Configuration [Syslog Menu] host host2 sever sever2 facil facil2 console log cur Set IP address of first syslog host Set IP address of second syslog host Set the severity of first syslog host Set the severity of second syslog host Set facility of first syslog host Set facility of second syslog host Enable/disable console output of syslog messages Enable/disable syslogging of features Display current syslog settings Table 6-3 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/syslog) Command Syntax and Usage host <new syslog host IP address (such as. sever2 <syslog host local severity (0–7)> This option sets the severity level of the second syslog host displayed. log all the seven severity levels. gslb. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 233 .223)> Sets the IP address of the first syslog host. see page 234.0. 192. It is enabled by default. You can choose to enable/ disable specific features (such as vlans.

234 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. the factory default settings for some of the management features remain with the network ports. You can change the defaults by configuring these features to permanently use the management port. This means that the system is giving a warning. 1: Alert. and default gateway. 6: Informational. and must be enabled before it can be used. This means that corrective action must be taken immediately.0. This means that the condition of the system is normal but with significant conditions that need attention. 2: Critical.Alteon OS 22. subnet mask. This means that the system is working but giving out information about certain unfavorable conditions. the network ports have to perform all switch management (other than the switch management using the console). the Management port saves consuming a port that could otherwise be used for processing data and traffic. The Management port must be configured with a static IP address. 5: Notice. 7. 3: Error. /cfg/sys/mmgmt Management Port Configuration Menu The Management port is a Fast Ethernet port that is used exclusively to manage the switch.2 Command Reference Seven Levels of Severity Following is the description of the seven levels of severity: 0: Emergency. or HTTP. broadcast address. SNMP. This means the condition of the system is critical. This port manages the switch using either telnet CLI. If this port is enabled. January 2005 . Debug. While the switch can be managed from any network port. If this port is disabled. This means that the system is giving out debug-level messages. This means that the system has errors that should be corrected. or in some cases. 4: Warning. by using the operational commands to set these options on a one-time basis. This port is isolated from and does not participate in the networking protocols that run on the network ports. This means that the system is unusable.

Set default gateway address intr .101)> Sets the IP address.Set default port for RADIUS tacacs .Set default port for SNMP traps syslog .2 Command Reference NOTE – The Management port does not support BOOTP. intr <interval (0 .Disable management port cur .Alteon OS 22. 255.Set default port for SYSLOG sonmp .17.Set IP address mask . Default is data port.60 seconds)> Sets the interval between gateway ping attempts. 192. gw <gateway address (such as.255.17.4. addr <IP address (such as.Set default IP for SONMP hello packets tftp .Set default port for NTP radius .4.Set interval between gateway ping attempts retry . To view the menu options.Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN dns .Set default port for TFTP ena .Set default port for TACACS+ smtp . January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 235 .0.Management Port Phy Menu addr .Set default port for DNS ntp . mask <subnet mask (such as. 192.Enable management port dis . retry <number of attempts (1-120> Sets the number of failed ping attempts before a gateway is declared DOWN. dns default port mgmt|data Sets DNS over management or data port. see page 237. 315393-J.Display current configuration Table 6-4 Management Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mmgmt) Command Syntax and Usage port Displays the management port link menu. [Management Port Menu] port .Set subnet mask gw .1)> Sets the IP address for the default gateway.255.Set default port for SMTP snmp .0)> Sets the subnet mask.

Default is data port. tftp default port mgmt|data Sets TFTP over management or data port.0. Default is data port. When this option is set to mgmt then the Management Port IP address is used in the SONMP hello packets transmitted by the switch. Default is data port. January 2005 . Default is data port. then the IP address of the data port interface specified by srcif (/cfg/sys/sonmp/srcif) command is used in the hello packets. The default is data port. But if it is set to data. snmp default port mgmt|data Sets SNMP trap host over management or data ports.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 6-4 Management Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mmgmt) Command Syntax and Usage ntp default port mgmt|data Sets NTP over management or data ports. smtp default port mgmt|data Sets SMTP over management or data ports. cur Displays the current configuration. Default is data port. 236 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. radius default port mgmt|data Sets RADIUS over management or data ports. sonmp default port mgmt|data Sets default IP address for SONMP hello packets. Default is data port. tacacs mgmt|data Sets TACACS+ over management or data ports. dis Disables the Management port. syslog default port mgmt|data Sets syslog host access over management or data ports. ena Enables the Management port.

auto on|off Sets auto negotiation for the port. ssh. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 237 . SSH commands are encrypted and secure in several ways. Both ends of the client/server connection are authenticated using a digital certificate. 315393-J. rlogin. It is widely used by network administrators to control Web and other kinds of servers remotely. and passwords are protected by being encrypted. cur Displays the current link configuration. rsh. SSH uses RSA public key cryptography for both connection and authentication. By default this command is turned on. Default is any.Display current link configuration Table 6-5 Management Port Link Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mgmt/port) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|any Sets the speed of the link with the Management port.Set full or half duplex mode auto .Set autonegotiation cur . and rcp. is a UNIX-based command interface and protocol for securely getting access to a remote computer. Default is any.slogin.Set link speed mode . SSH is actually a suite of three utilities . /cfg/sys/sshd SSH Server Configuration Menu Secure Shell (SSH).that are secure versions of the earlier UNIX utilities. mode full|half|any Sets half or full duplex mode.0. sometimes known as Secure Socket Shell. and scp .Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/mmgmt/port Management Port Link Menu [Management Port Link Menu] speed .

Table 6-6 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sshd) Command Syntax and Usage intrval <interval (0-24)> Sets the interval for generating the RSA server key.2 Command Reference [SSHD Menu] intrval scpadm hkeygen skeygen sshport ena dis on off cur - Set Interval for generating the RSA server key Set SCP-only admin password Generate the RSA host key Generate the RSA server key Set SSH server port number Enable the SCP apply and save Disable the SCP apply and save Turn SSH server ON Turn SSH server OFF Display current SSH server configuration NOTE – For the Alteon Application Switch. hkeygen Generates the RSA host key. RSA server key generation starts immediately. 238 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. ena Enables SCP. sshport <TCP port number> Sets the SSH server port number. SSH scripts can be viewed by using the /cfg/dump command (see page 353). skeygen Generates the RSA server key. scpadm Sets the Secure Copy (SCP)-only admin password.Alteon OS 22. cur Displays the current SSH server configuration.0. RSA host key generation starts immediately. on Enables the SSH server. When you enter this command. January 2005 . dis Disables SCP. When you enter this command. this menu enables Secure Shell access from any SSH client.

2 Command Reference NOTE – The top four commands are only accessible at the serial port /cfg/sys/radius RADIUS Server Configuration [RADIUS Server Menu] prisrv . port <RADIUS port to configure.Set RADIUS server timeout telnet . secret <1-32 character secret> This is the shared secret password between the switch and the primary RADIUS server(s). January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 239 .Set secondary RADIUS server secret port . in seconds. 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. before a RADIUS server authentication attempt is considered to have failed. The default is 3 seconds. timeout <RADIUS server timeout seconds (1-10)> Sets the amount of time.Turn RADIUS authentication ON off .Turn RADIUS authentication OFF cur .0.Set RADIUS port retries .Display current RADIUS configuration Table 6-7 RADIUS Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address> Sets the primary RADIUS server address. The default is 1645. secsrv <IP address> Sets the secondary RADIUS server address.Set primary RADIUS server secret secret2 . The default is 3 requests.Set secondary RADIUS server address secret .Set primary RADIUS server address secsrv . between 1500 .3000. retries <RADIUS server retries (1-3)> Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different RADIUS server. secret2 <1-32 character secret> This is the shared secret password between the switch and the secondary RADIUS server(s).Enable/disable RADIUS backdoor for telnet on . default 1645> Enter the number of the UDP port to be configured.Set RADIUS server retries timeout .

RADIUS combines authentication and authorization in a user profile. It supports full-packet encryption as against password-only in authentication requests. TACACS+ offers the following advantages over RADIUS as the authentication device: TACACS+ is TCP-based so it facilitates connection-oriented traffic. Also. 240 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. and accounting. on Enables the RADIUS server. off Disables the RADIUS server.0. TACACS is an encryption protocol and therefore less secure than TACACS+ and Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) protocols. authorization.2 Command Reference Table 6-7 RADIUS Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius) Command Syntax and Usage telnet disable|enable Enables or disables the RADIUS back door for telnet. (Both TACACS and TACACS+ are described in Request for Comments 1492. Telnet also applies to SSH/SCP connections. cur Displays the current RADIUS server parameters. Apart from that. /cfg/sys/tacacs TACACS+ Server Configuration Menu TACACS (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System) is an authentication protocol that allows a remote access server to forward a user's logon password to an authentication server to determine whether access can be allowed to a given system. whereas TACACS+ separates the two operations. Supports decoupled authentication. TACACS+ protocol has been implemented on Alteon OS to support the customers that have Cisco’s TACACS+ protocol as their network security feature.) TACACS+ protocol is seen as more reliable than RADIUS as TACACS+ uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) whereas RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP). January 2005 .

The default is 3 requests. port <RADIUS port configure. before a TACACS+ server authentication attempt is considered to have failed. retries <RADIUS server retries.0.3000. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 241 . The default is 3 seconds. secret <1-32 character secret> This is the shared secret between the switch and the primary TACACS+ server(s). 315393-J. 1-3> Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different TACACS+ server. The default is 1645. on Enables the TACACS+ server. 1-10> Sets the amount of time. secsrv <IP address> Defines the secondary TACACS+ server address. telnet disable|enable Enables or disables the TACACS+ back door for telnet.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference [TACACS+ Server prisrv secsrv secret secret2 port retries timeout telnet on off cur - Menu] Set primary TACACS+ server address Set secondary TACACS+ server address Set primary TACACS+ server secret Set secondary TACACS+ server secret Set TACACS+ TCP port Set TACACS+ server retries Set TACACS+ server timeout (seconds) Enable/disable TACACS+ backdoor for telnet Turn TACACS+ authentication ON Turn TACACS+ authentication OFF Display current TACACS+ configuration Table 6-8 TACACS+ Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/tacacs) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address> Defines the primary TACACS+ server address. secret2 <1-32 character secret> This is the shared secret between the switch and the secondary TACACS+ server(s). timeout <RADIUS server timeout seconds. default 1645> Enter the number of the TCP port to be configured. in seconds. between 1500 . Telnet also applies to SSH/SCP connections.

The default value is 1440 minutes.Alteon OS 22. [NTP Server Menu] prisrv . This interval of time will be specified in minutes (1-44640).Turn NTP service OFF cur .Enable/Disable daylight savings time on .2 Command Reference Table 6-8 TACACS+ Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/tacacs) Command Syntax and Usage off Disables the TACACS+ server.Set NTP server resync interval tzone . cur Displays current TACACS+ configuration parameters.0. January 2005 . By default. in HH:MM> Prompts for the NTP time zone offset.Set secondary NTP server address intrval . tzone <offset from GMT. /cfg/sys/ntp NTP Server Configuration This menu enables you to synchronize the switch clock to a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. in hours and minutes. of the switch you are synchronizing from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). 242 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Set primary NTP server address secsrv .Turn NTP service ON off . intrval <resync interval in minutes> Specifies how often the switch will re-synchronize the switch clock with the NTP server.Display current NTP configuration Table 6-9 NTP Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ntp) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <primary NTP server IP address> Prompts for the IP address of the primary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock.Set NTP timezone offset from GMT dlight . secsrv <secondary NTP server IP address> Prompts for the IP address of the secondary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock. this option is disabled.

and turns Ethernet Autotopology on. off Disables the NTP synchronization service. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 243 . on Enables the NTP synchronization service. If the interface specified by this command is not up. cur Displays the current NTP service settings. By default. the switch will add an extra hour to the system clock so that it is consistent with the local clock.2 Command Reference Table 6-9 NTP Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ntp) Command Syntax and Usage dlight disable|enable Disables or enables daylight savings time in the system clock. then the first interface which is up and running is used in the hello packets. on This command enables the SONMP protocol. Table 6-10 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sonmp) Command Syntax and Usage srcif <interface number (1-256)> This command specifies the IP address to be used in the hello packets.Alteon OS 22.0. The following commands add support for the Ethernet Autotopology algorithm and the Bay Topology MIB. The topology algorithm is executed by each Alteon switch on which SONMP is enabled. /cfg/sys/sonmp SynOptics Network Management Protocol Configuration [SONMP Menu] srcif on off cur Set source interface to be used in hello packets Turn Ethernet Autotopology ON Turn Ethernet Autotopology OFF Display current SONMP configuration SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) is a proprietary network management protocol that is used by Nortel Networks Optivitiy Switch Manager (OSM) to discover Alteon Application Switches on the network. 315393-J. When enabled. this option is disabled.

SNMP parameters that can be modified include: System name System location System contact Use of the SNMP system authentication trap function Read community string Write community string Trap community strings 244 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. you can manage the switch using the following standard SNMP MIBs: MIB II (RFC 1213) Ethernet MIB (RFC 1643) Bridge MIB (RFC 1493) An SNMP agent is a software process on the managed device that listens on UDP port 161 for SNMP messages.0. January 2005 . In SNMP model of network management. If you are running an SNMP network management station on your network. cur This command displays the current SONMP configuration. /cfg/sys/ssnmp System SNMP Configuration Alteon OS supports SNMP-based network management. a management station (client/manager) accesses a set of variables known as MIBs (Management Information Base) provided by the managed device (agent). and turns Ethernet Autotopology off.2 Command Reference Table 6-10 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sonmp) Command Syntax and Usage off This command disables the SONMP protocol. Each SNMP message sent to the agent contains a list of management objects to retrieve or to modify.

see page 247. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 245 .Set SNMP "sysLocation" cont .Set SNMP trap source interface timeout . wcomm <new SNMP write community string (maximum 32 characters)> Configures the SNMP write community string.Set SNMP read community string wcomm .Enable/disable SNMP link up/down trap cur .Set timeout for the SNMP state machine auth .2 Command Reference [System SNMP Menu] snmpv3 .Display current system SNMP configuration Table 6-11 SNMP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp) Command Syntax and Usage snmpv3 Displays SNMPv3 menu. To view menu options. The read community string controls SNMP “get” access to the switch. The default read community string is public. NOTE – This command is applicable only to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 traps because only the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 trap packets contain the source IP address that can be set with this command. The SNMPv3 packets do not contain this field. This command enables the user to select one of the configured interfaces as the source interface using the interface number. 315393-J.SNMPv3 Menu name . rcomm <new SNMP read community string (maximum 32 characters)> Configures the SNMP read community string. It can have a maximum of 32 characters.Set SNMP "sysName" locn .Set SNMP write community string trsrc . name <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name for the system. The location can have a maximum of 64 characters. locn <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name of the system location. The write community string controls SNMP “set” and “get” access to the switch. cont <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name of the system contact. The default write community string is private. It can have a maximum of 32 characters. trsrc <interface number (1-256)> Defines the interface number for SNMP trap source interface.Enable/disable SNMP "sysAuthenTrap" linkt .0. The contact can have a maximum of 64 characters.Alteon OS 22. The name can have a maximum of 64 characters.Set SNMP "sysContact" rcomm .

linkt <port> <disable|enable> Enables or disables the sending of SNMP link up and link down traps. The default setting is disabled. The timeout period determines when the resources/memory allocated for the output will be freed. When you use diff and apply.2 Command Reference Table 6-11 SNMP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp) Command Syntax and Usage timeout <SNMP state machine timeout minutes.Alteon OS 22. The default setting is enabled. 1-30> Defines the timeout period for SNMP state machine. January 2005 . auth disable|enable Enables or disables the use of the system authentication trap facility.0. cur Displays the current STP port parameters. memory is allocated to store the output of the command. 246 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.

view <vacmViewTreeFamily number [1-128]> This command allows you to create different MIB views. access <vacmAccess number [1-32]> This command allows you to specify access rights.0. To view menu options. 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. see page 250. To view menu options. see page 251. You need access control when you have to process retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 247 . To view menu options. You can also configure this entry through SNMP. The View-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user. see page 249.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2 Framework by supporting the following: a new SNMP message format security for messages access control remote configuration of SNMP parameters For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276. [SNMPv3 Menu] usm view access group comm taddr tparam notify v1v2 cur - usmUser Table menu vacmViewTreeFamily Table menu vacmAccess Table menu vacmSecurityToGroup Table menu community Table menu targetAddr Table menu targetParams Table menu notify Table menu Enable/disable V1/V2 access Display current SNMPv3 configuration Table 6-12 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage usm <usmUser number [1-16]> This command allows you to create a user security model (USM) entry for an authorized user.

see page 253. or a particular transport endpoint may be associated with several sets of SNMP parameters.2 Command Reference Table 6-12 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3) group <vacmSecurityToGroup number [1-16]> A group maps the user name to the access group names and their access rights needed to access SNMP management objects. There may be multiple transport endpoints associated with a particular set of SNMP parameters. To view menu options. notify <notify index [1-16]> A notification application typically monitors a system for particular events or conditions. tparam <target params index [1-16]> This command allows you to configure SNMP parameters. To view menu options. This command is enabled by default. January 2005 . comm <snmpCommunity number [1-16]> The community table contains objects for mapping community strings and version-independent SNMP message parameters. security level. 248 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. consisting of a transport domain and a transport address.0. cur Displays the current SNMPv3 configuration. This is also termed as transport endpoint. and security name information. consisting of message processing model. see page 257. see page 254. taddr <snmpTargetAddr number [1-16]> This command allows you to configure destination information. see page 256. To view menu options. To view menu options. and generates Notification-Class messages based on these events or conditions. The SNMP MIB provides a mechanism for performing source address validation on incoming requests. A group defines the access rights assigned to all names that belong to a particular group.Alteon OS 22. v1v2 disable|enable This command allows you to enable or disable the access to SNMP version 1 and version 2. see page 255. and for selecting community strings based on target addresses for outgoing notifications. To view menu options. security model.

then make sure that you have selected one of the authentication protocols (MD5 or HMAC-SHA-96). authpw If you selected an authentication algorithm using the above command. An SNMP engine must have the knowledge of applicable attributes of a user.0. The default algorithm is none. You need to provide a security name to create the USM entry. This menu helps you create a user security model entry for an authorized user. 315393-J. priv des|none This command allows you to configure the type of privacy protocol on your switch. auth md5|sha|none This command allows you to configure the authentication protocol between HMAC-MD5-96 or HMAC-SHA-96. you need to provide a password. The options are des (CBC-DES Symmetric Encryption Protocol) or none. you will get an error message.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm User Security Model Configuration Menu You can make use of a defined set of user identities using this Security Model. privpw This command allows you to create or change the privacy password.Alteon OS 22. The privacy protocol protects messages from disclosure. [SNMPv3 usmUser name auth authpw priv privpw del cur 1 Menu] Set USM user name Set authentication protocol Set authentication password Set privacy protocol Set privacy password Delete usmUser entry Display current usmUser configuration Table 6-13 User Security Model Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/usm) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> This command allows you to configure a string up to 32 characters long that represents the name of the user. otherwise you will get an error message during validation. This is the login name that you need in order to access the switch. If you specify des as the privacy protocol. This command allows you to create or change your password for authentication. If you select none as the authentication protocol. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 249 .

Alteon OS 22.Delete vacmViewTreeFamily entry cur .Set view name tree . cur Displays the USM user entries. cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu [SNMPv3 vacmViewTreeFamily 1 Menu] name . max 32 characters> This command defines MIB tree. which when combined with the corresponding mask defines a family of view subtrees. del Deletes the vacmViewTreeFamily group entry. January 2005 .0.0.Set view type del .1.6. cur Displays the current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration. mask <bitmask. 250 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 6-13 User Security Model Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/usm) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the USM user entries.Set MIB subtree(OID) which defines a family of view subtrees mask . which in combination with the corresponding tree defines a family of view subtrees. 1.. tree <object identifier. max size 32 characters> This command defines the bit mask.3.2.1. type included|excluded This command indicates whether the corresponding instances of vacmViewTreeFamilySubtree and vacmViewTreeFamilyMask define a family of view subtrees.1.1. which is included in or excluded from the MIB view. such as. a string of maximum 32 characters.Set view mask type .Display current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration Table 6-14 SNMPv3 View Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> This command defines the name for a family of view subtrees up to a maximum of 32 characters.

Access control is needed when the user has to process SNMP retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity. prefix <32 character name> Defines the name of the context.Alteon OS 22.Set prefix only or exact match rview . An SNMP entity has access to many contexts.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access View-based Access Control Model Configuration Menu The view-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user.Set group name prefix . For more information on naming the management information. An SNMP context is a collection of management information that an SNMP entity can access.Set read view index wview . 315393-J. see RFC2571. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 251 . The view-based Access Control Model defines a table that lists the locally available contexts by contextName. level noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|authPriv Defines the minimum level of security required to gain access rights.0.Set write view index nview .Display current vacmAccess configuration Table 6-15 View-based Access Control Model Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/access) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Defines the name of the group. The authPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol. [SNMPv3 vacmAccess 1 Menu] name . The level noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without authentication and without using a privacy protocol.Set content prefix model . the SNMP Architecture document. The level authNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol.Delete vacmAccess entry cur . model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Allows you to select the security model to be used.Set minimum level of security match .Set security model level .Set notify view index del .

January 2005 . nview <32 character view name> This is a 32 character long notify view name that allows you notify access to the MIB view. del Deletes the View-based Access Control entry. 252 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. wview <32 character view name> This is a 32 character long write view name that allows you write access to the MIB view. then all the rows whose contextName exactly matches the prefix are selected. If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted.2 Command Reference Table 6-15 View-based Access Control Model Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/access) Command Syntax and Usage match exact|prefix If the value is set to exact.0. If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted.Alteon OS 22. If the value is set to prefix then the all the rows where the starting octets of the contextName exactly match the prefix are selected. cur Displays the View-based Access Control configuration. rview <32 character view name> This is a 32 character long read view name that allows you read access to a particular MIB view.

Set security model uname . 315393-J.Display current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration Table 6-16 SNMPv3 Group Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group) Command Syntax and Usage model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Defines the security model. gname <32 character name> The name for the access group as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access/name on page 251.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group SNMPv3 Group Configuration Menu [SNMPv3 vacmSecurityToGroup 1 Menu] model . cur Displays the current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration.Delete vacmSecurityToGroup entry cur . January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 253 .Alteon OS 22.0.Set USM user name gname . del Deletes the vacmSecurityToGroup entry.Set group gname del . uname <32 character name> Sets the user name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm/name on page 249.

The configured entry is stored in the community table list in the SNMP engine. [SNMPv3 snmpCommunityTable 1 Menu] index . 254 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. tag <list of tag string. del Deletes the community table entry. January 2005 .Set USM user name tag . This tag specifies a set of transport endpoints to which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap.0. name <32 character name> Defines the user name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm/name on page 249.Set community string uname .Set community tag del .Set community index name .Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/comm SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu This command is used for configuring the community table entry. cur Displays the community table configuration. max 255 characters> Allows you to configure a tag of up to 255 characters maximum.Delete communityTable entry cur . This table is used to configure community strings in the Local Configuration Datastore (LCD) of SNMP engine. uname <32 character name> Defines a readable 32 character long string that represents the corresponding value of an SNMP community name in a security model.Display current communityTable configuration Table 6-17 SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ ssnmp/snmpv3/comm) Command Syntax and Usage index <32 character name> Allows you to configure the unique index value of a row in this table consisting of 32 characters maximum.

port <transport address port> Allows you to configure a transport address port that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration Menu This command is used to configure the target transport entry.Display current targetAddrTable configuration Table 6-18 Target Address Table Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Allows you to configure the locally arbitrary. del Deletes the Target Address Table entry. taglist <list of tag string. The configured entry is stored in the target address table list in the SNMP engine. This table of transport addresses is used in the generation of SNMP messages. pname <32 character name> Defines the name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam/name on page 256. 315393-J.Set targetParams name del . cur Displays the current Target Address Table configuration.Set target transport address IP port .Delete targetAddrTable entry cur .0.Set target address name addr .Set tag list pname . addr <transport address ip> Allows you to configure a transport address IP that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 255 . max 255 characters> Allows you to configure a list of tags that are used to select target addresses for a particular operation. target address name associated with this entry.Alteon OS 22.Set target transport address port taglist . but unique identifier. [SNMPv3 snmpTargetAddrTable 1 Menu] name .

Delete targetParamsTable entry cur .2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu You can configure the target parameters entry and store it in the target parameters table in the SNMP engine. The level authNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol. or authPriv). January 2005 . and the security level (noAuthnoPriv. The parameters include the message processing model (for example: SNMPv3. authNoPriv.Set message processing model model .Display current targetParamsTable configuration Table 6-19 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Allows you to configure the locally arbitrary. mpmodel snmpv1|snmpv2c|snmpv3 Allows you to configure the message processing model that is used to generate SNMP messages. SNMPv2c. the security model (for example: USM).Set USM user name level . model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Allows you to select the security model to be used when generating the SNMP messages. the security name. The authPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol.Set security model uname . This table contains parameters that are used to generate a message. uname <32 character name> Defines the name that identifies the user in the USM table (page 249) on whose behalf the SNMP messages are generated using this entry.Set minimum level of security del .Set target params name mpmodel .Alteon OS 22. SNMPv1).0. but unique identifier that is associated with this entry. [SNMPv3 snmpTargetParamsTable 1 Menu] name . The level noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without authentication and without using a privacy protocol. 256 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. level noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|authPriv Allows you to select the level of security to be used when generating the SNMP messages using this entry.

tag <list of tag string.Display current notifyTable configuration Table 6-20 Notify Table Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Defines a locally arbitrary but unique identifier associated with this SNMP notify entry.Set notify tag del . 315393-J. A notification typically monitors a system for particular events or conditions. cur Displays the current targetParamsTable configuration. Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable. is selected. cur Displays the current notify table configuration.Delete notifyTable entry cur .Alteon OS 22. del Deletes the notify table entry. that matches the value of this tag. [SNMPv3 snmpNotifyTable 1 Menu] name .Set notify name tag .0. and generates Notification-Class messages based on these events or conditions. max 255 characters> Allows you to configure a tag of 255 characters maximum that contains a tag value which is used to select entries in the Target Address Table.2 Command Reference Table 6-19 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the targetParamsTable entry. /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration Menu SNMPv3 uses Notification Originator to send out traps. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 257 .

Turn system TCP health services ON off .Display current TCP health services configuration Table 6-21 System Health Check Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/health) Command Syntax and Usage add <TCP port (2-65534)> Adds TCP services to listen to the health checks. cur Displays the current TCP health check services configuration.Alteon OS 22.Turn system TCP health services OFF cur .2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/health System Health Check Configuration Menu [System TCP Health Menu] add . Specify a TCP service port number. on Turns on the TCP health check services. off Turns off the TCP health check services. January 2005 . Specify a TCP service port number.Add TCP services to listen for health check rem . such as 80 for HTTP. such as 80 for HTTP. rem <TCP port (2-65534)> Removes TCP services that were added for listening to health checks.0. 258 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Remove TCP services from listening on .

set this to a different port (such as 8080).Display current system access configuration Table 6-22 System Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access) Command Syntax and Usage mgmt Displays the Management Configuration Menu.Enable/disable Telnet access tnport . The default is HTTP port 80. tnet Enables or disables Telnet access to the switch. or UDP packets to MP cur . 315393-J. You will see this command only if you are connected to the switch through the console port.User Access Control Menu (passwords) https . see page 263. wport <TCP port number (1-65535)> Sets the switch port used for serving switch Web content.Management Network Definition Menu user . TCP.0.HTTPS (Web) Server Access Menu http .Set Telnet server port number rlimit . http disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP (Web) access to the browser-based interface. see page 260. To view menu options.Alteon OS 22.Enable/disable HTTP (Web) access wport . To view menu options.Set HTTP (Web) server port number snmp . If Global Server Load Balancing is to be used. Sets an optional telnet server port number for cases where the server listens for telnet sessions on a non-standard port. snmp disable|read-only|read-write Sets the snmp user access level to either disabled. It is disabled by default. ICMP. read-only. To view menu options. user Displays the User Access Control Menu.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access System Access Control Configuration [System Access Menu] mgmt .Set SNMP access control tnet . see page 261. https Displays HTTPS Server Access Menu. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 259 . or read-write.Set max rate of ARP. tnport <TCP port number> The TCP port number that the telnet server listens for telnet sessions. This command is disabled by default.

NOTE – The add and rem commands below replace the /cfg/sys/mnet and /cfg/ sys/mmask commands found in earlier releases of Alteon OS. [Management Networks Menu] add . RIP. cur Displays the current configuration.Display current mgmt network definitions Table 6-23 Management Network Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/mgmt) Command Syntax and Usage add <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask> Adds a defined network through which switch access is allowed through Telnet. NOTE – If you configure the management network without including the switch interfaces. ICMP. it will cause the Firewall Load Balancing health checks to fail and will create a “Network Down” state on the network. or the Alteon OS browser-based interface. TCP.2 Command Reference Table 6-22 System Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access) Command Syntax and Usage rlimit <arp|icmp|tcp|udp> <max rate. SNMP. 260 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. or UDP protocols.Alteon OS 22. which the maximum number of packets per second that is allowed to enter the switch. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with a network mask address. Then specify the maximum rate.Add mgmt network definition rem . Specify an IP address and mask address in dotted-decimal notation.Remove mgmt network definition cur .0. January 2005 . Specify which protocol you wish to limit. 0-65535 (pkts/sec)> Sets switch-wide rate limiting on traffic entering the switch over ARP. /cfg/sys/access/mgmt Management Networks Menu This menu is used to define IP address ranges which are allowed to access the switch for management purposes.

Access includes “user” functions. 1-10> Displays the User ID Menu. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 261 . but cannot make any configuration changes. which consists of a management network address and a management network mask address. sopw Sets the SLB operator (slboper)password. To view menu options. 315393-J. The SLB operator manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can enable/disable servers using the Server Load Balancing configuration menus. The user has no direct responsibility for switch management. /cfg/sys/access/user User Access Control Menu uid usrpw sopw l4opw opw sapw l4apw admpw cur User ID Menu Set user password (user) Set SLB operator password (slboper) Set L4 operator password (l4oper) Set operator password (oper) Set Slb administrator password (slbadmin) Set L4 administrator password (l4admin) Set administrator password (admin) Display current user status NOTE – Passwords can be a maximum of 15 characters.2 Command Reference Table 6-23 Management Network Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/mgmt) Command Syntax and Usage rem <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask> Removes a defined network. usrpw Sets the user (user) password.0.Alteon OS 22. cur Displays the current configuration. Table 6-24 User Access Control Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user) Command Syntax and Usage uid <User ID. He or she can view switch status information and statistics. see page 264.

The operator password can have a maximum of 15 characters.Alteon OS 22. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can configure parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus.2 Command Reference Table 6-24 User Access Control Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user) Command Syntax and Usage l4opw Sets the Layer 4 operator (l4oper)password. 262 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. Access includes “slboper” functions. Access includes “l4oper” functions. admpw Sets the administrator (admin) password. sapw Sets the SLB administrator (slbadmin) password. Note that the Filter Menu options are not accessible to the SLB administrator. The Layer 4 operator manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services. He or she can view all switch information and statistics. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can reset ports or the entire switch. Access includes “slbadmin” functions. The operator manages all functions of the switch. l4apw Sets the Layer 4 administrator (l4admin) password. information. Access includes “oper” and “l4admin” functions. Access includes “l4oper” functions. He or she can view all switch information and statistics. cur Displays the current user status. Administrator who configures and manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. The super user administrator has complete access to all menus. with the exception of not being able to configure filters. including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. January 2005 . opw Sets the operator (oper)password. and configuration commands on the Alteon Application Switch.0. but can configure changes only on the Server Load Balancing menus. The Layer 4 administrator configures and manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services.

city) []: Ottawa Organization Name (for example. It will take approximately 30 seconds to generate the certificate. Then the switch will restart SSL agent. port <TCP port number> Defines the HTTPS Web server port number. company) []: Nortel Networks Organizational Unit Name (for example.com You will be asked to confirm if you want to generate the certificate. email address) []: info@nortelnetworks. certSave Allows the client. generate Allows you to generate a certificate to connect to the SSL to be used during the key exchange. A default certificate is created when HTTPS is enabled for the first time.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access/https HTTPS Access Configuration Menu [https Menu] https port generate certSave cur Enable/Disable HTTPS Web access HTTPS WebServer port number Generate self-signed HTTPS server certificate save HTTPS certificate Display current SSL Web Access configuration Table 6-25 HTTPS Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/https) Command Syntax and Usage https Enables or disables BBI access (Web access) using HTTPS. or the Web browser. to accept the certificate and save the certificate to Flash to be used when the switch is rebooted. section) []: Alteon Common Name (for example. The user can create a new certificate defining the information that they want to be used in the various fields. 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. For example: Country Name (2 letter code) [ ]: CA State or Province Name (full name) []: Ontario Locality Name (for example. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 263 . cur Displays the current SSL Web Access configuration. user’s name) []: Mr Smith Email (for example.0.

the operational state of the real server. pswd <15 char max> Sets the user password of up to 15 characters maximum. add <real server number. Layer 4 Operator. Operator.Alteon OS 22.Add real server . Alteon OS defines these levels as: User. rem <real server number.Set user password . name <8 char max> Defines the user name of maximum eight characters. dis Disables the user ID. Using this command you can list the current status of the real server including the real server number. You can enable or disable the real servers and change the password for accessing these real servers.Delete user ID .Set class of service . January 2005 . and the number of current sessions. SLB Administrator. SLB Operator. and Administrator.Disable user ID .Display current user configuration Table 6-26 User ID Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user/uid) Command Syntax and Usage cos <user|slboper|l4oper|oper|slbadmin|l4admin|admin> Sets the Class-of-Service to define the user’s authority level.Set user name . [User ID 1 cos name pswd add rem ena dis del cur Menu] . 264 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. 1-1023> Assigns a real server access to this user.0. the real server name. ena Enables the user ID.Enable user ID . 1-1023> Removes a real server access from this user. with User being the most restricted level.Remove real server .2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access/user/uid System User ID Configuration Menu This feature allows the users to operate the real servers assigned to them.

0.Alteon OS 22. Alteon OS 2000 Series The following table displays the number of Fast Ethernet ports and SFP GBIC ports with the numbering of the ports on Alteon OS 2000 series: Table 6-27 Port Configuration and Numbering on Alteon OS 2000 Series Model Alteon 2208 (1U) Alteon 2216 (1U) Alteon 2224 (1U) Alteon 2424 (1U) 10/100 Mbps Fast Ethernet 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Port Port Numbers Numbers 1–8 1–16 1–24 1–24 9–10 17–18 25–26 25–28 Fast Ethernet Ports The RJ-45 jack is used for connecting 10/100 Mbps Ethernet segments to the port. 315393-J. SFP GBIC Ports The LC jack is used for connecting Gigabit Ethernet fiber optic segments. This command is enabled by default.2 Command Reference Table 6-26 User ID Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user/uid) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the user ID. auto-negotiating. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 265 . cur Displays the current user ID configuration. The SFP modules are not shipped with the product. You may order the SFP modules from Nortel Networks. and support half or full-duplex operation. Port configuration is different on Alteon OS 2000 series and 3000 series. The ports are auto-sensing. /cfg/port <port number> Port Configuration The Port Menu enables you to configure settings for individual switch ports.

Set port egress bandwidth Limit rmon .Enable port dis .Set default port BW Contract nonip .Disable port cur . this option displays the Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu.2 Command Reference For more information on connectors. gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet.0.Gig Phy Menu pvid . cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port.Set default port VLAN id name . January 2005 . name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. 266 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. see page 276.Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames at ingress ena .Set BW Contract for non-IP traffic egbw . The default number is 1.Set port name cont .Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port iponly . nonip <BW Contract number. To view menu options. To view menu options. this option displays the Fast Ethernet Physical Link Menu.Fast Phy Menu gig . 1-4090> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. The commands on Alteon OS 2000 series and their description are as follows: [Port 1 Menu] fast . please refer to the Hardware Installation Guide for Alteon OS.Display current port configuration Table 6-28 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port) Command Syntax and Usage fast If a port is configured to support Fast Ethernet. see page 276. 1-256> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for non-IP traffic for this port. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. The default is set to none.Alteon OS 22. pvid <VLAN number.Enable/Disable RMON for port tag .

/cfg/port <port number> fast|gig Port Link Configuration [Fast Link Menu] speed . (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes. ena Enables the port.Set link speed mode .Alteon OS 22. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 277. dis Disables the port. It is disabled by default.2 Command Reference Table 6-28 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port) Command Syntax and Usage egbw <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the egress bandwidth limit for the port to avoid overloading the receiving router or switch.Display current fast link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link.Set full or half duplex mode fctl . rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. NOTE – You need Bandwidth Management license to use this command. Using this command.) cur Displays the current port parameters. 315393-J. It is disabled by default. the egress bandwidth for an FE port will be 100m. This means that the port’s speed will be taken as the egress bandwidth.Set auto negotiation cur . you can configure the egress bandwidth limit of the port to match with the bandwidth link of the receiving router or the switch. For example. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 267 .0. The default is 0.Set flow control auto . iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. It is disabled by default.

Table 6-29 Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port/fast|gig) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|any Sets the link speed. fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode.Alteon OS 22.The choices include: Any for auto negotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex This menu appears only if a Fast Ethernet port is selected.The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables auto negotiation for the port. The choices include: Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps This menu appears only if a Fast Ethernet port is selected. Link menu options are described in Table 6-36 and appear on the fast and gig port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch. January 2005 . Using these configuration menus. these options do not appear on the Gigabit Link Menu. and negotiation mode for the port link. 268 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. cur Displays the current port parameters. you can set port parameters such as speed.2 Command Reference NOTE – Since the speed and mode parameters cannot be set for Gigabit Ethernet ports. flow control. Not all options are valid on all ports. This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu.0. This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu.

it is fixed at 1000 Mbps. Four dual-mode ports (3. if 1000 Mbps is selected. autonegotiation must be turned on. 2. When the 10/100/1000Base-T copper port is selected as the preferred link. and 6). 5. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 269 .Alteon OS 22. refer to the Alteon OS Hardware Installation Guide Part Number 315393-E. These ports are designed to operate at 1000 Mbps and full duplex mode only.0. it can be configured at any speed. 315393-J. 7. 8 Dual-Mode Port Numbers 3–6 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Port Numbers 9–12 Port Configuration on Alteon OS 3408 The Alteon OS 3408 contains 12 ports. NOTE – For more information on connectors. However. 2. When the 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC port is selected as the preferred link. 7. See “Dual-Mode Ports” on page 274 for more details. Their description is as follows: Four 1000BaseT ports (1. The ports are autonegotiating and support half or full duplex operation. You can set either interface as the preferred or backup link. full-duplex with autonegotiation turned on. and 8) with RJ-45 connectors. 4. Four Small Form Pluggable (SFP) GBIC Fiber ports (9–12).2 Command Reference Alteon OS 3000 Series The following table displays the port configuration and numbering on Alteon OS 3408: Table 6-30 Port configuration on Alteon OS 3408 Model Alteon 3408 (1U) 10/100/1000Base-T Copper Port Numbers 1. These ports have two interfaces each: 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC and 10/100/1000Base-T Copper.

0. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes. To view menu options. 2. or 8>) Command Syntax and Usage gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet. ena Enables the port.2 Command Reference Single-Mode ports 10/100/1000Base-T Copper Ports When you select a single-mode copper port (1. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. this option displays the Copper Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu. 7. The default is set to None.) 270 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. January 2005 . 7. It is disabled by default. It is disabled by default. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. 2. or 8). cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. The default number is 1.Alteon OS 22. dis Disables the port. you see the menu below: [Port 1 Menu] gig pvid name cont rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - Copper Gig Phy Menu Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-31 Single-Mode Copper Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1. see page 271. It is disabled by default. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 277. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port.

Table 6-32 Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1. /cfg/port <port number> gig Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu [GE Copper Link Menu] speed .Set link speed mode . 2. This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu.2 Command Reference Table 6-31 Single-Mode Copper Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1.Alteon OS 22.Set duplex mode fctl .Set auto negotiate cur . Using these configuration menus. 2. Link menu options are described in Table 6-36 and appear on the gig port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch. or 8>/gig) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|1000|any Sets the link speed. The choices include: Any for auto negotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. Not all options are valid on all ports.Display current ge copper link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. or 8>) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current port parameters.The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 271 315393-J. 7. and negotiation mode for the port link. 7. flow control. January 2005 . you can set port parameters such as speed.Set flow control auto .0. The choices include: Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode.

The default number is 1. this option displays the SFP Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu.2 Command Reference Table 6-32 Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1. cur Displays the current Gigabit Ethernet copper link port parameters. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. To view menu options. pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. you see a slightly different menu as below: [Port 9 Menu] gig pvid name cont egbw rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - SFP Gig Phy Menu Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Set port egress bandwidth Limit Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-33 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <9–12>) Command Syntax and Usage gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet. 2. 272 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. or 8>/gig) Command Syntax and Usage auto on|off Enables or disables autonegotiation for the port. The default is set to None. January 2005 .0. see page 273. 7. 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Fiber SFP Ports When you select a single-mode SFP fiber port (9–12).Alteon OS 22. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port.

Using these configuration menus. you can set port parameters such as flow control. dis Disables the port. 315393-J. It is disabled by default. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames.0.Alteon OS 22. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. It is disabled by default. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 277. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 273 .Set flow control . /cfg/port <port number> gig Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Link Configuration Menu [GE SFP Link fctl auto cur Menu] .Set auto negotiate . It is disabled by default.Display current SFP gig link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link.2 Command Reference Table 6-33 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <9–12>) Command Syntax and Usage rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. and negotiation mode for the port link. ena Enables the port.) cur Displays the current port parameters. Link menu options are described in Table 6-36 and appear on the gig port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch.

2 Command Reference Table 6-34 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <9-12>/gig) Command Syntax and Usage fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. 274 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. see page 276. sfp Displays SFP Gigabit Physical Link Menu. To view menu options. Dual-Mode Ports When you select any one of the dual-mode ports (3–6).Alteon OS 22. To view menu options. January 2005 . cur Displays the current SFP Gigabit Ethernet link port parameters. The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables autonegotiation for the port.0. see page 277. you see the menu below: [Port 3 Menu] cop sfp pref back pvid name cont rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - Copper Gig Phy Menu SFP Gig Phy Menu Set preferred link Set backup link Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-35 Dual-Mode Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>) Command Syntax and Usage cop Displays Copper Gigabit Physical Link Menu.

The selected port will be used as the preferred port if both the ports are available. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 277. rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. dis Disables the port.0. pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. back copper|sfp|none Sets the preference for the backup link if the preferred port is not available. It is disabled by default. It is disabled by default. the port will not switch automatically to the backup port if the preferred port goes down. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes. ena Enables the port. 315393-J. If you choose none.Alteon OS 22. The default is set to None.) cur Displays the current port parameters. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. It is disabled by default. You cannot set the preferred port as the backup port. The default number is 1.2 Command Reference Table 6-35 Dual-Mode Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>) Command Syntax and Usage pref copper|sfp Sets the port preference between copper or SFP mode. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 275 .

The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables auto negotiation for the port. January 2005 . cur Displays the current Gigabit Ethernet copper link port parameters.0.Set duplex mode fctl .Set auto negotiate cur .Set flow control auto .Display current ge copper link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. you can set port parameters such as speed. Not all options are valid on all ports. Link menu options are described in Table 6-36 and appear on the cop port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch. flow control.Alteon OS 22. 276 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number (3–6)> cop Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration [GE Copper Link Menu] speed . and negotiation mode for the port link. Using these configuration menus.Set link speed mode . The choices include: Any for autonegotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. The choices include: Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode. Table 6-36 Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>/cop) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|1000|any Sets the link speed.

The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control cur Displays the current SFP Gigabit link port configuration.2 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number (3–6)> sfp Dual-Mode SFP Gigabit Link Configuration Menu [GE SFP Link fctl cur Menu] . enter the following command at any prompt: Main# /oper/port <port number>/dis Because this configuration sets a temporary state for the port.Alteon OS 22. See the “Operations Menu” on page 433 for other operations-level commands. The port state will revert to its original configuration when the Alteon Application Switch is reset.0. 315393-J. Temporarily Disabling a Port To temporarily disable a port without changing its stored configuration attributes. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 277 .Display current SFP gig link configuration Table 6-37 Dual-Mode SFP Gigabit Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3-6>/sfp) Command Syntax and Usage fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. you do not need to use apply or save.Set flow control .

Table 6-38 Port Mirroring menu options (/cfg/pmirr) Command Syntax and Usage mirror disable|enable Enables or disables port mirroring monport <monitoring port (port to mirror to)> Displays port-mirroring menu options that help configure the port.Display current Port-based Port Mirroring configuration 278 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. cur Displays the current settings of the mirrored and monitoring ports. To view menu options. /cfg/pmirr/monport Port-Mirroring Menu [Port 1 Menu] add . By attaching a network analyzer to the monitor port. and disable the monitored port. you can collect detailed information about your network performance and usage. network packets being sent and/or received on a target port are duplicated and sent to a monitor port.2 Command Reference /cfg/pmirr Port Mirroring Menu [Port Mirroring mirror monport cur Menu] Enable/Disable Mirroring Configure Monitor Port Display All Mirrored and Monitored Ports and VLANs Port mirroring is disabled by default. When enabled.Add "Mirrored" port and VLANs rem .0. The Port Mirroring Menu is used to configure.Alteon OS 22.Rem "Mirrored" port and VLANs cur . January 2005 . see page 278. enable.

cur Displays the current settings of the monitoring port. It is necessary to specify the direction because: If the source port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is ingress or both (ingress and egress).2 Command Reference Table 6-39 Port-Based Port-Mirroring Menu Options (/cfg/pmirr/monport) Command Syntax and Usage add <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> <direction (in. out. Traffic classification can be based on user or application information. rem <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> <vlan index or Carriage Return for all vlans> Removes the mirrored port. VLAN-based port mirroring allows the user to monitor traffic based on VLANs associated with a port. BWM is turned off. NOTE – BWM is a software key-enabled feature that requires users to purchase a license and a key.0. By default. This command also allows you to enter the direction of the traffic. It allows companies to guarantee that critical business traffic. such as e-commerce transactions. 315393-J. the frame is sent to the monitoring port. BWM policies can be configured to set lower and upper bounds on the bandwidth allocation. all traffic on that port will be mirrored. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 279 . Refer to your Application Guide for more information. In order to enable BWM. users need to enter the Bandwidth Management key using the /oper/swkey command. or both)> <vlan index or Carriage Return for all vlans> Adds the port to be mirrored.Alteon OS 22. /cfg/bwm Bandwidth Management Configuration Bandwidth Management (BWM) enables Web site managers to allocate a portion of the available bandwidth for specific users or applications. the frame is sent to the mirrored port. If the destination port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is egress or both. If you do not specify a VLAN. You can add specific VLAN(s) to a be monitored even if there are multiple VLANs associated with that port. receive higher priority versus non-critical traffic.

A bandwidth policy is often based on a rate structure whereby a Web host could charge a customer for bandwidth utilization. this option is disabled.Enable/disable enforce policies on . you must create one or more bandwidth management contracts. By default. To view menu options. For further details. see page 285.Globally turn Bandwidth Management processing ON off . The switch uses these contracts to limit individual traffic flows. frequen <1-1440 minutes. Table 6-40 Bandwidth Management Menu Options (/cfg/bwm) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BW contract number (1-256)> Displays the Bandwidth Management Contract Menu.Group menu user . To view menu options.Display current Bandwidth Management configuration NOTE – Up to 256 bandwidth management contracts can be configured on Alteon OS.Contract menu policy . The default is set to 0.0. see page 284. user <user name> Sets the SMTP user name to whom the history statistics will be mailed. see page 281. January 2005 . see the Alteon OS 22. entries <64k|128k|256k|512k|1024k> Sets the number of entries in the Bandwidth Management IP user table. For further details.Set number of entries in the BWM IP user table frequen .Alteon OS 22.Globally turn Bandwidth Management processing OFF cur .Set SMTP server user name entries . group <BW Group number (1-32)> Displays the Bandwidth Management Group Menu.2 Command Reference [Bandwidth Management Menu] cont .2 Application Guide.2 Application Guide.Policy menu group . see the Alteon OS 22. policy <BW policy number (1-512)> Displays the Bandwidth Management Policy Menu.Set the frequency of BWM email in minutes force . 280 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. Bandwidth policies are bandwidth limita- tions defined for any set of frames. To view menu options. 0 for default behavior> Sets the frequency of Bandwidth Management email in minutes.0. specifying the guaranteed bandwidth rates. To manage bandwidth on an Alteon Application Switch. The default is set to None.0.

Set Contract name policy .Disable BW Contract del .Time policy menu name . This means that no bandwidth limit is applied on the queues. By default. see page 283.Delete BW Contract cur . The packets will exit in the order they came in.Display current BW Contract configuration Table 6-41 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/cont) Command Syntax and Usage timepol <BW Contract time policy number (1-2)> Displays Time Policy Menu.Set user (IP address) limiting type for this contract wtcpwin . cur Displays the current Bandwidth Management configuration.Enable/disable monitor-only mode for this Contract shaping . Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 281 315393-J.Enable/disable overwriting IP TOS for this Contract mononly .Enable/disable user (IP address) limiting for this contract iptype . /cfg/bwm/cont <contract number> Bandwidth Management Contract Configuration [BW Contract 1 Menu] timepol .0. on Globally enables Bandwidth Management on this switch.Alteon OS 22.Set Contract Policy prec . When disabled. To view menu options. name <15 character name> Sets the name for this Bandwidth Management contract.Enable/disable overwriting TCP Window for this Contract ena .Set Contract Precedence history .Enable/disable traffic shaping for this contract iplimit . the reordering of the packets does not occur.Enable BW Contract dis . this option is enabled.2 Command Reference Table 6-40 Bandwidth Management Menu Options (/cfg/bwm) Command Syntax and Usage force disable|enable Enables or disables the enforcement of bandwidth policy on the traffic.Enable/disable Saving Contract stats history wtos . off Globally disables Bandwidth Management on this switch. January 2005 .

wtos disable|enable Disables or enables overwriting the IP Type of Service (TOS) for this contract. whether the user (IP address) limiting is enforced by the source IP address (SIP) or the destination IP address (DIP). 282 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. By default. iptype <sip|dip> Defines the IP type for this contract. The statistics are generated but no shaping or limiting will apply to this contract. the user can modify the TCP window size to a lower value so that when the packet arrives carrying the bytes within that window size. it is enabled. By default. ena Enables this Bandwidth Management contract. it is disabled. del Removes this contract from the switch. each IP address is limited to the user limit configured in /cfg/bwm/policy on page 284. For details. Do not set the value to lower than 1500 bytes. This command is used for design and auditing purposes only.0. iplimit disable|enable Enables or disables user (IP address) limiting for this contract. January 2005 . the receiver of that packet does not have to wait for acknowledgement. cur Displays the current Bandwidth Management contract configuration. shaping disable|enable Disables or enables shaping of the traffic for this contract. dis Disables this Bandwidth Management contract. The default policy number is 64. mononly disable|enable Enables or disables monitor-only mode for this Contract. history disable|enable Disables or enables saving statistics for this contract on the server. shaping means buffering a packet and keeping it ready to be sent. This may help reduce the traffic congestion. refer to the Application Guide.2 Command Reference Table 6-41 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/cont) Command Syntax and Usage policy <Bandwidth policy number (1-512)> Sets the policy number for this Bandwidth Management contract. By overwriting the default window size. prec <Bandwidth precedence value (1-255)> Sets the precedence value for this Bandwidth Management contract. If enabled. The default value is 1. In this context. wtcpwin disable|enable Enables or disables overwriting TCP Window for this Contract.

Enable Time Policy disable . policy <BW Policy number. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 283 .Alteon OS 22.Set Time Policy to hour policy .Disable Time Policy delete . If am or pm is not specified.Set Time Policy enable . the switch will default to am for numbers lower than 12 and will default to pm for numbers 13 or higher. The default is everyday. weekdays (Monday to Friday).Display current Time Policy configuration Table 6-42 BWM Contract Time Policy Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/ timepol) Command Syntax and Usage day <mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat|sun|weekday|weekend|everyday> Defines the day(s) of the week. If am or pm is not specified. enable Enables the Time Policy command on the switch. 1-512> Defines the policy number for the contract.Set Time Policy day from . the switch will default to am for numbers lower than 12 and will default to pm for numbers 13 or higher.2 Command Reference /cfg/bwm/cont <contract number>/timepol <Contract time policy number> BWM Contract Time Policy Configuration Menu This feature enables the user to configure different policies based on the time of the day using the following menu and commands: [BW Contract 1 Time Policy 1 Menu] day . 315393-J. to <1-12am/pm> Sets the end limit of time in hours.Set Time Policy from hour to .Delete Time Policy cur . disable Disables the Time Policy command on the switch.0. weekend (Saturday and Sunday) or everyday. from <1-12am/pm> Defines the time from where you need to start the time in hours.

January 2005 . cur Displays the current Time Policy configuration on the switch.Alteon OS 22. 284 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. userlim <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the bandwidth limit for each IP address in the contract traffic. This is the highest amount of bandwidth available to this policy. soft <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the soft bandwidth limit for this policy. This is the amount of bandwidth always available to this policy. resv <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the reserve limit for this policy. The default value is 500Kbytes.0.2 Command Reference Table 6-42 BWM Contract Time Policy Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/ timepol) Command Syntax and Usage delete Deletes Time Policy. The default value is 1000 kbps. The default value is 2000 kbps. /cfg/bwm/policy <policy number> Bandwidth Management Policy Configuration [Policy 1 Menu] hard soft resv userlim utos otos buffer del cur Set hard Limit Set soft Limit Set Reservation Limit Set per user (IP address) Limit Set underlimit (soft limit) TOS Set overlimit (soft limit) TOS Set Buffer Limit Delete BW Policy Display current Policy configuration Table 6-43 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/pol) Command Syntax and Usage hard <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the hard bandwidth limit for this policy.

The default value is 8192 bytes. buffer <Maximum buffer space (bytes) (8192-128000)> Sets the buffer limit for this policy.Delete BW Group cur .” the switch will not overwrite the TOS value. With this option set to the default value of “0. cur Displays all current Bandwidth Management Group configurations.Remove Contract from this group del . 315393-J. del Deletes the bandwidth management policy. rem <BW Contract number. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 285 .0.Alteon OS 22. /cfg/bwm/group Bandwidth Management Group Configuration Menu [BW Group 1 Menu] add . cur Displays the current value of the bandwidth policy configuration. 1-256> Removes a contract from this group. 1-256> Adds a contract to this group. otos <BW Policy TOS (0-255)> Sets the new otos (over the limit TOS) value to overwrite the original TOS value if the traffic for this contract is over the soft limit.” the switch will not overwrite the TOS value.Display current BW Group configuration Table 6-44 Bandwidth Management Group Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/group) Command Syntax and Usage add <BW Contract number. With this option set to the default value of “0.Add Contract to this group rem .2 Command Reference Table 6-43 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/pol) Command Syntax and Usage utos <BW Policy TOS (0-255)> Sets the new utos (underlimit TOS) value to overwrite the original TOS value if the traffic for this contract is under the soft limit. del Deletes this Bandwidth Management group.

0.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .2 Command Reference /cfg/bwm/cur Bandwidth Management Current Configuration Current Bandwidth Management setting: ON Policy Enforcement: enabled SMTP server user name: Contract Name Policy Prec Hist TOS State Shaping 1 cont_1 1 1 E E E E 2 cont_2 2 1 E D D D 256 Default -0 E D E D *Default contract gets all the BW that is available on a port after the active contracts reserved BW is taken. Policy 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Hard 25M 10M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M Soft 20M 8M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M Resv oTOS uTOS Buffer 500K 150 100 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 286 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.

see page 288. trunk <trunk group number> Displays Trunk Group Menu. The factory default value of this command is Nortel multiple STG mode disabled. the Nortel implementation of multiple STGs will be followed. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 287 . see page 292. 315393-J. To view menu options. When Nortel multiple STG mode is disabled. cur Displays the current Layer 2 parameters. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays VLAN Menu.2 Command Reference /cfg/l2 Layer 2 Configuration Menu [Layer 2 Menu] stg trunk lacp vlan ntmstg cur Spanning Tree Menu Trunk Group Menu Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu VLAN Menu Enable/disable Nortel multiple STG mode Display current layer 2 parameters Table 6-45 Layer 2 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2) Command Syntax and Usage stg <group number [1-16]> Displays Spanning Tree Group Menu. see page 294. To view menu options. lacp Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) Menu.Alteon OS 22. You need to reset the switch with the command /boot/reset for the Spanning Tree Group configuration to change to ntmstg enabled. The ntmstg enabled device will not work with the device configured for Cisco implementation of Spanning Tree BPDUs. see page 297. To view menu options. ntmstg disable|enable Enables or disables Nortel Multiple Spanning Tree Group mode. When Nortel multiple STG mode is enabled.0. the Cisco implementation of multiple STGs will be followed. To view menu options.

Spanning Tree configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path. Spanning Tree automatically sets up another active path on the network to sustain network operations. This command is turned on by default. [Spanning Tree Group 1 Menu] brg . Alteon OS supports up to 16 instances of Spanning Trees or Spanning Tree groups.Port parameter menu add . Each VLAN can be placed in only one Spanning Tree group per switch except for the default Spanning Tree group (STG 1).Globally turn Spanning Tree ON off .Display current bridge parameters 288 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Bridge parameter menu port .Default Spanning Tree and Member parameters cur . Thus. Alteon OS supports the IEEE 802. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) detects and eliminates logical loops in a bridged or switched network. The default Spanning Tree group (1) can have more than one VLAN. When multiple paths exist.1p Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path.Add VLAN(s) to Spanning Tree Group remove .Remove all VLANs from Spanning Tree Group on . Spanning Tree can be enabled or disabled for each port.0. All other Spanning Tree groups (2-16) can have only one VLAN associated with it. January 2005 . STP is used to prevent loops in the network topology. Multiple Spanning Trees can be enabled on tagged or untagged ports.2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/stg Spanning Tree Group Configuration When multiple paths exist on a network. If that path fails. STP forces redundant data paths into a standby (blocked) state.Remove VLAN(s) from Spanning Tree Group clear . See your Application Guide for a detailed description of this feature and how to configure Spanning Tree Groups on the switch.Globally turn Spanning Tree OFF default .Alteon OS 22.

on Globally enables Spanning Tree Protocol. STP must be enabled. off Globally disables Spanning Tree Protocol.Alteon OS 22. remove <VLAN numbers (1-4090)> Breaks the association between a VLAN and a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter.0. cur Displays the current Spanning Tree Protocol parameters. clear Removes all VLANs from a spanning tree. 315393-J. port <port number> Displays the Spanning Tree Port Menu. To view menu options. Table 6-46 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/stp) Command Syntax and Usage brg Displays the Bridge Spanning Tree Menu. see page 291. add <VLAN numbers (1-4090)> Associates a VLAN with a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter.2 Command Reference NOTE – When VRRP is used for active/active redundancy. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 289 . default Resets STG and Group member parameters to factory default. To view menu options. see page 290.

The range is 6 to 40 seconds.Set bridge Priority [0-65535] hello . The forward delay parameter specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the listening state to the learning state and from the learning state to the forwarding state.Set bridge Max Age (6-40 secs) fwd . The range is 1 to 10 seconds. configure the bridge priority lower than all other switches and bridges on your network. mxage <new bridge max age (6-40 secs)> Configures the bridge maximum age. 0 to disable) cur .Set bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs. The maximum age parameter specifies the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it re configures the STP network.Set bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs) aging . January 2005 . The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network is the STP root bridge.The hello time specifies how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). hello <new bridge hello time (1-10 secs)> Configures the bridge hello time. and the default is 32768. and the default is 20 seconds.Set bridge Hello Time [1-10 secs] mxage . The range is 0 to 65535. and the default is 2 seconds. and the default is 15 seconds.Display current bridge parameters Spanning Tree bridge parameters affect the global STP operation of the switch. The lower the value. The range is 4 to 30 seconds. Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value.0. 290 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/stg/brg Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration [Bridge Spanning Tree Menu] prior . To make this switch the root bridge. STP bridge parameters include: Bridge priority Bridge hello time Bridge maximum age Forwarding delay Bridge aging time Table 6-47 Bridge Spanning Tree Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stp/brg) Command Syntax and Usage prior <new bridge priority (0-65535)> Configures the bridge priority. fwd <new bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs)> Configures the bridge forward delay parameter. the higher the bridge priority.

When configuring STP bridge parameters.Turn port's Spanning Tree OFF cur .Alteon OS 22. STP port parameters include: Port priority Port path cost STP is turned on by default for the port.Turn port's Spanning Tree ON off . cur Displays the current bridge STP parameters.Set port Priority (0-255) cost . set this parameter to 0. 0 to disable)> Configures the forwarding database aging time. 315393-J. The range is 1 to 65535 seconds.2 Command Reference Table 6-47 Bridge Spanning Tree Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stp/brg) Command Syntax and Usage aging <new bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs. The aging time specifies the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the forwarding database. the following formulas must be used: 2*(fwd-1) > mxage 2*(hello+1) < mxage /cfg/l2/stg <STG Group Index>/port <port #> Spanning Tree Port Configuration [Spanning Tree Port 1 Menu] prior . 0 for default) on .Set port Path Cost (1-65535.0. and the default is 300 seconds. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 291 . To disable aging.Display current port Spanning Tree parameters Spanning Tree port parameters are used to modify STP operation on an individual port basis.

the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. the faster the port. The range is 1 to 65535. cur Displays the current STP port parameters. /cfg/l2/trunk <trunk group number> Trunk Configuration Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth and multi-link connections between Alteon Application Switches or other trunk capable devices. The port path cost is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. The range is 0 to 255. on Enables STP on the port. Up to eight ports/trunks can belong to the same trunk group. A value of 0 indicates that the default cost will be computed for an auto negotiated link speed. Best performance is achieved when all ports in a trunk are configured for the same speed. The port priority helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port.Alteon OS 22. Generally speaking. the lower the path cost.0. and the default is 128. January 2005 . combining their bandwidth to create a single. 0 for default)> Configures the port path cost. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment. cost <new port Path Cost (1-65535. Trunking from non-Alteon devices must comply with Cisco® EtherChannel® technology. The default is 10 for 100Mbps ports. and 1 for Gigabit ports. A trunk group is a group of ports that act together. Up to 12 trunk groups can be configured on the Alteon Application Switch. 292 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. off Disables STP on the port.2 Command Reference Table 6-48 Spanning Tree Port Menu (/cfg/l2/stp/port) Command Syntax and Usage prior <new port Priority (0-255)> Configures the port priority. larger virtual link. with the following restrictions: Any physical switch port can belong to no more than one trunk group. you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. When trunk groups are configured.

0. rem <port number> Removes a physical port from the current trunk group.Disable trunk group del .Add port to trunk group rem .Display current Trunk Group configuration Table 6-49 Trunk Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/trunk) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this trunk group. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 293 . del Removes the current trunk group configuration.2 Command Reference By default. the contract number is 256 for AD3 and 1024 for AD4. the trunk group is empty and disabled. 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.Remove port from trunk group ena . By default.Enable trunk group dis .Set BW contract for this trunk group add . ena Enables the current trunk group. [Trunk group 1 Menu] cont .Delete trunk group cur . dis Turns the current trunk group off. cur Displays the current trunk group parameters. add <port number> Adds a physical port to the current trunk group.

NOTE – Refer to IEEE 802. logical link segment. Each external port in the Alteon OS can have one of the following LACP modes. At the core of the 802. The maximum number of configurable trunk groups are 40: 12 user configurable trunks and 28 LACP trunks depending upon the maximum number of ports in the switch. If a link in a LACP trunk group fails.3ad standard on the Alteon OS. This protocol allows the user to group several physical ports into one logical port (LACP trunk group) with any switch that supports IEEE 802. Link aggregation is a method of grouping physical link segments of the same media type and speed in full duplex.3ad standard is Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). January 2005 . LACP automatically determines which member links can be aggregated and then aggregates them. It provides for the controlled addition and removal of physical links for the link aggregation. The maximum number of active physical ports in any trunk group is eight and the number of standby ports is also eight. When the system initializes. and treating them as if they were part of a single.3ad standard called the LACP trunks.Alteon OS 22. This port initiates negotiation with the partner system port by sending LACPDU (Link Aggregation Control Protocol Data Unit) packets. off (default) The user can configure this port to a regular static trunk group. active The port is capable of forming an LACP trunk. all ports are in off mode by default. passive The port is capable of forming an LACP trunk.3ad standard (LACP). The 802.3ad-2000 for a detailed information about the standard.3ad standard allows two or more standard Ethernet links to form a single Layer 2 link using the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). 294 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Alteon OS 22. traffic is reassigned dynamically to the remaining links of the LACP trunk group or is assigned to the standby LACP links. This port only responds to the negotiation requests sent from an LACP active port.0.2 supports IEEE 802. You can configure the trunk groups manually called the static trunks as well as you can configure dynamic trunk group using the IEEE 802.0.

You can choose between short (3 seconds) or long (90 seconds) timeout periods. cur Displays the current LACP configuration.Display current LACP configuration Table 6-50 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lacp) Command Syntax and Usage sysprio <1-65535> Defines the priority value (1 through 65535) for the Alteon OS. The rest of the ports stay in standby mode to substitute for any failed ports. The default value is 32768. The link can generate Link Aggregation ID (LAG ID) based on the operational key. port <port number> Displays the LACP Port menu. Lower numbers provide higher priority. an operational key. Please refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for a detailed information on this protocol.Alteon OS 22. To view menu options.0. in conjunction with port priority. [LACP Menu] sysprio . The default value is long. see page 296.Set LACP system timeout scale for timing out partner info port . NOTE – All ports are in LACP off mode by default. System priority is used when there are more than eight ports configured with the same adminkey. All the aggregatable ports must have the same LAG ID. You can form an active LACP trunk group with all the ports that have the same LAG ID.LACP port Menu cur . January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 295 . The system priority. and an aggregator for LACP to start negotiation on these ports. 315393-J. decides which eight ports should be combined to form a trunk group between two switches.2 Command Reference Each LACP active or passive port needs an admin. timeout <short|long> Defines the timeout period before invalidating LACP data from a remote partner. Use the following commands to configure LACP on the Alteon OS. You need to assign the same admin key to a group of ports to make them aggregatable.Set LACP system priority timeout .

passive: Using this option. The default value is 128.Set LACP port priority adminkey . prio <1-65535> Sets the priority value for the selected port. You can use this port to manually configure a static trunk. active: Using this option.Set LACP mode prio . Passive ports do not initiate negotiation.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/lacp/port <port number> LACP Port Configuration Menu [LACP Port 1 Menu] mode .Display current LACP port configuration Use the following commands to configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on a selected port. Only active ports initiate negotiation with the partner system port by sending the LACPDU packets.0. you can turn LACP on and set this port to active. but only respond to the negotiation requests from active ports. cur Displays the current LACP configuration for this port. Only ports with the same admin key and oper key (operational state generated internally) can form an LACP trunk group. adminkey <1-255> Sets the admin key for this port. Table 6-51 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lacp/port #) Command Syntax and Usage mode <off for no LACP or active or passive> off: Using this option. you can turn LACP on and set this port to passive mode. Lower numbers provide higher priority. 296 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. you can turn LACP off for this port.Set LACP port admin key cur . All ports are in off mode by default. January 2005 .

stg <Spanning Tree Group index (1-16)> Assigns a VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group. and change the port membership of the VLAN. 315393-J. rem <port number> Removes port(s) or trunk group(s) from this VLAN. which is enabled all the time. see “Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 34. add <port number> Adds port(s) or trunk group(s) to the VLAN membership. [VLAN 1 Menu] name stg cont add rem def jumbo learn ena dis del cur - Set VLAN name Assign VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group Set BW contract Add port to VLAN Remove port from VLAN Define VLAN as list of ports Enable/disable Jumbo Frame support Enable/disable smac learning Enable VLAN Disable VLAN Delete VLAN Display current VLAN configuration Table 6-52 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan) Command Syntax and Usage name Assigns a name to the VLAN or changes the existing name. the VLAN menu option is disabled except VLAN 1. to create logical segmentation of workgroups. and to enforce security policies among logical segments. The commands in this menu configure VLAN attributes. The default contract number is 256 on AD3 and 1024 on AD4. For more information on configuring VLANs.2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/vlan <VLAN number> VLAN Configuration VLANs are commonly used to split up groups of network users into manageable broadcast domains. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 297 . The default VLAN name is the first one. (1-256)> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for this VLAN. change the status of the VLAN. cont <BW Contract number. delete the VLAN. By default.0.Alteon OS 22.

Also.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 . del Deletes this VLAN.0. dis Disables this VLAN without removing it from the configuration. By default. it defines ports between 1-28 for VLAN 1. You need to reset the switch using /boot/reset command to enable jumbo frames on the switch. NOTE – All ports must belong to at least one VLAN. jumbo disable|enable Enables or disables jumbo frame support on this VLAN. you cannot add a port to more than one VLAN unless the port has VLAN tagging turned on (see the tag command on page 270). Any port which is removed from a VLAN and which is not a member of any other VLAN is automatically added to default VLAN #1.2 Command Reference Table 6-52 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan) Command Syntax and Usage def <list of port numbers> Defines which ports are members of this VLAN. You cannot remove a port from VLAN #1 if the port has no membership in any other VLAN. ena Enables this VLAN. learn disable|enable Enables or disables source MAC address learning on this VLAN. 298 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. Every port must be a member of at least one VLAN. cur Displays the current VLAN configuration.

0. rip1 Displays the Routing Interface Protocol Menu. 315393-J. see page 304. To view menu options see page 308.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3 Layer 3 Configuration Menu [Layer 3 Menu] if gw route arp frwd nwf rmap rip1 ospf bgp port dns bootp vrrp rtrid metrc cur Interface Menu Default Gateway Menu Static Route Menu ARP Menu Forwarding Menu Network Filters Menu Route Map Menu Routing Information Protocol Menu Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Menu Border Gateway Protocol Menu IP Port Menu Domain Name System Menu Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu Set router ID Set default gateway metric Display current IP configuration Table 6-53 Layer 3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3) Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number (1-256)> Displays the IP Interface Menu. To view menu options. frwd Displays the IP Forwarding Menu. gw <default gateway number (1-259)> Displays the IP Default Gateway Menu. To view menu options see page 309. route Displays the IP Static Route Menu. To view menu options. rmap <route map number (1-32)> Displays the Route Map Menu. nwf <Network filter number (1-256)> Displays the Network Filter Configuration Menu. see page 313. see page 304. To view menu options. arp Displays Address Resolution Protocol menu. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 299 . see page 306. see page 302. To view menu options.Alteon OS 22. see page 301. To view menu options. To view menu options.

300 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. see page 331. see page 347. bgp Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Menu. bootp Displays the Bootstrap Protocol Menu. To view menu options.2 Command Reference Table 6-53 Layer 3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3) Command Syntax and Usage ospf Displays the OSPF Menu. see page 330. To view menu options. see page 332. see page 315. To view menu options.101)> Defines the router ID. vrrp Displays Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu.4. metrc strict|roundrobin Sets the default gateway metric for strict or roundrobin. cur Displays the current IP configuration. port <port number> Displays the IP Port Menu.17. To view menu options. rtrid <IP address (such as. see page 324. 192. The default gateway metric is strict. To view menu options. dns Displays the IP Domain Name System Menu. January 2005 . To view menu options.Alteon OS 22.0. see page 333. For more information on gateway metrics.

dis Disables this IP interface. Each interface can belong to one VLAN. The Interface option is disabled by default.17. Each IP interface represents the Alteon Application Switch on an IP subnet on your network. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 301 .4. ena Enables this IP interface. 315393-J.0)> Configures the IP subnet address mask for the interface using dotted decimal notation. It is enabled by default. though any VLAN can have multiple IP interfaces in it. mask <IP subnet mask (such as 255.Alteon OS 22. relay disable|enable Enables or disables the BOOTP relay on this interface. Table 6-54 IP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/if) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as 192.0.255. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Configures the VLAN number for this interface.101)> Configures the IP address of the switch interface using dotted decimal notation.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/if <interface number> IP Interface Configuration [IP Interface addr mask vlan relay ena dis del cur 1 Menu] Set IP address Set subnet mask Set VLAN number Enable/disable BOOTP relay Enable IP interface Disable IP interface Delete IP interface Display current interface configuration The Alteon Application Switch can be configured with up to 256 IP interfaces. cur Displays the current interface settings. del Removes this IP interface.255.

Alteon OS 22. intr <0-60 seconds> The switch pings the default gateway to verify that it’s up.0.4. The default is 8 attempts.17. Gateways one to four are reserved for default gateway load balancing. 192.44)> Configures the IP address of the default IP gateway using dotted decimal notation.Enable/disable ARP only health checks ena .Set VLAN number prio .Set interval between ping attempts retry .Set priority of default gateway route arp . retry <number of attempts (1-120)> Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this default gateway inoperative.Disable default gateway del . vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the VLAN to be assigned to this default IP gateway.Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN vlan . 302 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. The range is from 1 to 120 attempts. The intr option sets the time between health checks. Table 6-55 Default Gateway Options (/cfg/l3/gw) Command Syntax and Usage addr <default gateway address (such as. January 2005 .2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/gw <gateway number> Default IP Gateway Configuration [Default gateway 1 Menu] addr .Delete default gateway cur .Enable default gateway dis . The default is 2 seconds.Display current default gateway configuration NOTE – The switch can be configured with up to 255 gateways. This option is disabled by default. The range is from 1 to 120 seconds. Gateways five to 259 are used for load-balancing of VLAN-based gateways.Set IP address intr .

then the default gateway route will always be preferred over learned default routes (such as from OSPF. arp disable|enable Enables or disables Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) health checks. NOTE – By default learned default route has higher priority than the configured default gateway route. del Deletes the gateway from the configuration. see page 347. Default Gateway Metrics For information about configuring which gateway is selected when multiple default gateways are enabled. then learned default routes will always be preferred over the default gateway route. 315393-J.0. or RIP protocols). relative to learned default routes. BGP.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 6-55 Default Gateway Options (/cfg/l3/gw) Command Syntax and Usage prio <high|low> Allows you to change the priority of the default gateway route to either high or low. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 303 . This command is disabled by default. dis Disables the gateway. cur Displays the current gateway settings. If you set the priority to low. If you set the priority to high. ena Enables the gateway for use.

Set re-ARP period in minutes .Add static route rem . ARP also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its cache memory. where any packet routed to this destination will be dropped.. January 2005 .0. [ARP Menu] static rearp cur . Table 6-56 IP Static Route Configuration Menu Options (cfg/l3/route) Command Syntax and Usage add <destination> <mask> <gateway> <interface number> Adds a static route.Alteon OS 22. and gateway address. cur Displays the current IP static routes. destination subnet mask. rem <destination> <mask> Removes a static route. ARP queries machines on the local network for their physical addresses.0. You will be prompted to enter a destination IP address. Then the corresponding physical address is used to send a packet. In any IP communication.Display current ARP configuration 304 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. /cfg/l3/arp ARP Configuration Menu Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the TCP/IP protocol that resides within the Internet layer.Remove static route cur . ARP resolves a physical address from an IP address.0.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/route IP Static Route Configuration [IP Static Route Menu] add . The destination address of the route to remove must be specified using dotted decimal notation. the route becomes a black hole route.Display current static routes Up to 128 static routes can be configured. Enter all addresses using dotted decimal notation.0. the ARP cache is consulted to see if the IP address of the computer or the router is present in the ARP cache.Static ARP Menu . If a gateway address is 0.

To view options.4.101)> Deletes a permanent ARP entry. Static ARPs can also be configured on some gateways as a protection against malicious ARP Cache corruption and possible DOS attacks. [Static ARP Menu] add .17. Static ARPs are also useful to communicate with devices that do not respond to ARP requests. rearp <2-120 minutes> Defines re-ARP period in minutes.2 Command Reference Table 6-57 ARP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp) Command Syntax and Usage static Displays Static ARP menu. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 305 .Add a permanent ARP entry del . del <IP address (such as. see page 305.Display current static ARP configuration Table 6-58 ARP Static Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp/static) Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> <MAC address> <VLAN number> <port number> Adds a permanent ARP entry.Delete an ARP entry cur . Static ARP entries enable the switch to reach the hosts without sending an ARP broadcast request to the network. 192. You can set this duration between two and 120 minutes.x and below allow the user to configure the ARP information but that information cannot be retained over a switch reboot.0.Alteon OS 22. Alteon OS 20. NOTE – Alteon OS 21. 315393-J. cur Displays current static ARP configuration.0 and above allows the static ARP configuration to be retained over reboots. /cfg/l3/arp/static ARP Static Configuration Menu Static ARP entries are permanent in the ARP cache and do not age out like the ARP entries that are learnt dynamically. cur Displays the current ARP configurations.

cur Displays the current IP forwarding settings. and to remove local networks. dirbr disable|enable Enables or disables forwarding directed broadcasts.Enable or disable forwarding directed broadcasts on . [IP Local Networks Menu] add .Local network definition for route caching menu dirbr .2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/frwd IP Forwarding Configuration Menu [IP Forwarding Menu] local .0.Add local network definition rem . off Disables IP forwarding (routing) on the Alteon Application Switch.Globally turn IP Forwarding OFF cur .Remove local network definition cur . To view menu options. Forwarding is turned off by default.Globally turn IP Forwarding ON off .Display current IP Forwarding configuration Table 6-59 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/frwd) Command Syntax and Usage local Displays the menu used to define local network for route caching. on Enables IP forwarding (routing) on the Alteon Application Switch. see page 306. This command is disabled by default. Up to five local networks (lnets) can be configured.Alteon OS 22. /cfg/l3/frwd/local Local Network Route Caching Definition This menu is used for adding local networks by setting the local network address and netmask for the route cache. January 2005 .Display current local network definitions 306 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.

0. rem <local network address> <local network mask> Removes a definition for a local network.0 . and the local network mask is the mask which is applied to produce the range.0 Mask 128.255.0.Alteon OS 22.0. For details. 315393-J.255. The local network address is used to define the base IP address in the range which will be cached.255.0 NOTE – All addresses that fall outside the defined range are forwarded to the default gateway. The default gateways must be within range.255 128.2 Command Reference Table 2 IP Local Networks Menu Options (/cfg/l3/frwd/local) Command Syntax and Usage add <local network address> <local network mask> Adds a definition for a local network. Table 6-60 Local Routing Cache Address Ranges Local Host Address Range 0.0.255.205. The /cfg/l3/frwd/local/add parameters define a range of addresses that will be cached on the Alteon Application Switch. To limit the route cache to your local hosts.255.0. the destination address is masked (bitwise and) with the local network mask and checked against the local network address.0.255 205. By default.0.0.0. Addresses to be cached are subnets that are directly connected and for which there is an interface configured on the Alteon Application Switch. by reducing the size of the ARP table on the Alteon Application Switch.32.0.0. To determine if a route should be added to the memory cache.0.0 .0.0.0.255.0. cur Displays the current local network definitions.0.0.255.32.0. see “Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache” on page 307.255.255.0 128.255.255 Address 0.0.32. This produces a range that includes all Internet addresses for route caching: 0. the local network address and mask are both set to 0.0 128.0 205.0 through 255. Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache The Local Route Cache lets you use switch resources more efficiently.0.0 255.127.0 . you could configure the parameters as shown in the examples in the following table. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 307 .

Disable Network Filter delete . For Border Gateway Protocol (BGP).IP Subnet mask enable . enable Enables the Network Filter configuration. The default value is 0. 308 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. mask <subnet mask (such as. assign the network filter to a route map.0.44)> Sets the starting IP address for this filter.0. The default address is 0.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/nwf Network Filter Configuration [IP Network Filter 1 Menu] addr . January 2005 .Enable Network Filter disable .0.255.0.0. delete Deletes the Network Filter configuration. then assign the route map to the peer. 192.0.0.255. cur Displays the current the Network Filter configuration.Alteon OS 22.Delete Network Filter cur .17.IP Address mask .0)> Sets the IP subnet mask that is used with /cfg/l3/nwf/addr to define the range of IP addresses that will be accepted by the peer when the filter is enabled. disable Disables the Network Filter configuration.Display current Network Filter configuration Table 6-61 IP Network Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/nwf) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as.4. 255.

2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rmap <route map number> Route Map Configuration Menu Route maps control and modify routing information. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 309 . One to three path preferences can be configured. metric <(value 0-4294967294)>|none Sets the metric of the matched route. which affects both inbound and outbound directions. For more information. 315393-J. [IP Route Map alist aspath ap lp metric type prec weight enable disable delete cur 1 - Menu] Access List number AS Filter Menu Set as-path prepend of the matched route Set local-preference of the matched route Set metric of the matched route Set OSPF metric-type of the matched route Set the precedence of this route map Set weight of the matched route Enable route map Disable route map Delete route map Display current route map configuration Table 6-62 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap) Command Syntax and Usage alist <number (1-8)> Displays the Access List menu. For more information.0.Alteon OS 22. The path with the higher preference is preferred. NOTE – The map number (1-32) represents the routing map you wish to configure. see page 312. aspath <number (1-8)> Displays the Autonomous System (AS) Filter menu. ap <AS number> [<AS number>] [<AS number>]|none Sets the AS path preference of the matched route. lp <(value 0-4294967294)>|none Sets the local preference of the matched route. see page 311.

The default is type 1. Type 2 routes have more cost than Type 2.2 Command Reference Table 6-62 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap) (Continued) Command Syntax and Usage type <value (1|2)>|none Assigns the type of OSPF metric. Type 2—External routes are calculated using only the external metrics. cur Displays the current route configuration. The smaller the value. none—Removes the OSPF metric. weight <value (0-65534)>|none Sets the weight of the route map. Type 1—External routes are calculated using both internal and external metrics. disable Disables the route map. delete Deletes the route map.0. prec <value (1-255)> Sets the precedence of the route map. January 2005 . 310 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. Default value is 10. enable Enables the route map.Alteon OS 22. the higher the precedence.

[IP Access List nwf metric action enable disable delete cur - 1 Menu] Network Filter number Metric Set Network Filter action Enable Access List Disable Access List Delete Access List Display current Access List configuration Table 6-63 IP Access List Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/alist) Command Syntax and Usage nwf <network filter number (1-256)> Sets the network filter number. cur Displays the current Access List configuration. See “/cfg/l3/nwf” on page 308 for details. 315393-J. action permit|deny or p|d Permits or denies action for the access list.0. delete Deletes the access list. disable Disables the access list.Alteon OS 22. metric <(1-4294967294)>|none Sets the metric value in the AS-External (ASE) LSA. enable Enables the access list.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rmap <route map number/alist <access list number> IP Access List Configuration Menu NOTE – The route map number (1-32) and the access list number (1-8) represent the IP access list you wish to configure. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 311 .

AS number action . enable Enables the Autonomous System filter.Delete AS Filter cur . January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.0. action permit|deny or p|d Permits or denies Autonomous System filter action.Set AS Filter action enable .2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rmap <route map number> aspath <autonomous system path> Autonomous System Filter Path NOTE – The rmap number (1-32) and the path number (1-8) represent the AS path you wish to configure.Disable AS Filter delete . disable Disables the Autonomous System filter. delete Deletes the Autonomous System filter. cur Displays the current Autonomous System filter configuration. 312 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Display current AS Filter configuration Table 6-64 AS Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/aspath) Command Syntax and Usage as <AS number (1-65535)> Sets the Autonomous System filter’s path number.Enable AS Filter disable . [AS Filter 1 Menu] as .

0. it is removed from the routing table.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rip1 Routing Information Protocol Configuration The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is an interior gateway protocol (IGP). For RIP1. This option is turned off by default. the natural mask is always applied by the router receiving the update.Alteon OS 22. This update contains known networks and the distances (hop count) associated with each one. [Routing Information Protocol Menu] updat . 315393-J.Set update period in seconds spply .Display current RIP configuration NOTE – Do not configure RIP1 parameters if your routing equipment uses RIP version 2. The RIP1 Menu is used for configuring Routing Information Protocol. version 1 (RIP1) parameters. RIP sends routing information updates every 30 seconds. For RIP2. which means the network has become unreachable.Enable/disable listening to default routes statc .Enable/disable listening to route updates deflt .Globally turn RIP ON off .Enable/disable supplying route updates lsten . If information about a network is not received for 180 seconds (six update intervals). RIP is one of a class of algorithms known as distance vector algorithms. RIP uses broadcast User Datagram protocol (UDP) data packets to exchange routing information. mask information is sent.Enable/disable supplying static routes poisn .Globally turn RIP OFF cur . If information about a network is not received for 90 seconds. The distance or hop count is used as the metric to determine the best path to a remote network or host where the hop count does not exceed 15 hops assuming a cost of one for each network. the metric associated with the network is raised to infinity (U) – the metric is set for 16.Enable/disable vip advertisement on .Enable/disable poisoned reverse vip . no mask information is exchanged. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 313 .

and the switch will continue to advertise the route. statc disable|enable This command is disabled by default.0. and will not be advertised. the switch uses split horizon with poisoned reverse. vip disable|enable Enables or disables the advertisement of virtual IP addresses as Host Routes. it will always be advertised except when it is included in another network route that is already being advertised. the switch accepts RIP default routes from other routers. 314 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. Note: If all real servers behind a VIP go down. If a VIP route exists in a routing table. When enabled. It is set at 30 seconds by default. When enabled. on Globally turns RIP ON. When disabled. the switch learns routes from other routers. January 2005 . the switch uses only split horizon. deflt disable|enable When enabled. When enabled. This command is disabled by default. off Globally turns RIP OFF. the VIP route does not get eliminated from the routing table. the switch rejects RIP default routes. If we disable all the real servers using operation command. spply disable|enable Enables or disables supplying route updates.2 Command Reference Table 6-65 Routing Information Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/rip1) Command Syntax and Usage updat <update period (1-120 seconds)> Sets the RIP update period in seconds. poisn disable|enable This command is disabled by default. This command is disabled by default.Alteon OS 22. This command is disabled by default. but gives them lower priority than configured gateways. lsten disable|enable When enabled. the route gets removed from the routing table. the switch supplies static routes. the switch supplies routes to other routers. When disabled. cur Displays the current RIP configuration.

Globally turn OSPF ON off . virt <virtual link (1-3)> Displays the Virtual Links menu used to configure OSPF for a Virtual Link. The Alteon OS implementation conforms to the OSPF version 2 specifications detailed in Internet RFC 1583. For more information on how to configure OSPF on the switch.OSPF Host Entry Menu redist .Globally turn OSPF OFF cur . The AS can be divided into smaller logical units known as areas. Areas inject summary routing information into the backbone. The backbone acts as the central OSPF area. 315393-J.OSPF Summary Range Menu if . range <range number (1-16)> Displays summary routes menu for up to 16 IP addresses.OSPF Route Redistribute Menu lsdb .OSPF Interface Menu virt . See page 321 to view menu options. which then distributes it to other areas as needed. known as the backbone. This area index does not represent the actual OSPF area number. See page 317 to view menu options. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315 . [Open Shortest Path First Menu] aindex .2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf Open Shortest Path First Configuration Alteon OS supports the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol.OSPF MD5 Key Menu host .Display current OSPF configuration Table 6-66 OSPF Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the area index menu.Export default route information on . if <interface number (1-256)> Displays the OSPF interface configuration menu.OSPF Virtual Links Menu md5key . In any AS with multiple areas. OSPF is designed for routing traffic within a single IP domain called an Autonomous System (AS). refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide.0. All other areas in the AS must be connected to the backbone. See page 319 to view menu options.OSPF Area (index) Menu range .Set the LSDB limit for external LSA default . one area must be designated as area 0.Alteon OS 22. See page 318 to view menu options.

redist <fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp> Displays Route Distribution Menu See page 323 to view menu options. Host routes are used for advertising network device IP addresses to external networks to perform server load balancing within OSPF. cur Displays the current OSPF configuration settings.Alteon OS 22. It also makes Area Border Route (ABR) load sharing and ABR failover possible. January 2005 . default <metric (1-16777215)> <metric-type 1|2>|none Sets one default route among multiple choices in an area. 316 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. off Disables OSPF on the Alteon Application Switch.2 Command Reference Table 6-66 OSPF Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage md5key <key ID (1-255)> Assigns a string to MD5 authentication key. See page 322 to view menu options. Up to 128 host routes can be configured.0. on Enables OSPF on the Alteon Application Switch. 0 for no limit)> Sets the link state database limit. Use none for no default. lsdb <LSDB limit (0-2000. See host <host entry number (1-128)> Displays the menu for configuring OSPF for the host routes.

Password: Authenticates simple passwords so that only trusted routing devices can participate. auth none|password|md5 None: No authentication required. when a virtual link has to be established with the backbone.Set time interval between two SPF calculations enable . 315393-J.Delete area cur . All routes received via that stub area carry the configured metric to potentially influencing routing decisions.Set stub area metric auth .101)> Defines the IP address of the OSPF area number. Metric value assigns the priority for choosing the switch for default route.Alteon OS 22.Set area type metric . MD5: This parameter is used when MD5 cryptographic authentication is required.Enable area disable .0. For example. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 317 . NSSA: Not-So-Stubby Area (NSSA) is similar to stub area with additional capabilities.Display current OSPF area configuration Table 6-67 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex) Command Syntax and Usage areaid <IP address (such as. External routes from outside the Autonomous System (AS) can be advertised within the NSSA but are not distributed into other areas. 192.Disable area delete . For example. Typically. routes originating from within the NSSA can be propagated to adjacent transit and backbone areas. a stub area is connected to only one other area. metric <metric value (1-65535)> Configures a stub area to send a numeric metric value. Any area that is not a stub area or NSSA is considered to be transit area. the area type must be defined as transit.17.Set area ID type .4. Transit area: allows area summary information to be exchanged between routing devices.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/aindex Area Index Configuration Menu [OSPF Area (index) 1 Menu] areaid . type transit|stub|nssa Defines the type of area. Stub area: is an area where external routing information is not distributed.Set authentication type spf . Metric type determines the method for influencing routing decisions for external routes.

17.4.Delete range .2 Command Reference Table 6-67 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex) Command Syntax and Usage spf <interval (0-255)> Sets time interval between two successive SPF (shortest path first) calculations of the shortest path tree using the Dijkstra’s algorithm.Set area index . 318 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.4. /cfg/l3/ospf/range OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu [OSPF Summary addr mask aindex hide enable disable delete cur Range 1 Menu] .17.Set IP address . 192. January 2005 . delete Deletes the OSPF area.Enable range . 192.Disable range .0.101> Displays the IP address mask for the range. mask <IP address (such as. disable Disables the OSPF area. aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays the area index used by the Alteon Application Switch.Display current OSPF summary range configuration Table 6-68 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/range) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP Address (such as.Alteon OS 22.101)> Displays the base IP address for the range.Set IP mask .Enable/disable hide range . cur Displays the current OSPF configuration. enable Enables the OSPF area.

enable Enables the OSPF summary range.0. cur Displays the current OSPF summary range.2 Command Reference Table 6-68 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/range) Command Syntax and Usage hide disable|enable Hides the OSPF summary range.Alteon OS 22. /cfg/l3/ospf/if OSPF Interface Configuration Menu [OSPF Interface aindex prio cost hello dead trans retra key mdkey enable disable delete cur 1 Menu] Set area index Set interface router priority Set interface cost Set hello interval in seconds Set dead interval in seconds Set transit delay in seconds Set retransmit interval in seconds Set authentication key Set MD5 key ID Enable interface Disable interface Delete interface Display current OSPF interface configuration 315393-J. delete Deletes the OSPF summary range. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 319 . disable Disables the OSPF summary range.

dead <value (1-65535)> Displays the health parameters of a hello packet. retra <value (0-3600)> Displays the retransmit interval in seconds.2 Command Reference Table 6-69 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/if) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the OSPF area index.0. prio <priority value (0-255)> Displays the assigned priority value to the Alteon Application Switch’s OSPF interfaces. Low cost indicates high bandwidth. which is set for an interval of seconds before declaring a silent router to be down. trans <value (0-3600)> Displays the transit delay in seconds. delete Deletes OSPF interface. mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none Assigns an MD5 key to the interface. January 2005 . disable Disables OSPF interface.) cost <cost value (1-65535)> Displays cost set for the selected path—preferred or backup. cur Displays the current settings for OSPF interface. enable Enables OSPF interface.Alteon OS 22. A priority value of 0 specifies that the interface cannot be used as Designated Router (DR) or Backup Designated Router (BDR). Usually the cost is inversely proportional to the bandwidth of the interface. hello <value (1-65535)> Displays the interval in seconds between the hello packets for the interfaces. 320 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. key <key>|none Sets the authentication key to clear the password. (A priority value of 127 is the highest and 1 is the lowest.

Set router ID of virtual neighbor .Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/virt OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu [OSPF Virtual aindex hello dead trans retra nbr key mdkey enable disable delete cur Link 1 Menu] . trans <value (1-3600)> Displays the delay in transit in seconds.Set transit delay in seconds . 315393-J. nbr <nbr router ID (IP address)> Displays the router ID of the virtual neighbor.Disable interface .Delete interface .Set retransmit interval in seconds .Set MD5 key ID . January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 321 . which is set to be in an interval of seconds. Default is 40 seconds. Default is none.Set hello interval in seconds .Display current OSPF interface configuration Table 6-70 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the OSPF area index. dead <value (1-65535)> Displays the health parameters of a hello packet. hello <value (1-65535)> Displays the authentication parameters of a hello packet. which is set to be in an interval of seconds.0. Default is one seconds.0.0. Default is five seconds.Enable interface . key <key>|none Displays the password (up to eight characters) for each virtual link. Default is 0.Set authentication key .Set dead interval in seconds .0. mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none Sets MD5 key ID for each virtual link. Default is none.Set area index . retra <value (1-3600)> Displays the retransmit interval in seconds.

Delete host entry cur .2 Command Reference Table 6-70 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt) Command Syntax and Usage enable Enables OSPF virtual link.Disable host entry delete . January 2005 . enable Enables OSPF host entry.Alteon OS 22. cur Displays the current OSPF virtual link settings. aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays the area index of the host. cost <cost value [1-65535]> Displays the cost value of the host. 322 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. disable Disables OSPF host entry.Enable host entry disable . disable Disables OSPF virtual link. /cfg/l3/ospf/host OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu [OSPF Host Entry 1 Menu] addr .Set host entry IP address aindex .Set area index cost .4. delete Deletes OSPF virtual link.Display current OSPF host entry configuration Table 6-71 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/host) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as.Set cost of this host entry enable .17.0.101)> Displays the base IP address for the host entry. 192.

[OSPF Redistribute Fixed Menu] add . To remove specific route maps.. enter all. enter all. enter none.Alteon OS 22. This option adds a route map to the route redistribution list.Export all routes of this protocol cur . cur Displays the current route map settings. 315393-J.To add all the 32 route maps.0. rem (<route map (1-32)> <route map (1-32)>) . cur Displays the current OSPF host entries. Removes routing maps from the rmap list. enter routing map numbers one per line.Display current route-maps added Table 6-72 OSPF Route Redistribution Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/redist) Command Syntax and Usage add (<route map (1-32)> <route map (1-32)>)|all Adds selected routing maps to the rmap list. To remove a previous configuration and stop exporting the routes of the protocol. The routes of the redistribution protocol matched by the route maps in the route redistribution list will be redistributed. export <metric (1-16777215)><metric type (1|2)> |none Exports the routes of this protocol as external OSPF AS-external LSAs in which the metric and metric type are specified. To remove all 32 route maps.Add rmap into route redistribution list rem .2 Command Reference Table 6-71 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/host) Command Syntax and Usage delete Deletes OSPF host entry.Remove rmap from route redistribution list export .. enter routing map numbers one per line. NULL at end. /cfg/l3/ospf/redist <fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp> OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu. |all Removes the route map from the route redistribution list. To add specific route maps. NULL at the end. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 323 .

cur Displays the current MD5 key configuration. 324 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. it is called external BGP (eBGP). BGP is defined in RFC 1771. When run between different autonomous systems. fixed routes and virtual server IP addresses with other internal and external routers. January 2005 . BGP is turned off by default.0. delete Deletes the authentication key for this OSPF packet. /cfg/l3/bgp Border Gateway Protocol Configuration Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a network to share routing information with each other and advertise information about the segments of the IP address space they can access within their network with routers on external networks. You can configure BGP either within an autonomous system or between different autonomous systems. BGP allows you to decide what is the “best” route for a packet to take from your network to a destination on another network. up to 16 chars> Sets the authentication key up to 16 characters for this OSPF packet. rather than simply setting a default route from your border router(s) to your upstream provider(s).2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/md5key OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu [OSPF MD5 Key key delete cur 1 Menu] Set authentication key Delete key Display current MD5 key configuration Table 6-73 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/md5key) Command Syntax and Usage key <key. When run within an autonomous system.Alteon OS 22. The BGP Menu enables you to configure the switch to receive routes and to advertise static routes. it is called internal BGP (iBGP).

exchanges routing information with routers on other external networks. a business enterprise. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 325 . see page 326. use the route with the shortest AS path as the preferred route if you are using eBGP. To view menu options. see page 329. on Globally turns BGP on. aggr <aggregate number (1-16)> Displays the Aggregation Menu. An autonomous system is assigned a globally unique number called an Autonomous System Number (ASN). within an autonomous system. or use the local preference if you are using iBGP. or a business division). as <autonomous system number (1-65535)> Sets Autonomous System Number for this autonomous system. An autonomous system (AS) is the unit of router policy.0. Each border router.Alteon OS 22. either a single network or a group of networks that is controlled by a common network administrator on behalf of an administrative entity (such as a university. When multiple peers advertise the same route. To view menu options. An autonomous system shares routing information with other autonomous systems using the Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). pref <preference (0-4294967294)> Sets the local preference. 315393-J. There is one fixed route per IP interface.2 Command Reference [Border Gateway peer aggr as pref on off cur - Protocol Menu] Peer menu Aggregation menu Set Autonomous System (AS) number Set Local Preference Globally turn BGP ON Globally turn BGP OFF Display current BGP configuration NOTE – Fixed routes are subnet routes. Table 6-74 Border Gateway Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/bgp) Command Syntax and Usage peer <peer number (1-16)> Displays the menu used to configure each BGP peer. The path with the higher value is preferred.

using dotted decimal notation. cur Displays the current BGP configuration.Set keep alive time advert .Set hold time alive .101)> Defines the IP address for the specified peer (border router).0.Redistribution menu addr .Set remote autonomous system number hold . The default address is 0. see page 328.17.Remove rmap from in-rmap list remo .Set time-to-live of IP datagrams addi .Add rmap into out-rmap list remi .Delete peer cur . 192. which are border routers that exchange routing information with routers on internal and external networks. 326 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Add rmap into in-rmap list addo .Enable peer disable .Set min time between advertisements retry .Alteon OS 22. addr <IP address (such as.Remove rmap from out-rmap list enable . To view the menu options.0. /cfg/l3/bgp/peer <peer number> BGP Peer Configuration Menu [BGP Peer 1 Menu] redist .Set min time between route originations ttl .Display current peer configuration This menu is used to configure BGP peers.Set connect retry interval orig .0. The peer option is disabled by default.0. January 2005 .4.Set remote IP address ras . Table 6-75 BGP Peer Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer) Command Syntax and Usage redist Displays BGP Redistribution Menu.2 Command Reference Table 6-74 Border Gateway Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/bgp) Command Syntax and Usage off Globally turns BGP off.Disable peer delete .

remi <route map ID (1-32)> Removes route map from in-route map list. hold <hold time (0. This value is used to restrict the number of “hops” the advertisement makes.2 Command Reference Table 6-75 BGP Peer Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer) Command Syntax and Usage ras <AS number (0-65535)> Sets the remote autonomous system number for the specified peer. It is also used to support multi-hops. ena Enables this peer configuration. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 327 . orig <min orig time (1-65535)> Sets the minimum time between route originations in seconds. when exhausted. dis Disables this peer configuration. addi <route map ID (1-32)> Adds route map into in-route map list. 315393-J.0. ttl <number of router hops (1-255)> Time-to-live (TTL) is a value in an IP packet that tells a network router whether or not the packet has been in the network too long and should be discarded. The default number is set at 1. 1-21845)> Sets the keep-alive time for the specified peer in seconds. advert <min adv time (1-65535)> Sets time in seconds between advertisements. addo <route map ID (1-32)> Adds route map into out-route map list. alive <keepalive time (0. It is set at 90 seconds by default. in seconds. would cause the packet to be discarded.Alteon OS 22. which allow BGP peers to talk across a routed network. TTL specifies a certain time span in seconds that. It is set at 0 by default. that will elapse before the peer session is torn down because the switch hasn’t received a “keep alive” message from the peer. retry <connect retry interval (1-65535)> Sets connection retry interval in seconds. This command specifies the number of router hops that the IP packet can make. The TTL is determined by the number of router hops the packet is allowed before it must be discarded. 3-65535)> Sets the period of time. remo <route map ID (1-32)> Removes route map from out-route map list.

2 Command Reference Table 6-75 BGP Peer Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes this peer configuration. Similarly. /cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu [Redistribution metric default rip ospf fixed static vip cur Menu] Set default-metric of advertised routes Set default route action Enable/disable advertising RIP routes Enable/disable advertising OSPF routes Enable/disable advertising fixed routes Enable/disable advertising static routes Enable/disable advertising VIP routes Display current redistribution configuration Table 6-76 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist) Command Syntax and Usage metric <metric (1-4294967294)>|none Sets default metric of advertised routes. 328 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. you have to enable static routes since the routes from default gateway are static routes. or none. you have to enable that protocol in this redistribute submenu. None: No routes are configured Import: Import these routes. Redistribute: Default routes are either configured through default gateway or learned through other protocols and redistributed to peer. Originate: The switch sends a default route to peers even though it does not have any default routes in its routing table.Alteon OS 22. If the routes are learned from default gateway configuration. cur Displays the current BGP peer configuration.0. originate. January 2005 . Defaults routes can be configured as import. if the routes are learned from a certain routing protocol. redistribute. default none|import|originate|redistribute Sets default route action.

fixed disable|enable Enables or disables advertising fixed routes. Table 6-77 BGP Aggregate Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ip/bgp/aggr) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address.17.Alteon OS 22. such as 192. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 329 .2 Command Reference Table 6-76 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist) Command Syntax and Usage rip disable|enable Enables or disables advertising RIP routes ospf disable|enable Enables or disables advertising OSPF routes.4.Enable aggregation disable .Delete aggregation current .0.Disable aggregation delete . 315393-J. vip disable|enable Enables or disables advertising VIP routes. static disable|enable Enables or disables advertising static routes.Set aggregation network mask enable .101> Adds the IP address to the selected aggregate. [BGP Aggr 1 Menu] addr .Set aggregation IP address mask .Display current aggregation configuration This menu allows you to configure aggregate routing to condense the number of routes between internal and external peer routers. /cfg/l3/bgp/aggr <aggregate number> BGP Aggregate Routing Configuration Menu NOTE – The aggregate number (1-16) represents the aggregation route you wish to configure. cur Displays the current redistribution configuration.

By default. enable Enables the selected aggregate.Turn Forwarding OFF cur . delete Deletes the selected aggregate.255. current Displays the current aggregate configuration. /cfg/l3/port <port number> IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu [IP Forwarding Port 1 Menu] on . 330 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. the port forwarding option is turned on. off Disables IP forwarding for the current port. January 2005 . Table 6-78 IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/port) Command Syntax and Usage on Enables IP forwarding for the current port.Display current port configuration The Layer 3 Port Menu allows you to turn IP forwarding on or off on a port-by-port basis. cur Displays the current IP forwarding settings. disable Disables the selected aggregate.0.0> Sets the IP mask for the selected aggregate.Alteon OS 22.255. such as 255.2 Command Reference Table 6-77 BGP Aggregate Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ip/bgp/aggr) (Continued) Command Syntax and Usage mask <IP subnet mask.Turn Forwarding ON off .

192.Set IP address of secondary DNS server dname . For example: mycompany. Enter the IP address using dotted decimal notation. and tftp commands.17.Set default domain name cur . Use dotted decimal notation. 192. Table 6-79 Domain Name System Menu Options (/cfg/l3/dns) Command Syntax and Usage prima <IP address (such as.0.Alteon OS 22.com cur Displays the current Domain Name System settings.4.Display current DNS configuration The Domain Name System (DNS) Menu is used for defining the primary and secondary DNS servers on your local network.101)> You will be prompted to set the IP address for your primary DNS server. If the primary DNS server fails. 315393-J. dname <dotted DNS notation>|none Sets the default domain name used by the switch. and for setting the default domain name served by the switch services. DNS parameters must be configured prior to using hostname parameters with the ping.17. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 331 .4.Set IP address of primary DNS server secon .2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/dns Domain Name System Configuration Menu [Domain Name System Menu] prima . the configured secondary will be used instead. secon <IP address (such as.101)> You will be prompted to set the IP address for your secondary DNS server. traceroute.

2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/bootp Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu [Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu] addr . The BOOTP configuration enables the switch to forward a client request for an IP address to two DHCP/BOOTP servers with IP addresses that have been configured on the Alteon Application Switch. cur Displays the current BOOTP relay configuration.Globally turn BOOTP relay ON off . 332 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.101)> Sets the IP address of the BOOTP server. January 2005 . Table 6-80 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bootp) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as. 192. 192.Set IP address of second BOOTP server on .Display current BOOTP relay configuration The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) Relay Menu is used to allow hosts to obtain their configurations from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. on Globally turns on BOOTP relay.4.Alteon OS 22.17. off Globally turns off BOOTP relay. addr2 <IP address (such as.17.Globally turn BOOTP relay OFF cur .Set IP address of BOOTP server addr2 .0.101)> Sets the IP address of the second BOOTP server. BOOTP relay menu is turned off by default.4.

see the “High Availability” chapter in your Alteon OS 22. 315393-J. This menu is used for configuring up to 1024 virtual routers on this switch. To view menu options. vrgroup <virtual router vrgroup number (1-16)> Displays VR Group Menu.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp VRRP Configuration Menu [Virtual Router vr vrgroup group if track hotstan on off holdoff cur Redundancy Protocol Menu] VRRP Virtual Router Menu VRRP Virtual Router Vrgroup Menu VRRP Virtual Router Group Menu VRRP Interface Menu VRRP Priority Tracking Menu Enable/disable hot-standby processing Globally turn VRRP ON Globally turn VRRP OFF Globally VRRP hold off time Display current VRRP configuration Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on Alteon Application Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. Group options must be configured when using two or more Alteon switches in a hotstandby failover configuration where only one switch is active at any given time. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master. Alteon OS has extended VRRP to include virtual servers as well. Table 6-81 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp) Command Syntax and Usage vr <virtual router number (1-1024)> Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Menu. To view menu options.Alteon OS 22. To view menu options. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Interface Menu.0. allowing for full active/active redundancy between its Layer 4 switches. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. see page 338. see page 341. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 333 . VRRP is disabled. group Displays the VRRP virtual router group menu. based on a number of priority criteria. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. used to combine all virtual routers together as one logical entity. If the master fails. By default. see page 345.0.2 Application Guide. see page 334. For more information on VRRP. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. To view menu options.

in which two or more switches provide redundancy for each other.2 Command Reference Table 6-81 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Tracking Menu.0.Enable virtual router .Delete virtual router . cur Displays the current VRRP parameters. see page 346. on Globally enables VRRP on this switch. this option is disabled.Set IP address . This menu is used for weighting the criteria used when modifying priority levels in the master router election process.Priority Tracking Menu .Display current VRRP virtual router configuration This menu is used for configuring up to 256 virtual routers for this switch. hotstan disable|enable Enables or disables hot standby processing.Set advertisement interval .Enable or disable preemption . 334 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number> Virtual Router Configuration Menu [VRRP Virtual track vrid addr if prio adver preem share ena dis del cur Router 1 Menu] .Alteon OS 22. holdoff <0-255 seconds> Globally suspends VRRP operation for the specified interval. a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address.Set renter priority .Set interface number . off Globally disables VRRP on this switch. To view menu options.Disable virtual router . January 2005 . A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address.Set virtual router ID . By default. On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router.Enable or disable sharing .

0. this switch is considered the “owner” of the defined virtual router. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. The default value is 1. To view menu options. even if it must preempt another virtual router which has assumed master routing authority. the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. If there is a tie. if <interface number (1-256)> Selects a switch IP interface (between 1 and 256). 192. The vrid of virtual server routers where the virtual router IP address is the same as the virtual server can be between 1 and 1024. This preemption occurs even if the preem option below is disabled. All vrid values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP interface belongs. vrid <virtual router ID (1-1024)> Defines the virtual router ID. This is used in conjunction with the vrid (above) to configure the same virtual router on each participating VRRP device. An owner has a special priority of 255 (highest) and will always assume the role of master router. The default value is 1.0. prio <priority (1-254)> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual server.4.Alteon OS 22. 315393-J. The default value is 1. This is used in conjunction with addr (below) to define a virtual router on this switch.17. When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track). If the IP interface has the same IP address as the addr option above. adver <seconds (1-255)> Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. each participating VRRP device must be configured with the same virtual router: one that shares the same vrid and addr combination.0. see page 336. The vrid for standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 255. To create a pool of VRRP-enabled routing devices which can provide redundancy to each other. Tracking is Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP. the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). Table 6-82 VRRP Virtual Router Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for this virtual router. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 335 .2 Command Reference Virtual routers are disabled by default. this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds.101)> Defines the IP address for this virtual router using dotted decimal notation. The default address is 0. Tracking is not needed if sharing (share) is enabled.0. the device with the highest IP interface address wins. addr <IP address (such as. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface. The default value is 100. used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. During the master router election process.

Each time one of the tracking criteria is met. this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. even when in backup mode.Enable/disable tracking other interfaces . the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through the VRRP Tracking Menu (see page 346). When enabled. an Alteon proprietary extension to VRRP.Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN .Enable/disable tracking master virtual routers . this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same). ena Enables this virtual router. /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number>/track Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration [VRRP Virtual vrs ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur Router 1 Priority Tracking Menu] .Alteon OS 22.0. this option is enabled. 336 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. dis Disables this virtual router. When enabled.Enable/disable tracking HSRP . January 2005 .Display current VRRP virtual router configuration This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual routers. By default. share disable|enable Enables or disables virtual router sharing.Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports . del Deletes this virtual router from the switch configuration. this option is enabled. if this virtual router is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master.2 Command Reference Table 6-82 VRRP Virtual Router Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr) Command Syntax and Usage preem disable|enable Enables or disables master preemption. By default.Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers . Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results. this switch will process any traffic addressed to this virtual router. Note that even when preem is disabled.Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports . cur Displays the current configuration information for this virtual router.

If the virtual router preemption option (see preem in Table 6-82 on page 335) is enabled. reals. and ports below) apply to standard virtual routers. ifs. reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers.2 Command Reference Criteria are tracked dynamically. ifs disable|enable When enabled. increasing Layer 4 efficiency. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master.” Other tracking criteria (l4pts. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this switch. this virtual router can assume master routing authority when its priority level rises above that of the current master. This command is disabled by default. Some tracking criteria (vrs. Table 6-83 VRRP Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr/track) Command Syntax and Usage vrs disable|enable When enabled. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 337 . This command is disabled by default. otherwise called “virtual interface routers. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual router in master mode on this switch. and hsrp) apply to “virtual server routers. increasing routing and load balancing efficiency. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN. This command is disabled by default.” which perform Layer 4 Server Load Balancing functions. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each healthy real server behind the virtual server IP address of the same IP address as the virtual router on this switch. 315393-J. This is useful for making sure that traffic for any particular client/server pairing are handled by the same switch. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each IP interface active on this switch. l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master. This command is disabled by default. continuously updating virtual router priority levels when enabled.0.Alteon OS 22. This command is disabled by default. ports disable|enable When enabled. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. A virtual server router is defined as any virtual router whose IP address (addr) is the same as any configured virtual server IP address.

Alteon OS 22.Set priority for virtual router group ena .2 Command Reference Table 6-83 VRRP Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr/track) Command Syntax and Usage hsrp disable|enable <priority (1-254)> Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover. cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router. This command is disabled by default.Delete virtual router group cur . you can group VIRs and VSRs to serve the high availability of a specific customer. January 2005 . In networks where HSRP is used.Disable virtual router group del .Display current VRRP virtual router group configuration 338 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements.Add virtual router to group rem . [VRRP Virtual Router Vrgroup 1 Menu] track .Set virtual router group name add .Enable virtual router group dis . hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments. The VIRs and VSRs configured for the other customers on the master switch are not affected.0. optimizing routing efficiency. Enabling HSRP helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master. When Web hosting is shared between two or more customers on a single VRRP switch.Remove virtual router from group prio . Up to 16 virtual router groups can be configured on the switch. /cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup Virtual Router Group Menu This feature allows the failover of individual groups of VIRs and VSRs. This command is disabled by default. the group of VIRs and VSRs associated with that customer alone will fail over to the backup switch.Priority Tracking Menu name . If failover occurs on a customer link. Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet.

To view menu options. name Defines virtual router group name up to eight characters. add <virtual router number (1-1024)> Adds a virtual router to the group. dis Disables the virtual router group. the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router.2 Command Reference Table 6-84 Virtual Router Group Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays VRRP priority tracking menu for this virtual router group. Tracking is Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP.0. del Deletes the virtual router group. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface. The default value is 100. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 339 .Alteon OS 22. the device with the highest IP interface address wins. the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). see page 340. this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. cur Displays the current VRRP virtual router group configuration. ena Enables the virtual router group. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. During the master router election process. When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup #/track). Each virtual router group can have up to 64 virtual routers. 315393-J. prio <1-254> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. rem <virtual router number (1-1024)> Removes a virtual router from the group. If there is a tie.

A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met.Alteon OS 22. the priority will be increased for each healthy real server behind the virtual server IP address of the same IP address as the virtual router on this virtual router group.0. the priority will be increased for each IP interface active on this virtual router group. increasing Layer 4 efficiency. 340 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. ports disable|enable When enabled. Criteria are tracked dynamically. continuously updating virtual router priority levels when enabled. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master. the priority will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this virtual router group. This command is disabled by default. reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through the VRRP Tracking Menu (see page 346).2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup <vrgroup number>/ track Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual routers. This command is disabled by default. the priority will be increased for each active port on the VLAN on this virtual router group. January 2005 . An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. This command is disabled by default. l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master. This command is disabled by default. [VRRP Vrgroup ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur 1 Priority Tracking Menu] Enable/disable tracking interfaces Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers Enable/disable tracking HSRP Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN Display current VRRP vrgroup tracking configuration Table 6-85 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup/track) Command Syntax and Usage ifs disable|enable When enabled.

cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router group. This command is disabled by default. /cfg/l3/vrrp/group Virtual Router Group Configuration [VRRP Virtual track vrid if prio adver preem share ena dis del cur Router Group Menu] .Set virtual router ID .Priority Tracking Menu . This command is disabled by default.Set renter priority .Disable virtual router . enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router group for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements.Set advertisement interval . January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 341 .Enable or disable preemption . which forces all virtual routers on the Alteon Application Switch to either be master or backup as a group. Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance on the virtual router group that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet.Delete virtual router .Enable or disable sharing .2 Command Reference Table 6-85 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup/track) Command Syntax and Usage hsrp disable|enable Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover.Set interface number . hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments. A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address. Enabling HSRP helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master. In networks where HSRP is used. optimizing routing efficiency.Enable virtual router . a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address.Alteon OS 22. 315393-J.Display current VRRP virtual router configuration The Virtual Router Group menu is used for associating all virtual routers into a single logical virtual router. On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router.0.

2 Command Reference NOTE – This option is required to be configured only when using at least two Alteon Application Switches in a hot-standby failover configuration. The default switch IP interface number is 1. where only one switch is active at any time. This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. adver <seconds (1-255)> Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. January 2005 . this switch will process any traffic addressed to this virtual router. even when in backup mode. If there is a tie.Alteon OS 22. this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. share disable|enable Enables or disables virtual router sharing. the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. 342 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. To view menu options. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface. vrid <virtual router ID (1-255)> Defines the virtual router ID for this group. The default value is 100. this option is enabled. this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). if the virtual router group is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master. this option is enabled. Tracking is Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP. During the master router election process. used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. preem disable|enable Enables or disables master preemption. By default. Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP. prio <priority (1-254)> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. the device with the highest IP interface address wins. The default is 1. When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track). By default. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. Note that even when preem is disabled. When enabled. When enabled. Table 6-86 VRRP Virtual Router Group Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for the virtual router group. this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same). see page 346. Tracking is not needed if sharing (share) is enabled.0. if <interface number (1-256)> Selects a switch IP interface (between 1 and 256).

del Deletes the virtual router group from the switch configuration.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 343 . /cfg/l3/vrrp/group/track Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration [Virtual Router vrs ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur Group Priority Tracking Menu] Enable/disable tracking master virtual routers Enable/disable tracking other interfaces Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers Enable/disable tracking HSRP Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN Display current VRRP Group Tracking configuration NOTE – If Virtual Router Group Tracking is enabled. cur Displays the current configuration information for the virtual router group.2 Command Reference Table 6-86 VRRP Virtual Router Group Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group) Command Syntax and Usage ena Enables the virtual router group. 315393-J. dis Disables the virtual router group.0. The tracking setting for the other individual virtual routers will be ignored. then the tracking option will be available only under group option.

This is useful for making sure that traffic for any particular client/server pairing are handled by the same switch. ports disable|enable When enabled. This command is disabled by default. 344 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. January 2005 . This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual router in master mode on this switch. cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. ifs disable|enable When enabled.Alteon OS 22. This command is disabled by default. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this switch. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each healthy real server. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP interface active on this switch. This command is disabled by default. hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. optimizing routing efficiency. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN.2 Command Reference Table 6-87 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vr/group/track) Command Syntax and Usage vrs disable|enable When enabled.0. increasing Layer 4 efficiency. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master. This command is disabled by default. This command is disabled by default. This helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master. reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet. This command is disabled by default. HSRP is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover. In networks where HSRP is used. increasing routing and load balancing efficiency. hsrp disable|enable Enables Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) for this virtual router group. This command is disabled by default.

passw <password> Defines a plain text password up to eight characters long. This password will be added to each VRRP packet transmitted by this interface when password authentication is chosen (see auth above). The IP interface itself is not deleted. del Clears the authentication configuration parameters for this IP interface.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/if <interface number> VRRP Interface Configuration NOTE – The interface-number (1 to 256) represents the IP interface on which authentication parameters must be configured.0. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 345 . 315393-J. [VRRP Interface auth passw del cur - 1 Menu] Set authentication types Set plain-text password Delete interface Display current VRRP interface configuration This menu is used for configuring VRRP authentication parameters for the IP interfaces used with the virtual routers. Table 6-88 VRRP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/if) Command Syntax and Usage auth none|password Defines the type of authentication that will be used: none (no authentication). cur Displays the current configuration for this IP interface’s authentication parameters.Alteon OS 22. or password (password authentication).

the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through this menu. The default value is 2.Set priority increment for HSRP tracking hsrv .Display current VRRP Priority Tracking configuration This menu is used for setting weights for the various criteria used to modify priority levels during the master router election process. January 2005 . hsrp <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for switch ports with Layer 4 client-only processing that receive HSRP broadcasts. reals <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for healthy real servers behind the virtual server router.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/track VRRP Tracking Configuration [VRRP Tracking Menu] vrs . 346 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. ifs <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for active IP interfaces detected on this switch. ports <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for active ports on the virtual router’s VLAN. The default value is 2. The default value is 2.0.Set priority increment for HSRP by VLAN tracking cur .Set priority increment for L4 real server tracking hsrp . The default value is 10.Set priority increment for virtual router tracking ifs . Each time one of the tracking criteria is met (see “VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu” on page 336). l4pts <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for physical switch ports with active Layer 4 processing.Set priority increment for VLAN switch port tracking l4pts . Table 6-89 VRRP Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track) Command Syntax and Usage vrs <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for virtual routers in master mode detected on this switch. The default value is 2.Set priority increment for IP interface tracking ports .Set priority increment for L4 switch port tracking reals . The default value is 2.

All gateway requests to the same destination IP address are resolved to the same gateway. The switch sends each new gateway request to the next healthy.0. These options do not affect the VRRP master router election process until options under the VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu (see page 336) are enabled. which are described in the table “Default Gateway Metrics (/cfg/l3/metrc)” on page 347. /cfg/l3/metrc <metric name> Default Gateway Metrics If multiple default gateways are configured and enabled. Table 6-90 Default Gateway Metrics (/cfg/l3/metrc) Option strict Description The gateway number determines its level of preference. This provides basic gateway load balancing.2 Command Reference Table 6-89 VRRP Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track) Command Syntax and Usage hsrv <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for vrrp instances that are on the same VLAN. roundrobin 315393-J. The default value is 10. enabled gateway in line. Gateway #1 acts as the preferred default IP gateway until it fails or is disabled. These priority tracking options only define increment values. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 347 . at which point the next in line will take over as the default IP gateway. cur Displays the current configuration of priority tracking increment values. a metric can be set to determine which primary gateway is selected.Alteon OS 22. There are two metrics.

see page 350. pdepth <# of packets. see page 352. January 2005 .0. the switch will let through all the out-of-order fragments in filtering. To view menu options. When set to deny. Any packets above the current threshold will be logged. To view menu options. To view options. The default is allow.Alteon OS 22. When set to allow. port <port number> Displays Port Security Menu. To view menu options. seclog <rate threshold (in packets)> Defines the rate threshold for security logging by the number of packets per second. see page 351. fragment <allow|deny> Sets the handling of out-of-order IP fragment packets during filtering. the switch will drop these packets. udpblast Displays UDP Blast Menu. 1-255|none> Defines the search window for pattern matching beginning from the start of the packet stream. cur Displays the current security configuration. see page 349. 348 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference /cfg/security Security Configuration Menu [Security Menu] ipacl pgroup port udpblast seclog fragment pdepth cur IP Address ACL Menu Pattern Match Group Menu Port Security Menu UDP Blast Menu Set rate threshold for security logging Set out of order IP fragments handling in filtering Set packet depth for pattern matching Display current Security configuration Table 6-91 Security Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/security) Command Syntax and Usage ipacl Displays IP address Access Control Menu. The window is in units of packets. pgroup <pattern group ID (1-128)> Displays Pattern Match Group Menu.

defined by the IP address/mask pair.Add IP Address/Mask for access control rem .Remove IP Address/Mask for access control cur . cur Displays current IP addresses ranges in Access Control List. [IP ACL Menu] add . then the client traffic is blocked.0. 315393-J. If a match is found. defined by the IP address/mask pair index. the client source IP address is checked against this pool of addresses.2 Command Reference /cfg/security/ipacl IP Address Access Control List Configuration Menu Alteon OS can be configured with IP access control lists (ACLs) composed of ranges of client IP addresses that are to be denied access to the switch. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 349 . rem <IP address/mask pair index> Removes range of source IP addresses to be denied.Display All IP address/mask for access control Table 6-92 IP Address ACL Menu Options (/cfg/sec/ipacl) Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> <IP mask> Adds range of source IP addresses to be denied.Alteon OS 22. When traffic ingresses the switch.

Add SLB string to group rem . use the /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/add command described on page 411.Set pattern group name add . By applying the patterns and groups to a deny filter.0. and then apply the group to a filter. 350 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. use the /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/cur command.2 Command Reference /cfg/security/pgroup <pattern group number> Pattern Matching Menu When a virus or other attack contains multiple patterns or strings. also on page 411. [Pattern Match Group 1 Menu] name .Delete pattern group cur .Remove SLB string from group del . Configure the binary or ASCII pattern strings. When a pattern group is applied to a deny filter. cur Displays the current configuration of this pattern group. To view existing strings and their ID numbers. the packet content can be detected and thus denied access to the network. del Deletes the pattern group. The filtering commands in Alteon OS Advanced Denial of Service Pack allow the administrator to define groups of patterns. group them into a pattern group. Up to five patterns can be combined into a single pattern group. it is useful to combine them into one group and give the group a name that is easy to remember. To configure SLB strings. add <string ID> Adds a pre-configured SLB string to this pattern group by the string ID number. Note: You can only add the binary or ASCII strings to a pattern matching group. name the pattern group. Up to five patterns can be combined into a single pattern group. the switch will match any of the strings or patterns within that group before denying and dropping the packet.Alteon OS 22. rem <SLB string ID> Removes an SLB string from this pattern group.Display current configuration Table 6-93 Pattern Matching Group Menu Options (/cfg/sec/pgroup) Command Syntax and Usage name <31 character name>|none Specifies a descriptive name for this pattern group. January 2005 .

2 Command Reference /cfg/security/port <port number> Port Security Configuration Menu Alteon OS can protect switch ports against a variety of Denial of Service (DOS) attacks including Port Smurf. 315393-J.x. LandAttack: Packets with source IP equal to destination IP.255). ScanSynFin: SYN and FIN bits are set in the packet. cur Displays the current security configuration on this port. Nullscan: TCP sequence number is zero and all control bits are zeros. Blat: TCP packets with SIP!=DIP and SPORT=DPORT. PortZero: TCP/UDP Packets whose source or destination port is zero. Enable DOS protection on ports connected to any network that could be the source of an attack. Enabling this command will allow detection of the following DoS attacks: Smurf: ICMP ping request to a broadcast destination IP (x. Nullscan. PortZero.0. Fraggle. and ScanSynFin.255).x. udpblast disable|enable Enables or disables UDP blast protection on this port. URG and PSH bits are set. [Port 1 Menu] dos ipacl udpblast cur - Enable/disable DOS attack detection Enable/disable IP ACL processing Enable/disable UDP Blast processing Display current port configuration Table 6-94 Port Security Menu Options (/cfg/security/port) Command Syntax and Usage dos disable|enable Enables or disables Denial of Service (DOS) protection on this port.x.x. Xmascan.Alteon OS 22. Fraggle: UDP packet sent to a broadcast destination IP (x. ipacl disable|enable Enables or disables IP access control List denial on this port. Xmascan: TCP sequence number is zero and the FIN. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 351 . LandAttack.

While you can configure multiple port ranges. Alteon OS can be configured to restrict the amount of traffic allowed on any UDP port. thus ensuring that backend servers are not flooded with data and disabled. January 2005 . [UDP Blast Protection Menu] add .0.Default packet rate for UDP blast protection cur . You can specify a series of UDP port ranges and the allowed packet limit for that range. as well as the maximum packet rate per second. If the first port number is 300. rem <UDP port number or range (first-last)> Removes UDP port or range for UDP blast protection. If the number of packets on this port range exceeds the maximum packet rate per second. default <packet rate> Defines the default packet rate for UDP blast protection.2 Command Reference /cfg/security/udpblast UDP Blast Protection Configuration Menu Malicious attacks over UDP protocol ports are becoming a common way to bring down real servers. UDP traffic is shut down on those ports. using any integer from 1 to 65535. The maximum port range is 5000. Alteon OS supports up to 5000 UDP port numbers.Add UDP port/range for UDP blast protection rem .Remove UDP port/range for UDP blast protection default .Display all UDP blast protection Ports Table 6-95 UDP Blast Protection Menu Options (/cfg/sec/udpblast) Command Syntax and Usage add <UDP port number or range (first-last)> [packet rate] Adds UDP port or range for UDP blast protection. 352 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. UDP traffic will be dropped. cur Displays all UDP blast protection ports. the last number that can be used is 5300. When the maximum number of packets/second is reached.Alteon OS 22. the sum of ranges cannot exceed the maximum of 5000 ports.

Spanning Tree. When using Telnet to configure a new switch.2 Command Reference /cfg/setup Setup The setup program steps you through configuring the system date and time. IP. “First-Time Configuration. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 353 . To start the dump program. enter: Configuration# setup /cfg/dump Dump The dump program writes the current switch configuration to the terminal screen. For a complete description of how to use setup. 315393-J.0.” To start the setup program. see Chapter 2.Alteon OS 22. edited. and placed in a script file. at the Configuration# prompt. VLAN parameters. which can be used to configure other switches through a Telnet connection. port speed/mode. enter: Configuration# dump The configuration is displayed with parameters that have been changed from the default values. The screen display can be captured. BOOTP. and IP interfaces. as described on page 354. The active configuration can also be saved or loaded via TFTP. paste the configuration commands from the script file at the command line prompt of the switch. at the Configuration# prompt.

at the Configuration# prompt. January 2005 . The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current configuration data. and filename is the name of the target script configuration file. The file can contain a full switch configuration or a partial switch configuration. NOTE – If the TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system. 354 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. To start the switch configuration upload.Alteon OS 22.0. the specified ptcfg file must exist prior to executing the ptcfg command and must be writable (set with proper permission. the active configuration will be replaced with the commands found in the specified configuration file. The configuration loaded using gtcfg is not activated until the apply command is used. NOTE – The output file is formatted with line-breaks but no carriage returns—the file cannot be viewed with editors that require carriage returns (such as Microsoft Notepad).2 Command Reference /cfg/ptcfg <TFTP server> <filename> Saving the Active Switch Configuration When the ptcfg command is used. the switch’s active configuration commands (as displayed using /cfg/dump) will be uploaded to the specified script configuration file on the TFTP server. enter: Configuration# ptcfg <TFTP server> <filename> [-m | -mgmt | -d | -data] where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname. To start the switch configuration download. at the Configuration# prompt. and not locked by any application). the apply action will be performed automatically. enter: Configuration# gtcfg <TFTP server> <filename> [-m | -mgmt | -d | -data] where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname. and filename is the name of the target script configuration file. /cfg/gtcfg <TFTP server> <filename> Restoring the Active Switch Configuration When the gtcfg command is used. If the apply command is found in the configuration script file loaded using this command.

each server usually specializes in providing one or two unique services. 315393-J. the switch is aware of the services provided by each server and can direct user session traffic to an appropriate server. Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for detailed information on this feature. This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for configuring Server Load Balancing (SLB) on the Alteon Application Switch.CHAPTER 7 The SLB Configuration Menu Server Load Balancing (SLB) allows you to configure the Alteon Application Switch to balance user session traffic among a pool of available servers that provide shared services. In an average network that employs multiple servers without server load balancing. January 2005 355 . based on a variety of load-balancing algorithms. If one of these servers provides access to applications or data that is in high demand. Placing this kind of strain on a server can decrease the performance of the entire network as user requests are rejected by the server and then resubmitted by the user stations. With this software feature. it can become overutilized.

356 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. To view menu options. gslb Displays the menu for configuring Global Server Load Balancing. group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays the menu for placing real servers into real server groups. see page 401. To view menu options.Alteon OS 22. To view menu options. To view menu options. January 2005 . To view menu options.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb SLB Configuration [Layer 4 Menu] real group virt filt port gslb layer7 wap sync adv linklb advhc pip peerpip on off cur Real Server Menu Real Server Group Menu Virtual Server Menu Filtering Menu Layer 4 Port Menu Global SLB Menu Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu WAP Menu Config Synch Menu Layer 4 Advanced Menu Inbound Linklb Menu Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu Proxy IP Address Menu Peer Proxy IP Address Menu Globally turn Layer 4 processing ON Globally turn Layer 4 processing OFF Display current Layer 4 configuration Table 7-1 Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb) Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays the menu for configuring real servers.0. see page 358. see page 399. see page 372. port <port number> Displays the menu for setting physical switch port states for Layer 4 activity. filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays the menu for Filtering and Application Redirection. see page 364. see page 383. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays the menu for defining virtual servers. To view menu options.

adv Displays the Layer 4 Advanced Menu. 315393-J. peerpip Displays Peer Proxy IP address Menu. Enabling Layer 4 services is not necessary for using filters only to allow. on Globally turns on Layer 4 software services for Server Load Balancing and Application Redirection. see page 413. see page 408.Alteon OS 22. This option can be performed only after the optional Layer 4 software is enabled (see “Activating Optional Software on page 441). off Globally disables Layer 4 services. the switch is able to forward traffic from the other switch. or NAT traffic. client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address. see page 431. see page 430.2 Command Reference Table 7-1 Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb) Command Syntax and Usage layer7 Displays Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu. deny. wap Displays WAP Menu. pip This menu is used to set the switch proxy IP address using dotted decimal notation. To view menu options. To view menu options. advhc Displays Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu. To view menu options. see page 419. see page 421. but the software processes will no longer be active in the switch cur Displays the current Server Load Balancing configuration. This happens because the peer switches are aware of each other’s proxy IP addresses. see page 415. To view menu options. sync Displays the Synch Peer Switch Menu. When the pip is defined.To view options. using Layer 2. All configuration information will remain in place (if applied or saved). without performing server processing on the packets of the other switch. see page 412. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 357 .0. This prevents the dropping of a packet or being sent to the backup switch in the absence of the proxy IP address of the peer switch. To view menu options. To view menu options. To view menu options. linklb Displays Inbound Link Load Balancing Menu. When this command is enabled.

January 2005 .Enable/disable source MAC address substitution ena .Set number of failed attempts to declare server DOWN restr .2 Command Reference Filtering and Layer 4 (Server Load Balancing) Filters configured to allow.Layer 7 Command Menu ids . /cfg/slb/real <server number> Real Server SLB Configuration [Real server 1 Menu] layer7 . Application Redirection filters. Layer 4 processing must be turned on before redirection filters will work.Set weight for real server avail .Set maximum number of connections tmout .Set number of successful attempts to declare server UP addport .Enable/disable fast health check operation submac .Enable/disable client proxy operation fasthc .Disable real server del . deny.Set real server name weight . however. require Layer 4 software services.Enable/disable Global SLB remote site operation proxy .Enable real server dis .Delete real server cur . These filters are not affected by the Server Load Balancing on and off commands in this menu.IDS Command Menu rip .Display current real server configuration 358 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Set IP addr of real server name .0.Set backup real server inter .Add real port to server remport . or perform Network Address Translation (NAT) on traffic do not require Layer 4 software to be activated.Alteon OS 22.Set minutes inactive connection remains open backup .Remove real port from server remote .Set interval between health checks retry .Set Global SLB availability for real server maxcon .

This will enable the network administrator to quickly identify the server by a natural language keyword value. The required parameters are: Real server IP address Real server enabled (disabled by default) Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage layer7 Displays the Layer 7 Menu. each real server is given a weight setting of 1. New connections will be issued again to this server once the number of current connections has decreased below the maxcon setting. name <string. Weights are not applied when using the hash or minmisses metrics (see “Server Load Balancing Metrics” on page 370). By default. Higher weighting values force the server to receive more connections than the other servers configured in the same real server group.0. client requests will be dropped by the virtual server. see page 362.Alteon OS 22. and the administrator will be warned if the server does not respond. A setting of 10 would assign the server roughly 10 times the number of connections as a server with a weight of 1. rip <real server IP address> Sets the IP address of the real server in dotted decimal format. such that new connections will not be issued to this server if the maxcon limit is reached. avail <server weight (1-48)> Displays the currently available real server for Global server load balancing and allows the user to change to another real server for Global server load balancing. the address entered is PINGed to determine if the server is up. client requests will be sent to the backup/overflow server or backup/overflow server group. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 359 . ids Displays Intrusion Detection Server/system menu. the number of maximum connections is set at 20. To view menu options. If all servers in a real server group for a virtual server reach their maxcon limit at the same time. see page 363. maxcon <maximum connections (0-200000)> Sets the maximum number of connections that this server should simultaneously support. 315393-J.2 Command Reference This menu is used for configuring information about real servers that participate in a server pool for Server Load Balancing or Application Redirection. weight <real server weight (1-48)> Sets the weighting value (1 to 48) that this real server will be given in the load balancing algorithms. To view menu options. This option sets a threshold as an artificial barrier. If no backup servers/server group are configured. When this command is used.000. maximum 31 characters>|none Defines a 15-character alias for each real server. By default.

The backup server is also used in overflow situations. this option sets how long an idle client is allowed to remain associated with a particular server. backup <real server number (1-1023)>|none Sets the real server used as the backup/overflow server for this real server. If the real server reaches its maxcon (maximum connections) limit. For TCP services. Every client-to-server session being load balanced is recorded in the switch's Session Table. Determining the health of each real server is a necessary function for Layer 4 switching. the switch pings servers to determine their status. Then. and the session table entry is then removed. retry <number of consecutive health checks (1-63)> Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this real server inoperative. if the real server becomes inoperative. using the defined service ports configured as part of each virtual service. The range is from 1 to 60 seconds.Alteon OS 22. The default interval is 2 seconds. Settings must be specified in even numbered increments between 2 and 32768 minutes. Using the tmout option. The range is from 1 to 63 attempts. such as when a client application is abnormally terminated by the client's system. the backup comes online to provide additional processing power until the original server becomes desaturated. TCP/UDP connections will remain registered in the switch's binding table. The default is 8 attempts 360 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. you can set the number of minutes to wait before removing orphan table entries.2 Command Reference Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage tmout <even number of minutes (2-32768)> Sets the number of minutes an inactive session remains open (in even numbered increments). For UDP services. To prevent loss of service if a particular real server fails. The range is from 1 to 63 attempts. these orphaned entries must be aged out of the binding table. The default setting is 10. The inter option lets you choose the time between health checks.0. the switch verifies that real servers and their corresponding services are operational by opening a TCP connection to each service. January 2005 . The data is transferred until the client ends the session. the switch will activate the backup real server until the original becomes operative again. use this option to assign a backup real server number. the session is recorded in the table. In certain circumstances. When persistent is activated. The default is 4 attempts restr <number of consecutive health checks (1-63)> Sets the number of successful health check attempts required before declaring a UDP service operational. The same backup/overflow server may be assigned to more than one real server at the same time inter <number of seconds between health checks (0-60)> Sets the interval between real server health verification attempts. An interval of “0” disables health checking for the server. In order to prevent table overflow. This option is also used with the Persistent option (see /cfg/slb/virt/pbind). When a client makes a request.

When enabled. This removes the real server from operation within its real server groups. submac disable|enable Enables or disables source MAC address substitution. By default. remport <real server port (2–65534)> Remove multiple service ports from the server. the real server will go down only after the configured health check interval. NOTE – This option does not perform a graceful server shutdown.0. the real server can process virtual server requests associated with its real server group. this option is disabled. when the apply and save commands are used. dis Disables this real server from Layer 4 service. Use this command with caution. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 361 . When enabled. By default. This command is enabled by default. disables this real server until it is explicitly re-enabled. when the apply and save commands are used.Alteon OS 22. This option. del Deletes this real server from the Layer 4 switching software configuration. A disabled server will no longer process virtual server requests as part of the real server group to which it is assigned. remote disable|enable Enables or disables remote site operation for this server. See /oper/slb/ena on page 436 for an operations-level command. proxy disable|enable Enables or disables proxy IP address translation. enables this real server for operation until explicitly disabled. a client request from any application can be proxied using a load-balancing Proxy IP address (PIP). this option is disabled. With this option enabled (default).2 Command Reference Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage addport <real server port (2–65534)> Add multiple service ports to the server. the real server goes down operationally as soon as the physical port connected to the real server goes down. fasthc disable|enable Enables or disables Fast Health Check operation. ena You must perform this command to enable this real server for Layer 4 service. This option should be enabled when the real IP address supplied above represents a remote server (real or virtual) that this switch will access as part of its Global Server Load Balancing network. This option does not perform a graceful server shutdown. 315393-J. This option. as it will delete any configuration options that have been set for this real server. See /oper/slb/dis on page 436 for an operations-level command that permits graceful server shutdown. When disabled.

remlb <URL path ID [1-1024]> Removes the predefined URL loadbalance string ID from the real server.Alteon OS 22.Enable/disable cookie assignment server exclude . /cfg/slb/real <server number>/layer7 Real Server Layer 7 Configuration [Real Server 1 Layer 7 Commands Menu] addlb . You need to use the write servers when you want to modify the directory on the server.Enable/disable LDAP Write server cur . January 2005 . this option is disabled. this option is disabled.0.Remove SLB string for content load balance cookser . and embeds the IP address of the real server that will handle the subsequent requests from the client. 362 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. LDAP servers are of two types: read servers and write servers. assigns the cookie. cookser disable|enable Enables or disables the real server to handle client requests that don’t contain a cookie. By default. The write server can conduct both read and write operations. Table 7-3 Layer 7 Commands Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage addlb <URL path ID [1-1024]> Adds the predefined URL loadbalance string ID to the real server.Enable/disable exclusionary string matching ldapwr .Add SLB string for content load balance remlb . This option is used if you want to designate a specific server to assign cookies only.Display current real server configuration This menu is used for entering commands and strings for Layer 7 processing. exclude disable|enable Enables or disables exclusionary string matching. This server gets the client request. ldapwr disable|enable Enables or disables LDAP write server.2 Command Reference Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current configuration information for this real server. By default. You need to use read servers when you only want to browse the directory.

January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 363 . idsport <port number> Defines port for Intrusion Detection Server. 315393-J.Display current real server configuration Table 7-4 IDS Configuration Menu options (/cfg/slb/real/ids) Command Syntax and Usage idsvlan <vlan number (1-4090> Defines VLAN ID for Intrusion Detection Server. /cfg/slb/real <real server number>/ids Real server IDS Configuration Menu Intrusion Detection System (IDS) is a type of security management system for computers and networks.Alteon OS 22.Set Vlan ID for ID Server idsport .Override OID for SNMP HC comm . comm <SNMP health check community string to override group community string> Overrides community string for SNMP health checks. [Real Server 1 IDS Menu] idsvlan . oid <SNMP health check object identifier to override group OID> Specifies the object identifier (OID). which include both intrusions (attacks from outside the organization) and misuse (attacks from within the organization). Refer to your Application Guide for more information. An Intrusion Detection System gathers and analyzes information from various areas within a computer or a network to identify possible security breaches. Note: IDS can only be configured on real servers between one to maximum number of ports on the switch.Set Port for ID Server oid .0. This OID overrides the OID for SNMP health checks. cur Displays the current real server configuration.2 Command Reference Table 7-3 Layer 7 Commands Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current real server configuration.Override community string for SNMP HC cur .

Set minmisses hash parameter viphlth .Enable/disable Intrusion Detection idsfld . Each real server can belong to more than one group.Set backup real server or group name .Set health check type backup .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/group <real server group number> Real Server Group SLB Configuration [Real server group 1 Menu] metric .Delete real server group cur .Set health check content health .Enable/disable the access to this group for operator ena . January 2005 . Each group must consist of at least one real server.Display current group configuration This menu is used for combining real servers into real server groups.Enable real server in this group dis . 364 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Set real server failure threshold idsrprt .0.Alteon OS 22. rmetric Sets the load balancing metric used for determining which port in the real server will be the target of the next client request.Set Intrusion Detection Port advhlth .Set metric used to select next server in group rmetric .Enable/disable VIP health checking in DSR mode ids .Enable/disable Intrusion Detection Group Flood oper .Disable real server in this group add .Remove real server del .Set real server group name realthr . The default setting is leastconns.Set an advance group health check formula mhash . See “Server Load Balancing Metrics” on page 370 for more information.Set metric used to select next rport in server content . Real server groups are used both for Server Load Balancing and Application Redirection. Each real server group should consist of all the real servers which provide a specific service for load balancing.Add real server rem . Table 7-5 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage metric leastconns|roundrobin|minmisses|hash|response|bandwidth|phash Sets the load balancing metric used for determining which real server in the group will be the target of the next client request.

0. The backup server/server group is also used in overflow situations. backup r<real server number (1-256)>|g<group number>|none Sets the real server or real server group used as the backup/overflow server/server group for this real server group. See “SLB Health Check Types” on page 367. 0 for disabled)> Specifies a minimum number of real servers available. the switch will activate the backup real server /server group until one of the original real servers becomes operative again. httphead .2 Command Reference Table 7-5 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage content <filename>|//<host>/<filename>|none This option defines the specific content which is examined during health checks. the number reaches this minimum limit. The default threshold is 0. The content depends on the type of health check specified in the health option (see below). This will enable the network administrator to quickly identify the server group by a natural language keyword value. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 365 . the backup server/server group comes online to provide additional processing power until one of the original servers becomes desaturated.use GET method. Then. a SYSLOG ALERT message is sent to the configured SYSLOG servers stating that the real server threshold has been reached for the concerned server load balancing group. The same backup/overflow server/server group may be assigned to more than one real server group at the same time. name <maximum 31 characters>|none Defines a 15-character alias for each Real Server Group. if the real server group becomes inoperative. health link|arp|icmp|tcp|http|httphead|dns|pop3|smtp|nntp|ftp|imap| sslh|radius-auth|radius-acc|script<n>|udpdns|wsp|wtp|wtls|ldap| snmp<n>|tftp|rtsp|sip http . The default is tcp. which also means the option is disabled idsrprt <real server port (2-65534)>|any Sets real server port for the Intrusion Detection Server. realthr <real servers (1-15. If any time.Alteon OS 22. 315393-J.use HEAD method Sets the type of health checking performed. If all the servers in the real server group reach their maxcon (maximum connections) limit. To prevent loss of service if the entire real server group fails. use this option to assign a backup real server/real server group number.

You can also select all 32-bits of the source IP address to hash to the real server.).2 Command Reference Table 7-5 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage advhlth <(1&2|3. When viphlth is disabled. For example. Using parenthesis with the boolean operators. AND or OR that are used to manipulate TRUE or FLALSE values. you can configure this real server to accept requests from all the groups or any number of groups that this real server is member of. add <real server number (1-1023)> Adds a real server to this real server group. you can create a boolean expression to state the health of the server group. dis <real server number. 366 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. January 2005 . This command supports two boolean operators. ids disable|enable Enables or disables Intrusion Detection Server (IDS) load balancing for the designated real server group.Alteon OS 22.. You will be prompted for the ID number for the real server to remove from this group. However. This command allows you to create a boolean expression to health check the real server group based on the state of the virtual services. rem <real server number (1-1023)> Remove a real server from this real server group. if a real server is a member of more than one group. 128>|none Defines an advanced health check formula expression for the real servers. By default the minmiss algorithm uses the upper 24-bits of the source IP address to calculate the real server that the traffic should be sent to when the minmiss metric is selected. 1-1023> Disables a real server in this group gracefully or on a per group basis. the switch uses RIP to perform all health checks. or you can also set the formula expression as none. This feature can only be configured on real server groups between 1-63. it works only when the service has DSR (Direct Server Return) feature enabled. idsfld disable|enable Enables or disables the Intrusion Detection flood. You will be prompted to enter the number of the real server to add to this group. mhash 24|32 <number of sip bits used for minmisses hash> Defines the minmisses hash parameter for this real server as either 24 or 32 bits.0. viphlth disable|enable Enables or disables VIP health checking in a service. ena <real server number. oper disable|enable Enables or disables the real server group operation. This feature is enabled by default. This command also supports a string expression which is up to 128 characters long. whether DSR is enabled or disabled. 1-1023> Enables a real server in this group gracefully or on a per group basis.

pings the server. you can specify the type of health check for the group of real servers.0.2 Command Reference Table 7-5 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes this real server group from the Layer 4 software configuration. httphead Allows the switch to declare if the server is up or not just by locating the URL header and not wait until all the URL contents are received.Alteon OS 22. This removes the group from operation under all virtual servers it is assigned to. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 367 . cur Displays the current configuration parameters for this real server group. Table 7-6 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health) Option and Description link Checks status of port for each server for IDSLB group only. check that the domain name specified in content can be resolved by the server. icmp For Layer 3 health checking. Refer to your Application Guide for their detailed description. Use this command with caution: if you remove the only group that is assigned to a virtual server. dns For Domain Name Service. Otherwise. SLB Health Check Types Using the health command. The health check options are described in the following table. You can use this command to test the validity and access to the hypertext links or to look for any recent modification to the URL.1 GETS when a HOST: header is required to check that the URL content is specified in content command. Note: If the content is not specified. http For HTTP service. the virtual server will become inoperative.0 GET occurs. 315393-J. tcp Opens and closes a TCP/IP connection to the server for TCP service. the health check will revert back to TCP on the port that is being load balanced. an HTTP/1. use HTTP 1. arp Sends an ARP request for Layer 2 health checking.

During the handshake. To perform application health checking to a RADIUS server. and establish a session ID for each session. radius-auth. check that the filename specified in content is accessible on the server through anonymous login. wsp Enables connectionless WSP content health checks for WAP gateways. udpdns Allows the user to perform health checking using UDP DNS queries. radius-acc For RADIUS remote access server authentication. check that the user specified in content is accessible on the server. check that the user:password value specified in content exists on the Alteon Application Switch and the server. check that the user:password account specified in content exists on the server.2 Command Reference Table 7-6 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health) Option and Description pop3 For user mail service. ftp For FTP services.Alteon OS 22. smtp For mail-server services. January 2005 . check that the newsgroup name specified in content is accessible on the server. The secrt value is a field of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that is used by the switch to encrypt a password during the RSA Message Digest Algorithm (MD5) and by the RADIUS server to decrypt the password during verification. imap For user mail service. check that the user:password value specified in content exists on the serve sslh Enables the switch to query the health of the SSL servers by sending an SSL client “Hello” packet and then verify the contents of the server’s “Hello” response. The content under /cfg/ slb/adv/waphc (see page 421) must also be configured. negotiate an encryption and compression method.0. 368 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. the network administrator must also configure the /cfg/slb/ secrt parameter. nntp For newsgroup services. script <n> Enables the use of script-based health checks in send/expect format to check for application and content availability. the user and server exchange security certificates. <n> denotes the health script number (1-8).

it will send the bind result message and the switch will mark the server as alive. tftp Sets the health check type to TFTP. ldap Sets the health check type to LDAP.0. If content is supplied the switch will issue the RTSP DESCRIBE method. The switch administrator can choose LDAP version 2 or 3 as both the versions are compatible with Alteon OS 22. If there is no content configured the switch will issue an RTSP OPTIONS method. The health check fails if the switch receives an error packet from the real server. The switch must send an unbind request so that the server does not hold resources indefinitely. The RTSP health check can operate with or without content. This health check consists of three LDAP messages over one TCP connection: a bind request.2 Command Reference Table 7-6 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health) Option and Description wtp Enables connection-oriented WTP + WSP content health checks for WAP gateways. the switch transmits TFTP read requests (RRQ) to all servers in the group. The content under /cfg/slb/adv/waphc (see page 421) must also be configured wtls Provides Wireless Transport Layer Security (WTLS) Hello-based health check for encrypted and connection-oriented WTLS traffic on port 9203.2. If this is not the response. If the server is up. The health check is successful if the server responds to the RRQ. You must enable UDP to perform SIP load balancing. the health check will fail.Alteon OS 22. and an unbind request. a bind result. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 369 . <n> denotes the health script number (1-5). 315393-J. The switch sends an anonymous bind request to the server.0. rtsp Sets the health check type to RTSP. snmp <n> Enables the use of SNMP-based health checks. This protocol enables the user to request a file from the server. At regular intervals. The LDAP health checks enable the switch to determine if the LDAP server is alive. You can perform the SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) health check by using SIP PING request. If the response to either method is RTSP/200 then the health check passes. sip Sets the health check type to sip.

January 2005 . the issuing process starts over with the first real server. For Server Load Balancing. helping to maximize successful cache hits. you can set a number of metrics for selecting which real server in a group gets the next client request. This is useful for applications where client information must be retained between sessions. This option is the most self-regulating. the hash metric uses IP address information in the client request to select a server. The hash metric should be used if the statistical load balancing achieved using minmisses is not as optimal as desired. This is particularly useful in caching applications. Server load with this metric becomes most evenly balanced as the number of active clients increases.2 Command Reference Server Load Balancing Metrics Using the metric command. consider using the hash metric. The server with the fewest current connections is considered to be the best choice for the next client connection request. This metric is optimized for Application Redirection. 370 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. with the fastest servers typically getting the most connections over time. the number of connections currently open on each real server is measured in real time. and shut down connections faster than slower servers. followed by the third real server. new connections are issued to each server in turn: the first real server in this group gets the first connection. all requests for a specific IP destination address will be sent to the same server. all requests for a specific IP destination address will be sent to the same server. For Application Redirection. it is not as effective as minmisses when servers leave and reenter service. due to their ability to accept. leastconns Least connections. Minmisses can also be used for Server Load Balancing. the second real server gets the next connection. all requests from a specific client will be sent to the same server. When minmisses is specified for a real server group performing Application Redirection. This is particularly useful for maximizing successful cache hits. If the Load Balancing statistics indicate that one server is processing significantly more requests over time than other servers. all requests from a specific client will be sent to the same server. With this option. Although the hash metric can provide more even load balancing at any given instance. and so on. This is useful for applications where client information must be retained on the server between sessions. With this option. hash Like minmisses. When specified for a real server group performing Server Load Balancing.Alteon OS 22. roundrobin Round robin. process. Best statistical load balancing is achieved when the IP address destinations of load balanced frames are spread across a broad range of IP subnets.0. These metrics are described in the following table: Table 7-7 Real Server Group Metrics (/cfg/slb/group/metric) Option and Description minmisses Minimum misses. When all the real servers in this group have received at least one connection.

The weights are adjusted so they are inversely proportional to a moving average of response time. 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. phash The phash metric utilizes the best features of the hash and minmiss metrics. With the phash metric. This can improve load balancing among servers of different performance levels. the real server weights are adjusted so they are inversely proportional to the number of octets that the real server processes during a given interval. the first hash will always be the same even if a real server is down. the switch supports an even load distribution (hash) and stable server assignment (minmiss) even when a server in the group goes down. the switch monitors and records the amount of time that each real server takes to reply to a health check. a higher proportion of connections are given to servers with higher weights. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 371 . With this option. it will rehash for that request based on the actual number of servers that are up. and phash metrics. With phash enabled. If the first hash hits a dead server. The response time is used to adjust the real server weights. bandwidth Bandwidth Metric. This results in a request always being sent to a server that is up. NOTE – Under the leastconns. when real servers are configured with weights (see the weight option on page 359). the smaller is the weight assigned to that server. hash.0. With this option. Weights are not applied when using the minmisses metrics. The higher the bandwidth used.2 Command Reference Table 7-7 Real Server Group Metrics (/cfg/slb/group/metric) Option and Description response Real server response time. roundrobin.

vip <virtual server IP address> Sets the IP address of the virtual server using dotted-decimal notation. The virtual server created within the switch will respond to ARPs and PINGs from network ports as if it was a normal server. such as http. Configuring a virtual server requires the following parameters: Creating a virtual server IP address Adding TCP/UDP port and real server group Enabling the virtual server (disabled by default) Table 7-8 Virtual Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt) Command Syntax and Usage service <virtual port or name> Displays the Virtual Services Menu. Client requests directed to the virtual server’s IP address will be balanced among the real servers available to it through real server group assignments. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22. see the sport command on page 385.0. and so on. the service number. 372 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. To get more information about well-known ports. The allowable port range is from 13 to 65534. To view services menu options. The virtual port name can be a well-known port name. see page 375. ftp.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt <virtual server number> Virtual Server SLB Configuration [Virtual Server service vip dname cont weight avail addrule remrule layr3 ena dis del cur 1 Menu] Virtual Service Menu Set IP addr of virtual server Set domain name of virtual server Set BW Contract Set Global SLB weight for virtual server Set Global SLB availability for virtual server Add Global SLB rule to domain Remove Global SLB rule from domain Enable/disable layer 3 only balancing Enable virtual server Disable virtual server Delete virtual server Display current virtual configuration This menu is used for configuring the virtual servers which will be the target for client requests for Server Load Balancing.

the switch uses only the client IP address as the session identifier.0. remrule <rule. Rule allows the server selected for GSLB to use different metric preference based on time of the day.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 373 . The maximum number of characters that can be used in a domain name is 34. ftp. layr3 disable|enable Normally. all services under this virtual server are assigned this BW contract. The domain name typically includes the name of the company or organization. and so forth).gov. To clear the dname.2 Command Reference Table 7-8 Virtual Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt) Command Syntax and Usage dname <34 character domain name>|none Sets the domain name for this virtual server. When the layr3 option is enabled (disabled by default). and also in applications where TCP fragments are generated. 315393-J. Remote site response times are divided by the real server weight before selection occurs. the client IP address is used with the client Layer 4 port number to produce a session identifier. The higher the weight value. The default is rule 1. The response time of this site is divided by this weight before the best site is assigned to a client.edu. It associates all the connections from the same client with the same real server while any connection exists between them. addrule <rule. weight Sets the Global server weight for the virtual server. The server selected for GSLB selects the first rule that matches the domain and starts with the first metric in the preference list of the rule. the Layer 4 software will allow the client to connect to a different server. It does not include the hostname portion (www. To define the hostname. avail Sets the Global SLB availability for the virtual server. . www2. specify the name as none. This option is necessary for some server applications where state information about the client system is divided across different simultaneous connections. All the frames that match this virtual server services are assigned this BW contract if the previously assigned contract for the frame has lower or equal precedence of the virtual server contract. see hname below. the more connections that will be directed to the local site. 1-64> Removes Global SLB rule from domain. 1-64> Adds Global SLB rule to domain. . However.com. An example would be foocorp. Each domain has one or more rules.com. and the Internet group code (. The default is 1. cont <BWM contract (1-256)> Enter a new Bandwidth Management Contract for this virtual service.org. If the real server to which the client is assigned becomes unavailable. . By default. the BW contract can be changed for a selected virtual server with /cfg/slb/virt <number>/service <number>/cont. The default number of contracts is set at 256 for Alteon OS. and so forth). Each rule has metric preference list.

Alteon OS 22. cur Displays the current configuration of the specified virtual server.0. dis This option disables the virtual server so that it no longer services client requests.2 Command Reference Table 7-8 Virtual Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt) Command Syntax and Usage ena Enables this virtual server. 374 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. del This command removes this virtual server from operation within the switch and deletes it from the Layer 4 switching software configuration. This option activates the virtual server within the switch so that it can service client requests sent to its defined IP address. Use this command with caution. as it will delete the options that have been set for this virtual server. January 2005 .

See page 380 to view the menu options for configuring virtual services on port 554 for RTSP. The following example shows a menu for http (port 80) services.Set real port hname .Enable/disable pip selection based on egress port/vlan del .Enable/disable UDP balancing frag .Set BW cont of an SLB string specific to this service pbind .Enable/disable DNS query load balancing http .Set multi response count thash .Set BW contract for this virtual service urlcont . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 375 .Enable/disable delayed binding udp .Alteon OS 22.Delete virtual service cur . [Virtual Server 1 http Service Menu] group .0.Set persistent binding type rcount .Enable/disable X-Forwarded-For for proxy mode epip .Set hostname httpslb .Set real server group number rport .Enable/disable direct access mode sip .Enable/disable HTTP redirects for Global SLB direct . NOTE – Select virtual service port 554 to configure RTSP traffic.Set HTTP SLB processing cont .Display current virtual service configuration 315393-J.Enable/disable SIP load balancing xforward .Set hash parameter dbind .Enable/disable only substituting MAC addresses dnsslb .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt <server number>/service <virtual port or name> Virtual Server Service Configuration This menu is used for configuring services assigned to a virtual server.Enable/disable remapping UDP server fragments nonat .

January 2005 . Note: If you enter 0 for the service contract. If a dname of “foocorp. You will be prompted to enter the number (1 to 256) of the real server group to add to this service. to add a hostname for Web services. The default is set at 1.foocorp. For example: httpslb <application> httpslb <application> and|or <application> cont <BWM Contract (0-256). this is the same as the virtual port (service virtual port). 0 for VIP default> Sets a Bandwidth Management contract for this virtual service. use the command: # hname none httpslb urlslb|host|cookie|browser|urlhash|headerhash|others Load balances on the following applications: urlslb: Enable or disable URL SLB host: Enable or disable for virtual hosting cookie: Enable or disable cookie-based SLB for cookie-based preferential load balancing. If rport is configured to be different than the virtual port defined in /cfg/slb/virt <number>/service <virtual port>.0. you could specify www as the hostname. The default number of contracts is set at 256 for Alteon OS. hname <hostname>|none Sets the hostname for a service added. You will be prompted for the following: Cookie name. it will carry the value entered for the Virtual Server IP (vip) contract.com” was defined (above). To clear the hostname for a service. starting point of the cookie value. others: Requires inputs for a particular header field You may choose to combine or select applications to load balance using the commands and and/or or. the switch will map the virtual port to this real port. number of bytes to be extracted. enable/disable checking for cookie in URI browser: Enable or disable SLB. By default.com” would be the full host/ domain name for the service. “www.Alteon OS 22. This is used in conjunction with dname (above) to create a full host/domain name for individual services. based on browser type urlhash: Enable or disable URL hashing based on URI headerhash: Hashes on any HTTP header value.2 Command Reference Table 7-9 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-1024)> Sets a real server group for this service. rport <real server port (0-65534)> Defines the real server TCP or UDP port assigned to this service. The format for this command is: # hname <hostname> For example. 376 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.

with clientip command enabled. The disable option allows you to disable presistent binding. Whereas. SSL provides authentication. such as with SSL (Secure Socket Layer. pbind clientip|cookie<p|r|i>|sslid|disable Enables or disables persistent bindings for a real server (disabled by default). When the client resumes activity after their connection has been aged out. The cookie option uses a cookie defined in the HTTP header or placed in the URI for hashing. In Alteon OS 22. or until the maximum count is reached. see “Cookie-Based Persistence” on page 381. For detailed information on Cookie-Based Persistence. non-repudiation. This may be necessary for some server applications where state information about the client system is retained on the server over a series of sequential connections. since the services are related. they will be connected to the most appropriate real server based on the load balancing metric. The session ID is a value comprising 32 random bytes chosen by the SSL server that gets stored in a session hash table. The default number is 1. By enabling the sslid option. if it has previously been enabled for a particular application. Web site search results. The Alteon Application Switch will examine each server response until the cookie is found. HTTP and HTTPs traffic from the same client will map to the same server irrespective of the load balancing metric used. all subsequent SSL sessions which present the same session ID will be directed to the same real server. see the Persistence chapter in the Alteon OS 20. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 377 .2 Application Guide. For more information on cookie option. which is a set of protocols built on top of TCP/IP that allow an application server and user to communicate over an encrypted HTTP session. Only use this command when a string is shared by multiple virtual services and each service requires a separate bandwidth. The connection timeout value (set in the Real Server Menu) is used to control how long these inactive but persistent connections remain associated with their real servers.0. The clientip option uses the client IP address as an identifier. or multi-page Web forms. 315393-J. An alternative approach may be to use the real server group metrics minmisses or hash (see Server Load Balancing Metrics). The sslid option is for Secure Sockets Layer (SSL). and associates all connections from the same client with the same real server until the client becomes inactive and the connection is aged out of the binding table. different services from the same client may not map to the same server. The default is set at 1024. and security.2 Command Reference Table 7-9 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage urlcont <URL path ID> <BW contract> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract of a string specific to this virtual service.2.0. rcount <response count number (1–16)> Sets the maximum response counter for cookie-based persistence.Alteon OS 22. HTTPS).

you must activate UDP balancing for the particular virtual servers that clients will communicate with using UDP. the source IP address. http disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP Redirection for Global server load balancing on a per VIP basis. For example. When stateless is enabled. Note: If applying a filter to the same virtual server IP address on which UDP load balancing is enabled. so that frames returning from server to the client do not have to pass through the switch. This option is disabled by default. which is sip. direct disable|enable Enables or disables Direct Access Mode (DAM) on the selected virtual service. This option is used for Direct Server Return (DSR) in an one-armed load balancing setup. you have to bind to a new server every time. January 2005 . If the user does not select any. dbind disable|enable Enables or disables Layer 4 Delayed Binding for TCP service and ports. udp disable|enable|stateless Enables or disables UDP load balancing for a virtual port (disabled by default). DNS uses UDP and TCP. 378 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. nonat disable|enable Enables or disables substituting only the MAC address of the real server (disabled by default). the switch will use default hash parameter. This option is enabled by default. Tunable hash feature allows the user to select different parameters for computing the hash value used by the hash.Alteon OS 22. Enabling this command protects the server from Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. see the cache command in Table 7-14 on page 390. disable caching on that filter for optimal performance. You can configure this option if the service(s) to be load balanced include UDP and TCP. dnsslb disable|enable Enables or disables DNS-based Layer 7 content load balancing. In those environments. Disabling HTTP Redirection causes GSLB to use proxy IP address for HTTP. or both source IP address and source port.0. This command takes precedence over the command to globally enable or disable Direct Access Mode on the switch. This option does not substitute IP addresses.2 Command Reference Table 7-9 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage thash sip|sip+sport Defines hash parameter. Since no session is created. For more information. and minmisses SLB metrics. no session table entry is created. For example. frag disable|enable Enables or disables remapping server fragments for virtual port. phash.

you can scan and hash calls based on a SIP Call-ID header to an MCS server. You need to turn Direct Access Mode (DAM) on to perform SIP load balancing. Using SIP on your switch. epip disable|enable Enables or disables proxy IP selection based on egress port or VLAN.2 Command Reference Table 7-9 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage sip disable|enable Enables or disables Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) server load balancing on the Alteon OS. the SP selects the proxy IP address based on ingress port or VLAN. X-Forward-For is a special header that stores and identifies the client IP information. This feature is applicable only on HTTP protocol. del This command removes this virtual service from operation within the switch and deletes it from the Layer 4 switching software configuration.Alteon OS 22. xforward disable|enable Enables or disables inserting the X-Forward-For header into the client HTTP request to preserve the client IP information. The SIP processing occurs at application level in order to parse out messages coming from client side as well as the server side. Use this command with caution. modifying and terminating sessions with one or more participants (documented in RFC3261). You can use only minmiss as the load balancing metric since the load balancing is performed based on the Call-ID. Using the epip command. When SIP is enabled. SIP is a UDP-based application-level control protocol for creating. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 379 . you can load balance Nortel’s MCS (Multimedia Communication Server) proxy servers. you can configure the SP to select proxy IP address based on the egress port or VLAN. 315393-J. When enabled. cur Displays the current configuration of services on the specified virtual server. Nortel Networks’ MCS is a SIP enabled application Server. you can configure SIP service on the service port 5060 for a virtual server. as it will delete the options that have been set for this virtual service. By default.0.

foocorp. “www. Tunable hash feature allows the user to select different parameters for computing the hash value used by the hash. use the command: # hname none rtspslb hash|patternMatch|dis This Layer 7 load balancing option sets the type of rtspslb. dis: If set at disable. hash: If you use hash. The format for this command is: # hname <hostname> For example. RTSP will use Layer 4 metrics to select a server to load balance. you could specify www as the hostname. 380 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. either hash or patternMatch.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt <server number>/service 554 Virtual Server RTSP Configuration This menu displays virtual services configured on service port 554 for RTSP traffic. If a dname of “foocorp. thash sip|sip+sport Defines hash parameter. To clear the hostname for a service. the switch will use default hash parameter.com” would be the full host/ domain name for the service. thereby enabling the service.com” was defined (above).Alteon OS 22. hname <hostname>|none Sets the hostname for a service added. phash. patternMatch: If you select this option.0. RTSP will parse the URL and will hash the URL to select a server to load balance. If the user does not select any. or both source IP address and source port. the source IP address. the destination IP address. to add a hostname for Web services. The default is hash. and minmisses SLB metrics. [Virtual Server group hname rtspslb thash del cur 1 rtsp Service Menu] Set real server group number Set hostname Set RTSP URL load balancing type Set hash parameter Delete virtual service Display current virtual service configuration Table 7-10 Virtual Server Service Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt 1/service 554) Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-1024)> Sets real server group number. which is sip. This is used in conjunction with dname (above) to create a full host/domain name for individual services. the switch will match the string or pattern within the URL to select a server based on the string configured on the real server. January 2005 . For example.

cur Displays the current virtual service configuration.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 7-10 Virtual Server Service Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt 1/service 554) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes this virtual service. 315393-J. and has the following command syntax and usage: pbind cookie <mode> <name> <offset> <length> <URI> Each parameter is explained in the following table. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 381 .0. Cookie-Based Persistence The cookie option is used to establish cookie-based persistence.

. Look for cookie in the URI.Alteon OS 22. For cookie rewrite.g. the server responds with the data. a date <MM/dd/yy[@hh:mm]> (e.. The switch intercepts this persistence cookie and rewrites the value to include server-specific information before sending it to the client.g.2 Command Reference Table 7-11 Command Syntax and Usage for pbind cookie Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service/pbind cookie) Option <mode> Description Specify the mode for cookie-based persistence. the extracting length must be 8 or 16. 382 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. a duration <days[:hours[:minutes]]> (e.. The switch uses this cookie to bind to the appropriate server. the switch. enter d to disable this option. enter e to enable this option. 45:30:90) . and the switch inserts an Alteon persistence cookie into the data packet. r: Rewrite mode. Enter the starting point of the cookie value (1-64) Enter number of bytes to extract (1-64)..0. To look for cookie in the HTTP header. generates the cookie value on behalf of the server.. and not the network administrator. If you want to look for cookie name or value in the URI. or none <return> <name> <offset> <length> <URI> Enter the name of the cookie. 12/31/01@23:59) . For more information on Cookie-Based Persistence. the network administrator configures the Web server to embed a cookie in the server response that the switch looks for in subsequent requests from the same client. The following three modes are available: p: Passive mode. When a client sends a request without a cookie. In active cookie mode (or cookie rewrite mode).0. Insert cookie mode expiration parameters are as follows: Enter insert-cookie expiration as either: .. In this mode. see the Alteon OS 22.2 Application Guide. January 2005 . i: Insert mode.

Set which addresses are network address translated vlan .Set real server group for redirection rport .Enable filter dis .Set destination TCP/UDP port or range action .Alteon OS 22.Display current filter configuration The switch supports up to 2048 traffic filters. The types of information include: IP protocol TCP/UDP ports TCP flags ICMP message type 315393-J.Set destination MAC address sip .Enable/disable filter inversion ena .Set action group .Disable filter del .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> SLB Filter Configuration [Filter 1 Menu] adv .Set destination IP address dmask .Set source IP mask dip .Set vlan id invert . Each filter can be configured to allow.Set source MAC address dmac .Set real server port for redirection nat . page 388) that can be used to provide more information through syslog. There are several options available in the Filter Advanced Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv.0.Set destination IP mask proto . and each physical switch port can be configured to use any combination of filters.Delete filter cur . redirect or perform Network Address Translation on traffic according to a variety of address and protocol specifications.Set filter name smac . This command is disabled by default. deny. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 383 .Set source TCP/UDP port or range dport .Set IP protocol sport .Set source IP address smask .Filter Advanced Menu name .

See details below for more information on producing address ranges. deny. see “Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters” on page 387. dmac any|<MAC address (such as. dip any|<IP address> If defined. 384 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. The default is any if the destination MAC address is any. smask <IP subnet mask (such as.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 . A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the dmask below.0. redirect. dmask <IP subnet mask (such as.0> This IP address mask is used with the sip to select traffic which this filter will affect. name <31 character name>|none Allows the user to assign a name to a filter. see “Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters” on page 387.255. 255. The default is any. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation.255. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the smask below.255.2 Command Reference The following parameters are required for filtering: Set the address. traffic with this destination IP address will be affected by this filter. 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> Sets the destination MAC address.0)> This IP address mask is used with the dip to select traffic which this filter will affect. 255. see page 388. or any. sip any|<IP address> If defined. To view menu options. The default is any if the source MAC address is any. The default is any. traffic with this source IP address will be affected by this filter. smac any|<MAC address (such as.255. For more information. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation. or any. For more information. and/or protocol that will be affected by the filter Set the filter action (allow. nat) Enable the filter Add the filter to a switch port Enable filtering on the Alteon Application Switch port Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage adv Displays the Filter Advanced Menu. masks. 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> Sets the source MAC address.

2 Command Reference Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage proto any|<number>|<name> If defined. or “any”. The default is set at any. just as with sport above. The default is any. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 385 . name. Specify the port number. The default is any.Alteon OS 22.0. range. Number 1 2 6 17 89 112 Name icmp igmp tcp udp ospf vrrp sport any|<name>|<port>|<port>-<port> If defined. Listed below are some of the well-known ports: Number 20 21 22 23 25 37 42 43 53 69 70 79 80 109 110 Name ftp-data ftp ssh telnet smtp time name whois domain tftp gopher finger http pop2 pop3 dport any|<name>|<port>|<port>-<port> If defined. name. Listed below are some of the well-known protocols. Specify the port number. Specify the protocol number. name. or “any”. range. 315393-J. traffic from the specified protocol is affected by this filter. or “any”. traffic with the specified TCP or UDP source port will be affected by this filter. traffic with the specified real server TCP or UDP destination port will be affected by this filter.

If dest is specified. if transparent proxies are used for Network Address Translation (NAT) on the Alteon Application Switch (see the pip option in Table 7-22 on page 399). Redirect frames that fit this filter’s profile.Alteon OS 22. This can be used for building basic security profiles.2 Command Reference Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage action allow|deny|redir|nat|goto Specifies the action this filter takes: allow deny redir Allow the frame to pass (by default). group <real server group number (1-1024)> This option applies only when redir is specified at the filter action. For valid Layer 4 health checks. The goto action causes filter processing to jump to a designated filter. Also. Layer 4 processing must be activated (see the /cfg/slb/on command on page 356). nat source|dest When nat is set as the filter action (see above). This can be used to map the source or destination IP address and port information of a private network scheme to/from the advertised network IP address and ports. this must be configured whenever TCP protocol traffic is redirected. The default is set at 0. the frame’s destination IP address (dip) and port number (dport) are replaced with the sip and sport values. This defines the real server TCP or UDP port to which redirected traffic will be sent. effectively skipping over a block of filter IDs. Filter searching action will then continue from the designated filter ID. If source is specified. To specify the new filter to goto. Discard frames that fit this filter’s profile. January 2005 . Allows the user to specify a target filter ID that the filter search should jump to when a match occurs. nat goto 386 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.slb/filt/adv/goto command. such as for web cache redirection. rport must be configured for all Application Redirection filters. Destination (dest) is set as the default filter. The default is group 1 rport <real server port (0-65535)> This option applies only when redir is specified at the filter action. use the /cfg. Define a real server group (1 to 16) to which redirected traffic will be sent. Perform generic Network Address Translation (NAT). the frame’s source IP address (sip) and port number (sport) are replaced with the dip and dport values. this command specifies whether Network Address Translation (NAT) is performed on the source or the destination information.0. This is used in conjunction with the nat option (mentioned in this table) and can also be combined with proxies. In addition.

For example. the filter does not get applied to all the member ports of this VLAN. the destination IP address is masked (bitwise AND) with the dmask and then compared to the dip. If the conditions for the filter are not met. The default is any.Alteon OS 22.0. cur Displays the current configuration of the filter. dis Disables this filter. invert disable|enable Inverts the filter logic. 315393-J. don’t act. which means the switch will match any VLAN ID of the incoming packet This command allows filters to be configured on per VLAN basis. This option allows you to match the VLAN ID of the switch against the VLAN ID of the incoming packet. But by applying this filter to a VLAN. and the smask (source) or dmask (destination) is the mask which is applied to produce the range. perform the assigned action. and applies a filter to a VLAN that already has been configured.2 Command Reference Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage vlan any|<VLAN ID (1 . If the conditions of the filter are met. ena Enables this filter. This option is disabled by default. the sip (source) or dip (destination) defines the base IP address in the desired range. When a range of IP addresses is needed. Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters You can specify a range of IP address for filtering both the source and/or destination IP address for traffic. to determine if a client request’s destination IP address should be redirected to the cache servers attached to a particular switch.4090)> Sets the ID of the VLAN that is to be filtered. del Deletes this filter. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 387 . You have to manually add the filter to the port. A VLAN has a set of member ports.

Enable/disable WAN link load balancing dbind .0.0.0.Set IDS server group for intrusion detection SLB idshash .IP Advanced Menu layer7 .0 .0 255.0 128.0.Set client proxy IP address cache .1p Advanced Menu tcp .Set BW contract for the reverse session tmout .0 0.0.Set BW contract revcont .TCP Advanced Menu ip .0. January 2005 .255 128. To do this.0 /cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv Advanced Filter Configuration [Filter 1 Advanced Menu] 8021p .0.Enable/disable pip selection based on egress port/vlan cur .255.127.0.Enable/disable logging fwlb .Set GOTO filter ID reverse .Set NAT or L7 lookup session timeout idsgrp .0.0.Enable/disable firewall redirect hash method linklb .0 128.Security Menu icmp .Enable/disable creating session for reverse side traffic proxyip .802.0.Alteon OS 22.Enable/disable persistent binding for redirection proxy . you could define the following parameters: Table 7-13 Filtering IP Address Ranges Filter #1 #2 Internet Address Range dip dmask 128.255 0.Set ICMP message type cont .Set hash parameter for Filter goto .0.2 Command Reference As another example. you could configure the switch with two filters so that each would handle traffic filtering for one half of the Internet.Enable/disable caching sessions that match filter log .0.Enable/disable client proxy epip .Set hash parameter for intrusion detection SLB thash .Layer 7 Advanced Menu security .255.Display current advanced filter configuration 388 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Enable/disable delayed binding for redirection pbind .255.255.

To view menu options. The default is set at 4 minutes. see the Alteon OS 22. By default. 1-1024>|none Sets the IDS server group for intrusion detection server load balancing.2 Command Reference Table 7-14 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv) Command Syntax and Usage 8021p Displays 8021p Advanced Menu. IEEE 802.Alteon OS 22.0. For a list of ICMP message types. each filter added to an IDSLB-enabled port can be assigned a unique IDS real server group. 1-256> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for the reverse traffic session. see page 393. the contract number is set at 256. This command helps you assign a different Bandwidth management contract from the one configured on the ingress filter. The default is set at any. To view menu options. tcp Displays the TCP Flags advanced menu. see page 397 icmp any|<number>|<type. layer7 Displays Layer7 advanced menu. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the Bandwidth Management Contract.1p is the specification for prioritizing the net- work traffic at the Layer 2 level in your switch. see Table 7-18 on page 394. revcont <BW Contract. idsgrp <real server group number. For a detailed description of filtering and ICMP. When filtering is used for IDSLB. tmout <even number of minutes (4-32768)> Sets the session timeout in an even number of minutes. To view menu options. ip Sets IP advanced menu. "icmp list" for list> Sets the ICMP message type. security Displays the filter Security Menu. To view menu options. see page 395. Using this command you can preserve 802. To view menu options. see page 392. idshash sip|dip|both Sets the hash metric parameter for Intrusion Detection System Server Load Balancing: source IP (sip).2 Application Guide. 315393-J.1p bits in all the frames that pass through the switch. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 389 .0. destination IP (dip). see page 391. or both.

If the user does not configure the proxy IP address in the filter. enabling this option changes the hash of the filter from a WCR hash to a FWLB hash. The switch uses the configured proxy IP address to replace the client's IP address. The sip option allows you to perform tunable hash on source IP address for this filter. 390 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. A cache-enabled filter creates a session entry in the switch. In order to use this feature. This option is disabled by default. This command allows for the creation of a session entry for reverse traffic to avoid inspecting traffic in both directions. the action on this filter must be set to goto. so that the switch can bypass checking for subsequent frames that match the same criteria. By default.0. log disable|enable Enables or disables generating of syslog messages when a filter is hit. a hashing algorithm is used to ensure that inbound packets and outbound packets for a pair of IPSA/IPDA traverse through the same firewall. reverse disable|enable Enables or disables the creation of a session for traffic coming from the reverse side. Use this command to specify the new filter to go to. fwlb disable|enable To ensure that the stateful inspection behavior of firewalls is maintained. The Default is auto. The option dip allows you to perform tunable hash on destination IP address for this filter. January 2005 . this option is disabled. linklb disable|enable Enables or disables WAN Link Load Balancing. Filter searching will then continue from the designated filter ID.2 Command Reference Table 7-14 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv) Command Syntax and Usage thash auto|sip|dip|both|sip+sport Allows you to choose hash parameter to use for filter redirection. The option both allows you to perform tunable hash on both source IP address and the destination IP address at the same time. By default. The option sip+sport allows you to perform tunable hash on both source IP address and source port at the same time. proxyip <IP address> Defines client proxy IP address. cache disable|enable Enables or disables caching sessions that match the filter. Cache is enabled by default. If the dport is 80 or 21. Note: Cache should be disabled if applying a filter to virtual server IP address while performing UDP load balancing (see “udp disable|enable|stateless” on page 378). this option is disabled. Exercise caution while applying cacheenabled and cache-disabled filters to the same switch port. goto <filter ID> Allows the user to specify a target filter ID that the filter search should jump to when a match occurs. the switch uses the proxy IP address configured under /cfg/slb/pip command.Alteon OS 22.

pbind disable|enable Enables or disables persistent binding for redirection on this filter. This is useful when certain traffic must retain original IP address information. 315393-J. The packets with a higher (non-zero) priority bits are given forwarding preference over packets with numerically lower priority bits value. [802.1p value. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 391 . proxy disable|enable Enables or disables client proxy. By default.0.1p value matching cur .Alteon OS 22. or when other forms of translation (such as Application Redirection or NAT) are preferred. This option applies only when redir or nat is specified as the filter action. Enable or disable proxy IP address translation for traffic matching the filter criteria. cur Displays the current advanced filter configuration. this is enabled. epip disable|enable Enables or disables proxy IP selection based on egress port or VLAN. If disabled.Display current 802. The value is the priority bits information in the packet structure.Enable/disable 802. any proxy defined for the switch port using the pip command (see page 399) is not performed for traffic meeting the filter criteria.2 Command Reference Table 7-14 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv) Command Syntax and Usage dbind disable|enable Enables or disables delayed binding for redirection on this filter. By default.1p configuration Table 7-15 8021p Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/8021p) Command Syntax and Usage value <0-7> Defines 802. the SP selects the proxy IP address based on ingress port or VLAN.1p Advanced Menu This feature provides the Alteon OS the capability to filter IP packets based on the 802. The 802.1p Advanced Menu] value .1p bits in the packet's VLAN header.1p value match . you can configure the SP to select proxy IP address based on the egress port or VLAN.1p bits specify the priority that you should give to the packets while forwarding them. /cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv/8021p 802.Set 802. Using the epip command.

Enable/disable TCP ACK matching . this option is disabled.Enable/disable TCP SYN matching .1p configuration. By default. psh disable|enable Enables or disables TCP PSH (push) flag matching.Enable/disable TCP URG matching . By default.Alteon OS 22. By default.1p value.Enable/disable TCP FIN matching .Enable/disable TCP PSH matching .Enable/disable TCP RST matching . 392 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. January 2005 . rst disable|enable Enables or disables TCP RST (reset) flag matching. When the Management Processor needs to reuse the packet to send to the destination. this option is disabled. ack disable|enable Enables or disables TCP ACK (acknowledgement) flag matching.0. the switch matches the original priority bits information with the priority bits information after the frame processing is complete. this option is disabled. this option is disabled. syn disable|enable Enables or disables TCP SYN (synchronize) flag matching. /cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv/tcp Advanced Filter TCP Configuration [TCP Advanced urg ack psh rst syn fin ackrst cur Menu] . cur Displays current 802.2 Command Reference Table 7-15 8021p Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/8021p) Command Syntax and Usage match disable|enable Enables or disables matching of 802. By default.Display current TCP configuration These commands can be used to configure packet filtering for specific TCP flags.Enable/disable TCP ACK or RST matching . Table 7-16 Advanced Filter TCP Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/tcp) Command Syntax and Usage urg disable|enable Enables or disables TCP URG (urgent) flag matching. By default. this option is disabled.

tmask <0-255> Sets IP type of service mask.Set IP maximum packet length option . option disable|enable Enables or disables IP option matching. this option is disabled.Alteon OS 22.Set IP TOS mask newtos . ackrst disable|enable Enables or disables TCP acknowledgement or reset flag matching.Display current IP configuration Table 7-17 IP Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt #/adv/ip) Command Syntax and Usage tos <0-255> Sets IP type of service (ToS) and the value of the type of service. this option is disabled. Any packet exceeding the maximum length will not match the filter.Enable/disable IP option matching cur . For more information on ToS. cur Displays the current Access Control List TCP filter configuration.Set new IP TOS length . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 393 . newtos <0-255> Sets new IP type of service.Set IP Type of Service tmask . 315393-J. refer to RFC 1340 and 1349.0. 64-65535>|any Defines the limit of IP packet’s length. By default.2 Command Reference Table 7-16 Advanced Filter TCP Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/tcp) Command Syntax and Usage fin disable|enable Enables or disables TCP FIN (finish) flag matching. /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/ip IP Advanced Menu [IP Advanced Menu] tos . By default. length <IP packet length (in bytes).

Alteon OS 22. January 2005 . Table 7-18 ICMP Message Types Type # Message Type 0 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 echorep destun quench redir echoreq rtradv rtrsol timex param timereq timerep inforeq inforep maskreq maskrep Description ICMP echo reply ICMP destination unreachable ICMP source quench ICMP redirect ICMP echo request ICMP router advertisement ICMP router solicitation ICMP time exceeded ICMP parameter problem ICMP timestamp request ICMP timestamp reply ICMP information request ICMP information reply ICMP address mask request ICMP address mask reply 394 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. ICMP Message Types The following ICMP message types are used with the /cfg/slb/filt/adv/icmp command.2 Command Reference Table 7-17 IP Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt #/adv/ip) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current advanced IP settings for the selected filter.0. You can list all ICMP message types with the /cfg/slb/filt/adv/icmp list command.

Alteon OS 22. then send back an HTTP redirection message back to the client that contains information in the second string ID. rdsnp disable|enable Enables or disables WAP RADIUS snooping on this filter. Only use this command when a string is shared by multiple filters and each filter requires a separate bandwidth.0. addstr <string id (1-1024)> Adds the string ID to this filter for L7 filtering. This information is needed to add to or delete static session entries in the switch’s session table so that it can perform the required persistency for load balancing.Enable/disable Layer 7 content lookup parseall . The string is defined under: /cfg/slb/layer7/ slb/add.Enable/disable active FTP NAT l7lkup . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 395 . addrd [1>2] Adds an HTTP redirection mapping.Set BW cont of an URL path specific to this filter addrd .Add string for layer 7 filtering remstr . please refer to your Application Guide.Remove string for layer 7 filtering rdsnp . Radius snooping allows the Alteon OS to examine RADIUS accounting packets for client information.Enable/disable WAP RADIUS Snooping rdswap .Display current layer 7 configuration Table 7-19 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage urlcont <URL path ID> <BW contract> Sets the URL path BW contract for this filter. 315393-J. This command tells the filter that if it matches on the first string id. Strings are defined under: /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/add.Add HTTP redirection mapping remrd .Enable/disable RADIUS/WAP Persistence ftpa . For more details. remrd <string id to redirect from (1-512)> <string id to redirect to (2-512)> Removes an HTTP redirection mapping that was added using the addrd command described above.Enable/disable layer 7 lookup (parsing) of all packets cur .Remove HTTP redirection mapping addstr . The string is defined under: /cfg/slb/ layer7/slb/add. remstr <string id (1-1024)> Removes the string ID for Layer 7 filtering.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/layer7 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Configuration Menu [Layer 7 Advanced Menu] urlcont .

The real server port (RPORT) will be replaced with a proxy port (PPORT). redir). please refer to your Application Guide.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 . this feature enables content-intelligent redirection or content-intelligent deny filtering. This command is enabled by default. By default. For more details. When parseall is disabled. this option is disabled. layer 7 lookup is turned off for the remaining packets in the session.0. l7lkup disable|enable Enables or disables layer 7 lookup on this filter. After the RAS receives the Radius accept packet. However. and normally all data packets in a session are examined by the filter. This command replaces the urlp and l7deny commands found in earlier releases of Alteon OS. When a client in active FTP mode sends a PORT command to a remote FTP server. The “framed IP address” attribute is used to rebind the RADIUS accounting session to a new server. the filter performs a lookup on layer 7 content such as HTTP strings or headers. deny. that is PIP:PPORT. When enabled. When combined with a filter action (for example. the switch will look into the data part of the frame and replace the client 's private IP address with a proxy IP (PIP) address. some sessions may contain only one packet containing the layer 7 content.2 Command Reference Table 7-19 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage rdswap enable|disable Enables or disables WAP RADIUS persistence on this filter. The application switch snoops on the RADIUS accounting start packet for the “framed IP address” attribute. A WAP client is first authenticated by the RADIUS server on UDP port 1812. This feature allows for RADIUS and WAP persistence by binding both (RADIUS accounting and WAP) sessions to the same server. 396 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. subsequent packets can be ignored. The server replies with a Radius Accept or Reject frame. The switch forwards this reply to the RAS. it sends a RADIUS accounting start packet on UDP port 1813 to the bound server. ftpa disable|enable Enables or disables active FTP Client Network Address Translation (NAT). cur Displays the current advanced Layer 7 configuration of the filter including the Radius/Wap persistence settings. parseall disable|enable Enables or disables parsing of all packets in a session where layer 7 lookup is being performed. Once this packet is found.

cur Displays the current configuration. pmatch disable|enable Enables or disables pattern matching on this filter. The protocol-based rate limiting limits the traffic coming from specific clients based on the IP address of the client. remgrp <pattern match group id> Removes a pattern group from this filter. Pattern groups are added using the /cfg/security/ pgroup/add command. 315393-J. When parseall is disabled.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/security SLB Filter Advanced Security Menu [Security Menu] ratelim addgrp remgrp pmatch matchall parseall cur Rate Limiting Menu Add pattern match group for layer 7 filtering Remove pattern match group for layer 7 filtering Enable/disable pattern matching Enable/disable match-all criteria for layer 7 filtering Enable/disable layer 7 lookup (parsing) of all packets Display current Security configuration Table 7-20 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/security) Command Syntax and Usage ratelim Displays the Rate Limiting Menu. the switch allows rate limiting to be enabled on TCP. Once this packet is found. subsequent packets can be ignored. and normally all data packets in a session are examined by the filter. This feature enables the switch to detect and block UDP or ICMP-based DOS attacks that slow down or decapitate the servers. To view menu options see page 398. Currently. addgrp <pattern match group id> Adds a pattern group to this filter.Alteon OS 22.0. parseall disable|enable Enables or disables pattern string lookup (parsing) of all packets in a session where pattern matching is being performed. and ICMP protocols. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 397 . matchall disable|enable Enables or disables matching of all configured patterns before the filter can perform the deny action. UDP. some sessions may contain only one packet containing the layer 7 content. However. This command is enabled by default. pattern matching is turned off for the remaining packets in the session.

The client is held down for a specified number of minutes. When the number of new connections or packets exceeds the configured limit. January 2005 . The time window can be configured per filter and not globally on all the filters.0. ena Enables the protocol for rate limiting. The hold-down duration can be configured per filter and not globally on all the filters. cur Displays the current rate limiting configuration. When blocking occurs. holddur <minutes. the client is said to be held down. dis Disables TCP. UDP. or ICMP rate limiting Disable TCP. and ICMP. UDP. A time window is a configured period of time (in seconds) during which packets are allowed to be received. The supported protocols are: TCP. timewin <seconds. 1-65535> Defines time window for rate limiting. Rate limiting is applied to the protocol configured on the filter. after which new TCP connection requests or packets from the client are allowed once again to pass through. UDP. or ICMP rate limiting Display current rate limiting configuration Table 7-21 Rate Limiting Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/security/ ratelim) Command Syntax and Usage maxconn <# of connections in units of 10 (0-255)> Defines maximum connections for rate limiting. or ICMP rate limiting.Alteon OS 22. UDP. 2-65535> Defines hold down duration for rate limiting.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/security/ ratelim Advanced Security Rate Limiting Configuration Menu [Rate Limiting maxconn timewin holddur ena dis cur Menu] Set maximum connections for rate limiting Set time window for rate limiting Set hold down duration for rate limiting Enable TCP. any new TCP connection requests or UDP/ICMP packets from the client are blocked. 398 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.

clear the session binding table for the port (see the clear command in Table 8-3 on page 436). Traffic not associated with virtual servers is switched normally.Enable/disable intrusion detection server load balancing cur .Enable/disable hot-standby processing intersw .Display current port configuration Alteon OS switch software allows you to enable or disable processing independently for each type of Layer 4 traffic (client and server) on a per port basis.Enable/disable client processing server .Enable/disable inter-switch processing proxy . the port can be enabled or disabled to process client Layer 4 traffic.Add filter to port rem . When server processing is enabled.Alteon OS 22. Ports configured to process client request traffic bind servers to clients and provide address translation from the virtual server IP address to the real server IP address.Enable/disable filtering add . expanding your topology options.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/port <port number> Port SLB Configuration [SLB port 1 Menu] client . This option is disabled by default.Enable/disable server processing rts . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 399 . Maximizing the number of these ports on the Layer 4 switch will improve the switch’s potential for effective Server Load Balancing. Table 7-22 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/port) Command Syntax and Usage client disable|enable For Server Load Balancing. This option is disabled by default.Remove filter from port idslb . NOTE – When changing the filters on a given port.Enable/disable use of PIP for ingress traffic filt .0. or another switch. it may take some time before the port session information is updated so that the filter changes take effect. Traffic not associated with virtual servers is switched normally. directly or through a hub. re-mapping virtual server IP addresses and port values to real server IP addresses and ports. router.Enable/disable RTS processing hotstan . server disable|enable Ports configured to provide real server responses to client requests require real servers to be connected to the Layer 4 switch. the switch port re-maps real server IP addresses and Layer 4 port values to virtual server IP addresses and Layer 4 ports. To make port filter changes take effect immediately. 315393-J.

intersw disable|enable Enables or disables inter-switch processing. Use this option and the intersw option in conjunction with VRRP hot-standby failover. Enabling the filter sets up the Real Server to look into the VPN session table. rather than around it. filt disable|enable Enables or disables filtering on this port. client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address.0. cur Displays the current system parameters. IDSLB is done at the end of filter processing or at the end of client processing where filtering is not enabled. January 2005 . IDSLB is enabled on a port and a real server group is designated for IDSLB. proxy disable|enable Enables or disables a proxy for traffic that ingresses this port. This option is disabled by default. see the “Firewall Load Balancing” and “VPN Load Balancing” chapters in the Alteon OS 22.2 Application Guide. This option is enabled for ports connected to a peer switch and is disabled by default. In the case of client processing. Enter filter ID (1 to 2048) or a contiguous block of filter IDs. When the PIP is defined. For more information on using rts. add <filter ID (1 to 2048)|block of IDs (first-last)> Adds a filter or a block of filters for use on this port. 1-100. This option is disabled by default.Alteon OS 22. For example. 400 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. This option is disabled by default.0. this forces response traffic to return through the switch. each filter’s rport parameter must also be defined (see rport on page 384). This option is used for firewall load balancing or VPN load balancing applications. In Alteon OS 22. Enable rts on all client-side ports to ensure that traffic ingresses and egresses through the same port. rem <filter ID (1 to 2048)|block of IDs (first-last)> Removes a filter or a block of filters from use on this port.0. Enter filter ID (1 to 2048) or a contiguous block of filter IDs. For example.This option is disabled by default. When pip is used with Application Redirection filters. Proxies are also useful for Application Redirection and Network Address Translation (NAT).2 Command Reference Table 7-22 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/port) rts disable|enable Enables or disables Return to Sender (RTS) load balancing on this port. 1-100.2. This option is disabled by default. hotstan disable|enable Enables or disables hot-standby processing. as is possible in complex routing environments. idslb disable|enable Enables or disables Intrusion Detection System Server Load Balancing on this port. In Server Load Balancing applications.

Remote Site Menu network . For more information.Set CPU utilization capacity threshold (DSSPv2) mincon .Enable/disable authoritative DNS direct based GSLB hostlk .Alteon OS 22.Set sessions available capacity threshold dns . see page 405.Set DSSP version 1 or 2 to send out remote site updates port . In addition.Globally turn Global SLB OFF cur . The switch performs this periodically on every remote site using Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP).0. see page 403.Rule Menu version .Network Preference Menu rule . 315393-J.Enable/disable encrypting remote site updates on .Enable/disable no remote real SLB encrypt . To view menu options. see page 406.Set interval in seconds for remote site updates sesscap . GSLB uses the health and response time to select the server in the GSLB selection engine.Enable/disable HTTP redirect based GSLB usern . network <network (1-128)> Displays Network Preference Menu. DSSP is a proprietary protocol that resides above TCP.Display current Global SLB configuration Table 7-23 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage site <remote site (1-64)> Displays the menu for a remote site. [Global SLB Menu] site .Set sessions utilization capacity threshold (DSSPv2) cpucap .Enable/disable HTTP redirect to remote real server name norem . GSLB sends the health and response time together with the local session and CPU utilization information that are collectively known as remote site updates.Set TCP port number for DSSPv2 remote site updates sinter .Enable/disable virtual service hostname matching http . rule <rule (1-128)> Displays the Rule Menu.Globally turn Global SLB ON off . To view menu options.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/gslb Global SLB Configuration Global Server Load Balancing (GSLB) at any given site performs periodic SLB health checks to determine the health and response time of the remote real server corresponding to the virtual server at the remote site. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 401 . please refer to your Application Guide. To view menu options.

the client will be redirected to the domain name specified by the remote real server name plus virtual server domain name: <remote real server name> <virtual server domain name> 402 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. The default TCP port is 80. If disabled. 10-7200> Sets the time interval in seconds for remote site updates. the hostname specified in the Virtual Service configuration. This option is disabled by default. The default configuration is 90%. sesscap <Session utilization capacity threshold (1-100)> Sets the threshold for session utilization capacity. When enabled. This option is enabled by default.2 Command Reference Table 7-23 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage version <DSSP version 1 or 2> Defines the version of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) that is used to send out the remote site updates. When a site redirects a client to another site using an HTTP redirect. cpucap <CPU utilization capacity threshold (1-100)> Sets the threshold for the CPU utilization capacity. the client is redirected to the new site's IP address. When enabled (default). January 2005 . mincon <available sessions threshold. The default configuration is 90%. The range is between 10 and 7200 seconds. When disabled. port <TCP port number> Sets the TCP port number for remote site updates for Global server load balancing. usern disable|enable Enables or disables an HTTP redirect to a real server name. hostlk disable|enable Enables or disables lookups based on host or domain name in a GSLB configuration. will be used to resolve the IP address for the domain. the switch will not perform HTTP Redirects. this switch will redirect client requests to peer sites if its own real servers fail or have reached their maximum connection limits. dns disable|enable Enables or disables DNS direct-based GSLB. but will instead drop requests for new connections and cause the client’s browser to eventually issue a new DNS request. in addition to the domain name. only the domain name will be used to match. If usern is enabled. http disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP redirects to peer sites by this switch.Alteon OS 22. sinter <remote site updates interval in seconds.0. 0-65535> Defines the capacity threshold for the sessions available on the real server for GSLB.

For HTTP protocols. off Turns GSLB off for this switch. you need to disable the http parameter in the same menu. the switch will not do remote real server load balancing for non-http protocols. By default. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 403 .0. /cfg/slb/gslb/site <site number> GSLB Remote Site Configuration The switch initiates a global server selection to direct client traffic to the best server for a given domain. The combination of a virtual server and a virtual service is called a domain. the switch will not encrypt the DSSP messages going out of the switch. encrypt This command enables or disables encrypting of DSSP updates. This option can be performed only once the optional GSLB software is activated (refer to “Activating Optional Software” on page 441). Each virtual server has a number of virtual services. Each virtual service has a host name. If enabled. if you want to do no-remote-real-server load balancing. GSLB is turned off. This option allows the GSLB feature to work with older versions of Web OS that do not encrypt DSSP messages on Activates Global Server Load Balancing (GSLB) for this switch. Any active remote sites will still perform GSLB services with each other. 315393-J. but will not hand off requests to this switch. Each site has a virtual server for the domain. Each domain has one or more sites. If disabled. Each virtual service has a group of real servers.Alteon OS 22. cur Displays the current Global SLB configuration. Each virtual server has a domain name.2 Command Reference Table 7-23 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage norem This command enables or disables no-remote real server load balancing.

If enabled (default). [Remote site 1 Menu] prima . Use dotted decimal notation. disable the updates.Disable remote site del . configure the Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface (BBI) to use a different service port (see the /cfg/sys/access/wport option on page 259). If both are enabled. there is a local virtual server but no remote virtual server. Global Server Load Balancing uses service port 80 on the IP interface for DSSP updates.2 Command Reference At a local site for a domain. Both services cannot use the same port. Table 7-24 GSLB Remote Site Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/site) Command Syntax and Usage prima <server IP address> Defines the IP interface IP address of the primary switch at the remote site used for Global Server Load Balancing.Set secondary switch IP address of remote site name . the local switch will address the remote site secondary switch instead.Display current remote site configuration Up to 64 remote sites can be configured. secon <server IP address> If the remote site is configured with a redundant switch. ena Enables this remote site for use with Global Server Load Balancing. If the remote site primary switch fails. By default.Set remote site name update . the Alteon OS Web-based interface also uses port 80. enter the IP address of the IP interface for the remote secondary switch here.Alteon OS 22. update disable|enable Enables or disables remote site updates. The local virtual server has a number of local virtual services Each local virtual service has a group of local or remote real servers. If disabled.Enable/disable remote site updates ena . 404 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Delete remote site cur .Enable remote site dis . this switch will send regular Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) updates to its remote peers using HTTP port 80. Note: When update is enabled. January 2005 . the switch will not send state updates. The remote real servers are the virtual servers at the remote sites.0. The default is set at none.Set primary switch IP address of remote site secon . If your local firewall does not permit this traffic. name <31 character name>|none Sets the name of the remote site.

Set source IP address mask .0)> This IP address mask is used with the source IP (SIP) address to find a correct virtual server IP address to respond to a DNS request. The preferred network contains a subset of the servers for the domain. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 405 . /cfg/slb/gslb/network <network number> GSLB Network Preference Configuration Menu Network preference selects a server based on the preferred network of the source IP address for a given domain. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation.Enable network dis . The switch will no longer use this remote site for Global Server Load Balancing.255.Add remote real server to network remreal .Remove remote real server from network ena . 255.Set source IP and network netmask addvirt . Up to 128 network preference numbers can be set.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 7-24 GSLB Remote Site Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/site) Command Syntax and Usage dis Disables this remote site. mask <IP subnet mask (such as.Add virtual server to network remvirt .Disable network del .Delete network cur . A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the mask option.Display current network configuration Table 7-25 GSLB Network Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/network) Command Syntax and Usage sip <IP address> Defines the source (client) IP address.Remove virtual server from network addreal . del Removes this remote site from operation and deletes its configuration. 315393-J. cur Displays the current remote site configuration.0. [Network 1 Menu] sip .255.

ena Enables the network. January 2005 . /cfg/slb/gslb/rule GSLB Rule Configuration Menu Rules allow the GSLB selection to use different metric preferences based on time-of-day. del Deletes the network entry. remvirt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Removes a virtual server from the network. The GSLB selection selects the first rule that matches the domain and starts with the first metric in the metric preference list of the rule.Alteon OS 22. [Rule 1 Menu] metric start end ttl rr dname ena dis del cur - Metric Menu Set start time for rule Set end time for rule Set Time To Live in seconds of DNS resource records Set DNS resource records in DNS response Set network preference domain name for rule Enable rule Disable rule Delete rule Display current rule configuration 406 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. Each rule has a metric preference list. remreal <real server number (1-1023)> Removes a real server from the network. dis Disables the network. You can configure one or more rules on each domain.0. No virtual server is added by default.2 Command Reference Table 7-25 GSLB Network Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/network) Command Syntax and Usage addvirt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Adds a virtual server to the network. addreal <real server number (1-1023)> Adds a real server to the network. cur Displays the current Internet network entry configuration.

The default is zero.Alteon OS 22. dis Disables the rule. ena Enables the rule. ttl <time to live in seconds (0-65535)> Specifies the duration (from 0 to 65535 seconds. You can use wildcard “*” while creating the domain name. cur Displays the current rule configuration. To view menu options. Default is none. end <hour (0-23)> <minutes (0-59)> Defines the end time for the rule.0. 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 7-26 GSLB Rule Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/rule) Command Syntax and Usage metric <metric (1-16)> Displays Metric Preference Menu. The default is 2 records. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 407 . start <hour (0-23)> <minutes (0-59)> Defines the start time for the rule. Higher numbers may reduce the amount of DNS traffic. but will generate more DNS traffic. A lower value may increase the ability of the GSLB system to adjust to sudden changes in traffic load. rr <rr (1-10)> Sets the DNS resource records that how many DNS resource records will be returned in the DNS response. dname <34 character (wildcard "*" allowed) domain name> | none Defines the domain name for the rule for network preference. The maximum length for the domain name can be 34 characters. see page 408. but may slow GSLB’s response to sudden traffic changes. with default at 60) that the DNS response from the switch (indicating site of best service) will remain in the cache of DNS servers. The default is zero. del Deletes the rule.

Web Cache Redirection Menu slb .Set timeout for incomplete delayed binding connections cur . see page 409. remnet Allows you to delete a network that was added to the selected metric.Display current Layer 7 configuration Table 7-28 Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage redir Displays the Web Cache Redirection Menu.Alteon OS 22. The default is none.Server Load Balancing Menu dbindtm .0.Add network to gmetric=network remnet . This command applies only if you select network as the metric. addnet Allows you to add a network to the selected metric. cur Displays the current configuration of the metric. /cfg/slb/layer7 Layer 7 SLB Resource Definition Menu [Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu] redir . January 2005 . To view menu options. 408 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/gslb/rule/metric Global SLB Rule Metric Menu [Rule 1 Metric 1 Menu] gmetric .Remove network from gmetric=network cur .Display current metric configuration Table 7-27 Global SLB Rule Metric Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/rule/metric) Command Syntax and Usage gmetric leastconns|roundrobin|response|geographical|network|random|availability|qos|minmisses|hash|local|always|remote|none Defines the metric to select the next real server for GSLB.Set metric to use to select next server addnet .

If this command is enabled.Display current WCR configuration Table 7-29 Web Cache Redirection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/redir) Command Syntax and Usage urlal disable|enable Enables or disables auto-ALLOW for non-GETs to origin servers. cur Displays the current Layer 7 configuration.Alteon OS 22. the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether it should redirect all requests that contain Cookie: in the HTTP header to a cache server or origin server. If this command is enabled.Enable/disable no-cache control header to origin servers hash .2 Command Reference Table 7-28 Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage slb Displays the Server Load Balancing Menu.0. If this command is disabled. If this command is disabled. To view menu options. the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether all non-GET requests should be redirected to a cache server or origin server.Enable/disable server loadbalance based on HTTP header cur . 315393-J. the switch will redirect all non-GET requests to the origin server.Enable/disable auto-ALLOW for Cookie to origin servers nocache .Enable/disable auto-ALLOW for non-GETs to origin servers cookie . dbindtm <10-60 seconds> Sets the timeout for incomplete delayed binding connections. cookie disable|enable Enables or disables auto-ALLOW for cookie to origin servers. This option is disabled by default. the switch will redirect all requests that contain Cookie: in the HTTP header to the origin server.Enable/disable URL hashing based on URI header . This option is enabled by default. see page 411. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 409 . /cfg/slb/layer7/redir Web Cache Redirection Configuration [Web Cache Redirection Menu] urlal .

Alteon OS 22. you can set the length of URI that will be used to hash into the cache server by specifying a number from 1-255. the switch will redirect all requests that contain Cache-Control: nocache in HTTP/1. hash disable|enable <number (1-255)> Enables or disables URL hashing based on the URI. If hashing is disabled. If this command is enabled. 410 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. or Pragma: no-cache in HTTP/1.0 header to the origin server. or Pragma: no-cache in HTTP/1.2 Command Reference Table 7-29 Web Cache Redirection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/redir) Command Syntax and Usage nocache disable|enable Enables or disables no-cache control header to origin servers. This option is disabled by default. January 2005 .1 header. If this command is disabled. the switch will only use the host header field to calculate the hash key. This option is disabled by default.0 header to a cache server or origin server.1 header. This option is enabled by default. header disable|enable host|useragent|others Enables or disables server load balancing based on HTTP header. If hashing is enabled. cur Displays the current URL expression table.0. the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether it should redirect requests that contain Cache-Control: no-cache in HTTP/ 1.

Rename SLB string for load balance addmeth . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 411 . 315393-J. you can define a string for server load balancing or a string for Layer 7 lookup.Alteon OS 22. remstr <SLB string ID> Removes this SLB string from the real server. you will have the option to choose between ascii or binary strings on a specific offset of the IP frame.0. The methods GET and HEAD must be supported by all general-purpose servers.Add SLB string for load balance remstr . addmeth <Method.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/layer7/slb Server Load Balance Resource Configuration Menu [Server Loadbalance Resource Menu] message . These strings will only be used for filtering string pattern matching. 1-32> Allows you to add HTTP request methods of maximum 32 characters to your switch software. The default message is “No available server to handle this request.Enable/disable case sensitive for string matching cont . If you choose l7lkup string. A method is case-sensitive. rename <SLB string ID> <SLB string> Renames the SLB string for load balancing.Remove HTTP method type case .Set HTTP error message addstr . The software supports both HTTP 1.” addstr <l7lkup|pattern> Allows the user to define a string that can be used for server load balancing or filtering by selecting either a Layer 7 look up string or a pattern match. All other methods are optional. If you choose pattern string.0 and HTTP 1. HTTP allows an open-ended set of methods to be used to indicate the purpose of a request.Remove SLB string for load balance rename .2 supports 22 request methods by default. Alteon OS 22.0.Set BW contract for the SLB string cur . You can see a list of supported default methods by using the command cur in this menu.Display current configuration Table 7-30 Server Load Balance Resource Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/slb) Command Syntax and Usage message <64 byte error message> Sets the message that will be displayed when an error occurs.1 to perform HTTP request methods.Add HTTP method type remmeth .

Display current WAP configuration Table 7-31 WAP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/wap) Command Syntax and Usage tpcp disable|enable Enables or disables the TPCP external notification for Add/Delete session requests. The default is set at 0. Using this command you can do either case sensitive or case insensitive string comparison. This option is disabled by default. case disable|enable Enables or disables case sensitivity for string matching.Enable/disable WAP TPCP external notification debug . all load balancing strings and all the request strings arriving on the switch will have to be converted to lower case before doing any string comparison.Alteon OS 22.0.WAP debug level cur . If you disable case sensitive.2 Command Reference Table 7-30 Server Load Balance Resource Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/slb) Command Syntax and Usage remmeth <Method ID> Allows you to remove HTTP methods from your switch software. /cfg/slb/wap WAP Configuration [WAP Options Menu] tpcp . cont <SLB string ID [1-1024]> <BW contract number [1-256]> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for a specified string for the SLB string ID. debug <wap debug level (0-10)> Sets the debug level for tracing the WAP related messages. January 2005 . cur Displays the current WAP configuration 412 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. cur Displays the currently configured SLB strings and their associated string IDs (index numbers) and the supported HTTP request methods.

FILT. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 413 . a peer must be configured and enabled on each switch. and VRRP configuration updates using /oper/slb/ synch. Peers are sent SLB. 315393-J.Enable/disable syncing port configuration prios . This option is enabled by default.Enable/disable syncing proxy IP addresses peerpips . This option is disabled by default.0.Alteon OS 22.Enable/disable syncing VRRP priorities pips . pips disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing proxy IP addresses. ports disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing Layer 4 port configuration.Enable/disable syncing persistent session state update .Display current Layer 4 sync configuration To synchronize the configuration between two switches.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/sync Synchronize Peer Switch Configuration [Config Synchronization Menu] peer .Synch Peer Switch Menu filt . Switches being synchronized must use the same administrator password.Enable/disable syncing BWM configuration state . This option is enabled by default. prios disable|enable Enables or disables syncing VRRP priorities.Enable/disable syncing filter configuration ports .Enable/disable syncing peer proxy IP addresses bwm . filt disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing filter configuration. This option is enabled by default.Set stateful failover update period cur . peerpips disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing the peer proxy IP addresses. This option is disabled by default. see page 414. Table 7-32 Synchronization Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync) Command Syntax and Usage peer <peer switch number (1-2)> Displays the Sync Peer Switch Menu. Peer proxy IP addresses are used in VRRP Active/Active configuration. To view menu options. This option is disabled by default.

dis Disables the peer for this switch.0.Display current peer switch configuration To synchronize the configuration between two switches. By default.Enable peer switch dis . a peer must be configured and enabled on each switch.Set peer switch IP address ena . if any.Disable peer switch del . 1–60> Sets the stateful failover update interval.0.2 Command Reference Table 7-32 Synchronization Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync) Command Syntax and Usage bwm disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing Bandwidth Management configuration between Master and backup switches.Alteon OS 22. The default is 0. This option is enabled by default.0 ena Enables the peer for this switch.Delete peer switch cur . to the backup switch at the specified update interval. update <seconds.0. Switches being synchronized must use the same administrator password. cur Displays the current Layer 4 synchronization configuration. 414 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. The default value is 30 seconds. This option is disabled by default. this option is disabled. state disable|enable Enables or disables stateful failover for synchronizing the persistent session state. Table 7-33 Peer Switch Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync/peer) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address> Sets the peer switch IP address. /cfg/slb/sync/peer <peer switch number> Peer Switch Configuration [Peer Switch 1 Menu] addr . January 2005 . The active switch sends update packets of new persistent binding entries.

To view menu options.Enable/disable graceful real server failure matrix .Enable/disable Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol vstat .Enable/disable Ingress Port For Session Table Binding fastage .Set virtual and real IP address mask mnet .Enable/disable Direct Access Mode grace .Set SLB session attack inspection interval allowlim .Session table slow-age (2 min) period bit shift cur .Set SLB session attack alert allowable limit submac . see page 421.0. /cfg/slb/adv Advanced Layer 4 Configuration [Layer 4 Advanced Menu] synatk .Display current Layer 4 advanced configuration Table 7-34 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv) Command Syntax and Usage synatk Displays SYN Attack Detection Menu.Session table fast-age (1 sec) period bit shift slowage .Alteon OS 22. 315393-J.Enable/disable Source MAC address substitution direct .Set persistent mask intrval .Enable/disable Virtual Service Statistics rtsvlan .Service Mapping Table Real Port Menu imask .Set management network mmask .2 Command Reference Table 7-33 Peer Switch Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync/peer) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the peer for this switch cur Displays the current peer switch configuration.Set management subnet mask pmask .Enable/disable Virtual Matrix Architecture tpcp .Enable/disable using VLAN info for real server lookup portbind .SYN Attack Detection Menu smtport . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 415 .

pmask <IP subnet mask (such as 255.255.2 Command Reference Table 7-34 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv) Command Syntax and Usage smtport Displays Service Mapping Table (SMT) Real Server Port Menu.255.255.255.255. the source MAC is not modified for the packets going to the servers in an SLB environment. direct disable|enable Enable/disables Direct Access Mode to real servers/services. January 2005 . allowlim <allowable limit (1-2097104)> This command allows you to specify the maximum number of sessions the switch can receive at any given period of time. mmask <IP subnet mask (such as 255. the switch will generate a syslog and an SNMP trap to alert the administrator that the switch is under SLB attack.255. Using this command you can add or remove a number of real server service port(s) that will process client traffic by-passing the server.255. the switch will substitute the source MAC address (for the packets going to the server) with the MAC address of the switch. imask <IP subnet mask (such as 255.0)> Configures the real and virtual server IP address mask using dotted decimal notation. But if you enable this command. In other words. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation.255.255.255. Typically. this option is disabled. submac disable|enable Enables or disables Source MAC address substitution.255.0)> Sets persistent mask. To view menu options. 416 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. The default is 255.0)> This IP address mask is used with the mnet to select management traffic which is allowed direct access to real servers. By default. see page 418. At the configured interval of time the switch will check if the number of sessions is within the configured limits. You can set this limit by using the next command in this menu: allowlim.255. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the mmask option.255. mnet <IP address> If defined. If the number of sessions exceeds this limit. intrval <time window for collecting sessions (0-3600)> This command allows you to configure the time interval (from one second to one hour) to specify how frequently you want to check the SLB sessions (attacks) the switch received. The default is 255. management traffic with this source IP address will be allowed direct (non-Layer 4) access to the real servers. This option also allows any virtual server to load balance any real server. this service port’s client request will not be processed by the server processor.255.0. The default is 255.Alteon OS 22.255.

The default interval is two seconds. rtsvlan disable|enable Enables or disables the use of VLAN for Return to Sender information on the real server. Each incremental increase of the value doubles the length of the interval. Allows existing sessions to remain bound to a server after the server has been placed in the service failed state (for more information. this option is enabled. a session can remain in the session table for months. cur Displays the current Layer 4 advanced configuration. see “Service Failure” in the Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 417 .0. slowage <shift the slow-age (2min) period 0-14 bits> Controls how frequently a slowage scan is performed.2 Application Guide). 315393-J. This command is used for security reasons—the UDP port can be closed. portbind disable|enable Enables or disables the inclusion of the ingress port number in the session table look up. which causes the time to double per increment).2 Command Reference Table 7-34 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv) Command Syntax and Usage grace disable|enable Enables or disables graceful real server failure.0. The default is 0. If a large value of slowage is used. this option is disabled. vstat disable|enable Enables or disables reporting of virtual service statistics. The slowage scan is used to remove idle or non-TCP sessions from the session at the specified intervals. If a large value of fastage is used. (Value is set in bits rather than seconds. By default. By default. The fastage scan is used to remove TCP sessions that have been closed with a FIN and sessions that have been identified by the slowage scan as idle for the maximum allowed period.Alteon OS 22. Each incremental increase of the value doubles the length of the interval. tpcp disable|enable Enables or disables the TPCP (Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol). this option is disabled. The default interval is two minutes. The default is 0. a session can remain in the session table for a few minutes. By default. matrix disable|enable Enables or disables the use of Virtual Matrix Architecture on the Alteon Application Switch. fastage <shift the fast-age (1sec) period 0-7 bits> Controls how frequently a fastage scan is performed.

/cfg/slb/adv/smtport Advanced SMT Real Server Port Configuration Menu [SMT Real Port Menu] add .Display real port configuration Table 7-36 Advanced SMT Real Server Port Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/smtport) Command Syntax and Usage add <real server port (2-65534)> This command allows you to add a service port to the real server that is configured to process client traffic by-passing the server processor.Remove real port cur .0.Display current SYN attack detection configuration Table 7-35 SYN Attack Detection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/synatk) Command Syntax and Usage intrval <SYN attack check interval in seconds (2-3600)> Sets the interval of SYN attack inspection.Set SYN attack detection interval thrshld . 418 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Add real port remove . January 2005 . remove <real server port (2-65534)> This command allows you to remove a service port from the real server that is configured to process client traffic by-passing the server processor.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/adv/synatk SYN Attack Detection Configuration Menu [SYN Attack Detection Menu] intrval . thrshld <SYN attack alarm threshold (new half-open sessions/second) (1-100000)> Sets the threshold of SYN attack alarm.Set SYN attack alarm threshold cur .Alteon OS 22. cur Displays the current SYN attack detection configuration. cur Displays real port configuration.

cur Displays current inbound link load configuration.Alteon OS 22. dis Disables inbound link load balancing. To view menu options.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/linklb Inbound Link Load Balancing configuration Menu [Inbound Linklb group ttl drecord ena dis cur Menu] Set real server group Set Time to Live of DNS resource records Domain Record Menu Enable Inbound Linklb Disable Inbound Linklb Display current Inbound Linklb configuration Table 7-37 Inbound Link Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/ linklb) Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-256)> Sets the real server ISP group number. see page 420. ttl <time to live in seconds (0-65535)> Sets the time-to-live for DNS resource records. 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 419 .0. drecord <domain record number (1-64)> Displays domain record menu. ena Enables inbound link load balancing.

Enable Domain Record dis . January 2005 .Disable Domain Record del . cur Displays the current domain records.Virt Real Mapping Menu ena . entry <linklb entry number (1-8)> Displays the link load balancer’s mapping menu for the virtual and real servers. dis Disables the domain records. 420 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. Default is none.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/linklb/drecord Inbound Link Load Balancing Domain Record Menu [Domain Record Menu] domain . See page 390 to view menu options.Set Domain Name entry . ena Enables the domain records.Display current Domain Record configuration Table 7-38 Inbound Link Load Balancing Domain Record Menu Options (/cfg/slb/ linklb/drecord) Command Syntax and Usage domain <34 character domain name>|none Allows you to configure the domain name. del Deletes the domain records.0.Delete Domain Record cur .

Set interval of response and bandwidth metric updates cur .Alteon OS 22.Disable Entry del . cur Displays the current real and virtual server mappings for drecords entries.Set Real Server Number ena . /cfg/slb/advhc Advanced Health Check Configuration Menu [Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu] script .Display current Layer 4 advanced health check configuration 315393-J.Set Virtual Server Number real . real Defines the real server number for mapping. ena Enables the entry for drecords.Delete Entry cur .WAP Health Check Menu aphttp . 1-1024> Defines the virtual server number for mapping. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 421 .Set RADIUS secret minter . dis Disables the entry for drecords. del Deletes the entry for drecords.Display current Entry configuration Table 7-39 Command Syntax & Usage virt <virtual server number.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/linklb/drecord/entry Inbound Link Load Balancing Mapping Menu [Virt Real Mapping 1 Menu] virt .Enable/disable Allow HTTP Health Check on any port ldapver .0.LDAP version secret .SNMP Health Check Menu waphc .Scriptable Health Check Menu snmphc .Enable Entry dis .

the network administrator must configure two parameters in the switch: the /cfg/slb/secret value and the cntnt parameter with a username:password value. cur Displays the current Layer 4 advanced health check configuration. snmphc <SNMP health check number (1-5)> Displays the SNMP Health Check Menu. minter <number of seconds between updates (1-256)> This command sets the interval of response and bandwidth metric updates. January 2005 . The secret value is a field of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that is used by the switch to encrypt a password during the RSA Message Digest Algorithm (MD5) and by the RADIUS server to decrypt the password during verification. Enabling it will allow you to use it on any port. secret <1-32 character secret> To perform application health checking to a RADIUS server. By default. The default is 2. see page 426. ldapver <LDAP version> Sets the LDAP version to 2 or 3. To view menu options.0. this option is disabled. you can use HTTP health checks only for HTTP service. The default is none. To view menu options. 422 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. waphc Displays the WAP Health Check Menu. When disabled. see page 425. To view menu options. like HTTPs. aphttp disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP health checks on any port.2 Command Reference Table 7-40 Advanced Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/advhc) Command Syntax and Usage script <health script number (1-16)> Displays the Scriptable Health Check Menu.Alteon OS 22. see page 423. The default is set at 10.

So both TCP and UDP services can be health-checked. 315393-J.Add binary expect command to end of script nexpect .Add close command to end of script (TCP only) rem . The ASCII and binary-based scripts control how a group of real servers are healthchecked.Add wait command to end of script close .Add offset command to end of script depth . send <text string (TCP). and the port number. With these health checks. [Health Script 1 Menu] open .2 Command Reference / c f g / s l b / a d v h c / s c r i p t <health script number> Scriptable Health Checks Configuration Scriptable health checks provide a robust and extensible way to health check a group of real servers. The Alteon OS 22. The Health Script menu provides commands that can be used to define the health “script.Add open command to end of script send .Add additional expect binary string to end of script offset .Add additional send binary string to end of script expect .Remove last command from script del . Using one or more nsend commands allows you to generate a binary content of more than 256 bytes in length. the users can define their own health checks of varied complexity. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 423 .” The total number of characters cannot exceed 6144 bytes. hex string (UDP)> Sends an ASCII request string through an open TCP or UDP port to the server. bsend <hex string> Sends a binary request string in hexadecimal format for the request packet through an open TCP or UDP port to the server.Add binary send command to end of script nsend .Delete script cur .Alteon OS 22.0.Display current script configuration Table 7-41 Scriptable Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/script) Command Syntax and Usage open <real port or name (such as: http)> <tcp|udp> Opens a TCP connection or specifies a UDP port for the health check. Up to 32 scripts can be configured.Add expect command to end of script bexpect . nsend <additional hex string (UDP)> Allows you to append additional content to the packet generated by the bsend command.0. You need to specify the protocol (TCP or UDP).Add depth command to end of script wait .Add send command to end of script bsend .2 allows a maximum of 256 bytes to be entered.

del Deletes the current script. the health check passes. depth <depth. cur Lists the current script configuration. nexpect <additional hex string (UDP)> Allows you to append additional content to the original content of the response packet specified by the bexpect command. wait <wait window in milliseconds (1-65535)> Allows the user to configure a wait window for the expected response. the server does not pass the expect step and the health check fails. The wait command should follow the offset and depth commands in the script. offset <offset. close Closes TCP connection. The wait window starts when the request is sent from the switch. If you do not see this string in any response packet before the health check interval or the configured wait window expires. 424 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. or beginning from offset if offset was specified. bexpect <hex string> Allows you to configure binary content request string (in hexadecimal format) that you can search in each server response packet for successful health check on an open TCP port.Alteon OS 22. 1-1464> Allows you to specify the depth (the window) in bytes beginning from the start of the UDP data area. rem Removes the last entered line from the script. The wait window is set in the units of milli-seconds. to search for the bexpect content. 1-1464> Allows you to specify the offset from the beginning of the UDP data area to start matching the content specified in the expect command. If the expected response is received within the wait window. hex string (UDP)> Allows you to configure an ASCII request string that you can search in each server response packet for successful health check on an open TCP port. If you need to specify offset. you must do it after executing the bexpect command.0. January 2005 . otherwise the health check fails.2 Command Reference Table 7-41 Scriptable Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/script) Command Syntax and Usage expect <text string (TCP).

3. weight disable|enable When enabled.1. maximum 32 characters> Enter the community string used in the SNMP get request packet.3.1872.4. 315393-J.5. comm <community string.0.Community string used in the SNMP request packet rcvcnt . del Deletes the current SNMP health check. the real server weights are dynamically adjusted based on SNMP health check response.6. for example.Delete SNMP health check cur .1. the health check fails if the response packet contains the value specified in the receive content (rcvnt) field.2. invert disable|enable Enables or disables the inversion of the expected value. such as. 1. cur Displays the current SNMP Health Check configuration. The default community string is public. rcvcnt <expected content an integer value or a string> Enter the content the switch expects to receive from the SNMP agent on the real server.OID to be sent in the SNMP request packet comm .11.1.7.6.Display current SNMP health check configuration Table 7-42 SNMP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/snmphc) Command Syntax and Usage oid <object identifier.0 max 30 sub-identifiers> Specify the Object Identifier (OID) to be sent in the SNMP GET request packet.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/snmphc SNMP Health Check Configuration [SNMP Health Check 1 Menu] oid .Enable/disable readjusting of weights based on response del .1. The format of the OID depends on the MIB file.Enable/disable inversion of expected value weight .Expected value in the SNMP response packet invert .2.Alteon OS 22. When the invert option is enabled. an OID is of the form 1.1.1. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 425 .

For further details. To view menu options. refer to the Application Guide. in a manner similar to scriptable health checks.WTP+WSP Health Check Content Menu wspport .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/waphc WAP Health Check Configuration Wireless Session Protocol (WSP) is used within the Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) suite to manage sessions between wireless devices and WAP content servers or WAP gateways. WTLS+WTP+WSP). ports 9200 and 9202 and connectionoriented (WTP) traffic runs on ports 9201 and 9203. and the switch verifies the expected response.Enable/disable coupling with RADIUS Accounting Service cur . WTLS+WSP. Alteon OS provides a content-based health check mechanism where customized WSP packets are sent to the WAP gateways.WTLS port number to health check couple . WTP+WSP. 426 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. wtpport <wtp port number to health check (0-65534)> Defines the WTP port number to health check.WSP port number to health check wtpport .WTLS+WSP port number to health check wtlsprt . wtpcnt Displays WTP and WSP Health Check Content Menu. [WAP Health Check Menu] wspcnt . deployed on WAP gateways/ servers.Alteon OS 22. Connectionless WSP runs on UDP/IP protocol. Application switches can be used to load balance the gateways in both modes of operation. To view menu options. see page 428. WSP content health checks can be configured in two modes: connectionless and connectionoriented.WTP port number to health check wtlswsp .WSP Health Check Content Menu wtpcnt .0.Display current WAP health check configuration Table 7-43 WAP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/waphc) Command Syntax and Usage wspcnt Displays WSP Health Check Content Menu. January 2005 . wspport <wsp port number to health check (0-65534)> Enter the port number on which WSP health checks will be performed. Alteon OS allows you to configure three WAP gateway health check types for all four WAP services (WSP. The default port number is 9200. see page 429. The default port number is 9201.

If the health check to any one of the four WAP services or Radius Accounting Service fails. The connection-oriented WTLS traffic uses default port 9203. The connectionless encrypted WTLS traffic uses default port 9202. WTLS+WTP+WSP) with Radius Accounting Service. couple disable|enable Enables or disables coupling together of all the four WAP services (WSP. WTLS+WSP.0.Alteon OS 22. 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 7-43 WAP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/waphc) Command Syntax and Usage wtlswsp <wtls+wsp port number to health check (0-65534)> Defines the WTLS (Wireless Transport Layer Security) and WSP port number to health check. cur Displays the current WAP Health Check configuration. wtlsprt <port number (0-65534)> Enter the port number on which WTLS health checks will be performed. then all of the four WAP services and Radius Accounting Service are disabled. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 427 . WTP+WSP.

0. This string will be delivered to the WSP gateway. cur Displays the current WAP Health Check configuration.Alteon OS 22. rcvcnt <receive content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents the content that the switch expects to receive from the WSP gateway. sndcnt <send content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents a connectionless WSP request to a WSP gateway. An offset value of 0 (default) sets the switch to start comparisons from the beginning of the content of the received packet.Offset in received WSP packet sndcnt .Display current WSP health check content configuration Table 7-44 WSP Content Health Check Options (/cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wspcnt) Command Syntax and Usage offset <Offset in the received WSP packet (0-512)> Enter the offset value content of the received WSP packages.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wspcnt WSP Content Health Check [WSP Health Check Content Menu] offset .Content to be received from the WAP gateway cur . January 2005 . 428 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Content to be sent to the WAP gateway rcvcnt .

This command allows you to customize the headers in the connect message. This string will be delivered to the WSP gateway.Alteon OS 22.REPLY PDU to be received from cur . The offset value is the number of bytes from the beginning of the WSP PDU. sndcnt <send content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents a WSP request to a WSP gateway.Offset in received WSP PDU connect . 315393-J. cur Displays current WTP+WSP health check content configuration.GET PDU to be sent to the WAP rcvcnt . connect <connect content as hexstring> Enter the content for the first switch-generated WSP session packet. rcvcnt <receive content as a hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents the content that the switch expects to receive from the WSP gateway. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 429 .CONNECT PDU to be sent to the sndcnt .0. An offset value of 0 (default) sets the switch to start comparisons from the beginning of WSP PDU of the received packet.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wtpcnt WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu This menu is used for configuring the health check for connection-oriented unencrypted WAP traffic. [WTP+WSP Health Check Content Menu] offset . at which the comparison begins to match with the expected receive content.Display current WTP+WSP health WAP gateway gateway the WAP gateway check content configuration Table 7-45 WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/advhc/ waphc/wtpcnt) Command Syntax and Usage offset <offset in the received WSP PDU> Enter the offset value content of the received WSP packets.

Set base type of Proxy IP address add . add <IP address> <port number|vlan number>|<port number-port number|vlan number-vlan number> Allows you to add either a port or a VLAN to a proxy IP address.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/pip Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu You need to enable proxy IP address processing on the port to use this command. You can configure up to 32 proxy IP addresses on per port or per VLAN basis. This command also allows you to remove all ports or VLANs assigned to any proxy IP address. cur Displays the current Proxy IP address configuration.0.Add port or VLAN to Proxy IP address rem .Remove port or VLAN from Proxy IP address cur . January 2005 . [Proxy IP Address Menu] type .Display current Proxy IP address configuration Table 7-46 Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/pip) Command Syntax and Usage type <port|vlan> Defines the base type of the proxy IP address. 430 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. rem <<PIP ID> <port#|vlan#>|<port#-port#|vlan#-vlan#>> Allows you to remove a port or a VLAN from a proxy IP address. You can configure multiple proxy IP addresses based on either port or VLAN. whether it is port-based or VLAN-based.

Rem peer Proxy IP address cur .Alteon OS 22.Add peer Proxy IP address rem . the switch is able to forward traffic from the other switch. 315393-J. rem <IP address> Allows you to remove a proxy IP address from the server load balancing peer. using Layer 2. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 431 . cur Displays the current proxy address configuration of the peer.Display current peer Proxy IP address configuration Table 7-47 Peer Proxy IP Address Menu Options (/cfg/slb/peerpip) Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> Allows you to add a proxy IP address to the server load balancing peer. This prevents the dropping of a packet or being sent to the backup switch in the absence of the proxy IP address of the peer switch.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/peerpip SLB Peer Proxy IP Address Menu When this command is enabled. This happens because the peer switches are aware of each other’s proxy IP addresses. without performing server processing on the packets of the other switch. [Peer Proxy IP Address Menu] add .0.

2 Command Reference 432 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.0. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.

315393-J.Change current user password clrlog .Send NTP request The commands of the Operations Menu enable you to alter switch operational characteristics without affecting switch configuration. but do not alter permanent switch configurations. you can use the Operations Menu to immediately disable a port (without the need to apply or save the change).CHAPTER 8 The Operations Menu The Operations Menu is generally used for commands that affect switch performance immediately.Operational Bandwidth Management Menu ip .Enter software feature to be removed passwd .Operational IP Menu swkey . January 2005 433 .Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu bwm . /oper Operations Menu [Operations Menu] port . For example.Clear syslog messages ntpreq . Port Mirroring menu options are accessible only to the Alteon AD4 and Alteon 184 WebSwitches.Operational Port Menu slb .Operational Server Load Balancing Menu vrrp . the port returns to its normally configured operation.Enter key to enable software feature rmkey . with the understanding that when the switch is reset.

434 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-J. January 2005 . see page 441. To view menu options. ntpreq Allows the user to send requests to the NTP server. For details. rmkey <software feature to be removed (GSL|BWM|Security)> Defines software feature to be removed. To view menu options.Alteon OS 22. see page 436. bwm Operational Bandwidth Management Menu. see page 442. slb Displays the Operational Layer 4 Menu. which has one sub-menu/option. see page 439. For details. clrlog Clears all syslog messages. To view menu options. passwd <15 char max> Allows the user to change the password. see page 439. To view menu options. You need to enter the current password in use for validation. see page 439. vrrp Displays the Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu. swkey <16-hexadecimal digit key to enable software feature> Sets key to enable software feature. see page 435. To view menu options. ip Displays the IP Operations Menu.2 Command Reference Table 8-1 Operations Menu Options (/oper) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the Operational Port Menu. the Operational Border Gateway Protocol Menu.0.

cur Displays the current settings for the port. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset.Disable port cur . Table 8-2 Operations-Level Port Menu Options (/oper/port) Command Syntax and Usage rmon disable|enable Temporarily enables/disables Remote Monitoring on the port. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. dis Temporarily disables the port.2 Command Reference /oper/port <port number> Operations-Level Port Options [Operations Port 1 Menu] rmon . ena Temporarily enables the port. and for changing Remote Monitoring (RMON) status on a port.Enable/Disable RMON for port ena .Enable port dis .0.Current port state Operations-level port options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling a port. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 435 .Alteon OS 22.

see page 437.Synchronize SLB. The real server will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. see page 438. January 2005 . 436 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-J. VRRP and other configurations on peers ena . sync Synchronizes the SLB. To take effect.2 Command Reference /oper/slb Operations-Level SLB Options [Server Load Balancing Operations Menu] group . the operations-level Server Load Balancing options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling real servers and synchronizing the configuration between the active/active switches. filter. To view menu options. VRRP. gslb Displays Global SLB Operations Menu. and VR priorities on a peer switch (a switch that owns the IP address). port. To view menu options.Real Server Group Menu gslb .Disable real server clear .0.Current layer 4 operational state When the optional Layer 4 software is enabled. Table 8-3 Server Load Balancing Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb) Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays the Real Server Group Menu. peers must be configured on the Alteon Application Switch and the administrator password on the switch must be identical.Alteon OS 22.Clear session table cur .Enable real server dis . ena <real server number (1-1023)> Temporarily enables a real server. Bandwidth Management configuration.Global SLB Operations Menu sync .

0. 315393-J. /oper/slb/group Real Server Group Operations [Real server group 1 Menu] ena . January 2005 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 437 . dis <real server number (1-1023)> Disables real server in this group. cur Displays current operational state of the server group. cur Displays the current SLB operational state. For more information. see “Disabling and Enabling Real Servers” in the Alteon OS 22. NOTE – This command provides for orderly server shutdown to allow maintenance on a server. NOTE – This command disrupts current SLB and Application Redirection sessions. 1-1023> [P .Enable real server in this group dis . clear Clears all session tables and allows port filter changes to take effect immediately.2 Application Guide.allow persistent http 1.Disable real server in this group cur .Current server group operational state Table 8-4 Real Server Group Operations Options (oper/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage ena <real server number (1-1023)> Enables real server in this group.0 sessions] p|n The disable command is used to temporarily disable real servers as follows: Using the p (persistent) option—immediately suspends assignment of connections to the specified real server (except for persistent http 1.0 sessions) by removing the real server from operation within its real server group and virtual server Using the n (none) option—immediately suspends assignment of connections to the specified real server by removing the real server from operation within its real server group and virtual server The real server will be returned to its configured state after a switch reset.0.2 Command Reference Table 8-3 Server Load Balancing Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb) Command Syntax and Usage dis <real server number.Alteon OS 22.

2 Command Reference /oper/slb/gslb Global SLB Operations Menu [Global SLB Operations Menu] query . January 2005 .Alteon OS 22. 438 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-J.Query Global SLB selection Table 8-5 Global SLB Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage query Allows you to query the Global site selection.0.

This is generally used for passing master control back to a preferred switch once the preferred switch has been returned to service after a failure.Alteon OS 22. [VRRP Operations Menu] back . When this command is executed. the current master gives up control and initiates a new election by temporarily advertising its own priority level as 0 (lowest). January 2005 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 439 .2 Command Reference /oper/vrrp Operations-Level VRRP Options.0. 315393-J.Send BW History to SMTP server Table 8-7 Bandwidth Operations Menu Options (/oper/bwm/sndhist) Command Syntax and Usage sndhist Sends the bandwidth history to a system administrator specified under /cfg/bwm/user (see page 279). the virtual router forced into backup mode by this command will resume master control in the following cases: This switch owns the virtual router (the IP addresses of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same) This switch’s virtual router has a higher priority and preemption is enabled. /oper/bwm Operations-Level Bandwidth Management Options [Bandwidth Management Operations Menu] sndhist . After the new election.Set virtual router to backup Table 8-6 Virtual Router Redundancy Operations Menu Options (/oper/vrrp) Command Syntax and Usage back <virtual router number (1-256)> Forces the specified master virtual router on this switch into backup mode. There are no other virtual routers available to take master control.

cur Displays the current BGP operational state. stop <peer number (1-16)> Stops the peer session. 440 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-J.Operational Border Gateway Protocol Menu Table 8-8 IP Operations Menu Options (/oper/ip) Command Syntax and Usage bgp Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Operations Menu.0.2 Command Reference /oper/ip Operations-Level IP Options [IP Operations Menu] bgp . To view the menu options see page 440. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22. /oper/ip/bgp Operations-Level BGP Options [Border Gateway start stop cur Protocol Operations Menu] Start peer session Stop peer session Current BGP operational state Table 8-9 IP Operations Menu Options (/oper/ip) Command Syntax and Usage start <peer number (1-16)> Starts the peer session.

enter: Main# oper 3. 2. January 2005 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 441 .0. Nortel Networks will then provide a License Password. Connect to the switch’s command line interface and log in as the administrator (see Chapter 1. NOTE – Each License Password will work only on the specific switch which has the MAC address you provided when registering your Licence Certificate. you must obtain a software license from your Nortel Networks representative or authorized reseller. “The Command Line Interface”). you must register each License Certificate with Nortel Networks and provide the MAC address of the Alteon OS switch that will run the optional software. One software license is needed for each switch where the optional software is to be used. At the Operations# prompt. Currently the following software packages are available for purchase and installation: Security Pack Bandwidth Management Global Server Load Balancing To obtain a software key.Alteon OS 22. perform the following actions: 1.2 Command Reference /oper/swkey Activating Optional Software The swkey option is used for activating any optional software you have purchased for your switch. Once you have your License Password. At the Main# prompt. enter: Operations# swkey 315393-J. You will receive a Licence Certificate for each software license purchased. Before you can activate optional software.

0. January 2005 . Deactivated software is still present in switch memory and can be reactivated at any later time. 123456789ABCDEF)> If the correct code is entered.Alteon OS 22. For example: Enter Software Key: <16 hexadecimal-digit key to enable software feature (such as. enter the code for software to be removed. enter your 16-digit software key code. Software feature enabled. For example: Enter Software Feature to be removed:[GSLB]||BWM|Security: GSLB 442 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-J. you will see the following message: Valid software key entered. When prompted. enter the following at the Operations Menu: Operations# rmkey When prompted. To deactivate optional software.2 Command Reference 4. /oper/rmkey Removing Optional Software The rmkey option is used for deactivating any optional software.

Scheduled Switch Reset Menu . January 2005 443 .Display current boot options Each of these options is discussed in greater detail in the following sections.Upload selected software image via TFTP .Select software image to use on next boot .Reset switch [WARNING: Restarts Spanning Tree] .Select config block to use on next boot .CHAPTER 9 The Boot Options Menu To use the Boot Options Menu.Download new software image via TFTP . The Boot Options Menu provides options for: Selecting a switch software image to be used when the switch is next reset Selecting a configuration block to be used when the switch is next reset Downloading or uploading a new software image to the switch via TFTP /boot Boot Menu [Boot Options sched image conf gtimg ptimg reset cur Menu] . 315393-J. you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator.

Alteon OS 22. and comes pre-installed on the device. This lets you test the new software and reload the original active image (stored in image1). Upgrading the software image on your switch requires the following: Loading the new image onto a TFTP server on your network Downloading the new image from the TFTP server to your switch Selecting the new software image to be loaded into switch memory the next time the switch is reset Downloading New Software to Your Switch The switch can store up to two different software images. called image1 and image2.Cancel pending switch reset cur .2 Command Reference Scheduled Reboot of the Switch This feature allows the switch administrator to schedule a reboot to occur at a particular time in future. cancel a previously scheduled reboot.0. called boot. image2.Set switch reset time cancel . You can set the reboot time. you must specify where it should be placed: either into image1. When you download new software. you would probably load the new image software into image2. you can upgrade the software running on your switch. This feature is particularly helpful if the user needs to perform switch upgrades during off-peak hours. as well as boot software. For example. January 2005 . and check the time of the currently set reboot schedule with the help of the following sub-menu: /boot/sched Scheduled Reboot Menu [Boot Schedule Menu] set . or boot. A version of the image ships with the switch.Display current switch reset schedule Updating the Switch Software Image The switch software image is the executable code running on the Alteon Application Switch. if your active image is currently loaded into image1. if needed. 444 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 315393-J. As new versions of the image are released.

You should next select a software image to run. However. Enter the name of the new software file on the server. January 2005 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 445 . This sets the default option for the gtimg and ptimg commands. Enter the name of the switch software to be replaced: Enter name of switch software image to be replaced ["image1"/"image2"/"boot"]: <image> 3.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference To download a new software to your switch. note that you can override this setting with the option provided to these operational commands. NOTE – The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. However. At the Boot Options# prompt. the file location is normally relative to the TFTP directory (usually /tftpboot). use the following procedure to download the new software to your switch. Enter the hostname or IP address of the TFTP server. enter: Boot Options# gtimg 2. 1. 5. See “Domain Name System Configuration Menu” on page 331). The system prompts you to confirm your request. 315393-J. you will need the following: The image or boot software loaded on a TFTP server on your network The hostname or IP address of the TFTP server The name of the new software image or boot file Setup the TFTP option (/cfg/sys/mgmt/tftp) for the TFTP connection. When the above requirements are met. as described below. Enter hostname or IP address of TFTP server: <server name or IP address> 4. Enter name of file on TFTP server: <filename> The exact form of the name will vary by TFTP server.0.

enter: Boot Options# image 2.2 Command Reference Selecting a Software Image to Run You can select which software image (image1 or image2) you want to run in switch memory for the next reboot. Specify new image to use on next reset ["image1"/"image2"]: Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch You can upload a software image from the switch to a TFTP server. Enter the name of the file into which the image will be uploaded on the TFTP server: Enter name of file on TFTP server: <filename> 446 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 315393-J. 1. The system prompts you for information. At the Boot Options# prompt. Enter the name or the IP address of the TFTP server: Enter hostname or IP address of TFTP server: <server name or IP address> 4.0. Enter the desired image: Enter name of switch software image to be uploaded ["image1"|"image2"|"boot"]: <image> <hostname or server-IP-addr> <server-file- name> 3. and prompts you to enter a new choice: Currently set to use switch software "image1" on next reset.Alteon OS 22. enter: Boot Options# ptimg 2. 1. Enter the name of the image you want the switch to use upon the next boot. January 2005 . At the Boot Options# prompt. The system informs you of which image is currently set to be loaded at the next reset.

Specify new block to use ["active"/"backup"/"factory"]: 315393-J. When you perform the save command. Enter the name of the configuration block you want the switch to use: The system informs you of which configuration block is currently set to be loaded at the next reset. At the Boot Options# prompt.1. January 2005 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 447 . The previous configuration is copied into the backup configuration block. and prompts you to enter a new choice: Currently set to use active configuration block on next reset. enter: Boot Options# conf 2. This can be useful when a custom-configured Alteon Application Switch is moved to a network environment where it will be re configured for a different purpose. Confirm upload operation [y/n]: y Selecting a Configuration Block When you make configuration changes to the Alteon Application Switch. enter Y. There is also a factory configuration block.7 Upload will transfer image2 (1889411 bytes) to file "test" on TFTP server 192. it may be desirable to reset the switch configuration to the default. Under certain circumstances. you must save the changes so that they are retained beyond the next time the switch is reset. Use the following procedure to set which configuration block you want the switch to load the next time it is reset: 1.2 Command Reference 5.1. To have the file uploaded. image2 currently contains Software Version 20. your new configuration changes are placed in the active configuration block.1.0.0. This holds the default configuration set by the factory when your Alteon Application Switch was manufactured. The system then requests confirmation of what you have entered.2.Alteon OS 22.

NOTE – Resetting the switch causes the Spanning Tree Protocol to restart. enter: >> Boot Options# reset You are prompted to confirm your request. January 2005 . 448 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 315393-J.0. depending on the topology of your network. To reset the switch. at the Boot Options# prompt. This process can be lengthy.2 Command Reference Resetting the Switch You can reset the switch to make your software image file and configuration block changes occur.Alteon OS 22.

Tech support dump Dump information contains internal switch state data that is written to flash memory on the Alteon Application Switch after any one of the following occurs: The switch administrator forces a switch panic.List FLASH dump panic . The switch reset key combination is <Shift><Ctrl><->. found in the Maintenance Menu. The panic option. 315393-J.CHAPTER 10 The Maintenance Menu The Maintenance Menu is used to manage dump information and forward database information.System Maintenance Menu fdb . and then causes the switch to reboot. [Maintenance Menu] sys .Dump state information to FLASH and reboot tsdmp .Uuencode FLASH dump ptdmp .tftp put FLASH dump to tftp server cldmp .IP Route Manipulation Menu debug .Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu arp .Debugging Menu uudmp . The switch administrator enters the switch reset key combination on a device that is attached to the console port.ARP Cache Manipulation Menu route . causes the switch to dump state information to flash memory. January 2005 449 . It also includes a debugging menu to help with troubleshooting. you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator.Clear FLASH dump lsdmp . /maint Maintenance Menu NOTE – To use the Maintenance Menu.

debug Displays the Debugging Menu.2 Command Reference The watchdog timer forces a switch reset. For details. see page 451. The purpose of the watchdog timer is to reboot the switch if the switch software freezes. For details. 450 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 315393-J. To view menu options. Table 10-1 Maintenance Menu Options (/maint) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System Maintenance Menu. To view menu options. see page 451. see page 456.0. see page 456. ptdmp hostname filename [-mgmt| -data] Saves the system dump information via TFTP. and send it to Nortel Networks Tech Support for debugging purposes. uudmp Displays dump information in uuencoded format. see page 455.Alteon OS 22. see page 457. see page 454. For details. see page 452. cldmp Clears dump information from flash memory. tsdmp Dumps all Alteon Application Switch information. and configuration. To view menu options. route Displays the IP Route Manipulation Menu. panic Dumps MP information to FLASH and reboots. fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu. see page 457. arp Displays the ARP Cache Manipulation Menu.You can log the tsdump output into a file. January 2005 . To view menu options. lsdmp Displays list flash dump. The switch detects a hardware or software problem that requires a reboot. To view menu options. For details. statistics.

Alteon OS 22. /maint/fdb Forwarding Database Options [FDB Manipulation Menu] find .Show FDB entries referenced by a single port dump . January 2005 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 451 .Clear entire FDB The Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu can be used to view information and to delete a MAC address from the forwarding database or clear the entire forwarding database. This is helpful in identifying problems associated with MAC address learning and packet forwarding decisions.Show a single FDB entry by MAC address port . 315393-J.Show all FDB entries del .Show FDB entries for a single port trunk . The options are used to perform system debugging.Delete an FDB entry clear .0. [System Maintenance Menu] flags .Show FDB entries on a single trunk vlan .Show FDB entries for a single VLAN refpt .Set NVRAM flag word Table 10-2 System Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/sys) Command Syntax and Usage flags <new NVRAM flags word as 0xXXXXXXXX> This command sets the flags that are used for debugging purposes by Tech support group.2 Command Reference /maint/sys System Maintenance Options This menu is reserved for use by Nortel Networks Customer Support group.

/maint/arp ARP Cache Options [Address Resolution Protocol Menu] find .Show ARP entries on a single port vlan .0. trunk <trunk number (1-12)> Displays all FDB entries for the specified trunk group.Clear ARP cache addr . refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays all FDB entries reference by a single port.2 Command Reference Table 10-3 FDB Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage find <MAC address> [<VLAN>] Displays a single database entry by its MAC address.Alteon OS 22.Show ARP address list 452 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 315393-J.Show a single ARP entry by IP address port . Use “0” for unknown port number. del <MAC address> [<VLAN number>] Removes a single FDB entry. For details. port <port number. see page 79. You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device.Show ARP entries referenced by a single SP dump . 0 for unknown>> Displays all FDB entries for a particular port. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN.Show all ARP entries clear . clear Clears the entire Forwarding Database from switch memory. January 2005 . dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database.Show ARP entries on a single VLAN refpt . Enter the MAC address using the xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format (such as 08:00:20:12:34:56) or xxxxxxxxxxxx format (such as 080020123456).

80.2 Command Reference Table 10-4 Address Resolution Protocol Menu Options (/maint/arp) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as. dump Shows all ARP entries.81 00:e0:81:24:ef:3c 1 1 empty 47. refpt. clear Clears the entire ARP list from switch memory.1 00:e0:16:7c:28:82 1 1 empty 47. 315393-J. 192. dump).----. January 2005 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 453 .17.101)> Shows a single ARP entry by IP address. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Shows ARP entries on a single VLAN.Alteon OS 22. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Shows all ARP entries referenced by a single port. addr Shows the list of IP addresses which the switch will respond to for ARP requests.80. See page 453 for a sample output.---.169 00:04:75:db:1c:1a 1 1 empty NOTE – To display all ARP entries currently held in the switch.----------------. vlan.0. you can also refer to “ARP Information” on page 93.16.16. /maint/arp/port <port number> ARP Entries on a Single Port IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port Referenced SPs --------------.80.--------------47. or a portion according to one of the options listed on the menu above (find.4.17. port.----. port <port number> Displays ARP entries on a single port.

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/maint/route IP Route Manipulation
[IP Routing Menu] find - Show a single route by destination IP address gw - Show routes to a single gateway type - Show routes of a single type tag - Show routes of a single tag if - Show routes on a single interface dump - Show all routes clear - Clear route table

Table 10-5 IP Route Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/route)
Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Shows a single route by destination IP address. gw <default gateway address (such as, 192.4.17.44)> Shows routes to a default gateway. type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast Shows routes of a single type. For a description of IP routing types, see Table 4-19 on page 92 tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|bgp|broadcast|martian|vip Shows routes of a single tag. For a description of IP routing tags, see Table 4-20 on page 93 if <interface number (1-256)> Shows routes on a single interface. dump Shows all routes. clear Clears the route table from switch memory.

NOTE – To display all routes, you can also refer to “IP Routing Information” on page 92.

454

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/maint/debug Debugging Options
[Miscellaneous Debug Menu] tbuf - Show MP trace buffer sptb - Show SP trace buffer spall - Show All SPs trace buffers clrcfg - Clear all flash configs vmasp - Show designated SP for IP address

The Miscellaneous Debug Menu displays trace buffer information about events that can be helpful in understanding switch operation. You can view the following information using the debug menu: Events traced by the Management Processor (MP) Events traced by the Switch Processor (SP) Events traced to a buffer area when a reset occurs If the switch resets for any reason, the MP trace buffer and SP trace buffers are saved into the snap trace buffer area. The output from these commands can be interpreted by the Nortel Networks Customer Support division. Table 10-6 Miscellaneous Debug Menu Options (/maint/debug)
Command Syntax and Usage tbuf Displays the Management Processor trace buffer. Header information similar to the following is shown: MP trace buffer at 13:28:15 Fri May 25, 2001; mask: 0x2ffdf748 The buffer information is displayed after the header. sptb <port number (1-4)> Displays the Switch Processor trace buffer. Header information similar to the following is shown: SP 1 trace buffer at 10:56:35 Tue Jul 30, 2002; mask: 0x00800008 The buffer information is displayed after the header. spall Displays the Switch Processor trace buffer. Header information similar to the following is shown: SP 1 trace buffer at 10:56:35 Tue Jul 30, 2002; mask: 0x00800008. The buffer information is displayed after the header. Displays all SP trace buffers. clrcfg Deletes all flash configuration blocks. vmasp <IP address> Displays the assigned SP (Switch Processor) for this IP address.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu

455

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/maint/uudmp Uuencode Flash Dump
Using this command, dump information is presented in uuencoded format. This format makes it easy to capture the dump information as a file or a string of characters. You can then contact Nortel Networks Customer Support for help analyzing the information. If you want to capture dump information to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the uudmp command. This will ensure that you do not lose any information. Once entered, the uudmp command will cause approximately 23,300 lines of data to be displayed on your screen and copied into the file. Using the uudmp command, dump information can be read multiple times. The command does not cause the information to be updated or cleared from flash memory. NOTE – Dump information is not cleared automatically. In order for any subsequent dump information to be written to flash memory, you must manually clear the dump region. For more information on clearing the dump region, see page 457. To access dump information, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# uudmp

The dump information is displayed on your screen and, if you have configured your communication software to do so, captured to a file. If the dump region is empty, the following appears:
No FLASH dump available.

/maint/ptdmp <server> <filename> TFTP System Dump Put
Use this command to put (save) the system dump to a TFTP server. NOTE – If the TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system, the specified ptdmp file must exist prior to executing the ptdmp command, and must be writable (set with proper permission, and not locked by any application). The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current dump data. To save dump information via TFTP, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# ptdmp <server> <filename> [-mgmt| -data]

Where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname, and filename is the target dump file.
456 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/maint/cldmp Clearing Dump Information
To clear dump information from flash memory, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# cldmp

The switch clears the dump region of flash memory and displays the following message:
FLASH dump region cleared.

If the flash dump region is already clear, the switch displays the following message:
FLASH dump region is already clear.

/maint/panic Panic Command
The panic command causes the switch to immediately dump state information to flash memory and automatically reboot. To select panic, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
>> Maintenance# panic A FLASH dump already exists. Confirm replacing existing dump and reboot [y/n]:

Enter y to confirm the command:
Confirm dump and reboot [y/n]: y

The following messages are displayed:
Loading Image:.......... Alteon Application Switch 2424 Rebooted because of Software PANIC. Booting complete 19:15:23 Thu Jan 9, 2003: Version 20.2.7 from FLASH image1, active config block. Jan 9 19:15:32 NOTICE system: link up on port 25 Enter password:

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu

457

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Unscheduled System Dumps
If there is an unscheduled system dump to flash memory, the following message is displayed when you log on to the switch:
Note: A system dump exists in FLASH. The dump was saved at 19:15:23 Thu Jan 9, 2003. Use /maint/uudmp to extract the dump for analysis and /maint/cldmp to clear the FLASH region. The region must be cleared before another dump can be saved.

458

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu

315393-J, January 2005

APPENDIX A

Alteon OS Syslog Messages
The following syntax is used when outputting syslog messages: <Time stamp><Log Label>Web OS<Thread ID>:<Message> where <Timestamp> The time of the message event is displayed in month day hour:minute:second format. For example: Aug 19 14:20:30 <Log Label> The following types of log messages are recorded: LOG_EMERG, LOG_ALERT, LOG_CRIT, LOG_ERR, LOG_WARNING, LOG_NOTICE, LOG_INFO, and LOG_DEBUG <Thread ID> This is the software thread that reports the log message. The following thread IDs are recorded: stp, ip, slb, console, telnet, vrrp, system, web server, ssh, and bgp <Message>: The log message Following is a list of potential syslog messages. To keep this list as short as possible, only <Thread ID> and <Message> are shown. The messages are sorted by <Log Label>. Where the <Thread ID> is listed as mgmt, one of the following may be shown: console, telnet, web server, or ssh.

LOG_WARNING
FILTER “filter <filter number> fired on port <port number>, <source IP address> -> <destination IP address>, [<ICMP type>], [<IP protocol>], [<layer-4 ports>], [<TCP f1ags>]”
ntp: ntp cannot contact primary NTP server <ip_address> cannot contact secondary NTP server <ip_address>

315393-J, January 2005

459

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

LOG_ALERT
stp: IP vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: slb: slb: gslb: gslb: gslb: gslb: slb: slb: slb: slb: bgp: bgp: vrrp: vrrp: dps: dps: syn_atk tcplim own BPDU received from port <port_id> cannot contact default gateway <ip_address> received errored advertisement from <ip_address> received incorrect password from <ip_address> received incorrect addresses from <ip_address> received incorrect advertisement interval <seconds> from <ip_address> cannot contact real server <ip_address> real server <ip_address> has reached maximum connections received update from <ip_address> for unknown remote server <ip_address> received update from <ip_address> for unknown virtual service received update for unknown remote server <ip_address> from <ip_address> received update for unknown service <ip_address:service> cannot contact real service <ip_address:real_port> real server failure threshold (<threshold>) has been reach for group <group_id> real server <ip_address> disabled through configuration Virtual Service Pool full. gSvcPool=MAX_SERVICES notification (<reason>) received from <BGP peer ip_address> session with <BGP peer ip_address> failed (<reason>) Synchronization from non-configured peer <ip_address> Synchronization from non-configured peer <ip_address> was blocked hold down triggered: <ip_address> for <min> minutes manual hold down: <ip_address> SYN attack detected: <count> new half-open sessions per second hold down triggered: <ip_address> for <min> minutes

460

Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

LOG_CRIT
SYSTEM: temperature at sensor <sensor_id> exceeded threshold SYSTEM: internal power supply failed SYSTEM: redundant power supply failed SYSTEM: fan failure detected SSH can't allocate memory in load_MP_INT

LOG_ERR
mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ntp: isd: stp: stp: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: PANIC at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> VERIFY at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> ASSERT at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> unable to listen to NTP port unable to listen to BOOTP_SERVER_PORT port Error: Error writing STG config to FLASH Error: Error writing config to FLASH Apply not done Save not done “<““apply””|““save””> is issued by another user. Try later” Error: Error writing %s config to FLASH New Path Cost for Port <port_id> is invalid PVID <vlan_id> for port <port_id> is not created RADIUS secret must be 1-32 characters long Please configure primary RADIUS server address STP changes can't be applied since STP is OFF Switch reset is required to turn STP on/off Trunk group <trunk_id> contains ports with different PVIDs Trunk group <trunk_id> has more than <max_trunk_ports> ports

315393-J, January 2005

Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages

461

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

LOG_ERR (Continued)
cli: cli: cli: Trunk group <trunk_id> contains no ports but is enabled Not all ports in trunk group <trunk_id> are in VLAN <vlan_id> Trunk groups <trunk_id> and <trunk_id> can not share the same port

port_mirr: Port Mirroring changes are not applied cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: Broadcast address for IP interface <interface_id> is invalid IP Interfaces <interface_id> and <interface_id> are on the same subnet Multiple static routes have same destination Virtual router <vr_id> must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router group must be enabled when hotstandby is enabled At least one virtual router must be enabled when group is enabled Virtual router group must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router group must have preemption enabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router <vr_id> must have an IP address Virtual router <vr_id> cannot have same VRID and VLAN as <vlan_id> Virtual router <vr_id> cannot have same IP address as <ip_address> Virtual router <vr_id> corresponding virtual server <server_id> is not enabled Hot-standby must be enabled when a virtual router has a PIP address Virtual router <vr_id> IP interface should be <interface_id> Enabled real server <server_id> has no IP address Real server <server_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id> Real server <server_id> has same IP address as switch Real server <server_id> (Backup for <server_id>) is not enabled Real server <server_id> has same IP address as virtual server <server_id> Real server <server_id> has same IP address as real server <server_id> Real server group <group_id> cannot backup itself Real server <server_id> cannot be added to same group Enabled virtual server <server_id> has no IP address

462

Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages

315393-J, January 2005

2 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id> Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address as switch Virtual servers <server_id> and <server_id> with same IP address must support same layr3 configuration Real server <server_id> cannot be backup server for both real server <server_id> and group <group_id> Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address and vport as virtual server <server_id> RS <server_id> can't exist for VS <server_id> vport <virtual_port> Switch port <port_id> has same proxy IP address as port <port_id> Switch port <port_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id> A hot-standby port cannot also be an inter-switch port There must be at least one inter-switch port if any hot-standby port exist “With VMA. January 2005 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 463 .0. ports 1-8 must all have a PIP if any one does” Client bindings are not supported with proxy IP addresses DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for port <port_id> in order for virtual server to support FTP parsing Real server <server_id> and group %u cannot both have backups configured Virtual server <server_id> : port mapping but layer3 bindings Extracting length has to set to 8 or 16 for cookie rewrite mode DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for port <port_id> in order for virtural server <server_id> to support URL parsing Port filtering must be disabled on port <port_id> in order to support cookie based persistence for virtual server <server_id> Virtual server <server_id>: port mapping but Direct Access Mode Virtual server %lu: support nonat IP but not layer 3 bindings Virtual servers: all that support IP must use same group Virtual servers <server_id> and <server_id> that include the same real server <server_id> cannot map the same real port or balance UDP Virtual server <server_id>: UDP service <virtual_port> with out-of-range port number 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.

<host_name>. January 2005 . Web server must be moved from TCP port 80” Remote site <site_id> does not have a primary IP address Primary and secondary remote site <site_id> switches must differ Remote sites <site_id> and <site_id> must use different addresses Remote site <site_id> and real server <server_id> must use different addresses Remote site <site_id> and virtual server <server_id> must use different addresses Only <MAX_SLB_SITES> remote servers are allowed per group Only <MAX_SLB_SERVICES> remote services are supported Enabled external lookup IP address has no IP address domain name must be configured 464 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.<domain_name>” Direct access mode is not supported with default gateway load balancing SLB Radius secret must be 16 characters long Dynamic NAT filter <filter_id> must be cached NAT filter <filter_id> must have same smask and dmask NAT filter <filter_id> cannot have port ranges NAT filter <filter_id> must be cached NAT filter <filter_id> dest range includes VIP <server_id> NAT filter <filter_id> dest range includes RIP <server_id> Redirection filter <filter_id> must be cached Filter with L4 ports configured <port_id> must have IP protocol configured “For Global SLB.2 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: Switch cannot support more than <MAX_VIRT_SERVICES> virtual services Switch cannot support more than <MAX_SMT> real services Trunk group (<trunk_id>) ports must have same L4 config Trunk group (<trunk_id>) ports must all have a PIP DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for ports <port_id> in order to do URL based redirection “Two services have same hostname.0.

<domain_name>” Loadbalance string must be added to real server <server_id> in order to enable exclusionary string matching intrval input value must be in the range [0-24] unapplied changes reverted unsaved changes reverted Attempting to redirect a previously redirected output Attempting to redirect a previously redirected output cfg_sync_tx_putsn: ABORTED Synchronization TX Error Synchronization TX connection RESET Synchronization TX connection TIMEOUT Synchronization TX connection UNREACEABLE Synchronization TX connection UNKNOWN CLOSE Synchronization RX connection RESET Synchronization RX connection TIMEOUT Synchronization RX connection UNREACEABLE Synchronization RX connection UNKNOWN CLOSE Synchronization connection RCLOSE by peer Synchronization connection RCLOSE before RX 315393-J.2 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: Network <static_network_id> has no VIP address duplicate default entry BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> must have an IP address BGP peers <bgp_peer_id> and <bgp_peer_id> have same address BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> have same address as IP interface <ip_interface_id> BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> IP interface <ip_interface_id> is not enabled Filter with ICMP types configured (<icmp_type>) must have IP protocol configure to ICMP “Two services have same hostname. January 2005 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 465 .0.Alteon OS 22. <host_name>.

peer:%s config:%s Sync Password Failed-Bad Password Sync receive already in progress … cannot start Sync receive Sync transmit in progress … cannot start Sync receive 466 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-J.2 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: Synchronization connection early RCLOSE in RX Synchronization connection Wait-For-Close Timeout Synchronization connection Transmit Timeout Synchronization Receive Timeout Synchronization Receive UNKNOWN Timeout Sync transmit in progress … cannot start Sync Sync receive in progress … cannot start Sync Sync already in progress … cannot start Sync Config Sync route find error Config Sync tcp_open error Config Synchronization Timeout .0. Try later” new configuration did not validate (rc = ) new configuration did not apply (rc = ) new configuration did not save (rc = ) Sync config apply error Restoring Current Config Sync rx tcp open error Sync Version/Password Failed-No Version/Password Line Sync Version Failed .Alteon OS 22.Resuming Console thread “<""apply""|""save""> is issued by another user. January 2005 .

Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 467 .0.2 Command Reference LOG_NOTICE system: system: system: system: system: system: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ssh: ssh: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: internal power supply ok redundant power supply present and ok temperature ok fan ok rebooted <last_reset_information> rebooted <last_reset_information> administrator logged in boot config block changed boot image changed switch reset from CLI syslog host changed to <ip_address> syslog host changed to this host second syslog host changed to <ip_address> second syslog host changed to this host Next boot will use active config block user password changed SLB operator password changed L4 operator password changed operator password changed SLB administrator password changed L4 administrator password changed administrator password changed scp <login_level> login “scp <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout"">” RADIUS server timeouts Failed login attempt via TELNET from host %s PASSWORD FIX-UP MODE IN USE <login_level> login on Console 315393-J.

2 Command Reference LOG_NOTICE (Continued) mgmt: mgmt: “<login_level> <""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Console” PANIC command from CLI port_mirr: “port mirroring is <""enabled""|""disabled"">” vlan: mgmt: mgmt: IP IP vrrp: vrrp: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: bgp: Default VLAN can not be deleted <login_level> login from host <ip_address> “<login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout""> from” “default gateway <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled"">” default gateway <ip_address> operational virtual router <ip_address> is now master virtual router <ip_address> is now backup “backup server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""diabled""> for real server <server_id>” “backup server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group <group_id>” “backup group server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group group_id>” “overflow server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server <server_id>” “overflow server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group <group_id>” “overflow group server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group <group_id>” real server <ip_address> operational real service <ip_address:real_port> operational No services are available for Virtual Server <virtual_server> Services are available for Virtual Server <virtual_server> session established with <BGP_peer_ip_address> 468 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.0. January 2005 .

0. January 2005 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 469 ." server key autogen starts server key autogen completes server key autogen timer timeouts new synch configuration applied new synch configuration saved Synchronizing from <host_name> Synchronizing to <host_name> Config Synchronization Transmit Successful Config Synchronization Receive Successful new configuration VALIDATED 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference LOG_INFO SYSTEM: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ssh: ssh: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ssh: ssh: ssh: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: bootp response from <ip_address> new configuration applied new configuration saved unsaved changes reverted Could not revert unsaved changes "<image1|image2> downloaded from host <ip_address>. file <file_name> <software_version>" serial EEPROM downloaded from host <ip_address> file <file_name> scp <login_level> login "scp <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout"">" <login_level> login on Console "<login_level> <""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Console" <login_level> login from host <ip_address> "<login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Telnet/SSH.

Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference 470 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-J. January 2005 .0.

mib -.mib aosSwitch.Textual Convention MIB s5emt104. IP.mib -. Alarm. Detailed SNMP MIBs and trap definitions of the Alteon OS SNMP agent can be found in the following enterprise MIB documents: altroot.mib -. UDP.SynOptics Registration MIB s5tcs112.mib aosTrap.mib aosLayer4. ICMP.MIB II Extension (IFX table) RFC 1643 .SynOptics Root MIB s5roo117. Version 3 supports two authentication protocols: MD5 and SHA. Version 2. History. the following SynOptics MIBS are also supported: synro193. Up to 16 IP addresses can be configured in targetAddr table. Alteon MIBs are registered as Vendor 1872. and Version 3. SNMP Groups) RFC 1573 .mib In addition. Event Groups) RFC 1850 for OSPF 471 315393-J.APPENDIX B Alteon OS SNMP Agent The Alteon OS SNMP agent supports SNMP Version 1.Bridge MIB RFC 1757 . Address Translation.MIB II (System. Interface. TCP. Alteon OS SNMP agent supports the following standard MIBs: RFC 1213 .mib aosLayer7.Ethernet Multi segment Autotopology MIB SNMPv1|v2|v3 traps can be sent to the hosts configured in targetAddr table.mib aosBwm.EtherLike MIB RFC 1493 . January 2005 .mib aosPhysical.mib -.RMON MIB (Statistics.mib aosNetwork.

0.Community MIB Alteon OS SNMP agent supports the following generic traps as defined in RFC 1215: ColdStart WarmStart LinkDown LinkUp AuthenticationFailure The SNMP agent also supports two Spanning Tree traps as defined in RFC 1493: NewRoot TopologyChange The following are the enterprise SNMP traps supported in Alteon OS: Table 10-7 Alteon OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps Trap Name Description altSwDefGwUp altSwDefGwDown altSwDefGwInService altSwDefGwNotInService altSwSlbRealServerUp altSwSlbRealServerDown altSwSlbRealServerMaxConnReached Signifies that the default gateway is alive.VACM MIB RFC 2576 .3ad MIB for LACP The following SNMPv3 MIBs are supported: RFC 2571 .Alteon OS 22. Signifies that the default gateway is down. Signifies that the default gateway is up and in service Signifies that the default gateway is alive but not in service Signifies that the real server is up and operational Signifies that the real server is down and out of service Signifies that the real server has reached maximum connections 472 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 315393-J. January 2005 .MPD MIB RFC 2573 .Target MIB RFC 2574 .2 Command Reference RFC 1657 for BGP IEEE 802.USM MIB RFC 2575 .SNMP Frame work RFC 2572 .

An altSwTempExceedThreshold trap signifies that the switch temperature has exceeded maximum safety limits. An altSwTcpHoldDown trap signifies that new TCP connection requests from a particular client will be blocked for a pre-determined amount of time since the rate of new TCP connections from that client has reached a pre-determined threshold.0. altSwVrrpAuthFailure altSwLoginFailure altSwSlbSynAttack altSwTcpHoldDown An altSwSlbSynAttack trap signifies that a SYN attack has been detected. An altSwLoginFailure trap signifies that someone failed to enter a valid username/password combination. January 2005 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 473 . The newBackup trap indicates that the sending agent has transitioned to 'Backup' state. A vrrpAuthFailure trap signifies that a packet has been received from a router whose authentication key or authentication type conflicts with this router's authentication key or authentication type. Implementation of this trap is optional.2 Command Reference Table 10-7 Alteon OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps Trap Name Description altSwSlbBkupRealServerAct altSwSlbBkupRealServerDeact altSwSlbBkupRealServerActOverflow altSwSlbBkupRealServerDeactOverflow altSwfltFilterFired altSwSlbRealServerServiceUp altSwSlbRealServerServiceDown altSwVrrpNewMaster altSwVrrpNewBackup Signifies that the backup real server is activated due to availablity of the primary real server Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due to the primary real server is available Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due to the primary real server is overflowed Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due to the primary real server is out from overflow situation Signifies that the packet received on a switch port matches the filter rule Signifies that the service port of the real server is up and operational Signifies that the service port of the real server is down and out of service The newMaster trap indicates that the sending agent has transitioned to 'Master' state. altSwTempExceedThreshold 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.

An altSwFanFailure trap signifies that a fan failure has occured.0. altSwSlbSessAttack altSwFanFailure 474 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .2 Command Reference Table 10-7 Alteon OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps Trap Name Description An altSwSlbSessAttack trap signifies that an SLB attack has been detected.

connect the Console port of an Alteon Application Switch to the serial port of your PC that supports XModem/1K XModem.PPCBoot 2. 2. 1. Using the serial cable.2. This procedure requires the following: A computer running terminal emulation software A standard serial cable with a male DB9 connector (see your switch hardware installation guide for specifics) A binary switch firmware image (not the tftp file used for TFTP download) Use the following procedure to perform a serial upgrade. Start hyper terminal (part of Microsoft Windows) and set the following parameters: Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Value 9600 8 None 1 None 3. Hold the <Shift> key down and hit D repeatedly until the following message appears: Alteon Application Switch . 4. January 2005 475 . Power on the switch. To download a serial image use 1K Xmodem at 115200 315393-J.APPENDIX C Performing a Serial Download You can perform a serial download of the new Alteon Application Switch software if you are upgrading Alteon OS directly from any image.

.. 9. 6. Select <Transfer-Send File> and choose the following: file: For example. Press <Enter> on the key board of the PC that is connected to the console port of the switch. NOTE – Although slower.Alteon OS 22. otherwise.0.img" (Or the file previously downloaded to the computer) 7. protocol: 1K XMODEM It will take about 15 minutes for the transfer to complete.0. This file can be downloaded from the CD that is shipped with the switch.. the switch will be inoperable.0_Serial. you will see: CCCC.2.2 Command Reference 5. Power off the switch. CAUTION—Do not power off the switch until you see the message: “Change your baud rate to 9600 bps and power cycle switch”.. ################################################################# Change your baudrate to 9600 bps and power cycle the switch ! 476 Appendix C: Performing a Serial Download 315393-J..0. wait for a few seconds and power the switch on. Make sure that the new binary firmware file is available on the computer. "21. When the Console Port is successfully communicating with the PC. The switch will boot with the new software load. Do *NOT* power cycle the switch Updating flash. Reconfigure your terminal emulation software with the following parameters (only after you see the message displayed in step 4): Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Value 115200 8 None 1 None NOTE – You can perform serial downloads at 57600 baud rate by pressing Shift f or at 115200 baud rate by pressing Shift d. January 2005 .PPCBoot 2. To download a serial image use 1K Xmodem at 115200 CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Total bytes transferred: 0x4ff400 Extracting images.. 8. You should see the following sample log on your screen: Alteon Application Switch . XMODEM will work too if you choose not to use 1K MODEM.

or a filter. A higher number will win out for master designation. to that of one of the real servers. In VRRP. TCP. Default is 100. The destination port (application socket: for example. UDP. ICMP. Full NAT is when both addresses are changed from one address to another. January 2005 477 . No NAT is when neither source nor destination IP addresses are translated. Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 254.Glossary DIP (Destination IP Address) Dport (Destination Port) NAT (Network Address Translation) The destination IP address of a frame. In VRRP. OSPF. and so on. http-80/https-443/DNS-53) Any time an IP address is changed from one source IP or destination IP address to another address. preemption will cause a Virtual Router that has a lower priority to go into backup should a peer Virtual Router start advertising with a higher priority. network address translation can be said to have taken place. Preemption Priority Proto (Protocol) Real Server Group 315393-J.) A group of real servers that are associated with a Virtual Server IP address. Virtual server-based load balancing uses half NAT by design. The protocol of a frame. the value given to a Virtual Router to determine its ranking with its peer(s). Can be any value represented by a 8-bit value in the IP header adherent to the IP specification (for example. In general. half NAT is when the destination IP or source IP address is changed from one address to another. because it translates the destination IP address from the Virtual Server IP address.

With this type of load balancing. DIP/Range (via netmask). Real Server IP Address. Therefore. A VRRP address that is an IP interface address shared between two or more virtual routers.0. Instead. The source IP address of a frame. redirection-based load balancing is designed to load balance devices that normally operate transparently in your network—such as a firewall. Filters can be configured to filter on the SIP/Range (via netmask). Deny. HTTP-80/HTTPS-443/DNS-53). requests are transparently intercepted and “redirected” to a server group. Protocol. “Transparently” means that requests are not specifically destined for a Virtual Server IP address that the switch owns. the destination IP address is not translated to that of one of the real servers. You can track the following: Vrs: Virtual Routers in Master Mode (increments priority by 2 for each) Ifs: Active IP interfaces on the Alteon Application Switch (increments priority by 2 for each) Ports: Active ports on the same VLAN (increments priority by 2 for each) l4pts: Active Layer 4 Ports. This filter intercepts traffic based on certain IP header criteria and load balances it. a filter is configured in the switch. spam filter. An IP addresses that the switch load balances to when requests are made to a Virtual Server IP address (VIP). Tracking can be very valuable in an active/active configuration.Alteon OS 22. In redirection-based load balancing. a method to increase the priority of a virtual router and thus master designation (with preemption enabled). or transparent Web cache. In VRRP. RIP (Real Server) SIP (Source IP Address) SPort (Source Port) Tracking The source port (application socket: for example. VIP (Virtual Server IP Address) VIR (Virtual Interface Router) 478 Glossary 315393-J.2 Command Reference Redirection or Filter-Based Load Balancing A type of load balancing that operates differently from virtual server-based load balancing. Redirect to a Server Group. or NAT (translation of either the source IP or destination IP address). January 2005 . SPort/Range or DPort/Range. client or server designation (increments priority by 2 for each reals: healthy real servers (increments by 2 for each healthy real server) hsrp: HSRP announcements heard on a client designated port (increments by 10 for each) An IP address that the switch owns and uses to load balance particular service requests (like HTTP) to other servers. The action on a filter can be Allow.

by the switch. Two or more devices sharing an IP interface are either advertising or listening for advertisements. The switches must be able to share Virtual Server IP addresses. One virtual router is associated with an IP interface. Virtual Server Load Balancing VRID (Virtual Router Identifier) VRRP (Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol) VSR (Virtual Server Router) 315393-J. January 2005 Glossary 479 . With VRRP. since the packet would have the DIP of the VIP and not that of the server (RIP). The switch announces this change in ownership to the devices around it by way of a Gratuitous ARP.0. Should the master stop advertising. Classic load balancing. the two switches would fight for ownership of the Virtual Server IP address. If there is more than one VLAN defined on the Alteon Application Switch. refer to RFC 2338. If they didn’t. then the VRID number needs to be identical on both switches so each virtual router on each switch knows whom to share with. forcing the packet up to Layer 3. a server would receive the frame that was destined for it's MAC address. The VRRP MAC address as defined in the RFC is 00-00-5E-00-01-{VRID}.0. which is owned by the switch. This is one of the IP interfaces that the switch is assigned. These advertisements are sent via a broadcast message to an address such as 224. VSR is Alteon WebSystems’ proprietary extension to the VRRP specification. as requests come and go. updates the relevant checksums. Frames come to the switch destined for the VIP. The backup switch is always listening for the broadcasts.0. are load balanced to a real server contained in the group associated with the VIP. This process of replacing the destination IP (VIP) with one of the real server addresses is called half NAT. A VRRP address that is a shared Virtual Server IP address. The switch then replaces the VIP and with one of the real server IP addresses (RIP's). and forwards the frame to the server for which it is now destined. Network address translation is done back and forth. Requests destined for a Virtual Server IP address (VIP). and the ARP tables in the devices around them would have two ARP entries with the same IP address but different MAC addresses. as defined in RFC 2338. and advertisements.18. In VRRP. The master is always advertising via the broadcasts. The reason for both of these protocols is so devices have a next hop or default gateway that is always available. a value between 1 and 255 that is used by each virtual router to create its MAC address and identify its peer for which it is sharing this VRRP address. If the frames were not half NAT'ed to the address of one of the RIPs. For a more detailed description. If the backup switch didn't do the Gratuitous ARP the Layer 2 devices attached to the switch would not know that the MAC address had moved in the network. The server would then drop the frame. the backup will take over ownership of the VRRP IP and MAC addresses as defined by the specification. All IP interfaces on the Alteon Application Switch must be in a VLAN.2 Command Reference Virtual Router A shared address between two devices utilizing VRRP. as well as IP interfaces.Alteon OS 22. If you have a VRRP address that two switches are sharing. A protocol that acts very similarly to Cisco's proprietary HSRP address sharing protocol. then the VRRP broadcasts will only be sent out on the VLAN of which the associated IP interface is a member. one switch is considered the master and the other the backup.

Alteon OS 22.0. January 2005 .2 Command Reference 480 Glossary 315393-J.

........... 269 A abbreviating commands (CLI) ....................... 268....................................................................... 279 contracts ........ 276 setup.................. 354 restoring ................ 262 advertisement of virtual IP addresses ................ 27 B backup SLB real server group option .................................................. 230..................... 32 auto-negotiation ......................... 344 active Layer 4 processing ................. 447 active FTP SLB parsing statistics ...................... 312 as ............ 475 3000 series...... 52 access control system .................................................................................... 32 link................ 259 action (SLB filtering option) ................................. 111 filters .................................................................................................................................................... 386 filter states........ 354 active switch............................................... 422 (SLB real server group option) content ................................................... 173.. 365 backup configuration block . 234.................................. 312 aspath ................... 358 within real server groups . 32............Index Symbols (MD5) ...................... saving and loading configuration .............. 314 aging STP bridge option ....................... 195 bandwidth management configuration ........................... 354 ptcfg ............................................................................................................................................................................ 86 application redirection ..................................................... 274.............. 312 Numerics 1K XModem ........................................................ 441 active configuration block . 93 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) address list ........................ January 2005 .......................................................... 49 [ ].......................... 229 applying configuration changes .................................. 33 port speed...................... 282 bandwidth management contract configuration ................................ 354 add SLB port option ....................... 365 / command ................................................................................................................................. 447 backup server activations (SLB statistics) ...................... 359.................................... 280 bandwidth management contract precedence value ....... 17 admpw (system option) .................... 24...................................................................................... 33 autonomous system filter action .......... 364 apply (global command) ...... 229 ASCII terminal ..................................... 230....................... 344 active port VLAN .............................................. 32 enable/disable on port ............................................................. 272.............................. 32...... 312 autonomous system filter path action ...................................... 188 active IP interface ..... 453 administrator account ............ 386 activating optional software ........................................ 291 STP information ... 400 addr ARP entries................................................ 453 IP route tag ......................... 344 active switch configuration gtcfg ........................... 281 481 315393-J................................................. 20 autoconfiguration duplex mode ....................................................

...........................................................439 bandwidth management policy configuration .................... 452 routing table ......................................................377 BLOCKING (port state)...................................................................................440 BPDU...........................................................325 peer configuration ................................................328 remote autonomous system ..284 over the limit TOS ............21 setup (enable/disable) ...... 52 482 Index 315393-J............475.. 27...............198 banner (system option)............232 bootstrap protocol ................. 93 IP route type .................. 196 client traffic processing ................................................................. 19 to 25.93 keep-alive time ...........................332 Border Gateway Protocol .......0....................289 bridge priority . border router ....................................... 92 broadcast domains .. 453 dump information ................................ 194 binding table ......... 199 C capture dump information to a file....................19 BGP configuration.............. 52 tab completion ....30 system option ...284 buffer limit ........................................................93 configuration..................................................86 STP transmission frequency ................. 17 global commands ............................................................................................. 476 BBI .......................................................................................290 Bridge Spanning-Tree parameters ........................................................................................................................443 BOOTP .................326 IP route tag ............... for STP .............. 201 contract statistics.................................................................................................................................................................................................... January 2005 . 49 shortcuts .....327 binary ................................ 454 clearing SLB statistics ............285 bandwidth management statistics ..... 49 Command-Line Interface (CLI) ................327 peer ............ 292 clear ARP entries ..... 199 switch processor rate contract statistics ......................20 serial download .......476 binding failure ..........................86 Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) .....................................................................................................327 router hops......................................................327 IP address............................................. 457 FDB entry .................................................... 47 commands abbreviations .......................... See Bridge Protocol Data Unit................. 399 command (help) .............. 52 stacking ..................324 iBGP..475 binary firmware image .........................................Alteon OS 22................................................................326 redistribution configuration ..........324 in route ...................................2 Command Reference Bandwidth Management options operations-level options .............. 36 Browser-Based Interface ....................................................285 hard bandwidth limit ...................................................... 456 Cisco Ether Channel ........................... bridge parameter menu................................................................................................................172.................................................................232 baud rate console connection ............324 eBGP ............................................................................................................................284 underlimit TOS ..290 broadcast IP route tag ............................... 199 switch processor contract statistics ............................................................................................................................................................284 soft bandwidth limit ................... 297 broadcast IP address ...................................................................86 boot options menu ............................................................... 19 BWM contract rate statistics.... 203 port ..............................................285 reserve limit ......... 200 history statistics ...... 52 conventions used in this manual ......................................................................324 Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) operations-level options .....

..... 243 current bindings .................................................................. 229 dip (destination IP address for filtering) ................. 211 CPU utilization ......................................... load balancing for .. 306 DISABLED (port state) ............................................................................. 227 configuring routing information protocol ...................... bandwidth management . viewing changes ............................... 173. 353 maintenance ............................................................................ 402 dmask destination mask for filtering ............................................................. 353 effect on Spanning-Tree Protocol ............... 313 connecting via console ..... 280 copper ports ................................ 347 default password .................... 240...................... 292 counters..................................... 449 default gateway information ........................................... 232 daylight savings time ............. 268........................... 270...................... 475....... January 2005 Index 483 ........... 229 VLAN default (PVID) ................... 160 Domain Name System (DNS) health checks ................. 209............. 276 Gigabit Ethernet ....................... 444 dropped frames (No Server Available) counter ... 92 directed broadcasts............................................................2 Command Reference configuration administrator password .................... for health checks ....................................... 270................ 377 console port communication settings .........Alteon OS 22.................................................................................................................... 272 IP static route ............................ 95 diff (global) command........................................... 243 debugging ......................................................... 449 state information .................. 457 315393-J............................ 333 configuration block active .. 86 disconnect idle timeout . 447 factory ..... 276 port link speed ......................... 301 TACACS+ ................ 353 switch IP address ........................... 365 contracts..................... 195 designated port.............. 275 VRRP ................................................................................................................ 452 deny (filtering) ................. 262 apply changes ............... 20 serial download settings ..... 268. 195 dump configuration command ..................... 262 operating mode .................................................. 271................ 273.. 261 view changes................................. 86 STP port option.................... 292 route cache............. 194 D date setup.............. 353 setup command .. 268.............................. 274... ................ 276 port mirroring ............... 266...................................................................... 447 selection ........................................................................................... 24 delete FDB entry ............... 306 save changes ............ 267.................................. 25 Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) setting update interval ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 20 via Telnet..................... 302 default gateway IP address ..................................... 270.................... 270 cost STP information ........................ for health checks.............. 195 CPU statistics ......... 229 default gateway interval......................................................... 266..................................... 476 content SLB real server group option ............................. 304 Layer 4 administrator password .............................................. 271....... 229 setup .............. 209..... 302 metrics ................ 447 configuration menu .................................................................. 347 round robin...... No Server Available (dropped frames) . 447 backup...................... 173........... 278 port trunking .............. 272................................................... 21 connection timeout (Real Server Menu option) ........................................ 211 cur (system option) ...................0. 301 VLAN tagging ........ 240 user password ........ 30 system option ....................................................................................... 20 connecting .................... 229 Fast Ethernet ... 266 flow control ........... 387 DNS statistics ............. 387 direct (IP route type) ..................... 302 dump command ...................... 271...................... 90 interval........................ 172........... 275 VLAN IP interface .......................... 368 downloading software ..............

.................. 271................................... 338........................ 270........ 180 gtcfg (TFTP load command) ................. 302 IDSLB.....................................................................................................................................93 flag field............................. 27................................... retries .. 338 VRRP priority increment value .................. 177 global SLB statistics ..................... number of failed health checks ...........187 filter statistics ...............Alteon OS 22............. 270..................... 119 setup .......................................... 346 use with VRRP ............368 FTP SLB maintenance statistics........................................... 417 Greenwich .................................... January 2005 ..449 delete entry .............................. 270..................... 19 hprompt system option ..............................86 H half-duplex ..............................32 dynamic routes .........................54....................................................145 fiber optic ports ................... 242 group .. 426 hello STP information ............................................................ 342 HP-OpenView . 119 configuring ............. 272 global commands..272 File Transfer Protocol ....... 344 hot-standby failover ...............................................417 FDB statistics ........ 25...................... 174 grace graceful real server failure .... 28 Fast Ethernet Physical Link .............. 274..........181 filtered (denied) frames ....................................................................................................................................................................... 370 health check types........ 484 Index 315393-J............ 49 host routes ...........475 EtherChannel as used with port trunking ................... 347 Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) priority increment value for L4 client ports ......................... 195 filters IP address ranges ...................................................... 367 layer information ...................................................................... SLB .............387 Final Steps.................... 32 hash metric ........................173......................................................................................................................32 fwd (STP bridge option) ..... 242 Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) .............................. 423 SNMP .............................................2 Command Reference duplex mode ................................452 Forwarding Database Information Menu . 87 FTP server health checks .................................................... 27 to 43 fixed IP route tag ........... See Hot Standby Router Protocol..................... 110 parameters for most protocols .............54.............. 346 Hot Standby Router VLAN (HSRV) use with VRRP ............................................. 49 global SLB maintenance statistics ................................... 425 WAP .......................................454 G gig (Port Menu option) ...................... 369...............................................................................189 full-duplex . 69.. 86........... 302 script ................78 Forwarding Database Menu................................................................ bridge port .........................................447 factory default configuration ...............................306 forwarding database (FDB) ................ 276 setup ...........38 first-time configuration ... 86 help .......... 33 forwarding configuration IP forwarding configuration ....32...........266 Fast Ethernet... 368 redirection (rport) ....................................................................................................................... 344 VRRP priority increment value ....................................................................................................................266 fastage . 272 Gigabit Ethernet configuration .........Alteon EMS .......................................... 232 HSRP...................451 forwarding state (FWD) ................................................. 266...............95 flow control ....................... 314 Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) use with VLAN-tagged environment ..................................... 386 retry....................................................................................189 FTP SLB statistics dump ..........................268........................32 link status ...25.........................292 F factory configuration block .................................. 272 Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link ..39 emulation software ............ 360 default gateway interval.......... configuring ports for ........................... 266...................290 FwdDel (forward delay).......................0....... 266... 367 health checks......................79........... 354 E EMS........

...... 154 interface statistics .............. 92 local network for route caching ............................................................................. 454 IP routing ....................... configuring ............................................... 184 layer 7 SLB string statistics ................................. 301 configuring VLANs ..............................................2 Command Reference HSRV...................................... 259 HTTP health checks on any port (aphttp) ..................... 346 IP network filter configuration .................................................................... 444 software...................................... selecting ................... 276 link status....................Alteon OS 22..................................... 90 local (IP route type) ....... HTTP application health checks .... 315393-J........... 35 ARP information ......... 259 http .......................................................................................... 173................. 163 IP address .... 35 tag parameters .............................................................. 54.............................. 53 Interface change stats ................................................................ 307 log syslog messages ... 368 imask (IP address mask) ......................... 306 local route cache IP address ranges for......................1d Spanning-Tree Protocol ..................................................... 268....... 86 least connections (SLB Real Server metric) .................................................................. 86 lmask (routing option) ............................ 87 Information Menu ............................................... 368 redirects (Global SLB option) ... 367................................................................................. 92 Information Trunk Group Information.............................................. 54........................ 308 IP port configuration ............ 330 directed broadcasts ................................. 306 local networks for route caching ................... 54 command ...... 441 license password ....................... 90................................................. 25 IDSLB health checks ........................................................................................0.... 446 IMAP server health checks .. 69... 104 IP interface ...... 194 incorrect Vports (dropped frames counter) ......................................................... 21 configuring default gateway ......... 416 IP configuration via setup ....................................... 119 Link Status Information ..................... 301 L l4apw (L4 administrator system option) ........................... 35 IP forwarding ................................................................ 330 IP Route Manipulation Menu .................. 422 IP interfaces .................................. 387 IP interface ............ 90 IP route tag ........................... See Hot Standby Router Protocol........................ 69.................................... 306 IP forwarding information ............................... 370 licence certificate ......................... 35 local route cache ranges ........................... 21 IP address mask for SLB ............................................... 93 priority increment value (ifs) for VRRP ......................... 24 Layer 4 processing active................. 93 IP Static Route Menu ......................................................... 402 system option ............................................................................................................................................................................ 35 IP subnets VLANs .......................................... 182 LDAP version ............................. 92 information ......... 119 linkt (SNMP option) ............. 155 IP subnet mask ............ 416 incorrect VIPs (statistic) .. 85........................................................... 262 Layer 4 administrator account................. 288 image downloading ........ 271................... See IP subnets... 441 link speed............ 90 lnet (routing option) .............................. 302 filter ranges ............................. 35........... 119 port speed............................................................................ 344 configuring address ............................ 195 indirect (IP route type) .. 94 BOOTP ....................... 307 Telnet .. 422 LEARNING (port state) ................... 344 layer 7 SLB maintenance statistics ........ 119 duplex mode .... 367 IEEE standards 802................................................................. 183 layer7 redirection statistics ................................................................... January 2005 Index 485 ......................................................... 246 LISTENING (port state) ............................................................. 90 IP Information Menu ................. 297 I ICMP statistics ........................................................ 304 IP statistics . 301 active ............................... 233 logical segment............................................... 172....... 161 idle timeout overview.........................

................364 metrics..... 232 NTP synchronization .................................92 multi-links between switches using port trunking...449 Management Processor (MP).............. 439 operations-level IP options ................................................. 242 switch location ...........87............................................... 440 Operations-Level Port Options ..........2 Command Reference M MAC (media access control) address........................................................0............... multicast IP route type ........... 323 fixed routes .... 440 operations-level BWM options .................................... 441.................... 325 general ................................................................ N nbr change statistics........47 Command-Line Interface (CLI) .... 365 MD5 authentication key ..... January 2005 ................................................Alteon OS 22............................................................................................. 320 dead... 54..206 MP............................290 O octet counters ...................... 320 cost value of the host .................................386 network management .......................................................25 summary ..........48 Maintenance Menu ............................................. See Management Processor...........................320 media access control............................ 322 dead......................... SLB ........................................... 151 hello..........55.....416 monitor port....................... 179 online help ..............370 minimum misses (SLB real server metric) .................. authentication parameter of a hello packet ........278 mp packet ................301 MaxAge (STP information) ..........455 mmask IP address mask for SLB ............. 195........................ 292 mxage (STP bridge option) ................... 268...........................367.............. 442 OSPF area types .92 mask IP interface subnet address ....... 439 optional software .............................................317 MD5 key ................................ 98......17 martian IP route tag (filtered) .. 321 export .......................316 MD5 cryptographic authentication .....153 Network Address Translation (NAT) filter action ............................................173....................55 manual style conventions .. 151 global .................86 mcon (maximum connections) ........... health parameter of a hello packet ...................................................................................... 317 authentication key ................................... 435 operations-level SLB options .............. configuring ...................................................................................... 49 operating mode... 436 operations-level VRRP options .................................................................... 315 ospf area index ................ 320 configuration .................. 194 486 Index 315393-J...........455 display MAC address ...........................................93 IP route type (filtered out) ........................21 Main Menu ...................................................... 441 removing ......................................................172....................................................... 243 NTP time zone ..................... declaring a silent router to be down ....................... 370 Miscellaneous Debug Menu .......... See MAC address...... 94.................. 315 cost of the selected path ..............................416 mnet management traffic IP address for SLB .................... 127 activating ...............................19 non TCP/IP frames ............................................................ metric SLB real server group option............. 78......... 433 operations-level BGP options .............. 276 operations menu ................................. 271. 451 notice .......................................................................................................... 315............................................

........................... 78........... 239 proxies IP address translation ....... 173........ 321 OSPF Database Information ................................................................. 317 summary range configuration ......................... 198 port configuration ............................................................ 69......................................................................2 Command Reference host entry configuration ................................... 32 setup..................... 336.............................................................. 261 password administrator account ......................................................................................................... 54................................................. 318 stub area ................. 50........................................ 337 virtual router ........................................................... 24 user account ...... 315 virtual link configuration ........................................................................................................................................................ 102 OSPF statistics .................................. 195 overflow servers .......................................... 318 transit area ................. 360 321 persistent bindings real server ........................... 319 link state database ......................... 278 Port number ................. 316 Not-So-Stubby Area ..... 99 OSPF General Information ................... 32 port states UNK (unknown) .................................................................... 266......... 86 RJ-45........... 24 VRRP authentication ..................... 345 passwords ... 265 SLB state information ..............................................................................................................................................................................................0.... 188 Password user access control ................................... 321 virtual neighbor.............................................................................................................. 24 L4 administrator account .............. 292 VLAN ID. as used with split horizon ..... 317 priority value of the switch interface............ 315 interface configuration ................................................... 361 Index 487 199 P panic command ... 54............. 119 auto-sense ..... 342 priority virtual router ..................... 119 port speed ............................................. router ID ........... January 2005 .................... 320 type.................................................................................... 449 parameters tag ........ 359 PIP ................................................. 315 redistribution menu .................. 457 switch (and Maintenance Menu option) ..................................................................... 79 port trunking description .......................... 272 port mirroring configuration .................. 322 host routes .............. 316 route redistribution configuration .... 314 POP3 server health checks....................................................................................... See flow control............................ 317 virtual link .................. 292 ports configuration ........ 277 information ............................................. 342 priority (STP port option) ... 120 preemption assuming VRRP master routing authority ................................... 270.............. 23 315393-J..... 320 range number ............................................. 316 MD5 authentication key........................... 292 prisrv primary radius server .............. 120 IP status .. 90 membership of the VLAN ...................... 316 interface ............................................ 111 STP port priority .......................... 430 poisoned reverse..........Alteon OS 22.......... 98 OSPF Information Route Codes ............................... 323 spf...... 150 overflow server activations ........................................................... 368 port bandwidth management switch processor statistics switch port contract statistics menu......................................... 92 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics .. Port Menu configuration options ...................... 317 transit delay .................................................. 292 port trunking configuration .......... shortest path first ........................................... 93 type..................................... 266 configuring Gigabit Ethernet (gig) ..................................... 270 configuring Fast Ethernet ................ 88 priority............ 100 OSPF Information ..................................... 31 disabling (temporarily)............................. 24 default .......................................... 377 ping ................... 101 OSPF general ........ 265 port flow control............................................................................

.................. 314 split horizon ...................................................180 real server SLB configuration ........................................................................................................0.......................................................................175 real server group options add ...........111 proxy IP address (PIP) configuration ..................... 157 router hops .......................................................................................................50 round robin as used in gateway load balancing ....50 R RADIUS server authentication ..................95 remote monitoring on the port (rmon) ..........................................365 priority increment value (reals) for VRRP .....364 real server group statistics ........ 190 rx flow control ..................346 SLB state information .. 306 route statistics .......... 423 secret radius server ..................245 real server statistics .................. 359 488 Index 315393-J..54...............................361 removing optional software ....... 33 Rx/Tx statistics....180 real server groups combining servers into ............ See Routing Information Protocol............................. January 2005 .........................79 referenced port .......................... segments...................................................................................Alteon OS 22.....................................368 read community string (SNMP option) .. 423 scriptable health checks configuration ...........................................................................................93 RIP............. 229 noback option .................. 314 version 1 parameters.................................................354 PVID (port VLAN ID)......... 297 segmentation....................................................110 reboot ................ 457 receive flow control 32... 93 options ................ 313 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) ...................239 retry health checks for default gateway ....................................................... 274................................... 230 save command..............................430 ptcfg (TFTP save command) ................ 363 operations-level options ...... 268......................... 276...................................................................... 239 secsrv secondary radius server ........442 reset key combination .......449................................. 33.................................................. 32.....................435 remote site servers ..................................................................... 367........................ rmkey .............. 20 serial download ... 313 rport SLB virtual server option ........................364 statistics .............. 277 redir (SLB filtering option) ........... 271.. serial cable . 475 Server Load Balancing IDS ........................... 239 Secure Shell .............................................................................29 retries radius server ....................... 376 RTSP SLB statistics ............................................................................................................... 314 poisoned reverse ......................449 restarting switch setup ............... 347 roundrobin SLB Real Server metric ......302 rip IP route tag ................358 real servers backup ............... See IP subnets..2 Command Reference proxy IP address (PIP) .................................................................................... 238 security VLANs............................................... See IP subnets...................... 327 routing information protocol configuration ............. 370 route cache configuration ...............................................................................................................................386 reference ports .............. 120 pwd ....442 S save (global command) ...................................................................... 436 real server weights ..................................................................179 real server global SLB statistics ................... 447 script health checks ...............................................366 real server group SLB configuration.................................................... 152 Q quiet (screen display option) ...............

..................................................................... 29 Spanning-Tree Protocol ................................................................... 182 SLB real server group health checks arp.................... 368 snap traces buffer ................................................................................................................................................ 32.......... 367 imap ................. 386 SLB Information ................................................................................ 359 restr (restore) SLB real server UDP option .............................................................................. 32 IP configuration ............................. 232 SMTP server health checks ... 356 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics Menu ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 31 port flow control .. 111 server traffic processing ..................................................................................... real server IP address ............................................... 368 wtls ...0.................................. 387 smtp .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 369 SNMP statistics ........ January 2005 Index 489 ................................................................................................... 368 smtp .................... 369 radius .......... 34 VLAN port numbers .................................................... 35 IP subnet mask . 194 315393-J..................................... 399 Session Binding Table ................ 399 server load balancing configuration options ........... 218 186. 425 HP-OpenView .................. 33 VLANs . 187.................. 34 SFD statistics mp specific ............................. 400 server traffic processing ...................................... 387 SLB filtering option action .............................. 359 submac ...... 360 weights ............. 359 slowage .............................................. 425 SNMP health checks ........ 30 duplex mode . 360 RIP........................... 364 SLB real server option backup ....................... 365 metric ................................................................................................................. 27 BOOTP ............................................................................. 417 smask source mask for filtering ........................................................................ 30 VLAN name ............. 35 port auto-negotiation mode ........................................................................................................ 245 SNMP Agent ................................ 369 SLB real server group option application health checking ........ 32 restarting ................ 28 stopping........................... 471 SNMP health check configuration .......................................... 365 health checking ........................ 368 http.................................................... 359 name..................................................... 25................................... 373 setup configuration ....................................................................... alias for each real server ................................. 360 retry ........ 270 SIP (source IP address for filtering) ................................................................................................. 367 SNMP ...................................................................................................... 369 sslh...... 360 session identifier ........................ 367 udpdns ............................................................................................................................................................. 367 dns ... 32... 360 maxcon (maximum connections) .......................................... 367 icmp ................................................................... 19 menu options ................. 368 wsp ...................................................... 367 health check types ........................... 272 shortcuts (CLI) ......... 30 system time .......................................... 360 intr (interval) ... 368 script .............................................................. 368 ldap ..........................2 Command Reference server load balancing client traffic processing........... 33 port speed .......... 370 port options ................................................. 353 setup facility . 368 tcp ....................... 361 tmout (time out) ..... 110 SLB layer7 statistics . 367 ftp .......................................................................... 130 health checks ............ 31 starting ........................................................................ 353 setup command....................................................... 209 SFP GBIC ports ..................................................................................................... 19................................................................. 34 VLAN tagging ......Alteon OS 22. server port mapping ....... 367 metrics ............................... configuration ........................................................................ 29 system date ............. 52 single-mode ports ................. 455 SNMP .... 399 health check ....... 33 port configuration . 245 set and get access ..........................................

.......... 21 BOOTP .......................................................... 240 Telnet support optional setup for Telnet support .... 259 l4apw (Layer 4 administrator password) ............ 240 TACACS+ ....................................... client system.............................................................................. 368 source and destination ports...........................86 port cost option ..................................... 17 TFTP ..................441 SYN attack detection configuration ....................314 SSL ................ 245 system access control configuration...............................................441 software image ..................................... 232 HTTP access ............................................. 233 system contact (SNMP option) .... 232 time...29 subnet address maskconfiguration IP subnet address ... 259 usrpw (user password) ......... 245 date and time ............................ 259 tnport ......301 switch resetting .......... 240 TCP fragments ...86............................ 55 location (SNMP option) .....................0......................377 secure socket layer statistics ............................................................................................................35 IP interface .............................................. 165...............................444 SP specific statistics ...............301 subnet mask .. 39 terminal emulation .............................205 Statistics Menu .......... 385 TCP statistics ......................... 451 system options admpw (administrator password) ...................................Alteon OS 22.................................................................................... 290 setup (on/off) ................................................................. 259 System Maintenance Menu ......................................288 Spanning-Tree Protocol ..................................................................................................................... 232 hprompt ... 262 BOOTP .............................................129 stopping switch setup....31 switch reset effect .... 413............... current .................. 262 login banner .................................................... 436 syslog system host log configuration ...................39 software image file and version ................. 436 synchronization VRRP switch........................... 354 315393-J...........86 state information........................ 261 system parameters..........................377 static IP route tag .......................................................................................................... 53.......210 spanning tree configuration.28 state (STP information) ..............448 Switch Processor (SP)................2 Command Reference SNMP Support optional setup for SNMP support .........455 display trace buffer ..............................186 stacking commands (CLI) ..................................................................................................314 statis route add ..........................................................448 split horizon........................ January 2005 ...............................................................................................304 statistics group ..................................................................................304 static routes Routing Information Protocol (RIP) ................................................55 license .......................... 353 telnet radius server ..........292 root bridge ......................35 subnets ...................93 static route rem .......................................................418 490 Index sync ... 243 date .................. 240.........................................290 bridge priority ............................................................................................................... 208 Telnet ..................................................................................................................52 starting switch setup ....................................... 445 PUT and GET commands .......................................................................... 229 bridge aging option ....................... 52 tacacs ..... 243 T tab completion (CLI) ..... 360 health checks ...................................................... 240.................................. 373 health checking using .............292 port priority option.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 21 configuring switches using ................................................................455 swkey ....291 bridge parameters .................................................................................. 354 TFTP server ................. 232 tnet...................................... 232 cur (current system parameters) ............................................................................................. 20 text conventions .........................................................................87........180 management processor ...........

..................................... 111 statistics ............ 33 407 tnet system option . 30 system option ........ 334 master mode ............ 17 tzone ................. 344 HSRV priority increment value ......................... 111 virtual router description ........... 342 virtual router group configuration ...............................................................................2 Command Reference time setup ..................................................................... 271............ 208 UDP datagrams ..........................Alteon OS 22................................................................................... 341 virtual router group priority tracking .......................................................... 33 type of area ospf............................................ 276....... 33......... 344 configuration ......... 344 HSRP priority increment value ................................ 87 ttl (time to live...... 92 typographic conventions.............. 401 tx flow control.............. 232 timeout radius server ........................ 24 usrpw (system option) ......................................... 345 group options (prio) ..... 343 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) authentication parameters for IP interfaces ........................................ global SLB menu option) ................... 275 port restrictions ........ 455 Switch Processor ........................ 239 timeouts idle connection ...................... 268........................................................................................................................ 335..... 340 incrementing VRRP instance ............................................... 79 Unscheduled System Dump .................................... 274........................................................... 25 timers kickoff.......................... 347 increasing priority level of ........ 417 trace buffer ... 175 virtual server SLB statistics ... 342 virtual routers HSRP failover ................................... 337 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol configuration333 virtual router sharing ..... 270..................................................... 259 tnport system option ........... 335 priority tracking options ........................... 342 master preemption (prio) ....................................... 386 Trunk Group Information ....................................... 455 traceroute........................................... 50 Tracking VRRP ............................................. 439 password........................................ 267......................................... 181 VLAN active port ............................................. 261 Uuencode Flash Dump .......... 337 virtual router group VRRP priority tracking ................. 167 unknown (UNK) port state ........................ 298 setup........ 338 master preemption (preem) ....... 360 source and destination ports ..................... 336 priority increment values (vrs) for VRRP .... 342 operations-level options ................................................. 346 virtual server global SLB statistics ....... 172.......... DNS response (global SLB menu option) V verbose ...... 345 priority election for the virtual router .....0.................................................... 32. 326.......................................... 111 virtual port state.. 317 type parameters .................. 346 HSRV................................................. 242 U UCB statistics ........... 314 IP route tag .............................................................................................................................. 344 priority........... 93 virtual IP address (VIP) ........ 339 transmit flow control32.................... 194 server status using ........................................................... 154 time-to-live............... SLB information about ...... when used for NAT ........................................................................................... 259 TPCP (Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol) .................................................................................. 385 UDP statistics ... 336................ 456 315393-J.................................................................................................................................... authentication .... switch software ....... 338............................... 342 tracking criteria .................. 297 VLAN tagging port configuration.... 458 upgrade. 277 transparent proxies.......... 111 user account ...................... January 2005 Index 491 ..................................... 444 URL for health checks ............... 181 virtual servers ......... 273.......................... 50 vip advertisement of virtual IP addresses as Host Routes . 367 SLB state information ............................................................................. manual .............

............................ 298 VLAN Number ..33.........192 watchdog timer .... 339 tracking configuration ....................... January 2005 ............342 VRRP statistics ........................................................34 port membership..............................................................................................425.......................371 setting virtual router priority values .................................. setup .......................78...... 88 name setup....................................346 virtual router sharing ........Alteon OS 22.................................94 broadcast domains .....................................336 VRRP Information ....345 master advertisements .......................................................................88 interface ............... 342 VRRP interface configuration ..................................................................2 Command Reference VLANs ........266.........245 wspport WAP health check ..............................88 VRID (virtual router ID) .425....425............................................................................36 multiple spanning trees ................................ 120. 427 WAP health check configuration ...... 426 wtlsprt ............................................................................105 VRRP master advertisements time interval ..297 information ................................................................ 427 492 Index 315393-J..................425......................................................78................346 write community string (SNMP option) ................................................... 54.......................................................... 272.......................................................335 tracking .....................19 weights for SLB real servers .... 270........ 426 wtlsprt WAP health check ........................426 WAP SLB statistics .. 475 275 W WAP health checks ........................297 setting default number (PVID) .........426 WAP health check wspport .........................34 security .....34 Spanning-Tree Protocol ..............................335.................................159 X XModem ........288 tagging ..................0........................................450 web-based management interface....................335........ 88 port numbers ...............288 name ..................35 ARP entry information ...........................................................................................

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful